Home

DVR Manual - Guardian Security

1. revised translation GV System Remote ViewLog Fast Backup and Restore FBR GV IP Device Utility Multi View Remote E Map Center V2 Vital Sign Monitor Dispatch Server GV GIS MCamCtrl Utility POS Text Sender Authentication Server SMS Server Audio Broadcast Multicast TwinDVR System Bandwidth Control Client Site Backup Viewer Mobile Server Useful Utilities To apply the revised translation to the applications click Save For the following applications the system will automatically locate the corresponding files on your computer and replace with the 640 1 Useful Utilities 2 After applying the revision a dialog box appears to show which applications have been revised Click OK Updated GYNVR C 6V1480 MultilingualConfig C Program Files x86 MultilingualConfig Multiview C Program Files DMMultiview OCX C Windows GeoOCx Remote ViewLog C Windows Geovision Remote Viewlog 20111017 Figure 11 117 3 The message Do you want to apply the revised multilingual texts to another folder appears If the storage path for the application has been changed or if the associated application is not listed in the dialog box click Yes and select the folder of the application To export or send the revised text 1 To export the revision as an executable file click Tools Export
2. Holiday and Weekend saturday Enable according to time span y sunday Disable vw Holiday Disable e Priority Weekend sl a coa Figure 3 62 3 Select Enable to enable video analytic schedule 4 Select Span 1 and specify a time period The period that you specify is effective from Monday through Friday 5 Set more spans based on your needs 6 Setthe schedule for holidays and weekends by selecting Enable according to time span Enable all day or Disable 7 Use the Priority drop down listto select whether to use the schedule setting for Holiday or Weekend when the holiday is on a weekend 8 Click OK to apply the settings 211 EI Video Analysis 3 22 Fisheye View A fisheye camera allows you to cover all angles of a location with just one fisheye camera The distorted hemispherical image produced by the fisheye camera will be converted to a conventional rectilinear projection You can among S view modes and adjust the PTZ views to different angles ie Be SAF 5 ON Mr Dual 180 degree 2 180 views Single view 1 PTZ view Figure 3 63 212 3 22 1 a Video Analysis Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera 1 Right click the image of the fisheye camera select the camera number and select Geo Fisheye 2 To customize the fisheye settings right click the image and select Fisheye Option The following configurations are available Camera Modes You can choose among four vew m
3. Video Standard Select a video standard used in your country Video Resolution Consider your priority in image quality or CPU usage before making a selection For NTSC the image quality and CPU usage from the highest to the lowest is 704 x 480 704 x 480 De interlace 640 x 480 640 x 480 De interlace 352 x 240 320 x 240 For PAL the image quality and CPU usage from the highest to the lowest is 704 x 576 704 x 576 De interlace 640 x 480 640 x 480 De interlace 352 x 288 320 x 240 To change the resolution of individual analog cameras refer to Resolution Button in Adjusting Individual Camera earlier in this chapter ER Configuring Main System 1 3 2 Fixing Aspect Ratio This feature lets you define your own aspect ratio for the camera channels so they will not be stretched when viewed in wide screen resolutions such as 1280 x 800 1440 x 900 1680 x 1050 and 1920 x 1080 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select A V Setting and select Wide Display Setup This dialog box appears Wide Display iew Ratio of Wideo For Panel Mode For FullScreen Mode For Digital Matrix cos Figure 1 22 Fit Automatically fits the video ratio into the camera channel The outcome will be stretched in wide screen resolution 3 2 Changes the aspect ratio of the camera channel to 3 2 4 3 Changes the aspect ratio of the camera channel to 4 3 5 4 Changes the aspect ratio of the camera cha
4. Monitor All LJ Connect to CenterV2 a Ll Connect to VSM Limit E 16 a a n O Control Center Server Startup Auto Login IS O Backup Server l Connect to Backup Center Startup and Hide into System Tray Display Default Screen Division Panel Resolution 800x600 Min View for Remote Desktop 2 Show E Map Figure 1 16 Default Screen Division Select the number of screen division to display at startup Panel Resolution 47 From the drop down list select the resolution that best fits your computer monitor screen For the monitor display ratio supported by each panel resolution see Appendix H Click the Arrow button and select Activate Quad Enhanced to enable the enhanced screen layout for the 8 12 and 16 screen divisions The layout 1 is the default layout the layout 2 is the enhanced layout Quad Enhanced lf Activate Quad Enhanced 1 gt 2 Bam gt EEE EE a a on Figure 1 17 ER Configuring Main System Note 1 When the enhanced screen layout is applied camera 1 view will be displayed in the central screen When the popup feature is enabled the pop up view will show on the central When the camera scan feature is enabled the scanned view will show on the central 2 The enhanced screen layout cannot be applied when DSP card is in use The enhanced screen layout will be applied at next startup Mini View for Remote Desktop Squeezes all video
5. 2 In the FBR Window Figure 11 37 click the Customize Features icon to display this dialog box Customize System Functions Feature Description Device applications PTZ Dome LO Module Modem Wave in Device POS Device GY Wiegand Capture Device IP Camera Device Functions Monitor Schedule Configure wiewLog j Default Cancel Figure 11 39 Devices Expand this folder and select the device applications you want to enable in the GV System Functions Expand this folder and select the functions you want to enable in the GV System The gray checked boxes indicate that the functions are enabled by default No changes can be made to these functions Click OK to apply the settings 999 ll Useful Utilities 11 6 4 Backing up and Restoring Settings You can back up the configurations you made in Main System and restore the backup data to the current system or import it to another GV System Backing up the settings 1 In the FBR window Figure 11 37 click the Backup System Settings or Restore Defaults icon and select Backup Current System This dialog box appears Ze Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveillance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below User s Administrative General Rights Schedule POS Y W Wiegand Network Figure 11 40 2 Select which settings you want to back up and press the Next Step button L The S
6. Figure 8 84 Opening the menu 466 D Remote Viewing 2 Enter the IP address of your GV System in the Address column and then press OK http 65 59 37 172 cancel Figure 8 85 Entering the IP address of GV server 3 Type a valid username and password and then press Submit User Name Passwords Figure 8 86 Entering the use name and password 4 Select the desired camera channel and then press Enter Live View Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Figure 8 87 Selecting a camera for live view If you log in successfully the i Mode phone will start receiving live video from the GV System 467 D Remote Viewing 8 13 7 iPhone iPod Touch and iPad GV iView function is introduced to support iPhone iPod Touch and iPad for the mobile surveillance application For the supported operating system version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter For the latest software version and Installation Guide Installing GV iView You can download GV View from App Store and install the application The GV iView icon will appear on the desktop Figure 8 88 Activating the GV iView Function To allow remote access to GV System the following functions must be activated 1 On the main screen click the Network button select WebCam Server click the JPG tab and select Create JPEG GIF file s 2 Click the Mobile t
7. Specific Date The file merging only begins on the specified date You can further choose to merge files from a specific time period on the specified date in step 7 Daily The file merging begins on the selected days every week The Daily schedule merges the files of the day previous to the selected day For example if you select Tue Thu and Sat to begin file merging The files of Mon Wed and Fri will be merged on those selected days respectively 5 In the Start Time section specify the time of day to begin the file merging 6 Click Next This dialog box appears Advanced Merge Tool Event List Z Camera RA Camera 1 Je Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 RA Camera 5 kA Camera 6 kA Camera 7 RA Camera 8 Je Camera 9 kA Camera 10 kA Camera 11 be Camera 12 s Camera 13 Camera 14 s Camera 15 Je Camera 16 lt Events 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 State el D GG E GG E CG GG E E 6 Time Period Start Time Previous day 00 00 End Time Previous day a 23 09 LJ Only search daylight saving rollback events Merge Mode Single File Multiple Files Merging Length Direct Merge Higher Speed w Output Location C Documents and Settings All Users Desktop Merge2010080 e Free size 24 00 GB Save as Exe Advanced Operation Time Period Figure 1 58 In the Time Period section specify Start and End time
8. The chent e network administrators designate three mobile numbers in above Information section e The client s operators See Setting Mobile Numbers later in this chapter For the users of Dispatch Server and Vital Sign Monitor refer to the CMS Users Manual Clicking the Question mark can view the specified mobile numbers at the client site 5 Click Save for above settings Disabling a client You can disable subscription services to an individual client when subscription expires In the Account Settings window Figure 10 6 right click the desired client and then select Disable To restore the service right click the desired client and then select Enable 915 10 Short Message Service 10 4 SMS Log 10 4 1 Setting SMS Log Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window No 4 Figure 10 1 and select SMSLog Setting to display this dialog box le SMS Log Setting SMS Log e Keep Days Ia Recycle Log EI 2 Log Path CASMS Log MN Available 5 92 GB Figure 10 8 SMS Log Keep Days Select this option and enter the number of days to keep log files Otherwise clear the option to keep log files until the Recycle starts or the storage space is full Recycle Delete the files of the oldest day when storage space is lower than 500MB Log Path Click the button to assign a storage path 916 10 4 2 Viewing SMS Log Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window
9. Video Process Save Image Setup Option F W Show Mask l Find and Stop Resun In 0 out SZ Search Open View Log Figure 4 38 Object Search 3 In the Video Process drop down list select Alarm 264 d D Playing Back Video Files Click the Setup button for further settings The following window will appear Setting Option rsch TESTL26 Camera L Sensitivity 12 25 2008 17 19 47 Cancel Figure 4 39 Use the mouse to outline a region for motion detection You will be prompted to enter Alarm Region Keep detection Sensitivity as defaults or adjust it if needed Click OK to finish the settings and close the window In the Option section you have several options Play All Events Plays back the vdeo segments found as a continuous series of images Show Mask Shows masks on the detection regions Find and Stop recommended Pauses the search process when motion is detected In the control panel click the Search button for the search When any video segment matches the search criteria of motion detection the Show button will be available Click Show to display the Event List window Video Process Taw I Show Small Picture men Event20051 209164053001 Avi He 12 9 2005 16 41 01 968 e 1219 2005 16 41 06 671 He 12 9 2005 16 41 11 437 1219 2005 16 41 16 375 H 12 9 2005 16 41 20 984 Option Je 1219 2005 16 41 22 250 E Play All Event Je 1219 2005 16 41 29 828 Y Show Mask l Find an
10. 1 Click the Advanced button No 9 Figure 4 1 and select Advanced Search This dialog box appears Alternatively press F8 on the keyboard to call it up S Advance Search Time Period Select Cameras Start Time 23 2004 E 0 39 48 pe End Time 6 23 2004 10 36 48 ES Camera 2 Camera 3 Search event in DST Camera 4 Camera 5 Description Viel og Using Time Period selector itis possible to display all available r cording s between two specific points in time Figure 4 10 2 f you want to search the video events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period select Search eventin DST Specify the desired date time period and cameras for search 4 Click OK to start searching 5 In the Video Event list the events matching the search criteria will be highlighted in gray color Click the Play button to play back the highlighted events 234 D Playing Back Video Files List Mode and Line Mode The List Mode and Line Mode allow you to see video events listed by date and to search events by event types or a POS item The List Mode displays events in an Event List while the Line Mode displays events in a timeline To switch between the two modes 1 Click the Normal button The List Mode or the Line Mode window appears 2 Click the arrow on the top left corner ER Event Only Video Events A 4 12 26 59 Figure 4 11 3 Select Switch Time Mode and select List Mode to
11. 10 EEn W Deactivate notification when selected pin is ON Mod 1 Input Pin Deactivate Notification Trigger by moton Deactivate Selected Notification Output Wave Alarm Send Alert TelE Mails MS f Momentary Mode e Mainta ned Mode E Start Stop Pin W StariStop Camera Monitoring by H Mod 1 Pin 1 iw StartStop IO Monitor by UO Mod 1 Pin cn Figure 6 7 I O Application 314 6 3 1 FJ 1 0 Applications Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trigger This section helps you set up the actions to be taken after the input device is triggered and whether to recycle input triggered events or not E VO Application Module 1 Monitor Input a s Input Rec ideo 5 SEC sie Input Invoke Alarm Notify Oo 2 Inputa s Inputa Invoke to Send Alerts Output Module mod 1 siipini DB Register Input Event Input Overlay Preset Go by IVO Demo PTZ010D Camera 9 Addr Alarm On Preset Alarm Off Preset Preset Go by lO Never Recycling Input Triggered Events Alarm On Dwell Time 10 SEL Figure 6 8 Select an Input number to be set up Clicking the Finger button can apply the same settings to all inputs Monitor Input Rec Video Select this option to use the input sensors or detectors to trigger recordings on multiple cameras Specify the recording duration and click the Arrow button to select which came
12. A resolution of 640 x 480 has been selected for the On Demand Display function Higher Resolution Streaming 1152 x 648 640 x 480 higher resolution streaming will be used 4 ERE ee E O REES PA Figure 2 17 The camera image in the middle has a resolution of 1152 x 648 so the higher resolution streaming will be used because 1152 x 648 is bigger than the selected 640 x 480 Lower Resolution Streaming wm wd 480 x 270 lt 640 x 480 lower resolution streaming will be used Figure 2 18 After switching to 16 channel screen division the resolution for each channel is 480 x 270 which is smaller than the selected 640 x 480 so the lower resolution streaming will be used 133 Chapter 3 Video Analysis 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 9 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 Object Tracking ANd Zooming seess kee EeN ENER nenna nennen nnne manne Advanced Single Camera Tracking ees eeKeN ENKER E nenn nann mnnn nnmnnn e Digital Object Tracking see EN KEE ER ENER ENEE ER EEN E nenn nnmnnn nnmnnn ne 3 3 1 Setting Digital Object Tracking viese 3 3 2 Tracking in PIP VIEW et ee SCC dE ACI IMPAR VICON EE Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm seess Kee nanne nnne nanne 34 2 ue CH ION ATAU EE OBIE CENO narra ne een ee ee 391 die EE Te lr EN 35 2 VIEWING ODISCE MOOK sersrssrcar Seet SE Wei ue OB echa aaa Automatic Video Snapshots ease ENNEN ENEE ER EE E EEN
13. Comnection of GV IP devices GV Center V2 No extra dongle required to Center V2 Note Currently GV Center V2 does not support the connection with ge party IP devices 652 Appendix B Supported PTZ Protocols and Models Note that GV System only supports original factory models Other brands of cameras claiming of the same protocol compatibility may not work properly with GV System Guardian Security Solutions takes no responsibility of such incompatibility PTZ Model and Protocol AcutVista SSD 7971D Ademco Jupiter Bosch G3 Bosch TC700 8560 Canon VCC4 VCC5i CBC GANZ ZC S120 Series Chiper CPT V9KRV COP 15 CD53W Pelco D COP 15 CD55TW Pelco D COP 15 CD55W Pelco D COP CD55X Pelco D Direct Perception PTU Series D max Dome DongYang Dome DOH 240 DynaColor D 7720 7722 DynaColor Dome Dynacolor DynaHawk ZH 701 ELBEX Matrix 1000 Elmo PTC 200C Elmo PTC 400C Elmo PTC 1000 EverFocus EPTZ 1000 500 Eyeview T Power T2 SA27 GKB SPD 221 HiSharp Pelco D HiSharp Pelco P JVC TK S576B S655 C686E Kalatel CyberDome Kampro Technology K ZC23 653 Appendix KenKo DMP23 H1 LG LP T OS553HQ Lilin PIH MLP1 Lilin PIH 7625 MLP1 Lilin PIH 820 MLP1 MESSOA SDS600 Series MESSOA D 700 Series Minking Dome Mintron 54G2AHN P NanWang NVD 2300PNT NanWang V4 1 NVD 2300PNT Panasonic W V CS850 Panasonic W V CW 960 Pelc
14. E Desktop My Documents My Computer My Nelwak Fle name n02 20100805 1457 z SOS Save as type JPEG p9 sl Cancel Stamp Text on the Image Click to display host name Click to display date W Hostname Y Camera name i lv Date V Time Click to de interlace r 7 Watermark Transparent text background KEE Set font for overlaid text e Click to watermark the snapshot Click to display camera name Click to display time Figure 1 28 ER Configuring Main System 1 4 2 Associate Monitoring You can set camera channels to start recording when any of the associated camera channels begins recording 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Camera Configure This dialog box appears Camera Configure Camera Name Camera Lens Camera 1 General I Rec Control Video Attribute Iw Rec Video Brightness 197 Day Night D Contrast J 1 Advanced Saturation 127 Motion Detection 5 sf 459 Default Sensitivity D Mask Filter Pa Ela 1 M Invoke Alarm D 7 Invoke to Send Alerts Output Module Mod 1 Pin 1 A l Register Motion Event EA Video Lost Connection Lost Output Module Mod 1 v Pin 1 Figure 1 29 2 From the Rec Video drop down list select either Motion Detect or Day Night If you select Day Night remember to click the Arrow button beside to configure the time span
15. Figure 11 29 b Select the groups detected in Active Directory from the left side and use the arrow buttons to assign the groups to User Poweruser or Supervisor level c Click OK The user data will be imported into the Password Setup window To automatically update changes to user data in Active Directory select Auto Update and type the update frequency in minutes To manually reload user data click the Reload User Data button Note that the current user data will be removed Click OK and restart Authentication Server to apply the settings 048 1 Useful Utilities 11 5 6 Starting the Server To configure the server and start the service follow these steps 1 Click the Server Setup button No 4 Figure 11 24 This dialog box appears Server Setup Network Setting Server Part 3663 Default v Automatic Failover Support Security Setting Authorized ID 111 Authorized Password eee E Enhance network security a Enable IP White List server Setting Autorun server service upon startup Notify when DYR is disconnected from server Figure 11 30 Sever Setup 2 Under Security Setting tyoe the Authorized ID and Authorized Password which will be used for the client GV System to log into the Authentication Server 3 Click OK to apply the settings 4 Click the Start Stop Service button No 5 Figure 11 24 to start the services You can optionally configure the following settings before s
16. Port The default communication port is 8866 O RPB port This port is used for remote playback feature The default value is 5511 For this feature to work the Run ViewLog Server option Figure 8 5 must be selected too Max connection Specify the number of users that can connect to this server Set the number between 1 and 20 382 D Remote Viewing 8 2 9 Multicast Settings These settings allow you toperform multicast and audio broadcast functions For details see Multicast and Audio Broadcast later in this chapter af Server Setup General Server Video Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile Multicast Multicast IF Fort 224 1 1 1 e300 Password Camera Audio lf Receive broadcast audio Multicast IF Port o 1i f 5400 Network card E 92 160 2 11 1 Intel R PROA 000 PM Metwo gt Cancel Default Figure 8 13 Multicast By default the IP address is 224 1 1 2 and port number is 8300 to send the video and audio stream Optionally you can specify a Password for hosts to activate multicast Click the Camera and Audio buttons to select which camera and audio are accessible through multicast Receive Broadcast Audio By default the IP address is 224 1 1 3 and port number is 8400 to receive audio broadcasting Network Card Select another network card if available to run the Multicast service on a different network Since the Multicast service can take a lot of bandwidth when enabl
17. Seguridad Seguridad Status Online 84 Video Call Xe Voice Call CG Figure 11 206 3 Click Send and an incoming call will appear momentarily Seguridad Figure 11 207 649 FOR Useful Utilities 4 Click the green Answer button to watch the live view Figure 11 208 Note You can back up the settings on the utility by using Fast Backup and Restore See Fast Backup and Restore earlier in this chapter 650 leie KE 652 A Zomm po g USB Dongle Required for IP Device Applications ERKENNEN ERR EEN NEEEER E N EE R E Supported PTZ Protocols and Modelle aa EER ENKER EEN EE ENEE REN ENER EE E Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking w cssscsecsecssesseeeeenesseeeeenesseaeseneseeanseneseeaneceesseanes Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan and Tilt Control ococococinoconiconcnoncocnno o supported IP Device Brands susinsnirinaa is Supported GPRS Menger Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View oc cccococccocncccncccnononccononaconenononanono ronca nrnnannns Display Ratio Supported by Panel Resolution ooocccononocniconococinnnnorononnnnonanononno ro rorennannnos Dual Stream SUPDON LIST ira ia Appendix 652 653 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 651 Appendix Appendix A USB Dongle Required for IP Device Applications Solution Application USB Dongle Connection of 3rd party IP devices NVR Dongle to GV System own Connection of 3rd party IP devices to GV NVR NVR Dongle
18. a Type the Server IP Address and the Port number of the server 547 d 1 Useful Utilities b To log into the server using your current login information select Connect with the current login information To log into the server using the login information of its administrator select Connect with administrator login information and type the User Name and Password c Click Test Connection to see if you can connect to the server with Active Directory To assign groups in Active Directory to User Poweruser or Supervisor authority levels a Click the Assign Authority Level button This dialog box appears Group Mapping Setup Undefined Group 3 Windows Authorization Access Grou GroupO0D Domain Controllers Groupoo Denied RODC Password Replication Server Operators Domain Admins Cryptographic Operators Network Configuration Operators Remote Desktop Users Domain Users Enterprise Admins Users Certificate Service DCOM Access Poweruser 115 IUSRS Groupodd Replicator Domain Guests Cert Publishers Performance Log Users Performance Monitor Users Read only Domain Controllers Guests Terminal Server License Servers Domain Computers Distributed COM Users Print Operators Supervisor Allowed RODS Password Replication Incoming Forest Trust Builders Pre Windows 2000 Compatible Acce Backup Operators Administrators Account Operators RAS and 145 Servers Group Policy Creator Owners wt Ee gt Cancel
19. password Then click OK 4 Once the connection is established the live video will appear 443 D Remote Viewing Playing Back the Recordings To play back the recordings follow these steps 1 2 3 4 eh Enable these two functions on the WebCam Server A Enable the Run ViewLog Server option on the General tab For details see General Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter B Enable the Mobile function on the Mobile tab and keep the RPB port to be 5511 or modify it if necessary For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Execute GV GView V2 on your PDA Click the IL button located at the lower left corner see Figure 8 54 The login screen appears IP Address peterliu dipmap com Port 15511 User Name 1 Password MDB Type DVR Clear History CANCEL Figure 8 57 Enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 5511 a username anda password Then click OK to connect Select the desired recording on the event list for playback Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the vdeo was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower The remote playback RPB function does not support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices 444 D Remote Viewing Other Functions In addition to live vew and playback GV GView V2 offers these functions viewing and controlling UC
20. 4 Right click on the right screen and uncheck Auto Arrange Now you can freely drag the I O icons to the desired locations on the imported map 5 To add images to another group repeat the steps 2 to 4 1 0 Central Panel se Ol pu Mode Default y Advanced 1 0 List Es Entrance 4 Input 1 9 Output 1 Output Le va 442 Input 3 9 Output 4 II Output 2 9 Output 3 Es Lobby amp gt Input 2 9 Output 1 5 89 Output 2 Output 4 Figure 6 30 Note Highlighting Advanced I O List in the Advanced WO List you can import another image 332 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 8 System Wide Triggers The System Wide feature gives privileges to remote applications such as Center V2 and VSM to force the outputs in the Main System for cascade triggers For this example the System Wide feature is enabled in Output 1 When the VSM operator manually forces Output 1 Output 2 3 and 4 will be triggered in a cascade series If the System W ide feature is disabled the operator can only force Output 1 without cascade triggers de Elevators Output 1 System Wide Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Figure 6 31 To enable this feature right click an output at the top level and then select System Wide Output 333 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 9 The Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam Option If you already set a specific input to trigger a specific output in the
21. E 1 e SS el lt e lt E e d di d e d e e e a e _ 7 ha bas p ha ba p L 3 LL A A gt ba b oe gt lt LA D I b ve eTo id nd rd ed rd rd A pa F r F r F A ye 050 Fa re re LE E p FS E gt ba bt be gt a 4 A PLA gt ea r E T k e ra ra ba gt lt tas ms e K ra ra TE hs b H gn de ras gt rs ra rs CR zeg K re 5 p ba ba p b b ba ze e ze ee ee ne ze E ra ra rs re s ER en pm UN r bE PA PE PG PG PH DG 2 DA Da Sd ra a ra p r p K K Ke K Fe b ba gt P P PA P D P e e e e lt ee DE Pa p Pa p r ra P ra wa Pa Pa Pa PE DA PH Ppa ba gt a Da M E EE LE gt gt gt bE ke Ka Fe ke ke 7 K K E F reg ke TA pa sa CR p KS b Te ba eS Pa pa pa pa pe br O EE EE ms e EE b p LS ra LEI ra rs bd ggf ef ke ke 7 ra ra gt lt b 4 bJ gt b lt gt e e 1 rt rt rt et Pe oP CR rg CRT l SH ba bas ba es b D KE gt K me gt pa rs ra rea rs J bE Fe ke k Pr BLA PA PA PE PE ze RT pd gt Ye pE a P gr we lt lt H ra ra ha ra ra ee sa gt ea y r hs bs b4 a k ke ke Les pa p lt ra zg K Ke e 5 b b b e ER KE KE E ee P eg t re p p b p Se nd K ee O 4 E Pa gt A P CH CRT gt bE gt a gt u gt lt Te e re ra ra ed CR CR pE Pa rz E zs gt rg rg T
22. E a W Align to center Pos X 1440 Pixels Pos vr 2430 Pixels eit OK Fage Setup Cancel Text Stamp and Position e Print host name e Print camera name ry O E le Printimadge date e A O E O E Print note Set Font Figure 4 21 Image Ratio and Position Changes the size of the image and its position on the page This option is only available in Single View mode Preserve aspect ratio Click to maintain the aspect ratio when resizing an image Align to center Click to change the position of the image on the page 247 D Playing Back Video Files Text Stamp and Position Select whether to include the host name camera name date and or time stamp on the printed image Select Print note to include a note below the image Under the Print note field type the text of less than 64 characters Stamp position icons Sets the position where the stamp is printed SetFont tab Click to select the font type for the stamp Click OK to save the settings or Print to print out the page 248 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 10 Setting Face Mask You can change the account privleges of Power User User and Guest to apply Face Mask which is designed to detect and blur the human faces in recorded videos for privacy purposes All Supervisor accounts can see the recorded video without face masks Figure 4 22 Note 1 The Face Mask function is designed to detect front view faces onl
23. If you are the user of GV GIS monitoring station the GPS data collected from either GV System or from connected IP devices can also be sent tothe GV GIS for central monitoring 11 15 1 Setting the GPS Receiver To record the GPS location data of GV System GV GPS USB Receiver _is required to connect to the local computer Also you need to run the GeoGISClient program in the background to receive the GPS data from the GPS receiver 1 Run GeoGlSClient exe from the GV folder This dialog box appears GV GIS Client Server IP Comnectionts m O 2 0 Da 4 GPS Receiver Detected Figure 11 93 2 To add the GPS receiver to the GV System click the E button and click the GPS Receiver tab This dialog box appears System Configuration General GPS Receiver Setting COM Pott COM 1 v Buad Rate 4800 B GPS update frequency E second s 1730 Figure 11 94 622 1 Useful Utilities Select the COM Port the GPS receiver is connected to and click Test to detect the device Select Baud Rate of the GPS receiver refer to the documentation of the GPS receiver Specify the time in seconds for the frequency to update the GPS data Then click OK Click the button to start receiving GPS data from the GPS receiver 623 ll Useful Utilities 11 15 2 Recording GPS Locations of GV System After configuring the GPS receiver on GV System as mentioned earlier you can enable t
24. Never Recycle Prevents the system from recycling the event files of crowd detection when the recycle threshold is reached 9 You can click Test to test your settings If an assemblage cannot be detected decrease Ratio of Changes to increase the system sensitivity for detection 10 To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 11 Click OK to apply the settings 12 Start monitoring to run the application When a crowd of people gathers in the alarm region for the specified time its location will be highlighted on live video the selected alarm or output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Crowd Detection in System Log for later retrieval 198 EI Video Analysis Note For the Skip Instant Light Change option 1 When it is selected you may be subject to the risk that the system will not generate an alert whenever the lens of the camera is covered by malice 2 If the infrared camera is in use it is not recommended to select this option If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this step Right click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert select Camera select Crowd Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset Alert Reset Background Model Rebuilds the reference image an
25. POS Index Number the POS device COM Port Select the COM port that is used in connection with GV System The parameter IP address button For the serial type of POS dewce click this button to configure Baud Rate Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits of the POS device For the TCP IP type of POS device click this button to configure Device Port and Password to match those of the GV System By default the port value is 4000 and the password fields in both POS Data Sender and GV System are left blank 7 Click Add to apply the settings 8 In the POS Text Sender dialog box the POS device is added to the connection list Click Start to start the connection You can also minimize the dialog box to the notification area At the GV System It is required to insert an appropriate dongle to the GV System for this integration to work To set up a POS device in GV System see POS Device Setup later in this chapter Note The maximum data size of each transaction to be transferred to a GV System is 100 KB When the data size of a transaction exceeds the limit only the latest data will be transferred and displayed at the GV System 345 Point of Sale POS Application 7 1 2 Data Capture Box Integration For details on attaching the text mode POS device to GV System through GV Data Capture Box visit the related links below POS System refers to that with a receipt printer attached internally while Cash Register refers to that with a
26. Ww Alternative Alert Approach SMS Account Setting Test Account com Figure 1 64 2 To enable alert notification select Send Event Alerts ER Configuring Main System 3 To specify the types of events to receive alert notification click the arrow button next to Send Event Alerts and select the alert types Some alerts are only available when the alert settings are activated Alert Events Setup E Mail Hotline SMS Alerts when Y Hideo Lost Y Recording Error M Disk Full Y 10 Device Error Y Scene Change Event Y Crowd Detection wt E Figure 1 65 d Click OK 5 To send e mail hotline or SMS alerts when motion is detected click Invoke to Send Alerts in the Camera Configure F9 dialog box You can select specific cameras for this application or click the Finger button to apply the setting to all the cameras See Figure 1 11 For related settings see Invoke to Send Alerts and options earlier this chapter 6 To receive notification by e mail or hotline select Default Alert Approach and select E Mail or Hotline To receive notification by SMS select Alternative Alert Approach SMS To see how to set up e mail server or hotline service refer to the sections below To see how to set up SMS notification refer to Chapter 10 for more details Di Configuring Main System 1 10 1 Setting Email Server To send e mail notification you need to first set up your mail server as desc
27. alert You can disable the prompt by selecting Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog In the Options section configure these settings Automatically Disable Alarm Stops all types of triggered alerts including sound alarm flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration Disabling the alerts will not disable alert settings and the detection in progress Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in the recorded files so that you can easily spot Suspicious events during playback Note that if you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search do not enable this option These flashing boxes can cause false alarms Skip Instant Light Change Ignores sudden illumination changes to avoid false alarms For example light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly With the option selected the system will ignore significant illumination changes and continue monitoring See the Note in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when an object is detected to be missing Click the button next to the option to assign a wav sound file Output Module Enables the output device when an object is detected to be missing Click the button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number Never Recycle With the option selected the event files of missing object detection will not be recyc
28. device Youcan also customize the HTTP port and VSS port Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the firmware of the device click Browse to specify the path of the firmware file and click Upgrade to proceed You can select Upgrade all devices to upgrade all other GV IP devices of the same username password and model Device Name Type a name for the device Export settings Click Browse to specify a path Click the Export Settings button to export the device settings Import Settings Specify the location of the file to import camera settings to an IP device If Upgrade all devices is selected the settings will apply to all other devices of the same username password and model You can select Password settings and Network settings to also import the password and network settings Reboot Click Reboot to reboot the device or click Light Show to make the device LED flash 633 11 16 4 Mapping IP Cameras You can map IP cameras tothe channels of GV System by using the GV IP Device Utility Click the NVR Camera Settings tab on the GV IP Device Utility window and the following window appears Camera List Host Name lt YS04A Joyce YS04A Joyce YS04A Joyce YS 02 William Ys 024MWilliam 8 02 RL 3 235 VS 02 RL 3 235 S 02 S 02 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 Srd1 ojh xp MFD110 Demo GV IP Device Utility File Tool ER E General settings NVR camera settings IP Addre
29. mobile Multicast General Server Video SE jw Run GeoHTTP Server 2 HTTP Port Command Port Data Port Certificate file El Private key file Sei Password Disable SSL2 0 Detect UPnP Cancel Detank Figure 8 6 Run GeoHTTP Server Enable Geo developed HTTP server or use your own HTTP server Command Port is the port used to access WebCam and Data Port is the port used to transfer data over Internet Enable SSL Enable the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol to ensure the security and privacy of Internet connection To use your own generated Certificate and Private Key or ones verified by SSL authority click the buttons and select the files stored at your computer Note that the system will enable both SSL 2 0 and SSL 3 0 as its default to disable SSL 2 0 protocol when using SSL 3 0 select Disable SSL2 0 Detect UPnP For details see UPnP Settings later in this chapter Note If you want to enable SSL 3 0 on a computer running Windows Vista it is required to upgrade your system to Service Pack 1 or Service Pack 2 375 D Remote Viewing 8 2 3 Video Settings 22 Server Setup Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile Multicast General Server Widen SDK Max Channeli 120 Max Image size Normal Ke PTZ Allowed PTZ camera Cancel Detant Figure 8 7 O Max Channel s Specify the number of channels allowed to access the WebCam server with the upper limit of 200 chann
30. moion d Deactivate Selected Notification Output Wave Alarm Send Aled iTelEMailS MS Figure 6 11 Deactivate notification when selected pin is ON When an assigned input module is activated all designated alarms and alerts will be disabled Assign an installed input module and a pin number for the application Deactivate Notification Triggered by Select an alert condition from the drop down list for the application For example if you choose Motion all designated alarms and alerts upon motion detection will be deactivated when the assigned input module is activated Deactivate Selected Notification Select the alarms and alerts you want to be deactivated such as Output Wave Alarm and or Send Alert when the assigned input module is activated 319 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 3 5 Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger This feature is designed to overlay the name of input device on live video for alert or save it to video files whenever the input is triggered VO Application 3 18 Module 1 Monitor Input ds Input w Rec Video 5 Sec ES Input 2 Y Invoke Alarm Notify fs 2 Input 3 s Inputa W Invoke to Send Alerts W Output Module mod 1 Pin b Register Input Event gt iw Input Overlay Ww Preset Go by lia Demo PTZO10D Camera EN Figure 6 12 Select an Input number to be set up Clicking the Finger button can apply the same settings to all inputs The i
31. oldest and latest events 964 1 Useful Utilities DVR Database Info Indicates the path size and number of the ViewLog Event List log files MDB Info Indicates the path size and number of System Log files Object Index Info Indicates the path size and number of Object Index files ViewLog Info Indicates the location you have backed up the EZ ViewLog player Note The DVR Event Info updates every minute The MDB Info DVR Database Info Object Index Info and ViewLog Info update as data changes 965 1 Useful Utilities 11 7 3 Adding a Disk Drive 1 Click Windows Start point to Programs select the GV folder and select Hot Swap HDD Tool 2 Insert a hot swap hard drive or plug a portable hard drive to your computer This dialog box appears Find some partitions What do you want y Free Space 22 55 GB Total Space 43 04 GB Recording Folder Hi Data Hi Add to recording path Storage Information D Vemp Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Y Camera 6 Camera 9 Camera 10 Figure 11 44 Select Add to recording path and select the storage group from the drop down list lf there are recording files saved on the hard drive you may select the options of Delete all events Delete all database files or Delete all object index files 5 Click OK to automatically configure the hard drive to the recording path 6 To verify the hard drive is added successfully check if the Sta
32. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tl tl ti tl tl H ti H ti Hi ti tl tl e ti Hi Time Period start Time 1 25 2010 S 00 00 End Time 2010 01 25 5 23 59 Only search daylight saving rollback events Merge Mode e Single File Multiple Files Merging Length Hr Direct Merge Higher Speed ac Output Location Ci Documents and Settings All UsersDesktopiMerge2010012 ce Free size 6 05 GB Save as Exe Advanced Operation Time Period a time gt Figure 4 16 2 Inthe Time Period section specify Start and End time to locate files The number of video and audio files for each camera found within the specified time is displayed on the left camera list For example Camera 9 18 0 means the Camera 9 has created 18 video files and O audio files within the specified time By default you can only merge the files of one day 3 In the Merge Mode section select one of the merging methods Single File Merges several AVI files into a single file The maximum size of the merged file is data and etc 2 GB for FAT32 and NFTS file systems If the merged file exceeds the limit of Windows file system it will be split up into another file Multiple Files Merges AVI files into several files of a specific duration After specifying the duration you can see the number of merged files will be created Direct Merge
33. 10192007 40748 HM System Exit 10192007 5 42 47 Ph Sistem Startup 10192007 5 50 02 HM System Exit 1019 2007 6 05 0 Phi System Startup 10192007 7 07 16 Ph Webcam Syr Start 10192007 d A0 Z PM Webcam Svr Stop 10192007 1 28 42 Phi System Exit 100192007 7 29 34 Ph Sistem Startup ID 2 4 4 A bh H H J lt Figure 1 42 ID Displays the event ID number Time This column shows the time when system event occurs Event This column shows the following messages when associated actions are taken Schedule Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops the monitoring schedule Auto Reboot Appears when the system performs auto rebooting function System Start Exit Appears when a user starts or stops GV System Start Stop Monitor All Appears when a user starts or stops all cameras monitoring functions Start Stop Monitor Appears when a user starts or stops the individual camera s monitoring function The camera number will appear in Device column Di Configuring Main System 10 Monitor Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops the individual I O modules monitoring function The l O module number will appear in the Device column WebCam Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops WebCam Server Connect to Center Start Stop Appears when the GV System connects or disconnects with the Security Center Connect to Center V2 Start Stop Appears when the GV System logs in or out Cent
34. 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T Filterl 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke 6pack 1000T 11 29 2007 coke 6pack 1000T Filterl 11 29 2007 coke 6pack 1000T 11 29 2007 6pack 51000T A A d EN 23 rm 2 2 2 2 as St 2 ae 2 as 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 a as 2 T Figure 7 17 A created column in System Log 356 Point of Sale POS Application 7 6 Abnormal Transaction Alerts When an abnormal transaction of the specified transaction item occurs this function can automatically activate the output device and send out assigned E Mail SMS Pager alerts To set up this function follow these steps 1 Follow the instructions in POS Filed Filter earlier in this chapter to set up a transaction item first 2 In the POS Capture Data Setting dialog box Figure 7 15 click the Loss Prevention Setting button This dialog box appears Mozzarella Cheese Loss Prevent
35. 51000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 51000T 6pack 1000T 6pack 51000T 6pack 51000T a Err n enden Figure 7 20 Filterl Filterl O Oh Oh Oh Oh Oh Oh Oh Oh On 359 Point of Sale POS Application 7 7 Codepage Mapping This feature is to support special characters and symbols display When your transaction text appears on the screen incorrectly your POS device may use different character code from GV System s To change a character code follow these steps 1 In Figure 7 13 enable Use Codepage Mapping and select a character code from the drop down list Note The codepage is related to Script in the Set Font option Figure 7 14 When this option is disabled it means there are no codepages matching your script setting 2 To verify the character code you selected click the button to preview its codepage Codepage Mapping Preview 4 3 T i LI E hd I 9 ite d Stat 4 IN iH oO oO Oo fF OO itn i heim D UI o Oo rm oO 000 a UI lo mit UI DI Zb Aia A EDD CT Or D bn EI UI CG IO Pi tn gt Ip fer ip jos JO lO op l E Iw j OJO 3 5 e z Da hn mA 010 0 ela 4 3 o 41 1 jo Je a je A fe MESE o je je j oO Dr E e i e Aa a I o bg mt R Pm oo w UG o ee Oe e D a ee OO 0 I jee e Q 0 dt AO a la OD O e MM LES eem GP mae UI Um t E
36. 96 98 99 100 101 IG lei dei CC a aA 1 17 Touch Screen SUD POM icivcderec cevece ata ceiecedecectivie scene nenn nnnn nunne nnmnnn nenn nenn mena e 1 18 1 t172 Touch Sereen ie EE EE IR Kee EE 4 esch hb wesch sch sch sesch wesch 17 1 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 PTZ and OO E Panel Eo e Hard Dist RH el aa a Sola OUR Oe sr nda Stopping Video Lost Waldo maria Deactivaling Video Lost Boada FaSEK OY LOCKUP SE FaSt KOV CIOS CS A A E Memon LIM dll VEFSION INOMatO Ml talado dd 102 103 103 103 105 105 107 107 108 108 109 110 110 Configuring Main System 1 1 Getting Started When you start the system for the first time the system will prompt you for a Supervisor ID and Password First Execution of Digital Surveillance System E 1 You execute Digital Surveillance system al first time Please enter Supervisor lO Password ID 1 Password a Password Confirmation Hint 1 E Mail List Auto Login To memorize this ID and password and to login When you execute Digital Surveillance system everytime Allow removing password system E Cancel Figure 1 1 a 1 Type an ID and a password Type the password again for confirmation 2 Type a hint that would remind you of the password when the password you entered is incorrect 3 Itis recommended to click E Mail List and enter e mail addresses Wh
37. Add the connection information of a GV System to the address book E3 Delete all entries in the address book G Displays the Installation Guide in two ways Manual and URL Link bai Exit the application SI Import or Export the address book 6 8 8 e D Remote Viewing 482 D Remote Viewing 8 14 Web Browsers on Smartphones Using the browser on your smartphone you can watch live view control PTZ live views and play back recordings from a GV System By connecting tothe WebCam server no extra application is required Note 1 Make sure the 3GPP function is enabled at the WebCam server 2 Live view control is only available for supported PTZ cameras For the support list see Appendix B 3 The playback function is only supported by Android devices In the following steps we use the Android smartphone as an example to log in the GV System 1 Open the browser on your Android device and type the IP address of the GV System to log in Webcam Login iD admin WW Remember My ID and Password Figure 8 106 483 D Remote Viewing 2 Click Login The cameras on the GV System appear Y Live View Remote Play Back Streaming Type Y H264 JPEG Camera List Lamera ax Camera 2 Camera 4 CH Camera 3 Figure 8 107 To watch live view tap Live View on the top tap the H 264 option for Streaming Type and then tap a video icon a The device connects to the live view shortly To
38. Cam NO Status video Resolution 10000 10000 10000 192 168 2 174 192 168 1 165 192 168 3 203 Connected 352x240 MPEG4SH amp 704 Connected 320x256 MPEG4 amp 1 28 Connecting Figure 2 14 Brand GeoVision_6Y PTZ010D GeoVision_6Y BL110D GeoVision_GY FE420 FE421 Add Camera Scan Camera Import Camera IP Device Utility Automatic Setup OK 9 Locate the storage path of the IP camera mapping settings you want to import and click OK The settings are updated to the GV System 128 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 10 Economic Mode The economic mode helps you reduce the disk space needed to store videos from IP video devices Once the economic mode is enabled you can choose to record key frames only or at a lower frame rate when no motion is detected or when I O devices are not triggered This can significantly reduce the file size of the recorded events Note The Economic Mode can only be applied to IP cameras To set up the economic mode 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Camera Configure 2 Select an IP camera under Camera Name 3 Under the Rec Control section click the button after Frames Sec This dialog box appears Hardware Rec Frame Rate Setting Video Frame Rate Limit Ww Enable Economic Mode Motion and UO Trigger Setting f Motion and lfotMotion First f motion and V O First f Motion Only f WO Only Economic Frame Rate S
39. E Browser 3 2 D Remote Viewing The following WebCam server features will be introduced later in this chapter IE Browser s W m Name Live View Remote Play Back DMMultiView Remote ViewLog Remote E Map Download Home Non lE Browsers W Name Live View Remote Play Back Home rver F r Description Accesses different types of live vew viewers See Single View Viewer 2 Window Viewer Multi Window Viewer Multicast and Audio Broadcast and JPEG Image Viewer later in this chapter Accesses remote playback options See Event List Query later in this chapter Accesses the Multi View Viewer See Multi View Viewer later in this chapter Accesses the Remote ViewLog See Remote ViewLog later in this chapter Accesses E Maps remotely set up at the GV System See E Map Application in Chapter 9 Accesses the Download Center This function offers optional viewing programs to be downloaded to the local PC See Download Center later in this chapter Returns to the Login page m Server F r Description Accesses different types of live view viewers For JPEG Image Viewer see JPEG Image Viewer later in this chapter Accesses remote playback options See Event List Query and Remote Playback later in this chapter Returns to the Login page 373 D Remote Viewing 8 2 WebCam Server Settings GV System is built in with a web sever Click the Network button and then select WebCam Server to disp
40. No 4 Figure 10 1 and select View SMSLog to display the SMS Log Browser Ls Event likts Frorn 7 1 20D7 to 7 41 2007 PMS Log Browsel File j Om Tools Vie Held 5 Mobile Number 886916638936 886916638936 886988356515 886988356515 886988356515 886988356515 886988356515 886988356515 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 37339128 Q e SMS Contents This is the test message from Geovision Video lost This is the test message from Geovision Video lost 11 2 2007 15 33 09 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve 11 2 2007 15 33 21 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve 11 2 2007 15 33 28 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve 11 2 2007 15 33 29 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve 11 2 2007 15 33 36 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve 11 2 2007 15 33 48 SMS Alert From DVR TEST105 POS loss preve Figure 10 9 The buttons on the Event Log Browser No j OO Of zJr Oli oO 2 Wy PDP Name Open Reload Filter Backup Print SMS Event Log System Event Log Exit About Description Opens an event log Defines the search criteria Prints the current event list Exits the browser Server Receive Time 7 5 2007 2 28 15 AM 7 5 2007 2 28 54 AM 7 5 2007 11 53 33 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 45 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 52 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 52 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 59 PM 7 5 2007 11 54 11 PM 10 Short Message Service Send SMS Time 7 5 2007 2 28 18 AM 7 5 2007 2 28 57 AM
41. Note To use two or more of the following functions simultaneously at least 2 GB of RAM is required Advanced Video Analysis Video Analysis IP Camera and Pre Record by Memory 219 Chapter 4 a Video Analysis Video Playback 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 1 7 4 1 8 4 1 9 4 1 10 4 1 11 4 1 12 4 1 13 4 1 14 4 1 15 Object Camaras Advanced Log Browser seess Ee EN KEE EEN EE NEE EE EE ER EE EEN ER EE 4 3 1 Quick Gearch ke KK A NN ANERER NN EEN ER anar NN AN ENER A NN ARA 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 Remote View og Service oncccccocicococonocnnoncancnancnennnconancnnnrnnnanrnnnancranannnan as 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 Single TE Playing Back on VICWLOG eer ee ENEE ER KEEN E conan seen eeeeeneeesaeeaneseaees Playback Screen Layout reinici rien ici idolos arcada Playback Control Buttons sisas rr aii Recycling Option for Video Files nor onononononons OOK dice o y O bang ueactent S6arching a Video EVEN nera depa Merging and Exporting Viden Extracting Frames from a Video Event o cooccoccccocccococcnoccoconnncononononconononanconnnnnanos elle Ben ee PARURO IOO WEE eine Face Mask EE Bee GPS Dal E Adj sting Reie Ce BA Object Tracking in Fisheye View Sea arrearen a RE ENE Advanced SENNO EE EE EE de EE Event Query SSUNOS egener Advanced Search Settings E ls AAA AA Creating EEN cascara indi dans e ln Le a GOUD AAA E E
42. Pa be D I 4 ra rs rs pa r D I hd ra rs PA b lt Pa gt b4 gt P E a H 4 4 lt rea L ka p4 Fa ba p hs ps ka Pa P e pa LE p b lt re E a b4 p p4 k d pa b4 rs b b4 Les O P a bk rosa p CR b b lt re 4 P gt MM a re p b lt E gt lt po gt lt SY ra b ra Fa 4 ra P a p lt po kd b4 pa Les gt gt P gt 5 P kd b gt a bk ra res ra KA ra d SEI Ps gt lt rs p4 P ra kA P gt s O bas P4 p p lt P lt p4 CET b gt b rs gt p4 bs gt lt po kd p lt p4 b ra Lad b ra gt re kd p 4 s Sa za Pa Le pa 5 gt KA ra ra gt lt ra 4 L ps p4 PA kA r pa ra ha L a Ka PA La p4 p4 ad p4 Ps 4 p lt ra has ra ba hs ba b ha ha ra gt a P4 gt 4 ER por 4 Sa p4 O gt ra gt o hs re gt a a k r 4 gt gt D k P a 4 4 pa re L ra res ka re gt 54 ra a4 Lef a 4 ag 4 yr d Sa Ka
43. Save counting results to GV Web Report Figure 3 30 2 Avoid installing the camera where it can be subjected to direct sunlight or reflections The lighting of the entrance where you set the camera should be sufficient but not be too bright or dark Light should be distributed evenly across faces without too much light coming from one side If sharp shadow edges are visible in the camera view the count accuracy might be less than what it normally is 169 EI Video Analysis 3 8 2 Setting Face Count 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Advanced Video Analysis and click Face Count Setting 2 Select the cameras you would like to configure and click Configure This dialog box appears Ee Count de ace Count pri Y Camera Camera Selection Camera 1 D Definition Mask Region C Detected Face Size Minimum Face Size Setting Alarm Type Mask Filter Inverse Alarm Reset at 12 o clock Sensitivity 3 Option l Enable upon input trigger Save counting results to GV Web Report Detection Interval sec 10 Iv Invoke Alarm Gs Output Module mod 3 enz gt Never Recycle E Schedule Test O OK Cancel Figure 3 31 3 Under Camera Selection select a camera from the drop down listto be configured 4 The following configurations are available Definition Mask Region Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored Detected Face Size
44. Select Fort Port 10000 stream Type e Single Stream C Dual Streams Codec Type Resolution A E Figure 2 3 117 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 4 The options in the dialog box may vary depending on camera brands Dual Stream Sets the main stream to H 264 and the sub stream to MPEG4 for GV IP cameras To see the firmware versions that support this function and the default resolutions after the camera is added refer to Appendix l e Camera list Select a camera number e Port Video streaming port number Stream number You may have the option of single or dual streaming depending on camera models Codec Type You may have different codec options depending on camera models If the selected camera supports dual streaming the preview codec and recording codec can be set differently Resolution You may select the different resolutions for preview and recording 5 Click Apply The IP camera is added to the list 6 Right click the camera and select Display position to map the IP camera to a channel on the GV System IP Device Setup Server address Port Status Video Resolution Brand Add Camera 1192 168 1 165 10000 Disconnect _GY BL110D_Seri I 192 168 1 231 10000 Disconnect EE GY Smart Box C Change setting Change Resolution Import Camera Remote camera setting Duplicate Camera IP Device Utility Network Time Out On Demand Display Change live view codec Change record codec Frames t
45. Select a camera to be configured After configuration you can click the finger button at each section to apply the same settings to all cameras Text Print on video file Enable this option to display POS data on the recorded wdeo file Print on screen Enable this option to display POS data on the transaction scene Print on POS Live View Enable this option to display POS data on the POS Live View window See POS Live View later in this chapter Alignment Select to set the position of text overlay on the screen Photograph Print texton video file or on screen with photograph Enable this option to overlay the photos with access text onto the live video or recorded file 353 Point of Sale POS Application Print on POS Live View Enable this option to display the photos on the POS Live View window See POS Live View later in this chapter Alignment Select to set the position of photo overlay on the screen Enable clean time W hen the option is enabled after the specified time in seconds that if GV System hasn t received the transaction data from your POS device the already displayed data will disappear from the camera screen e the cashier stops entering the transaction data Transaction end dwell time Specify the amount of time in seconds that POS data stays on a camera screen before the next transaction Camera Time IO Alarm Text Print on video file Enable this option t
46. The image on the right will not display until you complete the settings below Object Tracking Config Object Tracking Zoom In Object Advance Single Camera Tracking PTZ Selection E Camera 4 D Setup Selection Pan Idle Mode Idle Time sec Tilt Tracking D 10 2 Zoom Schedule Views X Add Remove Remove All Perser Test The priority of Object Tracking is higher than Advance Single Camera Tracking when both functions are enabled simultaneously Cancel Figure 3 9 143 10 a Video Analysis Click for the PTZ setup Refer to Object Tracking earlier in this chapter Choose the camera view of the PTZ In Figure 3 9 the images of the PTZ camera show in the camera 2 view Use the sliders of Pan Tilt and Zoom to set up the View 1 as shown below Then click the Add button to apply the settings The View 1 will show in the upper left corner of the right image view 1 Add Remove Remove All Figure 3 10 Click the drop down menu to set up View 2 3 and 4 one at a time Refer to Step 4 Specify Idle Time sec indicating the zooming duration in seconds selection Idle Mode Idle Timefsech view 1 fo 2 Figure 3 11 Click the Idle Mode drop down menu The seven options included inside are None View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4 Tracking and Refresh View None After zooming the PTZ camera will remain on the same view until the next zooming
47. User Login This column shows the ID of the login user User Logout This column shows the ID of the logout user SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS IF 127 0 IP 127 0 IF 127 0 IF 127 0 Status This column shows whether login or logout attempts were successful or failed Di Configuring Main System Mode This column shows the following messages O Local Appears if a user logs in or logs out the Main System WebCam Appears if a remote client logs in or logs out the WebCam server Remote DVR Appears if a Control Center operator logs in or logs out via the Remote DVR service Remote Matrix Appears if a Control Center operator remotely logs in or logs out via the Matrix View service Remote Desktop Appears if a Control Center operator logs in or logs out via the Remote Desktop service Note This column shows the IP address of the client server Counter This function shows the information and result of GV System s counter function Live Log Browser Recycle Log 8 23 2007 18 52 El Monitor System Login Counter pos 2 Start Time End Time Device 10262007 6 30 33 PM 10 26 2007 6 31 33 PM Camera 3 1026 2007 6 31 41 PM 10 26 2007 6 32 03 PM Camera 3 Figure 1 44 ID This column shows the event ID number Start Time This column shows the time when GV System s counter function is activated End Time This column shows the time when GV System s counter function is ter
48. a specific period of time for playback select RPB With Time se SsviewV3RpbConnect Py Peteriu dipmap com My 551 _ asss Port User name Password Figure 8 74 457 D Remote Viewing 4 Onthe Login screen enter the IP address of your GV System port value default value is 5511 a username and a password Then click Options and select Video Server 5 Select the desired recording on the event list for playback Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the vdeo was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower 2 The remote playback RPB function does not support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices Other Functions In addition to live vew GV SSView V3 offers other useful functions such as changing camera channels zooming ina camera view rotating images and seeing Server and WebCam information Select Options to have these features 458 D Remote Viewing 8 13 4 BlackBerry Phone GV Remote View function is introduced to support BlueBerry phones for the mobile surveillance application For the supported operating system version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter Installing GV Remote View 1 To download GV Remote View please click Here and click the Link button 2 Download GV Remote View from BlackBerry App World Activating the GV Remote View Function To allow remote access to GV System enable the Creat
49. block out area s in the exported file type a valid ID and password in the Remove Recoverable Privacy Mask region s field If you want to remain the recoverable block out area s in the exported file leave the field blank 6 If you want to add more Privacy Masks onto the video follow the instructions in Privacy Mask Settings later in this chapter 7 lf you want to save the video file inthe codec type that it was originally recorded in enable Direct Merge Higher Speed Note Once the Direct Merge Higher Speed is enabled you will not be able to customize settings such as codec selection privacy mask recoverability and digital watermark but the time required for conversion is significantly reduced 8 To configure the saving path and format of the exported video click the Setting tab For details see AVI File Settings later in this chapter 9 Click OK to export and save the file 239 Advanced Merge D Playing Back Video Files Advanced Merge allows you to merge several AVI files into a big single file or into a number of files of a set duration 1 On the function panel click the Save as AVI button No 2 Figure 4 2 and select Advanced Merge This dialog box appears Advanced Merge Tool Ei Camera _ Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera amp Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Camera 17 Events State A
50. click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select I O Device and click I O Device Setup This window appears 1 0 Device Select UO Device Input 1 HD Name Device GV NETHO Card Input 1 Port Remove Signal Type f NWO C NC Latch Trigger Address Module Device Port Address o dy 1 GV NET IO Card E Output air e Name Output 1 Force Output Signal Type C MNO e NO Toggle C WO Pulse EN 8 ec C NC NC Toggle C Nic Pulse om Figure 6 1 I O Settings Select I O Device Adds an I O device to the system 1 Select the device from the Device drop down list 2 Click the Format Addr button to assign an address to the device The Format Address dialog box appears 3 Start your first device with New Address set to 1 Click the Write button to write the address to the device Click OK to apply the setting 4 Click the Add button You should see the device listed in the display window 5 Repeat above steps to add more devices once ata time Each device should have its own address therefore in step 3 you should assign a different address for the new device Note For GV Net lO Card V3 1 Net IO Card Mode select the GV NET IO Card option for GV Net IO Card V3 1 I O Box Mode and GV I O Box 4 Ports select the GVIO USB 4 option for GV IO Box 8 Ports select the GVIO USB 8 option and for GV I O Box 16 Ports select the GVIO USB 16 opiton 307 FJ 1 0 Application
51. devices PTZ control adjusting image quality starting and stopping recording On the live view screen click the buttons on the toolbar to have the desired functions 1 G VIE yy E D D i 399 eception pur SUR Figure 8 58 Button Description TOA Click it to stop the connection E Click it for Focus in Focus out and Zoom in Zoom out control This is only i available when the camera supports PTZ functions e Click itto move the camera to different directions This is only available when the camera supports PTZ functions raz Click itto move the camera to the preset positions This is only available when Gi the camera supports PTZ functions e Click it to adjust the image quality x Click it to access the connected l O devices 4 Click it to start or stop recording Click it to display the camera status The supervisor is given the highest priority to control the PTZ camera and won t be restrained by 60 second time limit When the supervisor logs in the Timer shows 999 eception Use this drop down list to switch cameras 445 D Remote Viewing Accessing l O Devices To access the connected I O devices use the drop down list to select the desired camera and click the button The I O module button appears on the toolbar Lei d Welcome Gview Pr x 02 35 ok Camera REE je Figure 8 59 The number on the toolbar indicates the connected module Click the desired number to access its I O devices The I O
52. gt oK Cancel Figure 3 52 2 Use the drop down listto select one camera and check the Enable option 3 When the image enhancement is enabled the system load will increase Adjust the Refresh rate by moving the slide bar to optimize system performance 4 Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 5 If you want to view the demonstration of this function click the Demo button 191 a Video Analysis 2 If dual stream IP channels are applied for better image quality it is recommended to change the streaming to single stream before you enable video stabilization This effect does not support On Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single channel division 192 EI Video Analysis 3 15 Wide Angle Lens Dewarping Camera images can sometimes appear curved toward the edges ofthe view This feature helps correct distortion towards the edge of the camera view 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Camera Configure This dialog box appears F Camera Configure r Camera Lens Camera Mame Camera 1 Wide Angle el Pee Control Video Attributes lw Rec Video Motion Detect Brightness EN Rec Frame Rate Setting P Contrast J 128 rees Saturation H 128 Se Hue vc ed 128 Default Figure 3 53
53. i ef VI ve VI VI A4 A gt VI a EE Li A p has p ad p p p kaf Pd ki ka ka ka o E re re Q O pa 0 E Sd pd ke pd pd k k pd r S gt gt has has b rs hs p A ba p pd pd pd pd pd pd E F Fa Fa Fa FS F FS ee rg d eg eg el eg ad gl e d gi eng bE E E ee E D P D M bda ba pd kd Pd k kd ke kd k HA PE PE PE PE ro ra pa pa pe ke ke F ke pa F F Fe F ke PE PE PE DU PA TK hd pa k k nd k S Le p p p p b 4 t bet ret Fe OP o e bE PE PA PE PE ae K ke mM K F Se K F K Sg K P PA PA PA PI PA sn Pe 0 S S DEN lt E PA re ZS ZC A K k k y k gt bE DE DE PPE DJE DE Da gt LEI E zs E rt p a pa pe pea pea pe pe ha ye mre E O a ae n y Ka ba PE Da E JE pa pa de S OR e L d Sa PE Pa a P P P S gt bd gt d gt n gt PS y WW ra p p p p L P p e 040040 0000 MM ges vh dp En Eh db e gr dh A A h rh wh amp s BO eh dh vg A vo g L he _ eg 8 8 amp Sg re yd Fe pg y d v 5 gt b b b hs hs gt b b hs he we ER h a we e e DE e e lt ne e ra L ra ra ra ra ro ra ra rs ras ras pa E gt E gt e 8 64 d ef ad el pad n y ba 4 b ba b pa ba p bas pa ba pa p ba D a a pa pa pd Da bet DE DE DE DE gt d 5 Le L gt re re Le L re na DITA OOO Si i bE ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e F k
54. k F pd r r TO O D D D E Y Pa A pl eS eS par RV gt ba pa ef ef a CR hd hd K ka bet k Ka Ka K oa e pl pd gt pa gt pr bE PA A PA PU PAU PAU Pi bad bd a gt d gt ee S S DE ze re re DE re he DE DE E k K k Ka k K Ss 3 nF E ga _ O O A KE o K hs nr e E a a E A A CR a p p y A y A 7 7 a A 7 A b b b ER E rs rs ros a e K ke K es ba eg ba ba ba ba h Les rs rs a pd LEI p4 b va KR CR CR ee a CRT re CRT Ha rs e ba ha ba ba ha FA ha ee CR o he a e ros ro ros rs ro ro S e H D b F re Li b pa p ba ta ba p e K S Sa CR a a ea E E d gt de a A MA A S Z O bE P a P P P P ee e ms me L ms e gt ba Fa Pa B pa Pa ZO ZC Cp ZK he ad Sg CH RT oa oa ea oad ad p D gt bE D E PE PE DPE Da E DEN ns ze PE a P PHE PA A PA CZ ZE A e e re CR re re CR Ca r bE a fra e ke O ka Fa e a e ze me d d d d d a 4 b4 ra p4 p pa r L r re ra be gt Ce nal r re rg rs lt BE pu E rt pa ba PE DA PAE PU PU PU DP W pa pa b ba 4 ke pd be KA K Ke ka SA S bE ee ee ee s ER nr s Pa gt r L P p p L es re ee CR CR K e e e a va g 3 4 pr a hs has pa has hs 4 ba ba b O f ER KR i i 7 e gt DE lt y P lt a P
55. ras P ra gt kA ro D P4 pa ra aa P4 e a 4 Pa pd p A a4 I b hs P hs ro gt lt G Le p P lt a ra z a P4 Sa zs Ps gt 3 r gt b 4 he Le D P4 ka d 5 mn a P pa gt gt a r 4 S B a A w gt 2 gt Te P a gt p lt gt b gt Ed gt C O SS WW a rs ha re ha a ras ied 4 4 RK za ra 4 ea 4 gt he ha p b p rs es re a Ad 4 CRT 4 ra 4 za 4 gt p be ba CR e b b bra gt gt a a he hr ka L 5000940040000 d gt gt pe P La b A Sa gt gt Pe gt a 7 re Bt lle e 9090909099 gd PH 9 D pe d re ba a K re pd p ea sa ea pE p EI e k e pa A e b E a 5 i ra d e StSt 9 4 244 be fe we ve A d A Pe A Be A So d 2 A d 3374 by vi Kaffe lt d y ef gt gt A Sl ye J Nee A e 2 A Ae 2 lt gt lt pa b 7 row A e pd A C E E re Ps OP bd pd ke ke pd p K k ke La 4 474 gt Di pa pd d k k nd pd pd pd lt PE PSG PSG PG PSG DRG PS A ke y Fa k F re zg rt gt gt
56. see Video Analysis Schedule later inthis chapter 7 Click OK to apply the settings Note The minimum storage space required for Object Index is 500 MB 159 a Video Analysis 3 5 2 Viewing Object Index After configuring Object Index you can start to vew the most recent frames captured with 50 frames at most 1 Start camera monitoring 2 Click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and then select Live Object Index to display the Live Viewer window Lock Object Index Live Viewer Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 4 Camera 15 Camera 4 16 09 13 16 09 14 16 09 16 16 09 16 16 09 16 v u J Time ending without Camera 15 Camera 15 Camera 4 Camera 3 Camera 15 16 09 17 16 09 21 16 09 21 16 09 23 16 09 23 Time ending with v Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 15 Camera 1 Camera 15 16 09 25 16 09 27 16 09 27 16 09 29 16 09 30 i Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 15 Camera 3 16 09 31 16 09 32 16 09 31 16 09 33 16 09 34 e Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 3 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 36 Figure 3 22 The controls in the Live Viewer window The Lock button Click to pause the updating process Time ending without This means the file is a complete one and can be played back with the ViewLog or Quick Search player Double click the frame to play back its related video Time ending with This means
57. 12 Spot Monitor Controller keieren tee Ee 11 e SPO Montor Fanel a dada O 11 13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller ee ERKENNEN RENE EEN EEN an 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 11 11 Report Generator usina 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 12 1 11 13 1 11 132 SeUINGIPOD UD AEN 111133 Displaying TV Quad Panel eier Eege 11514 Digital MaliDC ais 11 14 1 11 142 11 14 3 11 14 4 11 14 5 11 14 6 11 15 1 11 15 2 11 15 3 11 15 4 11 15 5 11 16 1 Installing the Bandwidth Control Allowing Remote Control at DVR occcccococncccnconocccononcnccnonnnoonnnoos Connecting toa WebCam Server cunnicicciococcccnnccncononnnoncccnonocanonons Controlling a WebCam Server cnnciocoococccononcocononnnononononnnonononnnanoos Sale un RTE BIOCK BT SEET een eer enen eer Starting Report Generator EE Setting Report Generator ccociccnoninccoconnnococcnononononononononanocnnnnnonons Setting Report CARA eege E Mail Attachment Settings uk ENNEN EEN AER Playing Back Video Recordings E Viewing Event Log s eesessssssssrssserersrrrrererrsrrrrersrerrsrrerersrrersrens Spot Monitor Controller sita idol o Meta ine te Ma ra Activating Multiple Monitors 0 0 ccc cceceeeceeeeeee eens ereeeeeeeaeeeeeaes SEEING LIVE Md SERIES Sil VEER ee Setting Live View with Pop up Alert ooococcoocicccocicccococccococononononos Controlling Screen Display sun tia 1115 GIS EELER pur A iii ieee tien he
58. 2 Set the idle time after which to start the protection mode 3 Select Auto Preset Multi Position Tour or Tour Schedule as protection mode Setting Multi Position Tour You can create a PTZ tour with up to 64 preset points Note the number of preset points depends on your PTZ capacity 1 Select Multi Position Tour on the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box Figure 1 71 and click the Setting button This dialog box appears User define Multiple Preset Tour Tour Setting Preset Dwell Time 5 Cancel Add Preset Mo Cruel Time Mo 1 2 3 H 5 C Figure 1 75 2 Select a Preset as a start point 3 Setthe Dwell Time that the PTZ will remain in a preset 4 Click Add and repeat Steps 2 3 to build more points in the tour ER Configuring Main System Setting Tour Schedule When the PTZ camera remains stationary for a certain time the camera will start the defined behaviors such as activating the auto pan or returning the designated preset in the defined time frames 1 Select Tour Schedule on the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box Figure 1 74 and click the Setting button This dialog box appears Customize Tour Schedule Time Span Setup Ww Span AM 00 00 E Auto Pan W Span AN 00000 Preset 1 lw Spans AM 00 00 _ Preset 6 Wo Span AM 00 00 kt Customize hiultiple F Preset y H f Sunday amp Saturday f Sunday Only Cancel Figure 1 76 2 Selec
59. 2 lf the Domain name from DDNS option on the Advanced Setting tab Figure 11 69 is not selected this dialog box will appear Connect to Remote Viewlog Service Port 5552 Default ID Password coa Figure 11 75 3 Type the IP or domain name ID and password of the GV System and then click Connect for playback 3 D 1GV 800 Main System iReport120110623trere_2011 JB fx Figure 11 76 602 Useful Utilities 4 You can change the play mode and create special effects on the video by right clicking on the playback window For details on the playback window see Single Player in Chapter 4 603 1 Useful Utilities 11 11 6 Viewing Event Log All Report Generator events are recorded to the event log To view the event log in the Report Generator dialog box click the Event Log tab All events are displayed in descending order For the related settings of the event log see Event Log Settings in Setting Up Report Generator earlier in this chapter 604 1 Useful Utilities 11 12 Spot Monitor Controller GV Combo Card GV 1120 1280 1480 and GV Combo A Card GV 1120A 1280A 1480 A come equipped with a TV output allowing you to connect one spot monitor or TV monitor to the computer With the Spot Monitor Controller you can define the screen divisions set the channel sequence of each scanned page and adjust video images on the additional monitor 11 12 1 Spot Monitor Controll
60. 3GPP Mobile Multicast General Server ideo SH RPB CC d SDK Max Channel 1 10 KBytes sec Cancel Detautt Figure 8 8 This feature is only used for SDK users to prevent overloading on slower networks O Max Channel s Specify the number of channels allowed to be downloaded to a client PC Bandwidth Control Enable and specify the rate of data to be transferred over network The option effectively controls the bandwidth being used by the WebCam server 377 D Remote Viewing 8 2 5 Audio Settings Connecting Audio Devices Through the WebCam server you can access live audio at a remote site and talk to the server site This feature is useful when the remote site requires speaking to the personnel atthe server site in case of emergency Before using this feature make sure all the necessary hardware are in place 1 To record audio connect microphones to the audio inputs on the GV Video Capture Card For details refer to the GV DVR and Accessories Installation Guide on the Software DVD 2 Make sure your sound card is already inside the computer Connect a multimedia speaker to the audio output of your computer s sound card This is for receiving audio from the remote site 3 Connect a desktop microphone to the input of the audio extension card or cable line This is for sending audio to the remote site Audio Setup 22 Server Setup General Server Video SOK Audio JPG 3GPP
61. 5 Y View v3 V7 E E Week Days Enable Schedule v4 ks TI E SUN MON TUE weD THU ER SAT UI SS Apply Day s Operation s Schedule List Window O O a lt sed Camera Tabs a Figure 1 48 ER Configuring Main System 1 8 1 Video Schedule 1 3 Set your surveillance preferences Time Enter the starting and ending time of the schedule Monitor Invoke Sets alert methods on motion detection Rec Records while monitoring Select the recording mode to be Motion Detection or Round the Clock Pager E Mail Sends pager or e mail alerts on motion detection Output Triggers the corresponding I O devices on motion detection To set up I O devices see Adjusting Individual Camera earlier in this chapter Remote Allows remotely accessing live vdeo from the WebCam server on the scheduled time Week Days Enable Schedule Select days for the schedule Camera Applies the settings to selected cameras Click the Add Schedule tab to apply above settings The set schedule will be displayed on the Schedule List Window Repeat above steps to set up more schedules Clicking separate Camera tabs you will see the set schedule is displayed in different color bars e e Red Recording enabled Green Pager E mail notification enabled Blue Live view from the WebCam server accessible Jade I O monitor enabled Purple Center V2 schedule enabled To modify a schedule highlight the
62. 7 1 1 Windows Based Direct POS Integration o oooccocncninncococccncnoconnnnnos 1 1 2 Data Capture Box Integral 7 2 Graphic Mode POS Device civic ENEE EUR POM eine ele escasa cto 2 2 N twork EIDEN rat 7 3 POS Device Sell Dita TA POS Data Overlay at 341 341 346 347 347 349 351 353 8 3 8 7 9 2 7 10 1 8 1 Remote Viewing Using a Web Browser onmmciciconocecocococoanoronanaronanaranarararararanonos 8 2 WebCamServer Setting S aii ds 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 2 7 8 2 8 8 2 9 8 2 11 8 2 12 Network Port Intorm anon 8 3 Single VIEW Viewer EE 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 3 5 8 3 6 8 3 7 Visual P IZ Gontrol EE SENO LNE EE 7 10 POS Color Tex A EE EH EE tege en Det ende de e E General eege SEVER EE iia VICES EE Ee RI ne EE lee nn e EE TEE ne EE SOPP SUNI ati ls Mobile S Le EE Multicast Settings coocononcocoononononocnononencnnononenono conc A 8 210 En EE EP Sener SCUNOS ar Conto Panel esoteric a een nhs Met A Sener LIST EE VISO RECON O laa Tee Wee LE Video and Audio Configuration oooccccocnccicccococcnonnncoccno non carononnnanoos Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream oo ooooniccconicccocicnncnooo P TOON e EE 399 363 364 364 8 Remote Viewing ee ER ER ERR ER ERR KR ee ep ven 909 370 374 374 375 376 377 378 380 381 382 383 384 387 388 389 391 392 393 394 395 397 398 8 3 8 EI CARE Control EE HOT Cn a cee asec eset
63. 7 5 2007 11 53 37 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 49 PM 7 5 2007 11 53 56 PM 7 5 2007 11 54 02 PM 7 5 2007 11 54 09 PM 7 5 2007 11 54 16 PM Status Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Refreshes the event log manually Exports the current event list and video files Displays the log of SMS server events Displays the log of SMS server activities Displays the application information of SMS Log Browser 917 SMS Event Log 10 Short Message Service Clicking the SMS Event Log button No 6 Figure 10 9 on the toolbar you can monitor senders ID mobile numbers text messages sent and failed SMS This can be beneficial as you may charge your clients by the amount of SMS messages they sent Event lists From 6 1 2007 to 6 18 2007 SMS Log Browser File Tools View Help babes aa ID 5 g Mobile Number 886920698698 886920698698 886920698698 886920698698 886920698698 886920698698 886920698698 886920698525 System Event Log SHEEEE SMS Contents video lost video lost Video Lost sub login start all types stop cam monitoring video lost Video Lost Figure 10 10 Server Receive Time 6 6 2007 10 08 06 PM 5 6 2007 10 12 36 PM 6 6 2007 10 24 21 PM 6 6 2007 10 24 25 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 23 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 23 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 23 PM 6 6 2007 10 32 30 PM 6 6 2007 10 32 31 PM Send SMS Time 6 6 2007 10 08 08 PM 5 6 2007 10 12 38 PM 6 6 200
64. Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue Move the sliders to adjust image attributes Click the finger button to apply the selected values to all cameras Recording Quality Move the slider to increase or decrease the picture quality Click the finger button to apply the selected quality to all cameras Image Size Keyframe indicates the compressed file size while Frame shows the partly compressed file size after quality and image adjustment Note The smaller image size means higher video compression and smaller file size thus extending the recording capacity ER Configuring Main System WebCam Center V2 Control Center You can configure the image quality for vdeo streaming to the WebCam server Center V2 and Control Center Your quality settings for Low Normal and Best will be applied to these remote applications Advanced Video Attributes Multicam WebCam Center2 Control Center Camera 2 e DI Codec Selection Geo Mpeg4 v Original Image Compressed Image Quality Quantizer 4 Bits per Second Normal E Default 36 469 Kbisec een Figure 1 25 Quantizer The bigger the Quantizer the poor the image quality Quality The default Quantizer for Best is 2 for Normal is 4 and for Low is 8 The adjustment rule between Quantizer and Quality is Quantizer for Best lt Quantizer for Normal lt Quanitzer for Low Bits per second Indicates the data transmission speed after quali
65. Camera List to the desired camera channels in the By default the login username and password for the IP camera both are set to admin If the added IP camera does not use the default settings you need to right click the IP camera in the Dispatch Pattern section and select Login User Information to modify its logon information You can use the Export button to export the IP camera mapping settings and then import the settings back into the Main System See Camera Mapping Using IP Device Utility in Chapter 2 634 KOR Useful Utilities 11 17 MCamCtrl Utility for GV Joystick The MCamCitrl Utility is an independent application that allows you to control GV PTZ Camera GV PT Camera GV IP Speed Dome and any PTZ camera connected to GV Video Server and GV Compact DVR using a GV Joystick You just need to run the MCamCtrl Utility on the computer connected with a GV Joystick and open the Web interface of the specific GV IP device You can remotely control the PTZ movement using the GV Joystick 11 17 1 Installing MCamCtrl Utility To install the MCamCtrl Utility on the computer connected with a GV Joystick 1 Insert the Software DVD to your computer lt runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Select GV MCamCtrl Utility and follow the on screen instructions 635 1 mo e o Y 1 Useful Utilities 11 17 2 Starting the MCamCtrl Utility Go to Windows Start point to Pr
66. Cancel Figure 3 40 Scene Change Detection Setup Camera Select the camera to be configured Mask region Masks off the areas where motion will be ignored Focus change Generates an alert when the camera is out of focus e e View change Generates an alert when the camera has been moved or the lens of the camera has been covered e Sensitivity Adjusts detection sensitivity The default value is 3 180 a Video Analysis Delay Time s Sets the duration of a scene change before an alarm condition is triggered Invoke Alarm Activates the computer alarm when a scene change is detected Click the button beside to assign a wav sound file Output Module Activates the output device when a scene change is detected Click the button beside to assign the output module and pin number Live disable alarm Choose whether to invoke the warning message when a scene change is detected Click the button beside to display Figure 3 40 Camera 3 Auto After confirmation the scene change detection will use the new current Manual scenario Delay Time s E Cancel Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Select Auto to close the warning message Figure 3 42 automatically or select Manual to close it manually Under Delay Time s you can define the duration of a scene change to invoke the message The range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds Never Recycle When this option is select
67. Chere 44 00 TA AS 0d Ate 207 1537 ap 071 100205 14 17 54 Sho 007 1 05 om CMP ac S mes goe 5 os cocke dt A e e MA AE SI PEP Oe ED UECHT MAA ER SE Sale SEKR TIO O oS Se or A A WO OF LO LO LoS 00 i area rnn hotdas 3b Lk S ier D Lei ere eNO Figure 7 26 Note You can set the maximum of 32 keywords for identification 366 Chapter 8 Remote Viewing occcoccoccocncoccnccnonnnno 369 8 1 Remote Viewing Using a Web BrowSeP 1 c1 cccccecceeeencesneeeeeeneneneeees 82 WebCam Server Seting EE 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 2 7 8 2 8 8 2 9 8 2 10 8 2 11 8 2 12 9 3 Single VIEW VIE Wei aa 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 3 5 8 3 6 8 3 7 8 3 8 8 3 9 8 3 10 8 3 11 8 3 12 8 3 13 8 3 14 8 4 2 Window Viewer cece cece KN AN ENN AN ENN E ENNEN E AN EN E nn EN ER AN ENN ar EN ENN KN EN kV 8 5 Multi Window Viewer cece cece cece ENN KR EN EN E ANEN E AN ENN ER EN EN E nr EN EN E KN EN EN kV 8 6 Multi View VIC E Tue 8 6 1 General Sen Osso add ia ines Sener Oe EOS is Video Seinos asa SDK Ehe Ee lee Eur E JPG S E SGP P SEUNS enaa ES Mobile SENO EE VE ee URRE te EE EE Eet Seinos eegene Network Port Information N T Conto PAINS EE ENEE dee NICO FICCOIGIING ana O O a Rd Alarm Non Canon marian Video and Audio Configuration cccococncccccococcconnncocncnnnncnnon ono ceseaeaeeeeseaeaeeeeseereeeeaes Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream noicocnccicnnonicnccc
68. Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host You can combine multiple hosts into a single host including the camera channels all from different IP addresses There are two methods to combine multiple hosts the manual creation of Multiple Hosts the quick creation of Multiple Hosts Manual Creation of Multiple Hosts 1 Click the Edit Host button No 10 Figure 8 35 to display the Edit Host window Click the New button and select Group to create a group first Then click the New button again and select Host to create a host 2 Select Multiple Host This dialog box appears Host List Host Informations S New Group Host Protection E 2 New Host Single Host e Multiple Host Host Mame New Host Password CS CS 1 2 3 4 5 Bi T H Now Delete Import Export Figure 8 39 Creating Multiple Hosts 3 In the Host Name field enter a desired name to identify the Multiple Hosts 4 To set up each camera channel of the Multiple Hosts click the Edit tab one at a time Alternatively you can click and drag the created camera channel from the Host List Figure 8 36 to each Edit tab Note that all created camera channels must be added to each Edit tab in the order of 1 to 32 415 D Remote Viewing 5 Click the Edit tab This dialog box appears Camera Setting Device IC Ee System IF Address 127 0 0 1 User Name Password Camera Mo Command Fort 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port 6550 O
69. Configuring the Remote E Map uuu AE 499 9 4 4 Viewing Host Information and Playing Back Video e DOO 9 4 5 Accessing Remote ViewL0Q A DOT 9 5 E Map SOI E E 95 1 Installing E Map Sen EE JOC 9 5 2 The E Map Server WindoW e DOB 9 5 3 Setting E Map Gener nn D04 9 5 4 Remote Monitoring via E Map Gener e DOO 9 5 5 Accessing Authentication Server Account Information weet DOG 486 E Map Application E Map displays the monitoring area on an electronic map by which the operator can easily locate the cameras sensors and alarms triggered by motion or I O devices Topics discussed in this chapter include creating an E Map file with E Map Editor working with E Map in the Main System working with E Map on the WebCam server and E Map Server 9 1 The E Map Editor The E Map Editor program allows you to import a floor plan in BMP GIF and JPG formats and use the icons of cameras and l O devices to edit a map per your requirement The E Map Editor program comes with the installation of Main System Click the Windows Start menu select Programs select GV folder and click EMap Editor The E Map Editor window will appear 487 al E Map Application 9 1 1 The E Map Editor Window d D 7 1 Mbp Editor Fi it ap Ho iew a 2 E Ge Map View x 13 3 4 New Map PM New Map 1 Host View x TEST140 PC pp Cameras 1 13 VO Devices File Type DVR Figure 9 1 The E Map Editor Window The controls in the E Map Editor
70. D Remote Viewing Monitor Enable I O and Schedule monitoring to the remote GV System Click the Send button to apply the settings Remote Config Enable KO Monitoring Enable Schedule en Figure 8 31 406 D Remote Viewing 8 4 2 Window Viewer On the 2 Windows you can drag and drop the camera PTZ and l O icons to the desired window for the following functions respectively video display activating the Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image activating the Visual Automation function To access the 2 Windows click Live View on the left panel of the Single View page and then select 2 Windows Live view gt Mpeg4 Encoder Viewer gt 2 Windows Figure 8 32 407 D Remote Viewing 8 5 Multi Window Viewer The Multi Windows displays at most 16 channels at a time and supports up to 32 channels To access the Multi Windows click Live View on the left panel of the Single View page and select Multi Windows You can also access Multi Windows directly if you select Simple Version at the Login page Figure 8 2 Live View gt Multi Windows Ps fo Pio e Pas Pos Jas ro s 17 fas 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26127 25 4 16 Figure 8 33 408 D Remote Viewing 8 6 Multi View Viewer Multi View is a multi channel viewer allowing users to view up to 32 live cameras simultaneously Because multiple channels require a large amount of data to be transferred over Internet thi
71. DNS earlier in this chapter For details on remote playback see Playing Back Video Recordings later in this chapter Event Log Settings Auto Import Specify the number of days of Report Generator logs to be displayed when the Event Log is started Up to seven days of data can be displayed Keep Days Specify the number of days to keep Report Generator logs The logs can be kept for up to 365 days Log Path Select the location to store Report Generator logs 597 1 Useful Utilities 11 11 3 Setting Report Criteria You can create up to 300 reports Jobs with different criteria 1 In the Report Generator dialog box click the Program Report tab Program Report Advanced Setting Evert Log POS MOB DI DU Action Select Jok Monitoring Simo mi E W Save to HD Setting System MDE 5 E H 5 Mai iw Monttor Filter H Mm E a E Mail Setting Mom god mis System Mas 14 1 157 16 Execution Method Manual weekly Login l Counter fer Select Date 1 22 2008 Weekly report days of data selected SUM MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Execution Apply Remove Job Selection Monitoring System MDB Monitor POS MDE 1 Action Selection Ho Execution Time 08 00 00 Execution Day Manual weekly Days of data selected Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Figure 11 70 2 In the Job field type a descriptive name for the report 3 Select the types of events you want to include
72. E Input 1 e Input 1 iG Input 2 oe de Exit 2 Input 3 E Input 3 ff Output 4 a Output 1 G Output 2 a Output 2 a Output 3 Figure 6 26 Quick Link __ 4 Entrance es Exit ES Lobby 330 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 6 Forcing Output To manually force an output click one output and select Force Output In the Standard I O List you can force the output individually In the Advanced I O List considering cascade triggers you can only manually force the output at the top level e g Figure 6 27 Other outputs at sub levels cannot be forced manually e g Figure 6 28 However if the output is not in a cascading hierarchy you can definitely force it manually e g Figure 6 29 is Elevators e Entry 3 48 Toilet EAT e Input 2 0 Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 ER Output 3 9 Output 2 Output 3 e Output 4 0 Output 3 e Output 4 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 331 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 7 Editing Background Image With the Background Image feature you can import a floor plan to lay out the locations of triggered I O devices This feature works in the Icon style of the Advanced I O List 1 To switch to the Icon style click the Advanced I O List Style button No 4 Figure 6 17 and then select Icon 2 Selecta group in the Advanced I O List The I O icons of this group will be displayed 3 Right click on the right screen and select Background Image to import a graphic file
73. ENEE 3 6 1 Setting Video Snapshots ocoococccccocncococcconoconoconanonnnannnn conc rn nonc nn non cnr nan anrnnarannnanans 3 6 2 Searching Video Snapshots ccccccccsecceceecseceeceeceeeeceeeeeeaseceeeseaeeeseeseaeeeeeeaeeeseeees Face Detection isis FCO G OUI da 3 8 1 Installing the Camera wc ccccseceeeceeceececeeeee cee seeaes nnnononn nan aonn nn nan rara cn nara rrn arranco 38 2 Setting Face EEN Unattended and Missing Object Detection ococcnnncinianocoomoo oo 3 9 2 Detecting Missing Objects AE PRIVACY Mask Protection score inercia den 3 101 Seling a Privacy MaS Cisco noi 3 10 2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas o mnmcconconnccicccocononoononnnononnos Scene Change Detection coociccnnccnncccccncconcncncnnccncnncnancnnnannnan cn anrnnnannnanes Panorama VICW sccsccec cc cece cncccccececncecenus cece secnascnaeseenasenasseennsenaasennsseenases 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution sa 190 AS Ae A Sale BIC ZOO MUNG ados 136 143 146 149 149 151 152 a 199 A geeiert tege Eet 154 156 158 158 160 161 163 163 165 167 169 169 170 ns ker 3 9 1 Detecting Unattended Objects ccoc oocinin nnccioniccocoonononororoncnoonono non car ono no rrrn cn nan teretne 173 175 178 178 179 180 182 134 3 13 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 12 1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping Aregas oooocococnicnccocio
74. Higher Speed The merging method only joins video files together without the inclusion of their video effects such as privacy masks watermarks time stamps GPS 240 D Playing Back Video Files Using the Direct Merge to merge several AVI files into a single file also select Single File Using the Direct Merge to merge AVI files based on the specified duration also select Multiple Files To merge audio and video together click the arrow button and select Include Audio Since the exclusion of video effects the Direct Merge is faster than the other two merging methods In the Output Location section specify the storage location of merged files and select whether to save merged files in EXE format In the Advanced Operation section Ifyou select Single File at the step 3 click the Ka button to configure video effects to merged files For details see Merging and Exporting Video earlier in this chapter Ifyou select Multiple File at the step 3 you can define different video effects for each time segment Select a period of time and click the button to define the video effects to the specific time segment Click Start to begin merging files 241 D Playing Back Video Files Exporting PIP PAP View You can apply PIP Picture in Picture or PAP Picture and Picture view to a recorded video and then export the video The video will be played back in PIP or PAP view 1 Select a recorded video
75. IP address Port number and login ID and Password You can optionally select Remember Account or you can enter ID and Password each time you connect the host using Address Book 4 Select Server Type 5 Click the Update button to request the number of cameras installed from the host 6 Click OK to create the host account If you want to assign a group for the host type a group name in the Group Name box The group name will be added to the Host List and also to the Group Name drop down list Next time when you add a host you can optionally select the created groups from the Group Name drop down list To create a host account of GV Recording Server GV Failover Server and GV Redundant Server click the Add GV Device Server buttons To create a host account of GV Backup Center and GV Storage System click the Add GV Backup Center and Add GV Storage System buttons respectively The Add a Host dialog box may look a bit different among these hosts Tip Right clicking the created host on the Address Book and selecting Connect can connect with the host and display its events on the ViewLog 4 5 2 Creating a Group You can customize a group to pull up the maximum of to 32 camera videos from different hosts directly 1 Click the Add Group button 2 Drag the desired cameras form Host List to the created group Tip By right clicking the created group and selecting Connect images from the selected cameras will appear on the ViewLog
76. MON W TUE W WED w THU W FRI SAT SUN e Any Time f Select Time Figure 11 52 Any Time The backup starts whenever there are files to be backed up O Daily The backup starts at the set time of a day Drag the mouse over the timeline to define the start and end time O Weekly The backup can start at any time or the specified time of a week To specify the time select the desired days Mon Sun select Select Time and then drag the mouse over the timeline to define the start and end time 976 1 Useful Utilities 11 8 4 Manually Adding Files for Backup Once connected the files from the GV System will automatically be backed up to the storage system To manually select the files for backup 1 Click the Backup Server icon on the system tray and then select Add Files This dialog box appears Add Files 0 1 Cig Data I 2 03 camo on 0105 Ce Eventz002010 D Eventz002010 D Eventz002010 Ce Eventz002010 D Eventz002010 Ce Event2002010 Ce Event2002010 D Eventz002010 D Eventz002010 Ce Event2002010 v gt OK Figure 11 53 2 Expand the hard disk drive folders and select the files for backup 3 Click OK to start 577 KR Useful Utilities 11 8 5 Viewing Server Status You can access the information of connection activities backup files and backup data To view the information click the Backup Server icon on the system tray and select Server Status The
77. MPEG4 amp 128 GeoVision_GY BL110D Scan Camera 192 168 3 203 10000 Camerat Connecting GeoVision_GY FE420 FE421 Import Camera IP Device Utility Automatic Setup K Figure 2 1 To automatically set up an IP camera click Scan Camera to detect any IP cameras on the same LAN To manually set up an IP camera click Add Camera To import IP cameras from the GV IP Device Utility click Import Camera To map IP devices through the GV IP Device Utility click IP Device Utility 8 e To add all IP cameras within an IP address range click Automatic Setup To see more details on importing and mapping cameras using GV IP Device Utility refer to Camera Mapping Using GV IP Device Utility later in this chapter For the other methods refer to the sections below 116 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 5 1 Adding Cameras Manually An example of manual setup is described below 1 Click Add Camera This dialog box appears Select Brand Server IP 192 168 0 222 HTTP Pot Ian User name jamin Password E ASS Brand GeoVision Please select the brand of IP camera Figure 2 2 2 Type the IP address username and password of the IP camera Modify the default HTTP port 80 if necessary 3 Selecta camera brand and model name from the Brand and Device drop down lists respectively This dialog box appears GeoVision _GV BL110D_5eries Query Dual Streams Query status Standby Camera list
78. Mobile Mulicast W Server to Client Max Channels ZU Iw Client to Server Max Channel s 5 Port 6550 Cancel Default Figure 8 9 Server to Client Allows a remote computer to access live audio from the server site of the GV System 3 8 D Remote Viewing Max Channel s Enter the number of remote computers allowed to access live audio with the upper limit of 40 PCs Client to Server Allows a remote computer to speak to the server site of the GV System Max Channel s Enter the number of remote computers allowed to speak to the server site with the upper limit of 20 computers Port The default audio port is 6550 3 9 8 2 6 JPG Settings These settings allow you to send JPEG or GIF files over Internet 2 Server Setup General Server Widen Audia JPG 3GPP mobile Multicast Create JPEGIGIF filets 2 FTP transfer JPEG file FTP Sawa JPEG ality Cancel Default Figure 8 10 D Remote Viewing Create JPEG GIF file s Allows you to view the JPEG GIF images remotely You can use the JPEG Image Viewer feature of the WebCam server to access the JPEG images over Internet Enabling this function also allows you to use GV mobile applications i Mode GV Remote View GV iView and GV AView to access the JPEG images on your mobile phone After the feature is enabled use the slider to adjust JPEG image quality The bigger the number sliding it
79. Note In the Password Setup window of Authentication Server the Fast Backup amp Restore tab is not available 046 KOR Useful Utilities 11 5 5 Importing Groups and Users from Active Directory To avoid creating user accounts manually you can import groups and users from Microsoft s Active Directory to Authentication Server You will need to install Active Directory on a Windows Server 2008 and set up users into groups the Active Directory before following the steps below Note 1 This feature only supports Windows Server 2008 2 User accounts in Active Directory need to be grouped into Groups settings first because only groups can be imported into Authentication Server 1 Click the Account Setup button No 3 Figure 11 24 and select AD Setup to access the active directory setup page This dialog box appears Configure source Database O Default Database Active Directory Active Directory Setup Server IP Address 192 166 3 97 Port 200 Connect with current login information Connect with administrator login information UserName administrator Password Test Connection Group Mapping Setup Auto Update Setup Assign Authority Level v Auto update Manual Update Setup Reload User Data Please restart Authentication Server for changes to take effect Figure 11 28 2 Under Source Database select Active Directory to enable the function 3 To connect to the server with Active Directory
80. O icon on the main screen and Enable advanced logical input in Multicam from a certain group see Figure 6 19 together To switch to the simple input trigger output setting just disable Enable advanced logical input in Multicam 334 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 10 Managing a Group of I O Devices With groups of l O devices set up on the l O Advanced Panel you can enable or disable these l O devices by groups Enabling a Group On the I O Advanced Panel right click a desired group and select Start Monitoring All input devices of this group are now enabled When inputs are triggered outputs will be activated in cascade mode Disabling a Group On the I O Advanced Panel right click a desired group and select Stop Monitoring All input devices of this group are now disabled No cascade triggers will occur Pausing the Triggered Inputs This feature is designed for a group of outputs set to be Toggle mode When inputs activate outputs in cascade triggers right click this group and select Pause Monitoring The inputs of the group will be reset but the outputs keep on alarming Note With the System Wide Output option see System Wide Triggers above activated you cannot use these three options to manage a group of I O devices 335 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 7 Visual Automation The Visual Automation helps you automate any electronic device by triggering the connected output You can intuitively click on the image of the e
81. Pol MONO Pam ell aia Ee 11 13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller ceccceseesecese essen ceeeeeneeeneeseeaneneeaes O Ee E 567 568 569 571 571 573 574 577 578 580 581 582 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 992 593 594 595 595 596 598 601 602 604 605 605 608 609 609 524 ak GC Le BE ee IEN telas Displaying TY Quad Panel soriana a MAA Digtal Mat EE fN SNE eg nie WU Et la Oe ne 114 2 Setting TEE lieber Seming Scanned EE Tila Seting Pop up Alai o td 11 145 Setting Live View with Pop up Alert 11 14 6 Controlling Screen Display occoococnccccococonocnonococonnnconononnnannnnnon A E T Aa 1115 GIS FOC OFGIING BEN E WE ne on EE 11 15 2 Recording GPS Locations of GV SySteM AE 11 15 38 Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device ou ce cee teneeeaeeeeeeee teense renee 11 15 4 Viewing GPS Locations during Playback 11 15 5 Sending GPS Data to the GV GIS cocccocccococcconcncnccconnncoconononanocc nro nann ono cn nana cnoan nro 11 16 GAP Device UIV EE EE 11 16 1 Installing GV IP Device Ulm 11 16 2 The GV IP Device Utility EE caia add METES Setting IP DEVICES ana a Mapping A E 11 17 MCamCtrl Utility for GV JOYStICK ccc teceee seen ee KEREN ERKENNEN EN 11124 Installing MCamGtri Utility EE MA2 otang Me Meam O E geen NS Se lee UE era 11 19 MultiLang Tool for Translated Text eeeeee KREE ENER ENEE ER EE ER EEN 11 20 Skype Video Utility ociosa cis 11 20 1
82. Refresh Rate 7 Sharpen Schedule Figure 3 51 2 Use the drop down list to select a camera and select Enable 3 When the image enhancement is enabled the system load will increase Adjust the Refresh rate by moving the slide bar to optimize system performance 4 lf you want to vew the demonstration of this function click the Demo button Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 189 a Video Analysis If dual stream IP channels are applied for better image quality it is recommended to change the streaming to single stream before you enable these video analysis effects This effect does not support On Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single channel division 190 EI Video Analysis 3 14 Video Stabilization Images from a shaky camera are jittery or blurry This feature helps to reduce camera shake leaving you with clear and steady images Note This function takes high CPU and memory usage Make sure at least 1 GB of RAM is installed on your system 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Advanced Video Analysis select Stabilizer Setting select up to 4 cameras to be configured and then click the Configure button This dialog box appears Video Stabilizer Setup Y Enable Camera 1 D Original Refresh Rate Schedule lt lt Lowj High gt
83. Remote Desktop 2 Show E Map Figure 1 15 General Auto Monitoring Select one of the following monitor control modes at system startup 47 Monitor All Allows you to monitor all cameras and l O if available at system startup lt is the same as to manually click Monitor button No 16 Figure 1 2 and select Start All Monitoring For details see Camera Monitoring later in this chapter Schedule Monitor Allows you to monitor cameras by schedule Alternatively you may click Schedule button No 15 Figure 1 2 and select Schedule Start Refer to Recording Schedule later inthis chapter I O Monitor Allows you to monitor all I O devices Alternatively you may click the Monitor button No 16 Figure 1 2 and then select 1 O Monitoring Camera Monitor Enables all cameras for monitoring Note To set different recording modes and alert methods for each camera see Monitor Control in Adjusting Individual Camera later in this chapter ER Configuring Main System O LimitPort Limits the number of video ports to be used This option helps increase the frame rate of each channel by shifting the frame rate of disabled video ports to enabled ones This function will take effect at next system startup O Startup Auto Login Select and press the Arrow button to assign an ID used at system auto startup After the setup the system will automatically login using this ID at next startup with
84. Setup Video Resolution Add Camera EES 1681165 Display position GeoWvis ion GY BL1 10D_ seri 1192 168 1 231 Delete camera Fonnect TNT Smart Box Scan Camera Change setting Change Resolution Import Camera Remote camera setting Duplicate Camera IP Device Utility Network Time Out On Demand Display We des ls ee A y 640 X 480 use higher resolution streaming Disable 720 X 480 use higher resolution streaming 800 X 600 use higher resolution streaming 1024 x 768 use higher resolution streaming 1280 x 1024 use higher resolution streaming 1600 x 1200 use higher resolution streaming 1920 X 1080 use higher resolution streaming Change live view codec Change record codec Frames to keep in live view buffer Record stream type GIS Setting Automatically adjust DST v YV Y Y vv va Y Figure 2 16 4 Point to Enable When View Size Bigger Than and select a resolution When the resolution of the camera image on the screen is bigger than or equal to the selected resolution the system will switch to the higher resolution streaming 132 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution Note 1 The On Demand Display function is not supported for Privacy Mask Defog and Stabilizer 2 The On Demand Display function is not supported for GV Fisheye Camera 3 Ifthe same resolution has been set for both video streams the On Demand Display option will still be visible but automatic resolution adjustment will not occur Application Example
85. Single View page Figure 8 20 click Remote Play Back and select Remote Play Back This window appears 10 27 2004 13 42 39 751 Figure 8 51 2 Select the desired camera date and time segment file 3 Click the Play button to start 4 For further playback features click on the image to have the options of Play Mode Render and Tools 435 D Remote Viewing 8 10 Remote ViewLog Through WebCam Server you can remotely play back the recorded files by using the video player ViewLog To allow remote access to GV System ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server function Figure 8 5 is activated on GV System 1 On the left panel of the Single View page Figure 8 20 click Remote Play Back and select ViewLog This dialog box appears Connect to Remote Viewlog Service Port 5557 Default ID 123 Password ES Save Password Host Type DVR Add current entry to Address book under this group New Group Address book Cancel Figure 8 52 2 Type the IP Address ID and Password of the GV System Select DVR to be the host type Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary 3 Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen Then you can access all ViewLog features for playback 436 D Remote Viewing 8 11 Event List Query With the Event List Query function on the WebCam server you
86. This dialog box appears Schedule of Compacting Files Camera be Camera Camera 1 Camera 2 Tue ed Thu Fri Sat Sun Camera 3 Enable schedule of compacting video files Schedule Time Camera 4 Camera 5 setting Camera 6 Reserved Days Days Reserved Frames MJPEG 1 Frameis i1 Sec id g Camera 6 Camera 9 Temp Folder GW emp T Camera 10 Camera 7 Include Never Recycle events Camera 11 Camera 12 Warring Camera 13 Source files will be replaced by the compacted files Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Zi Camera 14 Figure 1 53 3 Select the desired camera individually or select Camera to check all the cameras from the camera list 4 Select Enable schedule of compacting video files 5 In the Schedule Time section specify the day and time to compact the video files 6 In the Setting section specify the options below Reserved Days The number of days that the original video files are reserved For example if you choose to reserve the vdeo files for 2 days the system will keep the original video files for the lasttwo days recorded today and yesterday and compact all the files earlier The minimum value is to reserve 1 day Reserved Frames MJPEG Since every frame is a key frame for MJPEG codec you should specify the number of frames per second you desire to reserve for the video files compressed with MJPEG The default value is 1 frame per seco
87. Upload Info dialog box appears Event Log This tab shows the history of connection activities Note that the latest event is always placed on the top Server Status Disk Space Total Space 29 31 GB Used Space 9 36 GB Free Space 19 95 GB Event Log Backup File List Backup Database List Index Time Message 11 40 08 Login OK Figure 11 54 9 8 Useful Utilities Backup File List This tab displays the files being backed up Click File View to display the backup files by file names or click Camera View to display the backup files by cameras ZZ Server Status Disk Space Total Space 29 31 GB Used Space 9 37 GB Free Space 19 94 GB EventLog Backup File List Backup Database List gt X File view Camera View Event201008181 3343100 Event2010081813343100 Figure 11 55 Tip To view the information of the backup file click the file event Database List The related log data including system log and POS data will be backed up to storage system with the recording files Note that the record only appears on the next day of file transference ZZ Server Status Disk Space Total Space 29 31 GB Used Space 9 36 GB Free Space 19 95 GB Figure 11 56 9 9 1 Useful Utilities 11 8 6 Retrieving Recorded Files You can retrieve the files from the storage system and play video back 1 On the ViewLog screen click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4
88. Webcam Login l gt CI Guest Login C Remember My ID and Password Simple Version Common Version Change Password Forget Password Figure 8 2 3 Type a user ID and a password created on the GV System 4 Click Login When the connection is established this Single View page appears G Webcamserver cdeTccc5 30c8 8b86 a5e2 02edb6be4530 Windows Internet Explorer E e e http 127 0 0 1 Webcam htm IDKey cde7ccc5 30c8 4b86 a5 ei E Favorites 363 E Suggested Sites y BI Web Slice Gallery v Webcamserver cde7ccc5 30c8 4b86 a5e2 02ed ar O deh v Pager Safetyy Tock fr gt Live View Live View gt 1 Window B 4 Window EI 2 Windows Bl Multi Windows Multicast JPEG Image Viewer gt Remote Play Back D Event List Query E Remote Play Back gt DMMultiView gt Remote ViewLog Remote eMap Download Internet Protected Mode Off Figure 8 3 Live View on IE Browser 371 D Remote Viewing 6990 d099 2044 4282 bTe3 gt e gt CG IN 192168 0 214 Webcam_ext htm7IDKey 68924099 2444 4237 L A RARA OA e 4232 b703 294048560 332 V ies Typez2 Live View gt Mpeg4 Encoder Viewer Mpeg4 Encoder Viewer Camera List Camera 2 Motion JPEG JPEG Image Viewer Camera adjustment gt Remote Play Back D Event List Query Brightness B Remote Play Back Contrast Saturation Please instal QuickTime player Figure 8 4 Live View on Non
89. Windows Firewall x General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall iz turned off Your computer is at gek of attacks and intrusione from outside sources such as the Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services O File and Printer Sharing Remote Assistance Pal PnP Frame Add Program Add Fort Edit Delete W Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program Wel are the risks of allowing exceptions Cancel Figure 8 16 4 Select UPnP Framework and click OK 389 D Remote Viewing Enabling UPnP on the WebCam Server 1 On the main screen click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 select WebCam Server and click the Server tab The Server Setup dialog box Figure 8 6 appears 2 Click Detect UPnP This dialog box appears Port Mapping UPnP based Router 1 Linksys BEFSR41 3 i Configure Exit _ WebCam Server Http Port TA 168 0 100 cal WebCam Serwer Command Port 192 166 0 100 _ WebCam Server Data Port 192 168 0 100 _ WebCam Server Audio Port 192 166 0 100 _ WebCam Serer SSL Pon 192168 0 100 _ WebCam Serwer Mobile Port 192 168 0 100 a WebCam Server Mobile RPB Port 192 166 0 100 14 36 31 Find UPnP Devicet i Linksys BEFSR41 v3 1P 221 169 248 174 1436 22 Searching for UPnP enabled routers Figure 8 17 3 Click Searching to search the UPnP enabled routers 4 If your server is installed with mu
90. You can adjust the Minimum Face Size and the Maximum Face Size to instruct the system to only detect faces within that size range You must pause the live image by clicking the cy button before you can adjust the size Setting Alarm Type Face Count Counts the number of faces The counting results are only available on the GV Web Report To connect to the GV Web Report refer to the Enable Web Report option below Mask Filter Detects faces and invokes a computer alarm or triggers an output device O Mask Filter Inverse Alarm Invokes a computer alarm or triggers an output device when the system is unable to detect a face after the number of seconds specified in the Detection Interval 170 a Video Analysis Reset at Type a counting reset time between 0 and 23 For example if you type 23 the number of faces counted will become zero at 23 o clock daily Sensitivity Adjust the detection sensitivity by moving the slider The higher the value the more sensitive the system to motion The default value is 3 Detection Interval When Mask Filter and Input I O Trigger are both selected the Detection Interval slider specifies the number of seconds you want the system to detect faces when the input device is triggered For example the input device is a card reader and a door lock has been set up as the output device After you swipe the card triggering the reader the system starts to detect the face for the interv
91. activated Camera Scan When rotating through screen divisions GV System will switch to the next screen division after the time specified in the drop down list elapses ER Configuring Main System Exit Option Auto Shutdown Windows Closes Windows OS after exiting GV System Auto Restart Windows Restarts Windows OS after exiting GV System Display Enable DirectDraw Scale Applies DirectDraw Scale to enhance image quality if your VGA card Supports it For certain VGA cards DirectDraw Scale can result in blurred images To avoid the image problem and remain DirectDraw Scale change the image quality from High to Standard See mage Quality of DirectDraw Scale in System Tools later in this chapter Enable De interlace Render Avoids interlace of the odd and even video lines This feature affects only single vew mode with the resolution of 640 x 480 and 704 x 480 After enabling the feature you must restart the GV System to apply it Note The Enable Directdraw Scale and De interlace Render features can greatly enhance image quality If your VGA card supports DirectX9 enable both settings Tip To check the version of your DirectX search for the file name dxdiag Open the file and find the related information Video Record Max Video Clip Specifies the maximum time length of each recorded file from 1 to 5 minutes If you select 5 Min a 30 minute event will be chopped into six 5 minute event files if you se
92. alarm l Skip instant light change Test O M Invoke Alarm Schedule M Output Module l Never Recycle cancel Figure 3 57 3 Selecta camera from the Camera Selection drop down list and configure these settings Mask Region If necessary mask off the area on the camera view where motion will be ignored Sensitivity Adjusts detection sensitivity The higher the value the more sensitive the system is for changes inthe camera view 200 EI Video Analysis Tolerance Time of Alarm Sets the duration of scene change before an alarm condition is activated Automatically Disable Alarm Stops all types of triggered alerts including sound alarm flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration Disabling the alerts will not disable alert settings and the detection in progress Skip Instant Light Change Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms For example light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly With the option selected the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm and continue monitoring See the Note in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter for possible risk Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when the scene change is detected Click the button next to the option to assign a wav sound file Output Module Activates the output device when the scene change i
93. and Recycle are enabled the system applies whichever condition comes first For example if the specified smallest amount of storage space comes earlier than the designated keep days then recycle is applied first 574 1 Useful Utilities Server Settings You can select the files of cameras to be backed up and the notification method when the network is disconnected Advanced General Server Settings Schedule Gamers Salotin Disconnection Alerts Trigger Output C Enable All A OEE Module Pin e Manual Select l E Camera Selection E Mail Address SMS Setup E Mail Setup M Send SMS Message Account Settings setup TestAccount Figure 11 51 Camera Selection Selects the files of desired cameras to be backed up Disconnection Alerts Selects the alert methods when the network is disconnected L Trigger output Triggers the specified output module and pin for alerts L Send E mail An e mail message is sent out for alerts Before using this function click the Setup button in the E Mail Setup field to set up an e mail account L Send SMS Message A SMS message is sent out for alerts Before using this function click the Accounts Settings button in the SMS Setup field to set up a SMS account 0 5 1 Useful Utilities Schedule You can plan the time to back up the files to the storage system Advanced General Server Settings Schedule C Any Time t Daily e weekly We
94. as cloud and tree movement Ignore video noise when the lighting condition is poor or changed Set a minimum and maximum object size to only detect objects within the size range 8 e e Ignore envronmental changes such as rain snow and tree movement Note You can only enable either motion detection by sensitivity or by object size at a time 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Advanced Motion Detection Setting The Advanced Motion Detection Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the camera to be configured and click the Configure button This dialog box appears Advanced Motion Detection Setup wv Enable Camera 1 User defined C Den Min Object Size e Setregion Sensitivity 4 C Mask region Y Noise Tolerance XK 24 4 Minimum duration E ka Level 1 Ignore environmental changes Default Figure 3 55 Advanced Motion Detection Setup 3 Select the desired camera from the drop down list 195 EI Video Analysis To limit motion detection to objects within a size range select User defined and select Define Object Select Min Object Size or Max Object Size from the drop down list and then drag an area on the image To set detection sensitivity in a specific area clear the selection for User defined and click Set region Select a sensitivity level by moving the slider and then drag an area on the image This setup has sensitivity
95. atthe maximum frame rate possible Live view Key Frame only You can choose to view the key frames ofthe videos only instead of all frames on the live view This option is related to the GOP setting of the IP camera For example if the GOP value is set to 30 there is only one key frame among 30 frames Live view frame rate control Main stream Sets the live vew frame rate of the main stream with higher resolution when On Demand function is enabled Refer to Live view frame rate control above to see the options available Image Orientation You can adjust the image orientation by selecting Normal Horizontal Mirror Vertical Flip or Rotate 180 Note 1 Some options are not available for GV Fisheye Cameras 2 When CPU loading is high selecting Live View Key Frame Only can reduce CPU loading by jumping from key frame to key frame and dropping the non key frames in between When CPU performance is poor or live view display is slow select Frames to keep in live view buffer to reduce the number of frames kept in buffer and achieve a real time appearance by dropping frames These settings do not affect the frame rate of the recorded videos 122 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 6 PTZ IP Camera To set up the IP camera with PTZ functions follow these steps 1 To add the PTZ IP camera to the system follow the steps in Adding IP Video Sources above 2 To open the PTZ control panel and perform the PTZ functions
96. be transferred to the FTP server 5 In the Send File Delay field specify the frequency to upload recorded images from the GV System to the FTP server The time range is from 0 1 to 600 seconds 6 Inthe Connection Retries field specify the number of retries when the FTP connection fails Max 999 In the Retry Delay field specify the interval between each connection retry Max 9999 SeC 7 Click OK to apply above settings 387 D Remote Viewing 8 2 12 Network Port Information The Network Port Information is designed for users to vew and manage all network ports of remote applications On the main screen click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Network Port Information This dialog box appears Http Port 80 Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Y Audio Port 6550 m SSL Port 443 s Mobile Port 8966 Mobile RPE Port 5511 3G RTSP TCP Port 8554 36 BTDIRTCDILDD Port 17300 17380 gl Centerv2 mi Control Center Server gl Remote Playback Server ad TCP Server md Multicast Server md Twin Server md UPnP mi Wiegand Capture Server Figure 8 19 The controls on the Port Settings No Name Description 1 Modify Changes the port settings 2 Save Saves the port settings Employs UPnP technology Universal Plug and Play to allow automatic 3 Port Mapping port configuration to the router 388 D Remote Viewing 8 3 Single View Viewer After you l
97. blur human faces when the user watch recorded events in ViewLog Click OK 250 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 11 Displaying GPS Data H the recorded video includes GPS data you can enable GPS data display to see the coordinates and the average speed of the vehicle on the playback video 1 Click the Setting button No 5 Figure 4 1 click the Display tab and select Display GPS positions F System Configuration Play Setting Display Database Cache Quad view Thumbnail Views User Interface Aspect ratio 4 3 e Camera mee Setting Iw Apply deinterlace render e Apply scaling render IS Apply deblocking render t single view only J Iw Apply text overlay s camera name time alarm render Iw Apply text overlay s POS GY VMiegand render Iw Apply camera name render Iw Display GPS positions Use image instead of blue screen Replace blue screen during playback or merging video clips 015 500 Main System CommRestlamloga jpg 7 Figure 4 24 2 The coordinates and the average speed of the vehicle will be displayed in the top left corner on the playback video Camera 1 3PS 25 096 121 547110 E 1 113402 KmiH Figure 4 25 251 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 12 Adjusting Distorted Views When viewing videos through the ViewLog player images may be curved near the corners Use the Wide Angle Lens Dewarping feature to correct image distortion 1 Click the Effect button select
98. bmp i a 2EB Bitmap Image S addrbook_compactdwri6 bmp i ee ee 1 KR Bitmap Image S addrbook_compactdwr22 bmp i gt addrbook_compactdwr22 bmp 2 KR Bitmap Image S addrbook_defaulthost bmp i S addrbook_ defaulthost bmp 2 KR Bitmap Image S addrbook_dvri bmp i DA 24 bmp ZKE Bitmap Image Figure 8 47 428 D Remote Viewing 8 7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast Multicast sends a single video and audio stream to multiple hosts using the same multicast IP address and within the same LAN Multicast can greatly increase the bandwidth efficiency when multiple hosts access the same video and audio stream As for audio broadcast it allows a host to speak to other hosts using the same broadcast IP address and within the same LAN Note To perform multicast within a LAN with different IP sequence numbers e g 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 2 1 you need a router supporting Multicast Pass Through function 8 7 1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings On GV System you can configure two settings One is to allow remote access to multicast delivered from the GV System the other is to receive audio broadcast from other host Activating Multicast 1 Click the Network button select WebCam Server and click the Multicast tab The Server Setup dialog box Figure 8 13 appears 2 Select Multicast to enable the multicast settings 3 By default the IP address is 224 1 1 2 and port number is 8300 to send the video and audio stream
99. change Hide reference image setup dialog MT Invoke Alarm M Output Module Schedule eg Schedule M Never Recycle Figure 3 58 3 Selecta camera from the Camera Selection drop down list 4 lf necessary use the Mask Region function to mask off the area on the camera view where motion will be ignored 5 Select Unattended Object Size and click the Camera icon to pause live images 203 10 11 12 13 14 a Video Analysis Outline Min Object Size on the camera view and select Max Object Size from the drop down list and outline iton the camera view Select Sensitivity The higher the value the more sensitive the system is for changes in the camera view Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows any unattended object to stay before an alarm condition is activated Every time when the system detects changes in the background image you will be prompted for alert If you want to close the prompt select Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog In the Options section configure these settings Automatically Disable Alarm Stops all types of triggered alerts including computer alarm flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration Disabling the alerts will not disable alert settings and the detection in progress Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in the recorded files so that you can easily spot Suspicious
100. change the video player from ViewLog to Quick Search z v EE o 9 loza benejerry ice crea 3 00T Figure 4 45 Quick Search 271 D Playing Back Video Files The controls on the Quick Search window No Name Description a Displays video associated to the event Right click on the window to have 1 Monitoring Window the options of Play Mode Render and Tools 2 Camera Select Use the drop down list to select camera 3 Day Select Use the drop down list to select date 4 Time Select Use the drop down listto select time 5 Go Button Click to search files that match to the parameters set above Click to specify event query See Event Query Settings later in this 6 Event Query Pan SS y 9 chapter 7 Transaction Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next transaction event 8 Void Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next void event 9 Transaction Window Displays POS transaction 10 320 lt gt 640 Click to switch between 640 x 480 and 320 x 240 display Expand Select Expand Shrink Dialog to display the Transaction window or 11 Shrink Dialog select Advanced Search to display the Advanced Search panel See Advanced Search Settings later in this chapter 12 View by ViewLog Click to open ViewLog player 13 Time Period Use these buttons to search event within the specified time Includes Play Pause Previous 10 frames Home Next 10 frames End 14 Playback Panel buttons 15 Exit Click to close Quick Search scree
101. changes The system will accept the scene change from this point on and no longer generate any alert for it Reset Alert Disables and resets the triggered alert After the alert is reset if the scene change remains over the specified tolerance time the system will still detect itas a scene change and keep generating alert 202 EI Video Analysis 3 19 Advanced Unattended Object Detection Compared to Unattended Object Detection that can only be applied in the indoors the advanced version of Unattended Object Detection can be applied in the outdoors The Advanced Unattended Object Detection can generate an alert when any unattended object stays within the camera view Note 1 Upto 16 cameras can be configured for this application 2 Itis highly recommended not to use Advanced Unattended Object Detection and Unattended Object Detection together 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 click Advanced Video Analysis and select Advanced Unattended Object Detection Setting 2 Select the desired camera s to be configured and click Configure This dialog box appears Advanced Unattended Object Detection Iw Camera Camera Selection Camera 1 D Definition Mask Region EH IS C Unattended Object Size Setting Sensitivity 3 d Option Tolerance Time of Alarm sec F Automatically disable alarm sec 30 M Embed alarm region into recorded video Construction Option I Skip instant light
102. command Tracking After the idle time the PTZ camera will start tracking if it is also being applied for the tracking function View 1 2 3 4 After the idle time the PTZ camera will go back to the preset View 1 2 3 or 4 Refresh View After the idle time the 4 views will be refreshed Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function For details see Video Analysis Schedule later inthis chapter Click Test to check your settings Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views The area will be magnified in the left view Click OK to apply the displayed selections and close the dialog box 144 a Video Analysis Starting Object Zooming After the above settings you can start the object zooming application 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and click Object Tracking View to open the Zoom in Dialog window overlapping on the main screen Figure 3 8 2 Inthe Zoom In Type field select Quad View 3 In the Camera field select the assigned PTZ camera Then the four views you set up before shows in the Zoom in Dialog window Zoom In Dialog Selection Zoom In Type Camera Quad View Camera 2 D e Figure 3 12 4 Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views The area will be magnified on the main screen 5 When you click the Go to Idle Mode button in the lower part
103. connected I O modules Advanced l O List Groups l O devices in cascade mode 323 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 2 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers You can group I O devices by function or geography Further the group allows cascade triggers meaning that the trigger actions of one trigger can activate another trigger For example you might have a group called Entrance that contains all O devices installed at entrances The Entrance group might contain other sub groups each of which contains just the related UO devices in various geographic locations Group containing all I O devices installed at entrances Ce Input Input 2 installed atthe front etrance 2 8 Output 1 Output 1 sub group atthe kitchen 8 Output 2 Output 3 sub group atthe garage Figure 6 18 When Input 2 is triggered it will trigger the sub groups of Output 1 and Output 3 and Output 1 will trigger Output 2 in a cascade series Creating a Group 1 Right click on Advanced I O List and then select Add A Group This dialog box appears i l Group Mame En Host 1 Cancel Group Motity Setting k Invoke Alarm Buzzer Sy le Enable advanced logical Input In Multicar Figure 6 19 Group Name Names the group Invoke Alarm Invokes the computer alarm on I O trigger Select a sound from the drop down list Enable advanced logical inputin Multicam See The Advanced Logical Input Status in Multi
104. control buttons appear on the toolbar ES Welcome Gen 7 4x02 35 GN Camera Ema ER SER Figure 8 60 Button Description I Click it to view the log of input triggers O Click it to display and force the connected output devices 446 D Remote Viewing Viewing Input Triggered Events All input triggers are logged on the Alarm list Click the I button see Figure 8 60 to view the list of trigger events Da ve Ee e Welcome Gview A d 20 E Figure 8 61 Forcing Outputs To force any connected output devices click the O button see Figure 8 60 and click the desired number The numbers on the toolbar indicate the connected output devices Eg welcome Gview 7 x 02 35 ok Camera ENTER Se Figure 8 62 447 D Remote Viewing Controlling PTZ Cameras To control the PTZ camera use the drop down listto select the desired camera and click the button Clon the live vew screen see Figure 8 58 P Ye A ok Figure 8 63 Button Description Click it to return to the previous page ts Use these buttons to move the PTZ camera to the left up down and right Click it to return to home 448 D Remote Viewing Viewing Camera Status To view the camera status click the button on the live view screen see Figure 8 58 ES Welcome Gvie Y e 11 17 ak Camera Status 01 Normal 03 Normal 05 Normal 07 Normal 09 Inactive 02 Mormal 04 Normal 06 Normal 08 Norma
105. desired schedule in the Schedule List window and then click the Modify Schedule button to make changes To delete a schedule highlight the desired schedule in the Schedule List window and the press the Delete key on the keyboard ER Configuring Main System 1 8 2 Special Days Schedule 1 Click the Special Day Schedule tab All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section Use the drop down listand select a date from the pop up calendar Click Apply to add the date to the schedule Figure 1 49 ER Configuring Main System 18 3 I O Schedule Set up a schedule to activate the monitoring of l O devices automatically All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section After setting up time and dates select the I O Monitor option to activate the schedule Stan bh UO Monitor Figure 1 50 ER Configuring Main System 18 4 Center V2 Schedule Set up a schedule to connect to Center V2 services automatically All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section After setting up scheduled time and dates select the Center V2 option to activate the schedule For details on Center V2 see Chapter 1 in GV CMS Series Users Manual Start e Centervz Figure 1 51 Note If you select the Center V2 option without setting up the Center V2 schedule and later enable the Center V2 server the connection to Center V2 will be
106. device select IO Module again and repeat step 2 PTZ Control 1 To access the PTZ functions select a camera from the Camera List and select PTZ control The PTZ control panel appears This channel support PTZ control Figure 8 78 461 D Remote Viewing 2 You can tap the direction buttons ESMARJILA and the zoom buttons JE to control the camera Tap the home button J to return to home position You can also adjust the focus of the camera using the focus buttons Ka or tap the autofocus button Kai Note The PTZ control function is only supported in GV Remote View V1 2 1 462 D Remote Viewing 8 13 5 3G Mobile Phone Without installing any GV applications you can directly access live video or recordings from a 3G enabled mobile phone Activating the 3G Mobile Phone Function To allow remote access to GV System you must enable the 3GPP function on the WebCam Server For details see 3GPP Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Connecting to GV System 1 On the mobile phone open the Internet browser and enter the IP address of the GV System to establish the connection 2 On the Login page enter a username and a password select 3G and click Submit sc Internet Explorer og il d X ef http mtrp0216 dipmap com 8 ele Figure 8 79 3 Select Live If you want to change the video settings use the drop down lists to configure video size quality and audio codec Then sc
107. device placed within the map is triggered the blue area will flash in blue and red 492 D E Map Application 9 2 3 Setting View Zone to Show the Monitored Area The View Zone function allows you to draw an area to represent the area monitored by each device GN Hallway Figure 9 7 View Zone To Set Up a View Zone 1 In E Map select a device icon 2 Right click the device icon and select Edit View Zone 3 Move the mouse to adjust the length and direction of the view zone Hallway Figure 9 8 4 Scroll the mouse to adjust the width of the view zone Right click the map and select Finish to finalize the zone 493 al E Map Application 9 3 Starting E Map After creating an E Map file go to the Main System Click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and then select E Map to display the following E Map Viewer window Double click any E Map file of the local host to open it Note If you have created the E Map files for remote hosts these files will also be displayed in the E Map Viewer window but won t function here They only work on WebCam that is discussed later A Deal Camerad Ds d de t 1 x y N 7 y K A X Ter X f d K Camera 2 Output 1 gt EN Ei Si CH O CH Camera 1 gt a w y E D L 4 gt wei Ze EI Camera3 4 Sep Output 3 1 or cr K 1 go E T EN le a p paa JE M Input 2 g Output 2 N m Se Ee Ba
108. each camera is indicated respectively e g Camera 1 1 0 means Camera 1 has 1 video file and 0 audio file Video Audio drop down list Select the types of video events for backup 294 L Backup Deletion and Repair Information Database Files Click to back up the files from System Log Object Index Click to back up the Object Index files Only Never Recycle Event Click to only back up the never recycle events Unmark these events to be recycled after the backup is complete After the backup is complete the never recycle events will be unmarked for recycling Please note if the first file in the database has been marked and then unmarked in this condition the first file will be deleted automatically Include daylight saving rollback events Click to back up events recorded during Daylight Saving Time Bookmarked Files Click to back up the bookmarked frames in JPEG format The Status and Search End section Indicates the number of backup files and their total size Total MDB refers to the System Log files Click OK to add the schedule You can repeat step 3 to create up to 10 periods of time To include the player to the backup files select Include Player at the right bottom of the Backup dialog box and select ViewLog or Single Player By default ViewLog is selected If no player is selected you can only play the backup files at the computer installed with GV System or Geo Mpeg4 codec Cl
109. end of the IP address 477 D Remote Viewing Tap the created link in the address book NVR DVR View Demo Site webcam geoviston com tw 8866 Figure 8 100 Tap the Connection button Ks to access the GV System GVAView H NVR DVR View TTPS Demo Sitel webcam geovisic 8866 test Password MZ Figure 8 101 478 D Remote Viewing Accessing Live View 1 Press the menu button on the mobile phone to see the following options Figure 8 102 l O Trigger uly Forces I O devices to be triggered Record Event Ka Starts or stops recording the current channel or all channels Image setting KA Changes the image quality between Normal and Good 2 Double tap the live view to see it in single view You can tap the Snapshot button to capture the current image 3 If the camera supports PTZ functions tap the PTZ button ka and use the touch screen to control the camera The following control buttons are also available BSZ Moves the camera toward different directions al cl Zooms in and out eo Adjusts the focus Moves the camera back to Home position D Auto focus 6 8 e e EJ Moves the camera to a preset point by typing the preset number 479 D Remote Viewing Playing Back Recordings on GV System 1 Onthe main page tap the RPB View tab 2 To add the connection information of a GV System tap the menu button and tap the Add button Or RPB View NVR DVR
110. feature click the PTZ Control button No 5 Figure 8 20 and select Visual PTZ For details on using the Visual PTZ Control Panel see PTZ Automation in Chapter 1 421 D Remote Viewing 8 6 11 Output Control 1 Click the I O Control button No 6 Figure 8 35 Turn the switch to ON position Select a module from the drop down list Each module provides 4 to 16 connected relay output devices 4 Click the Output x button to enable the output device 127001 xi switch 7 E Timer Figure 8 42 I O Control Panel 422 D Remote Viewing 8 6 12 Remote ViewLog More than simply playing back recorded video audio files the Remote ViewLog function allows you to have full access to the ViewLog features of the connected GV System Note To use the Remote ViewLog for the first time you need to install the Remote ViewLog components to the local PC Install the components from the Software DVD or from the Download page see Download Center later in this chapter 1 On the Multi View window click the ViewLog button No 8 Figure 8 35 The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears 2 Type the IP Address ID and Password of the remote GV System Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary 3 In the Host Type field select DVR 4 Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen Then you can
111. files can be split By cb SMTP Mail Server requires authentication Account Password SEH Figure 11 73 2 In the Attach File Select field use the Export file type drop down list to select Html or MDB as a file format If you want to create a self executable file of the report select Create a self executable file 3 Select Attach File Limit and decide the size limit of the attached file Set the limit between 1 MB and 10 MB 4 Select one of these options to set the attachment condition The attached files exceeding the size limit will not be sent When the attached report file exceeds the size limit the e mail will not be sent The attached files are automatically split and sent out in multiple e mails If the attached file exceeds the size limit it will be automatically split and sent out in multiple e mails Note this option cannot apply to the report files in mdb format For details on setting Mail Server see Setting Email Server in Chapter 1 601 KR Useful Utilities 11 115 Playing Back Video Recordings In a HTML format report the video recordings can be played back with the Remote ViewLog function Ensure the Remote ViewLog Service is enabled on the GV System that owns those recordings 1 Open a report and click the desired video icon Monitor Table 1 Total 1 pages 2007 12 19 02 02 26 otion Video icon 2007 12 19 02 02 36 amera otion 2007 12 19 02 02 42 Figure 11 74
112. frequency conditions click the Advanced button For details see Setting Alarm Frequency earlier in this chapter Alarm Output Check this item and use the drop down lists to select the connected module and output device Alert Message Type the message for the E mail or SMS alerts to be sent out when the alarm is triggered 4 Click OK to save the above settings 365 Point of Sale POS Application 5 When the defined text is identified in the transaction data the identification appears not only on the main screen but also on the POS Live View window lt is also recorded in the System Log mara A A aE BOBO rar amp LO STS le ISu age iicruueerema piai a 003 ck Maur dier Stay mb Kit Wm H 11d cid H SE JL RS mett SEI SL A E 005 l EA IT r camai ET fiJo cms Er UE SHEI y ME 7osT gn K 007 o min CISTI se se A ir Eu y yar EE Wantar Syriam Login Zeegnl 206 1 Draco puro inn hite Or M WEM CF y ENT Teo Cortee ONRET 2 EN Wer 12 IVA 1 j3 Cer 32 PO trayra nto 1 BOT WES y H 37 VITAE AS St 17 theese 1997 D v z A 33 IVT SHED Mineros Ge Ma 1111 A cola S sR 5 EE FO AFT MAA mwge NM 33 fly 3353 tree VIE 10 tn 33 197700935453 131 veas oia 37 A LE 2000 3 A e f Hi tiin TISE t0 1305 miaro 13 dee INA 193 127 Coge 100 13 yu Y thd Getta ISk d PS 1s MUA s nao PO eme 33 Loi E 7i d Im mm mn Ze 161 Th Step Ai J
113. hours one day one week or one month Return to the configured frequency conditions After the alarm is triggered by the set frequency conditions the system starts counting frequency again from zero H this option was disabled and the frequency conditions have been met the alarm will be triggered by every event Idle time To avoid constantly triggered alarms you can set the time interval between each event occurrence 358 Point of Sale POS Application In System Log the events that match the alarm frequency settings are marked with Alarm R Live Log Browser Recycle Log 11 28 2007 23 04 JE Monitor System Login Counter pos 1 POS2 Pos 3 Pos4 Pos5 Pos6lros7 rPos8 Pos9 Pos10 Alt Time 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 11 29 2007 Iam d EN IN PA O ASS PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA PA Content oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T oreo cookie 1000T coke coke coke coke coke coke coke coke coke coke coke 6pack 51000T 6pack
114. identify your monitors Drag and drop the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors Click OK Start the GV System click Configure click Accessories select Digital Matrix Setting select monitors from the Display list and select Activate for each monitor For example if you install 7 additional monitors you need to activate Display 1 to Display 7 one by one Click Apply Your additional monitors should now display the channels seen on the primary monitor See the figure below for example Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Figure 11 88 615 KOR Useful Utilities 11 142 Setting Live View You can set different live vews and screen divisions for each monitor 1 On the main screen click Configure click Accessories and select Digital Matrix Setting This dialog box appears Digital Matrix Setup F Activat Display1 Bl Description 1024 by 768 pixels This is the Main Monitor op Event Popup d Ki cam2 Z Cam Z cama Ei cams Z Camp Ei cam Z cama Ei Cam Ki cam10 Ei Cam E cam12 2 cami3 g cami A a ramis Drag and Drop Camera No to the Screen e Live Mode Auto Scan Screen Division 14 Divisions C Event Popup Mode fir F e G adam Di Ok Cancel Apply Figure 11 89 2 Use the Display listto select the monitor to be configured 3 Select Screen Division 4 Drag and drop the camera numbers to the desired positions on the divisions To clear the assig
115. ila dined eed le Recording GPS Locations of GV SySteM uu cece eeee eee eeeeee es Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device enters Viewing GPS Locations during Playback Sending GPS Data te Bu ENEE 11 10 GV P DEVICE UU EE Installing GV IP Device Utility oooocoociococcconoccnononononnnnnoos 11 16 2 The GV IP Device Utility Window oococconncnonomononos o FEIOS EREM inicia 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 595 596 598 601 602 604 605 605 608 609 609 612 613 614 614 616 617 618 620 621 622 622 624 625 626 628 631 631 632 633 Ti 20 Skype Video KT TK EE 11 20 1 Installing GV Skype Video Ulm 11 20 2 Setting Up Notifications Upon Motion or I O Trigger 642 643 644 APPDENdIK E OO rc O D Im Dn WwW gt USB Dongle Required for IP Device Applications EEN ENEE EE EE Supported PTZ Protocols and ModelS ococcccocccononocococococonannononaranarenananonan os Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking ua ENKER E ENER EE EN Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan and Tilt Control Supported IP Device Ternes EE e ada Supported GPRS Models tege Eege Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View Sek ERR ENER EEN EEN Eu Display Ratio Supported by Panel besoluton e aNEEN EEN EENEEEREER RENE Dual Steam RE tele lu S E 652 653 656 656 657 658 659 660 661 Chapter 1 Configuring Main Gvsiem TE Genting Stared
116. name will be deleted automatically 930 Setting up E mail Notification 1 Useful Utilities You can set up E mail settings to receive e mail notification In the DNS Client dialog box Figure 11 3 click E mail Setting The E mail Setting dialog box appears EMail Setting EMail when IP changed Sender Name From Username Password Receiver DDNSClient Mail Server Host Name Address Port EX Figure 11 4 Scheme Select to receive e mail notification when failed to update IP to DNS or when IP has changed Sender Type a name to identify the sender and then type the sender s e mail address Type the username and password of mail server Receiver Type the recipients e mail addresses For multiple recipients add a semicolon between each e mail address Mail Server Type the host name or address of your mail server You can keep the default port 25 or type your own if the mail server uses a different port Select SSL if your e mail server requires the SSL authentication for connection Click the Test button to send a test e mail and see whether the setup is correct 531 1 Useful Utilities 11 1 4 Local DDNS Server The Local DDNS Server can map a device name to the POS device and the AS200E Controller with a dynamic IP by which the GV System can access the POS device and the AS200E Controller by the device name For details see GV Data Captur
117. of each CD DVD thus overlapping some videos in the beginning of each CD DVD from the end of the previous CD DVD 1 2 When you start burning a dialog box Figure 5 4 appears For Mode 2 select Yes A dialog box indicating the number of required discs for burning Figure 5 5 appears Select Yes to start the backup 297 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 3 2 Including the Player in the Backup Files If you choose to include the player in the backup files the Model 2 backup method will be applied You may see some overlapping videos inthe beginning of each CD DVD from the end of the previous CD DVD 1 To include the player in backup files select Include Player at the right bottom of the Backup dialog box and select ViewLog or Single Player Backup Media Time Frame C Using Hard Disk Backup Folder Name e Using CD DWD en LTR 523275 650 MB X CD DVD Burning Software E C CD Using OS Burning 2 Media Information ar y mm i 5 used Size 77 43 MB Free Size 572 57 MB Total Size 650 00 MB Add time frame Resume _ErsseRewrtatieticc venBecuptos r x Cancel Iw Include Player Viewlog Viewlog Single Player Figure 5 6 2 When the backup process starts a dialog box indicating the number of discs required for backup appears 3 Click Yes to start the backup 298 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 4 Deleting Recorded Files To delete fil
118. on the main screen 2 Ensure Enable GIS Data is enabled for desired IP devices to receive the GPS data from those IP devices Figure 11 95 3 Click the ES button on the GV GIS Client window Figure 11 93 This dialog box appears Connection amp Data Source Setup GPS Data Source Selection Connection Information O GPS Receiver Server IF Address 192 168 1 21 IP Device Port 3356 Default Account for GPS Receiver to connect GY GIS Server Enable sending data from GPS Receiver to GY GIS Serer Accountfor IF Devices to connect GY GIS Server Camera Source D Password Camera 1 IF Device Camera 3 IP Device ai Camera 3 IP Device atte Camera A IP Device Camera 5 IP Device camera 6 IP Device C Camera 7 IP Device C Camera 8 IF Device C Camera 9 IP Device C Camera 10 IF Device C Camera11 IF Device C Camera12 IF Device C Camera13 IF Device C Camera 14 IF Device vr m wt Figure 11 99 4 In the GPS Data Source Selection section select IP Device 5 In the Connection Information section type the IP address of GV GIS Keep the default port value of 3356 or modify it if necessary 629 10 KR Useful Utilities In the Account for GPS Receiver to connect GV GIS Server section type login ID and password created on GV GIS for the GV System In the Account for IP Device to connect GV GIS Server section select desired IP cameras and type their separate login IDs and passwords cr
119. playback or other operation without obstructing surveillance scene To make this operation possible your system must have a graphic card with dual video outputs and each output should be connected to its own monitor for display 1 To configure two monitor display on Windows right click on the Windows desktop and select Properties The Display Property dialog box appears 2 Select Settings enable Extend my Windows desktop onto this Monitor and click the Apply button Display Properties Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors Display 2 Plug and Play Monitor on GIGABYTE Radeon 1600 PRO Seconde ze Screen resolution Color quality Less More Highest 32 bit 1280 by 1024 pixels li mi EE mi C Use this device as the primary monitor Extend mp Windows desktop onto this monitor Figure 11 15 3 Go the GV folder and locate DMPOS exe ls File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Q Back gt Ki ys Search a Folders Ke E x Address IC C 16v800 Type Application Application i ML Document E DMUPnPServer dll Application Extension E DMwebCam dll Application Extension Y lt d i Figure 11 16 936 KOR Useful Utilities 4 Run DMPOS exe This dialog box appears Set Application Function Position Screen Setup Multicam ViewLog RPE EZViewLog LPR DMMultiview Displayer Setup Select Moni
120. player 276 D Playing Back Video Files 4 5 3 Creating a Folder Link You can create a link to the folder that contains recordings from the local computer This function has the same effect as Reload Database accessed from the Advanced button No 9 Figure 4 1 To add a folder click the Add Folder button and select the video folder on the computer The folder link is created under Group List 277 D Playing Back Video Files 4 5 4 Connecting from Address Book Choose one of these ways to quickly access a host group or folder by using Address Book 1 Right click a host group folder on Address Book and select Connect 2 Select a host group folder on Address Book and select the Connect button Ensure the Remote View Log function has been enabled at the remote host to allow access from the GV System For more remote playback functions also see Resuming Backupand Retrieving Images of Object Index in Remote ViewLog Service later in this chapter 278 D Playing Back Video Files 4 5 5 Importing and Exporting the Address Book You can import or export the address book by clicking the Import Export button Host Group List PRBa ax BVI Import a file S DVR Import a folder GA ev S E GV P Device D GV Recording Server List ia Se Export Figure 4 50 To import the address book select Import a file to import a single database file of the address book Or select Import a folder to s
121. port value is 5111 192 168 11 81 BIR en Figure 7 5 c Select OPOS Printer Driver if the POS device is compatible with OPOS protocol Click OK In the dialog box that appears type the connection port The default port value is 5111 Figure 7 6 6 Click OK This dialog box appears ReadFile Setting Stock and inventory control Printer Type Serial Port Y File Path POS Index COM Port 9600 None 8 1 Add Cancel Figure 7 7 344 Point of Sale POS Application Stock and inventory control Select to record identical transaction items as separate entries for receipts without receipt number and title This function is useful for recording items entering or exiting a warehouse to keep track of the number of items currently in stock Note This option is only available when you select File inthe previous step When connecting through Internet or OPOS protocols identical transaction items are already recorded as separate entries for receipts without receipt number and title by default Printer Type Select the type of the POS device Serial Port or TCP IP Port Select Serial Port if the POS device is connecting to GV System using a cross over RS 232 cable Select TCP IP Port if the POS device is connecting through internet or OPOS protocols File Path Locate the data file to be transferred to GV System This option is only available when you select File inthe previous step
122. re PE Pa Pa ra ra r pP rt ret re i E s ba ret ha gt A pd ed gt 4 Pa gt a gt a gt u OR pE E b b Ban 7 E E ba E p ba bp p be ER KI e s me Le zs E he 4 se gt s K DE DE e e e II AREA O AA AA A A A WWII gt lt lt gt lt gt a Te r gt L L k ra pa re 7 ra Le ra CH e gt ER gt PE PH ZE E ae ke KR ER gt gt gt g 4 S pa pE PE PE pi Q 4 re ha pa Re CR b A lt D YN hs le e E ra ra L CO a a s a pa ka gt a gt u RT hs gt gt L res rs gt he K be lt LS LE gt p LE TR CR we L rd 4 p4 p lt L K e ra ee G ee 4 s4 E EI EW P 4 pe re E ZE b E EW 2012 Guardian Security Solutions L C All rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual may not be copied in whole or in part without the written consent of Guardian Security Solutions L C Every effort has been made to ensure that the information inthis manual is accurate Guardian Security Solutions L C makes no expressed or implied warranty of any kind and assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions No liability is assumed for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the information or products contained herein Features and specifications are subject to change without notice Guardian Security Solutions L C 3214 122 st Lubbock TX 79423 Tel 1 800 658 2
123. receipt printer attached externally 346 Point of Sale POS Application 7 2 Graphic Mode POS Device You can integrate a graphic mode POS device tothe GV System The transaction data is directly transferred to the GV System va a RS 232 serial cable or TCP IP connection Before You Start Before you start note the specifications below for the integration This integration only supports the Windows based POS device An appropriate dongle is required for the integration to work For serial port connection up to 4 POS devices can be connected to one GV System For TCP IP connection up to 16 POS devices can be connected to one GV System 7 2 1 Serial Port Connection To attach the graphic mode POS device with the Windows operating system and serial output to GV System follow these steps 1 Connect the POS device as illustrated below o Cross over RS232 s POS Device GV System USB dongle Figure 7 8 2 Insert the Software DVD to the POS device It runs automatically and a window appears 3 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Paid Software 4 Select GV POS Data Sender Only for Graphic mode POS device and follow on screen instructions to complete the installation 347 Point of Sale POS Application 5 Select POS Data Senderfrom Windows Start Menu This dialog box appears Ze POS Data Sender Start Service Serial Port TCP IP Port COM
124. select cameras and click OK to start searching The two windows appear Record List CH 7111 2009 H E 711212009 E 7113 2009 Ea 7 412009 23 7115 2009 E 01 00 Ep 03 00 E 05 00 Ep 08 00 E 08 30 E 09 00 Camera 1 5 23 2015 10 00 10 30 1 T Moving Object List 10 00 27 140 10 01 04 140 10 01 05 640 10 02 33 687 10 02 47 750 10 02 48 984 10 03 14 703 10 03 15 843 E an oF ah D 10 03 16 671 10 04 47 015 10 04 48 515 10 05 12 796 10 05 20 703 a a y d E 4 10 06 23 531 10 06 41 265 10 06 42 406 10 06 45 250 10 07 11 359 ei S 10 07 27 765 10 07 37 343 10 08 46 093 10 08 46 406 10 08 47 750 gt gt Show snapshot Figure 3 28 In the Record List window expand a Camera folder to display all found date folders and time segment files 165 El Video Analysis Click one time segment file to open its included frames in the Moving Object List window To play images with Quick Search or ViewLog player double click the desired frame To display the image with your default image viewer of Windows e g Paint select Show snapshot at the bottom of the Moving Object List window and double click the desired frame 166 El Video Analysis 3 7 Face Detection The Face Detection enables the GV System to detect and record human faces This feature captures human faces only ignoring other bo
125. several links of GV System servers for quick connections Up to 50 links can be created My Favorite Favorite Figure 8 93 Playing Back the Recordings To retrieve the events recorded on the GV System and play them back 1 On the login screen Figure 8 85 press RPB View RPE View 2 Enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 5511 ID and Password You can also search the recordings of a specified date and time by selecting RPB Time Setting and entering the date and time Then press Connect Connect B View Connect RPB Connection Setting RPB Time Setting Favorite Name Host Name RPB With Time KIM webcam geovis Date 2011 02 25 FE Time 09 16 15 AM test Password TTT RPB Favorite RPB Favorite RPB Time Setting RPB View DVI RPB View Figure 8 94 Figure 8 95 473 D Remote Viewing 3 Select the desired recordings from the event list for playback Use the Change cam button at the top right corner to switch cameras Change cam Prev 10 items NEXT 10 items 10 10 27 2011 02 25 10 07 00 2011 02 25 10 03 24 2011 02 25 10 02 48 2011 02 25 10 00 16 2011 02 25 09 55 16 2011 02 25 09 54 40 2011 02 25 09 51 29 2011 02 25 09 49 39 2011 02 25 Figure 8 96 Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the vdeo was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower 2 The remote playback RPB function does not
126. support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices 474 D Remote Viewing Import Export This function allows you to export My Favorite list to iPhone iPad iPod Touch device or import My Favorite list from Phone iPad iPod Touch device The maximum number of import export items is 100 connections Find the Import Export option on the login screen and operate Favorite Name Host Name HTTPS Password e My Favorite Favorite Image Setting Image Setting Version GV iViewHD v1 1 Import Export Import Export Figure 8 97 475 D Remote Viewing 8 13 8 Android Smartphones and Tablets GV AView function is introduced to support Android smartphones and tablets for the mobile Surveillance application For the supported operating system version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter For the latest software version and Installation Guide Figure 8 98 476 D Remote Viewing Access to a GV IP Device 1 Tap the GV AView icon on the main page This page appears NVR DVR View HTTPS Figure 8 99 2 Type the IP address port number user name and password of the GV System you want to access And then tap the Add button K to save the connection information in the address book Note lf the default HTTP port of 80 on the WebCam Server of the GV System is modified specify the new port number used for HTTP connection at the
127. swo O EC ACI E EECHER CI RER vaes A A vwm A O S ooo 656 Appendix E Supported IP Device Brands This list provides the supported IP device brands For detailed information on the supported IP devices refer to Supported IP Camera List from Guardian Security Solutions Guardian Security Solutions B D 657 Appendix F Supported GPRS Models Brand Round Solutions TER GX series Wavecom Multiband 900E 1800 GSM Modem 658 Appendix G Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View This chart lists all the default icons with their filenames as a reference for users who wish to replace icons on the Multi View window To replace an icon on the Multi View window simply rename your custom icon name to one of relevant icon name listed below CAI IET ER epp ios aco serumom 22 E fase pra SCT ege MS A E CE EE A CE O ETA 606 Vease EEE EA eeneg E E IS FE ETA EEE A DO E CA OE emee owe fee TP engt rere 62 asaz eo TES o f ee EA acma O see eor tac webcamothostime 2222 ES eener LES CA E 659 Appendix The display ratio supported by each types of panel resolution is listed below 660 Appendix Dual Stream Support List The table lists the firmware versions of GV IP devices that support dual stream and the default resolutions after the camera is added to GV System verson Main Stream SubStream GV BX110D V1 00 to V1 06 1280 x 102
128. system triggers alerts or the output device The Delay Time will not work if you stop monitoring or enable the function Deactivate notification when selected pin ON in UC Application wndow Figure 6 7 Never Recycling Input Triggered Events When the item is checked the recorded files of input triggered events won t be recycled by the system when disk space is full 316 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 3 2 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input Trigger This feature allows you to define how the PTZ camera and the GV System will respond to an input trigger event W Preset Goa by lio Demo PTZ01 DD Camera 4 y Addr Alarm On Preset Alarm Off Preset Preset Go by VO Alarm On Dwell Time 10 Sec Figure 6 9 Select an Input number to be set up Clicking the Finger button can apply the same settings to all inputs Preset Go by I O Enable the option and select your PTZ camera from the drop down list Addr Specify the address of the PTZ camera Alarm On Turns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the input is triggered Alarm Off Returns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the triggered input is off 6 e e Alarm On Dwell Time Specify the amount of time the PTZ camera stays at Alarm On preset point before returning tothe Alarm Off preset point Note Depending on the capability of the PTZ camera up to 256 PTZ preset points ranging from 1 to 256 and addresses rangi
129. the Video Event list Icons appearing under the Description The compacted file The compacted file of the Never Recycle event remains the same scheduled compacting date icon Tick The video file has failed to be compacted because the file was being played back when it was supposed to be compacted Camera 1 ne Evert Total Frame h Video Events Total Frame 18 27 45 9 18 33 14 16 36 14 Figure 1 55 Di Configuring Main System 1 9 2 Merging Video Events You can program the file merging and exporting to begin on a specific date or on a daily schedule The schedule is helpful when computer sources are busy at monitoring or detection it allows you to assign the file merging and exporting after working hours Setting up a Merging Schedule 1 Click the Schedule button select Schedule Center and select Merging Video Events Schedule Center Schedule type Compacting Yideo Events fj Fast Backup and Restore Im Setting VSM Schedule Figure 1 56 2 Click Edit This dialog box appears Schedule of Merging Files Task Name Schedule Type e Specific Date Date z 1j2010 C Daily a E y p g S Start Time Task List TaskName Type StartDate Start Time Time of Merging Files test Once 2010 02 01 15 46 2010 02 01 00 00 Figure 1 57 ER Configuring Main System 3 In the Task Name field name the schedule 4 In the Schedule Type section select one of the types
130. the output device Click to view the live video associated with that camera dome Up to 16 live videos can be accessed simultaneously 497 D E Map Application 9 4 2 Logging in Different Hosts When the client PC connects to the WebCam server all the E Maps saved in the local server will be downloaded to the client PC with the E Map files of 500 hosts at most The E Maps created for remote hosts can only function through WebCam after you log in these hosts You can login 500 hosts at a time Click the Login button No 1 Figure 9 10 to display the following Login window Host Login Host Logout Host Name Auto Login TEST101 Host Name Login Logout Figure 9 11 Logging indifferent hosts 498 D E Map Application 9 4 3 Configuring the Remote E Map Click the Configure button No 7 Figure 9 10 to display the following dialog box C Program Files x86 Remote EN Browse Figure 9 12 The Configure Dialog Box Download EMap files Click to download E Map files from the local server to the client PC This option can reduce network load when you want to view E Maps of multiple hosts Use local EMap files Once downloading E Map files to the client PC you can use these E Map files for connection Motion I O Input Alert Sound Check this option and assign a wav file to alert the operator when motion is detected or I O devices are triggered Camera Blink I O Blink Wh
131. the right image and observe if it is magnified in the left image clearly If not use the Live Tuning buttons to adjust directions and the desired level of zooming Click OK to save your settings of the tracking time the idle time for zooming in objects and the testing results Starting Object Tracking After the above settings you can start the object tracking application Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and then click Object Tracking Startto start the function Tip You can interrupt the PTZ camera tracking and take over the camera control by using PTZ Control Panel on Main System PC s keyboard and GV accessories such as GV Keyboard GV IR Remote Control and GV Joystick When the controlling device or panel is inactive for over 5 seconds the PTZ camera will go back for tracking 141 a Video Analysis Zooming in Objects While the PTZ is being applied for tracking you can still control it to zoom in any desired area by launching the Zoom in Dialog window 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and then click Object Tracking View to launch the Zoom in Dialog window overlapping inthe main screen as shown below Note The Zoom In Dialog window is for the stationary camera view and the main screen is for the PTZ view amera A 7 i H z ilzlatal
132. this ID for IR Remote Control G Keyboard Send password by E mail Login this ID automatically Single user mode New Remove San Multicam Viewlog Webcam Fast Backup and Restore Control Center Privacy Mask Other Allow removing password system E Cancel Figure 3 39 Note If you open the event files av directly from local disks the valid ID and password are also required to access the block out areas For more information on retrieving the block out areas in the exported files see Merging and Exporting Video in Chapter 4 179 a Video Analysis 3 11 Scene Change Detection The Scene Change Detection can detect when a camera has been tampered physically This feature can generate an alert whenever someone or something has covered the lens of the camera or when the camera has been moved or when it is out of focus 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Video Analysis and select Scene Change Detection Setting The Scene Change Detection Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras to be configured and then click the Configure tab This dialog box appears Scene Change Detection Setup Camera Camera H Mask region Iw Focus change iv View change Sensitivity 3 Delay Time sec Gem Invoke Alarm Schedule M Output Module M Live disable alarm Never Recycle M Skip instant light change Demo Focus change Play l H
133. to locate files The number of video and audio files for each camera found within the specified time is displayed in the camera list on the left For example Camera 9 18 0 means the Camera 9 has created 18 video files and O audio files within the specified time By default you can only merge the files of one day In the Merge Mode section select one of the merging methods O Single File Merges several AVI files into a single file The maximum size of the merged file is 2 GB for FAT32 file system and 4 GB for NTFS file system If the merged file exceeds the limit of Windows file system it will be split up into another file Di Configuring Main System Multiple Files Merges AVI files into several files of a specific duration After specifying the duration you can see the number of merged files will be created Direct Merge Higher Speed The merging method only joins video files together without the inclusion of their video effects such as privacy masks watermarks time stamps GPS data and etc Using the Direct Merge to merge several AVI files into a single file also select Single File Using the Direct Merge to merge AVI files based on the specified duration also select Multiple Files To merge audio and video together click the arrow button and select Include Audio The Direct Merge is faster than the other two merging methods because the video effects are excluded 9 Inthe Output Locat
134. to the GV Mobile Server User Manual on the Software DVD 637 KOR Useful Utilities 11 19 MultiLang Tool for Translated Text The user interface has been translated from English into 30 other languages If you find the translation to be unsuitable and would like to correct it you can use the MultiLang Tool to revise the translation Next you can apply the revised text to the applications and export a MRewse exe file to make the same revision on another computer You can also send the revision back to Guardian Security Solutions to have the revision included in future software releases Note When using the MultiLang Tool it is recommended to revise an entire sentence at a time instead of simply searching a single word and replacing the word in all other strings To revise the translated text 1 Insert the Software DVD to your computer lt runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Select GV MultiLang Tool and follow the on screen instructions 4 Close all Guardian Security Solutions applications first and then double click MultilingualConfig exe This dialog box appears 3 MultilingualConf Language Tools Version Multilingual Text Figure 11 114 5 Click Language and select the language of the text you want to revise 6 Click Version to select the version of the Main System that you want to revise 638 T is MultilingualConfig Language Tool
135. used by the IP address A setup dialog box will appear In this example an IP address is selected for bandwidth limit setup Select Bandwidth Setup specify a bandwidth limit and then click OK Bandwidth Setup IF Address 127 0 0 1 Bandwidth Setup Bandwidth Figure 11 64 591 1 Useful Utilities 11 10 5 Bandwidth Setup You can specify the total bandwidth allocated to a WebCam server You can also specify the bandwidth for certain users and IP addresses This is especially useful when your network is busy or heavily loaded 1 Click Configure on the menu bar and select Bandwidth Setup A dialog box prompts for you to select a host 2 Select the desired WebCam server and click OK This dialog box appears Bandwidth Setup 192 168 0 121 192 168 0 220 1000 KB By Username 1000 KB lt Lill gt Figure 11 65 Bandwidth limit Select this option and define the total bandwidth that the WebCam server will be allowed to use on your network By IP Click the Add button and specify a specific IP address or a range of IP addresses and its bandwidth limit By Username Click the Add button and specify the user name and its bandwidth limit Note If you have already specified the total bandwidth toa WebCam server it is prioritized before the bandwidth limits set to user names and IP addresses 992 KR Useful Utilities 11 10 6 Block List Setup Two types of block lists are p
136. vew mode is set to be Panorama View Quad View or Multi View this is the default play mode Real Time Plays back video on real time This method saves waiting time for rendering but drop frames to give the appearance of real time playback When the view mode is set to be Single the default play mode is Real Time Just Key Frame Plays back the most representative frames of video When your network bandwidth is limited select this option to enhance the playback smoothness Smooth Playback When the playback appears choppy select this option to enhance the smoothness 228 D Playing Back Video Files Note 1 Forthe MJPEG codec every frame is key frame 2 The Key Frame function only works on V8 3 3 or later If the version of connected GV System through Remote ViewLog is earlier than V8 3 3 the Key Frame function is not available Ato B Playback Mode When playing video events you can set a starting and an ending frame for auto playing 1 To set the starting frame A click the Ato B Mode button Figure 4 4 The message A to B Mode Set A appears on the screen 2 To setthe ending frame B click the Ato B Mode button The message A to B Mode Set B appears on the screen ViewLog will start playing the set frames AtoB repeatedly To stop the playing click the A to B Mode button the message A to B Mode Cancelled will appear 229 4 1 3 D Playing Back Video Files Recycling Option for Video File
137. view will keep the recording in original format Up to 4 sets of panorama views can be created To access this feature click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Advanced Video Analysis select Panorama Setting select the desired cameras on be configured and then click the Configure button This dialog box appears POOOCG OQGOOE a o Panorima View Setup rl wae LA sn E d Panorama selection 2 3 Panorama 1 ei Source 4 Camera 3 7 3 Selected Source Figure 3 43 182 EI Video Analysis The controls on the Panorama View Setup dialog box No 2 D 0 IN O 10 11 12 13 14 15 Name Add Undo Manual Setting Blending Demo Left Right Top Bottom Customize Resolution Save Before Exit Exit Preview Window Easy Mode Panorama Selection Source Selected Source Description Adds an image for automatic splicing Cancels the settings Manually splices the images together Makes the spliced images seamless Displays the setup procedure Place the selected image to the left or right of the previous image Place the selected image on the top or bottom of the previous image Sets the width and height of the panorama view in pixels Saves the created panorama view and closes the dialog box Closes the dialog box Displays the selected source image or the spliced images Places camera views next to each other with no overlaps Selects t
138. window No Name Description 1 Up Returns to the previous E Map file 2 Add Map Adds an E Map file 3 Add Host Adds a host folder in the Host View 4 Load Map Imports a floor plan 5 Rename Renames an E Map file and or folder 6 Delete Deletes an E Map file and or folder 7 Zoom In Enlarges the Map View 8 Zoom Out Diminishes the Map View 9 Fitto Screen Adjusts the Map View to fit the current size of the window 10 Actual Size Displays actual size of the imported graphic file 11 Floor Plan The window displays the imported graphic file 12 Host View Tree view of host folders 13 Map View Tree view of E Map files and or folders 488 D E Map Application 9 2 Creating an E Map File To create and edit an E Map file follow the steps below 1 Click the Add Map button No 2 Figure 9 1 on the toolbar A New Map file will be created in Map View and the Floor Plan window separately as illustrated below E E Map Editor File Edit Map Host View 240 alo Ae a a Hew Map Figure 9 2 Creating a new map 2 Click the New Map file in Map View and then click the Load Map button No 4 Figure 9 1 to import a graphic file The file opens in the Floor Plan window Figure 9 1 3 Double click the local server folder in Host View The program will automatically detect the number of cameras and l O devices already installed at the server and display their separate icons Drag and drop these icons from Host View ont
139. with up to 7 close up views on moving objects 1 On the main screen click the desired camera name label and select PAP View 2 The screen automatically switches to one division and a row of inset windows appears around the live view screen The number of inset windows is based on the number set for Max Number of Tracked Objects admin TEST ZB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 15 14 15 16 PA MAA SE m A E YU Corea S08868 MEA A A TEE dE Figure 3 17 3 When a moving object enters the camera view it will be highlighted with a navigation box to help you track the object An inset wndow will also display the magnified image of the tracked object 4 You could also draw the box to select a focus area and this selected area is immediately reflected in one inset window Up to 7 Max Number of Tracked Objects boxes can be drawn for focus areas For instance you can draw 5 boxes to be focus areas if you select 2 for the Max Number of Tracked Objects See Setting Digital Object Tracking earlier in this chapter To delete a focus area right click a drawn box select Focus Area of PAP Mode and select Delete To add another focus area when less than seven boxes are drawn right click the image select Mega Pixel Setting and select Enable Add Focus Area Mode Then draw a box on the image 152 EI Video Analysis 3 4 Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm The Object Counting provi
140. 0 1 Client Tel Client FAX Client Address Login Time 11 5 2007 2 12 56 PM Client Type DVR Status Client 1 3 The controls in this window No Button 1 Exit Figure 11 24 Description Exits this window Logs out Administrator Changes Password exports account information 2 Log 3 Account Setup Sets up the Authentication Server Log and opens the log browser Configures passwords and grants permissions to clients Imports groups from Active Directory Server Setup Start Stop Service Find A Client View Edit A Client Delete An Area Client Add A Client Add An Area Client List j O O IN tot SCH JE i N Connected Client List O Client Information Configures the Authentication Server Starts Stops the Authentication Server Finds an existing client Select a client from the Client List and click to view edit it Deletes an existing group or client Creates a client account Creates an Area group Lists the created clients and area groups Lists the connected GV Systems E Map Servers or Control Centers Lists the information of the selected GV System E Map Server or Control Center 544 1 Useful Utilities 11 5 3 Creating a Client DVR You must create and arrange client GV Systems under the DVR List first To create a DVR list follow these steps 1 To create a group click the Add An Area button No 10 Figure 11 24 2 To create a
141. 00 Y With Decimal Sign MOB File Entry Marne Coke cancel Figure 7 16 Setting search criteria 355 Point of Sale POS Application Key Word Enter a meaningful keyword that matches exactly one of transaction items texts in the receipt The field is case sensitive Suppose we enter Coke and every text matching to Coke will be screened out Capture Data Type Select the type of data followed by the specified transaction item text Numeric Currency or Alphabetic If the specified transaction item text is followed by a price amount select Numeric or Currency If it is followed by alphabets select Alphabetic With Comma If there are commas in a price amount select the option With Decimal Sign If there are decimal signs in a price amount select the option With Space The option is only available when you select Alphabetic If there is space among a series of characters check the option MDB File Entry Name Enter a file name to store the data Click OK to apply the above settings In System Log for this example you can see the last column created for the transaction item Coke The transactions matching the search criteria will be displayed under the created column R Live Log Browser Recycle Log 11 28 2007 23 04 Monitor System Login Counter Pos1 POS 2 Pos 3 Pos 4 Poss Pose Pos Poss Posa rosen Alt Time Content 1172972007 oreo cookie 1000T 11 29 2007 oreo cookie 1000T
142. 007 To select the days of data to be included in the report click the desired day buttons See Figure 11 72 If you select 24 hours before execution time on the Advanced Setting tab Figure 11 69 the generated report will contain the data of 7 days counting back on your specified date and time Specify the date and time by using the Select Date and Select Time drop down lists For example if you enter 12 10 2007 and 01 00 the report is generated on the time from 01 00 am December 10th to 01 00 am December Ath 2007 To select the days of data to be included in the report click the desired day buttons See Figure 11 72 600 1 Useful Utilities 11 11 4 E Mail Attachment Settings After you set up the e mail account to receive the reports as e mail attachments you can also set up the attachment limits to avoid sending out large files 1 On the Program Report tab select E mail and click the Setting button beside This dialog box appears Mail Setup SMTP Server Text Content E Mail From E Mail To Charset Western European incio ii Subject Report from TESTES P Test Mail Account Attach File Select Export file type Htrril Create a self executable file SMTP Server Upper limit of the attach files size 2 ME SMTP Port f The attached files exceeding the size limit will not be sent 25 e The attached files are automatically split and sent out in mulitple e mails Only bim
143. 010 09 24 v1 03 2010 07 26 v1 06 2010 09 10 v1 06 2010 10 01 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 00 2010 09 20 v1 00 2010 10 04 Temperature NOTE Figure 11 100 Description Searches for available GV IP devices under LAN Automatically assigns unused IP addresses on the LAN to the IP addresses with the same ID and Password Adds an IP device tothe list or import an excel file to add multiple IP devices A template of the excel file is located in the folder where GV IP Device Utility is installed Deletes the IP device from the list Specifies the network adaptor Configure Specifies the network adaptor Temperature Monitor Select the temperature unit and specify the temperature Directs to the Web interface of the IP address 632 1 Useful Utilities 11 16 3 Setting IP Devices 1 2 Double click the GV IP device to open the setting page of the device Mac Address IP Address User Login User Name Kou ves Port 10000 Password Set IP Address Firmware Upgrade Device Name Export settings Import settings Reboot IP Address 192 168 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 Default Gateway 492 168 DNS Server 192 168 HTTP Port SS Port Figure 11 101 Click the different tabs to access the following settings Set IP Address Type the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS server of the
144. 054 Fax 1 800 687 2774 http www MyS hield org Trademarks used in this manual Guardian Security Solutions L C the Guardian Security Solutions L C logo and GV series products are trademarks of Guardian Security Solutions L C Windows and Windons XP are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation November 2012 Full Manual for V8 5 9 Guardian Security Solutions Surveillance System Welcome to the Full Manual for V8 5 9 Guardian Security Solutions Surveillance System Cards Supported V8 5 9 Guardian Security Solutions Surveillance System only supports the following GV video capture cards GV 600 S V3 20 and later GV 650 S V3 30 and later GV 800 S V3 30 and later GV 804A V3 10 and later GV 600A GV 600B GV 650A GV 650B GV 800A GV 800B GV 900A GV 1120 GV 1120A GV 1120B GV 1240 GV 1240A GV 1240B GV 1480 GV 1480A GV 1480B GV 3008 GV 4008 GV 4008A GV 5016 GV SDI 204 Note that GV 600 V4 GV 650 V4 and GV 800 V4 and GV 804 V4 Cards are renamed to GV 600A GV 650A GV 800A and GV 804A These V4 and A Cards are the same video capture cards Important Notes GPU Decoding Specifications In V8 5 or later support for GPU Graphics Processing Unit decoding is added to lower the CPU loading and to increase the total frame rate supported by a GV System GPU decoding only supports the following sof
145. 1 Register Username swansea Password eeeseese Re type Password eseese Enter the characters as they are shown in the box below 4NCxRC Figure 11 1 Username Username is 16 character maximum username may not start with spaces or minus signs Username will be your hostname Password The password is case sensitive Word Yerification This step helps us prevent automated registrations 6 Click the Send button The following message appears Username swansea Hostname swansea dipmap com IP Address 147 0 0 1 Your hostname will be activated in 4 minutes Your hostname will be deleted you don t update your host address for 30 days Figure 11 2 928 Useful Utilities Username The username you registered In this example the username is swansea Hostname The hostname you created Hostname is made by registered username and dipmap com In this example the host name is http swansea dipmap com This will be the domain name you use to log into GV System IP Address Your GV System s current IP address This IP address is updated every 10 minutes Note Before you can register a domain name with Dynamic DNS Service provided by Guardian Security Solutions it is required to run any Guardian Security Solutions application in the background if the installed GV System is of version 8 2 or later 929 1 Useful Utilities 11 1 3 Starting Dynamic DNS After r
146. 1 enable Default Alert Approach select Hotline and click the Setting button This dialog box appears HotLine Modern Setup HotLine Alert 1 Modern Device RAS PPPoE Lime Dial HotLine Com Port COM Detect W Activate l l Attach Text Message HotLine Option HotLine Alerts Interval E Min 911 911 911 911 Default f Attach Audio Message Audio Message Play Repeat 10 Times Oo Play ber Browse When Received HotLine Alerts Please Press before Hang up the Call Format PCN 8 000Hz 3Bit com HotLine Attach Audio Message Figure 1 67 Modem Setup Select the dialup modem installed on the computer of the GV System and the COM port that is connected Click the Detect button to test the connection with the modem Note Internal modems PCI or ISA are not recommended Hotline Alert x The event can be set to trigger up to 3 units of telephones and pagers A text message may be sent to the pager Enter the telephone number HotLine Alert 1 Dial Hotline Empty Dial Humber iw Achyate e Attach Text Message Enter the text message SAME Default f Attach Audio Message Play Rec Browse Format PEM 8 000H2 8Bit mono Figure 1 68 sch O Sp ER Configuring Main System In the Dial HotLine drop down list type the telephone or pager number Select Activate Select Attach Text Message and type the text messages to be sent to a p
147. 1 168 192 168 3 139 A nn A d n n ammm Double click a device 0013E200FC33 0013E20246ED 0013E202552C 0013E2021139 0013E2019085 0013E202B3CE 0013E2012BB3 0013E2018D7F 001382023316 0013E2024D29 0013E20245CA 0013E201641C 0013E2019662 0013E2019696 0013E202553F 0013E2019037 001400000001 0013E2016406 008414430000 0013E2012BBB 0013E202723E 0013E2034C79 mm d n Ed A d n ee Figure 2 5 Brand GeoVision_GY LX8C GeoWision_GY Bx220D GeoVision_GY FE422 GeoYision_GW FE110 GeoWision_Gv Bx220D GeoVision_GY YS04H GeoWision_GW WS02 GeoYision_GW FE110 GeoWision_GW PT110D GeoVision_GY YS12 GeoWision_GW BX320D GeoYision_GW BX110D GeoWision_GW Bx220D Geovision_GW Bx520D GeoWision_GW CB220 GeoVision_GY Bx110D GeoVision_GY YS02A4 GeoVision_GY SDO10 GeoWision_GW PT110D GeoWision_GW WS02 Geovision_GW FE420 GeoWision_GW CB220 A ns Follow steps 4 8 in the Adding Cameras Manually section above 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution The username and password are set to admin by default If the camera does not use the default settings a dialog box will appear for you to type the correct username and password 119 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 5 3 Automatic Setup Using Automatic Setup you can add all Guardian Security Solutions and third party IP cameras within an IP address range 1 Click Automatic Setup A dialog box appears Automatic Setup Settings for Automatic Setup Start IP address 192 168 OQ 1
148. 1 Object Tracking For the tracking function you need one PTZ camera applied for tracking and one stationary camera set for a fixed view Install the PTZ camera and the stationary camera in close proximity of each other so the focus and the camera view of both are similar Only GV IP Speed Dome and some third party IP cameras support this function To see the supported PTZ cameras see Certified PTZ Models for Object Trackingin Appendix C Setting Up a PTZ Camera Before configuring the Object Tracking function first configure the PTZ camera 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select PTZ Device and select PTZ Setup 2 Select the model from the drop down list 3 Click the button A setup dialog box appears For GV IP Speed Dome select Enable Object Tracking To configure the preset points first select Normal and configure presets from the PTZ control panel on the screen 136 EI Video Analysis GV 5D200 Camera 2 IP 192 1568 5 217 Dome Mame GV _ S0200 f Normal f Enable Object Tracking Figure 3 1 For other cameras select Active and select Enable Object Tracking Specify COM port Baud Rate and PT Speed of the PTZ camera To configure the preset points first select Normal and configure presets from the PTZ control panel on the screen 4 Click OK to apply the settings Note For analog cameras you must first add the camera to the PTZ camera l
149. 16 11 52 l Pop up live video Ee e E y Motion Motion Captured images Figure 8 22 1 Click the Show System Menu button No 5 Figure 8 20 and select Alarm Notify This dialog box appears Alarm Notify nese Y Motion Notify Iw UO Alarm Notify Y Alert Sound Y Auto SnapShot File Path C Windows AviFiles Browse eo Figure 8 232 Alarm Notification Motion Notify Once motion is detected the captured images are displayed in the control panel of the Single View 1 O Alarm Notify Once the input device is triggered the captured images are displayed in the control panel of the Single View Alert Sound Activates the computer noise alarm on motion and input triggered detection Auto Snapshot The program will take a snapshot every 5 seconds on motion and input triggered detection File Path Assigns a path to save the snapshots 2 Click OK to apply the above settings 394 D Remote Viewing 8 3 5 Video and Audio Configuration To change the video and audio configurations of the connected camera click the Show System Menu button No 5 Figure 8 19 and select Video and Audio Configuration Camera In this tab you can change the video codec quality and frame rate immediately The resolution options are corresponded to the maximum image size set on the connected GV System For details see Video Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Note the Defog and Stabi
150. 192 160 2 174 Viewlog 192 168 2 174 20 3 Evert20071228203233002 20 32 Evert20071228202732002 20 27 G Kuur Evert20071228202231002 20 22 3 3 i aau E b RRIS Figure 11 60 play video back For details see Single Player in Chapter 4 585 1 Useful Utilities 11 9 5 Using Remote ViewLog Using the Remote ViewLog function you can access the data on the GV System Click the Remote ViewLog button Eon the toolbar The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears Type the IP address ID and Password of the GV System select DVR in the Host Type field and click Connect to enable connecting to the GV System 986 11 10 1 Useful Utilities Bandwidth Control Application The Bandwidth Control is an independent application that controls and monitors the network traffic of the WebCam servers lts features include 6 e e Manage up to 10 WebCam servers Get bandwidth usages of every Webcam server and every user Set bandwidth thresholds for specific users and IP addresses IP black and white list Kick unwanted users Note The Bandwidth Control application only works on Internet Explorer If the user logs inthe WebCam server using other browsers e g Netscape and FireFox the Bandwidth Control cannot detect and manage the login user However the user of other browsers has access to JEPG and live images only 587 11 10 1 No INI OO ik Vo Ibh Instal
151. 2 and select Remote Storage System This dialog box appears Connect to storage systsem Host List Hn EA Camera 2 EA Camera 3 EA Camera 4 EA Camera 5 EA Camera 6 EA Camera EA Camera 8 EA Camera 9 Gy Camera 10 EA Camera 11 Gy Camera 12 Eh Camera 13 Get Host List Close Figure 11 57 2 Click the Get Host List button to enable connecting tothe storage system The DVR icon appears 3 Expand the DVR folder select the host and click the S button on the top right corner 4 After the events stored on the storage system are displayed on the Event List you can use ViewLog features for playback 580 1 Useful Utilities 11 8 7 Viewing Backup Status You can view the backup status of each camera To view the information click the Backup Server icon on the system tray and select Backup Status The Backup File Viewer dialog box appears In the left menu click a camera channel to see the date and time when the recording of the camera was backed up Backup File Viewer e TESTI77PCR 109234550607 8 8 1011121314151617 18192021 222324 Camerat RABO BN ne 2011 7 6 Im i Wm Camera 6 Camera 7 z Camera 6 Camera H Camera L Camera 12 Figure 11 58 581 KR Useful Utilities 11 9 Backup Viewer With the Backup Viewer you can access the video recordings and log data backed up at the storage system from any computer over the In
152. 2 Use the Camera Lens drop down list to select Wide Angle 3 Click the b button This dialog box appears Wide Angle Dewarping Setting dE E gt D z a Do A wi A paper Weg Al A a Z NO Rw GEIER daa d al ss y 3 H j q Y fa AAA ga AE Laf Original Image Dewarped Image Settings Field of View Angle ke 240 degree Figure 3 54 4 Move the slider to adjust the degree of warping The adjusted view is shown on the right 5 Click OK 6 Onthe main screen right click the live view select the camera number and select Wide Angle Lens Dewarping to apply the setting 193 a Video Analysis Note l This function only applies to live view and does not affect the recorded video but it can also be applied after a video is recorded Refer tothe Adjusting Distorted Views section in Chapter 4 for details lf dual stream IP channels are applied for better image quality it is recommended to change the streaming to single stream before you enable wide angle lens dewarping This effect does not support On Demand Display for automatic adjustment of live video resolution in single channel division 194 a Video Analysis 3 16 Advanced Motion Detection To avoid false motion detection the Advanced Motion Detection feature provides five solutions Designate up to 5 levels of motion detection sensitivity for each outlined area Mask off unwanted areas for monitoring such
153. 2008 00 59 Monitor Systern Login Counter ID Time Device Information Event DST Rollback 10 26 2008 1 36 06 4M Camera 13 Video Lost 10 26 2008 1 36 06 AFM Camera 14 Video Lost 10 26 2008 1 36 06 AM Camera 15 Video Lost 10 26 2008 1 36 06 AM Camera 16 Video Lost 10 26 2008 1 38 43 AM Camera 1 a Motion 10 26 2008 1 38 51 AM Camera 1 a Motion 10 26 2008 1 38 58 AM Camera 1 I Motion Figure 1 32 ER Configuring Main System In ViewLog a separate DST subfolder will be displayed in the Date Tree Cl Der Figure 1 33 Note The AVI file recorded during the DST period is named with the prefix GvDST e g GvDST20081022xxxxxxxxx avi to differentiate from the regular AVI file named with the prefix Event e g Event20081022xxxxxxxxx am 1 5 Account and Password EI Configuring Main System The password setup allows you to assign permission and rights to users You can create up to 1 000 passwords The system will control and restrict access to system resources based on the permission and rights associated with each user account Only Supervisor account level is pre set with access to the Password Setup function Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure point to Password Setup and then select Local Account Edit to display the following window Guest User PowerUser Supervisor New Search Allow removing password system El ID Password Hi
154. 25 2 SCN Camera TEE 203 PULOMANC OCUP EE 2 5 4 Customizing IP Camera Settings ococcicnnonicnicnocccccconnncnn ono no nanann nn nnnn ono aonarnnnos PIZIP CaME WEE RISP CONNEC d e Un asien ds ONVIF amp PSIA Connection bk E KK co EEN EN NN A KR AR ER EN EN A A A KR KN EN A Camera Mapping Using GV IP Device Utility oo o0 On Demand Display seet dies BON SES NEEN ENEE 113 114 115 116 117 119 120 121 123 124 126 127 129 132 111 Hybrid and NVR Solution To implement IP video surveillance Guardian Security Solutions provides the two solutions Hybrid Solution Integrates analog videos with digital videos from IP video devices NVR Solution A software based system GV NVR without requiring a video capture card Both Hybrid and NVR Solutions come with 32 free IP channels when connecting to Guardian Security Solutions IP video devices Guardian Security Solutions s Hybrid and NVR solutions support not only Guardian Security Solutions s own IP video products but also products from other leading manufacturers For the supported IP devices refer to the Supported IP Note GV 250 Card does not support the Hybrid solution 2 1 Guardian Security Solutions IP Video Products Guardian Security Solutions offers a comprehensive line of IP video products GV IP Camera GV IPCAM H 264 series cameras including Box Camera Mini Fix
155. 3 To access the Authentication Server account settings on the Host List right click Host List by ID and select Get Host List by ID Adialog box prompts you for ID and password 4 Type a user ID and password created on the Authentication Server and click OK A list of assigned GV System hosts to the user will be displayed 599 1 Useful Utilities Accessing from Multi View Viewer Once the GV System is connected to the Authentication Server you can only enter the user account created on the Authentication Server to log into the Multi View Viewer Once you log into the Multi View successfully a list of assigned GV System hosts to the user will be displayed Host Auto Search EF S 127 001 AE Authenication Host Figure 11 36 996 1 Useful Utilities 11 6 Fast Backup and Restore With the Fast Backup and Restore FBR solution you can change interface skin and customize features to suit personal preference as well as back up and restore your configurations in Main System 11 6 1 Installing the FBR Program 1 Insert the Software DVD click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility select GV Fast Backup amp Restore Multicam System and follow the on screen instructions 2 After the installation is complete run Fast Backup amp Restore Multicam System from the Windows Start menu This window appears Ze Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveil
156. 3 13 Image Enhancement To enhance the image quality of live video click the Show System Menu button No 5 Figure 8 20 and select Image Enhance This dialog box appears Image Enhance W Die Interlace De Block kW Enable DirectDraw Figure 8 29 De Interlace Converts the interlaced video into non interlaced video De Block Removes the block like artifacts from low quality and highly compressed vdeo Enable DirectDraw The DirectDraw setting is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames Uncheck this option to disable the DirectDraw function 404 D Remote Viewing 8 3 14 Remote Configuration Remote Configuration allows you to start stop recording enable disable UC monitoring and activate deactivate schedules to the remote GV System For this the remote GV System must grant the privilege first See the Enable Remote Control option in Figure 8 4 Click the Show System Menu button No 5 Figure 8 20 and select Remote Config to display the following dialog box Record Check the desired cameras to start or stop recording to the remote GV System Click the Send button to apply the settings Remote Config E Record monitor i 127 0 0 1 e Camera 1 e Camera 2 l n Camera 3 e Camera 4 l n Camera 5 Camera 6 l n Camera JH Camera 0 e Camera 9 MI Camera 10 JE Camera 11 M Camera 12 e Camera 13 Figure 8 30 405
157. 4 320 x 240 GV MFD110 V1 07 or later 1280 x 1024 320 x 256 GV BL110D GV BX120D V1 00 1280 x 1024 320 x 256 GV BL120D V1 02 or later GV VD120D GV VD121D GV VD122D GV VD123D GV FD120D V1 03 or later GV CB120 GV MFD120 V1 05 or later GV BX130 V1 04 or alter GV BL130 GV MFD130 GV BX220D 0 V1 00 1920 x 1080 448 x 252 GV BX220D 1 GV BX220D 2 GV BX220D 3 GV BL220D V1 02 or later GV VD220D GV VD221D GV VD222D GV VD223D GV FD220D V1 03 or later GV CB220 GV MFD220 V1 05 or later 1920 x 1080 448 x 252 GV BX320D 0 V1 00 2048 x 1536 320 x 240 GV BX320D 1 GV BL320D V1 02 or later GV VD320D GV VD321D GV VD322D GV VD323D 661 Appendix GV FD320D V1 03 or later GV MFD320 V1 05 or later GV MFD520 V1 05 or later 2560 x 1920 320 x 240 GV BX520 GV PT110D V1 07 or later 1280 x 1024 320 x 256 GV PTZ010D N V1 07 or later 704 x 480 392 x 240 GV PTZ010D P V1 07 or later 704 x 576 325 x 288 662
158. 5 18 22 23 25 2 29 30 32 32 33 34 38 40 42 42 43 45 47 48 50 51 52 53 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 System dle Protectoras EOT AUTO aen dE EE 1 6 2 Auto Login User without Access Rights oooccoocncconniocccccococnnonocononncnn ano nononnnnronnannos COS PAULO Stale RECON O ot SYSTEM OG WEE Tei NICWINGMEVENT EE le Te NEE EE Les Een lee WT E EE S Tee Date Reie II Ru Wee A a eat a Vaated allele seats 1 82 Special Days Schedule E 183 VOSchedul EE 118 4 Center Vz E TE Schedule Center aa AN EN ENN NN A E E ANEREN EN EN E A na nn ANEN EN EN EN NN A E KREE e 1 9 1 Compacting Video RT EE EE 19 2 Merging e E 19 3 Setting Backup Ee TEE E SCUIRO ee Alert ett REESEN e MS A A IP ENK WE dl Bellenger PIZ CONTO EE 1114 Mapping PIZ GaMeras scini iini aiii eos Wed E TZ Idle Ee te e EE 1 11 3 Auto switching PTZ Control Panels isnon ind ee WO e eet do PIEZA AUTOM ALON A dioss POD UD LIVE VICO sii rr Video Noise Solutions ccoccccccnnoncccocococonnnnnnnnnn co EN NN E A nn cn EEN NN A AE aran nn anna LASA Nose Ola o Deo tods 1 13 2 Noise Detection to Reduce File tGuze corn nn nano nn cnn cano rn rar nr nro EE SM NOSE GEN Picture in Picture NEEN Picture and Picture View en KEN KN EN KN EN ANN EN AN EN AN EN AN EN AN EN AN 94 54 55 56 57 57 62 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 70 74 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 90 92 93 95 96
159. 6 1 Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host 1 On the function panel click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 and select Remote ViewLog Service This dialog box appears Connect to Remote Viewlog Service al IP Address Port 5652 Default IE Guest Password Save Password Host Type o Figure 4 51 2 Enter the IP Address ID and Password of the remote video device Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary 3 Inthe Host Type select DVR or GV IP Device 4 Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the events of the remote video device appearing on the Event List Then you can use all ViewLog features for playback 280 D Playing Back Video Files 4 6 2 Retrieving Recordings from Multiple Hosts You can access the video files of up to 32 cameras from multiple hosts of GV Systems DVRs and GV IP devices For details see Creating a Group earlier in this chapter 281 D Playing Back Video Files 4 6 3 Retrieving Images of Object Index The images of Object Index include the Object Index Face Detection and Video Snapshot Through the Remote ViewLog Service you can retrieve all the Object Index images from another GV System on the network 1 Build the connection to another GV System on the network using the Remote ViewLog Service See Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host earlier in this chapter 2 Click the Advanced button and s
160. 7 48 50 51 52 53 1 68 SISIB MAD e e TEE 1 6811 Ad digeck Zotioufebi 3 lot 1 6 2 Auto Login User without Access Rights ooooocicinnnnnnininnniniccncococccnnos 16 3 AUTO Start RCCORONNGS ar ras iria LE eV SUC NON is lalol VIEWING EVOL LOIS aaa ES CN ee Event LOGS miis ios 13720 EC EVEN REI eege e e ese ea 19 Recording Schequle sar aia 1811 MIO Schedule avisarle a a 1 82 Special Days Schedule cats AA O A aa E T N 1 84 Gemer HEH a lista 1 9 Schedule Center id L91 Compacting Vid o Events aborda 1 9 2 gt Merging Video EVenIS cia 1 9 3 Setting Backup e UE 1 9 4 Setting VSM Gchedule kasna A Ra ORA 110 Alert NOUNCaUON ee t10 1 Setting Email GENEE enee neg a tenaieshiniae 1102 SEUNG HOUN SCIVICES aos 114 PIZ CON Polonia tenene cbunenebereade were tell Mapping PTZ Cameras ciar talco T2 SZ 0 Fole LOM EE 1 11 3 Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels ENNEN ENEE A LIA Ul TZ AUTOM le EE TAZ Een Live EES 1 13 Video Nolse SOLUTIONS ee aa IviSel INOI JEE Ode 1 13 2 Noise Detection to Reduce File ze E NOLE FIOT OOCPLCAE ON OO EE Sain 1 14 Picture n PICTUTS VW 1 15 PICIUFE ANG PICIUME VIEW sinnis EE Ss WE OT 117 Touch Screen SUPDO davant eege ege EE 1 17 1 PTZ and I O Control Pan l sssini lelfe2 TOLUCA Sereen Panel EEN 168 164 55 56 57 57 62 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 70 74 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 90 92 93 95 96 96 98 99 100 101 102 103 103 103 1 18 System E Hard DISK G
161. 7 10 24 24 PM 6 6 2007 10 24 29 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 25 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 30 PM 6 6 2007 10 31 35 PM 6 6 2007 10 32 32 PM 6 6 2007 10 32 37 PM Clicking the System Event Log button No 7 Figure 10 9 on the toolbar you can activities client login and logout and connection problems 7 Event lists From 6 1 2007 to 6 18 2007 SMS Log Browser File Tools View Help Status Success LCE Success Success Success Success Success Success Success monitor the server i i a a g ID System System System System EEN System System System Connection Login Logout Login Logout Login Logout Q e Message Success to get device GM862 PCS in COM2 Change server setting Server Setting Start Service The network connection of server is abnormal 1 1P 221 169 248 174 login 2 1P 221 169 248 174 login This account has already logged in Figure 10 11 Message Time 6 6 2007 12 57 19 AM 6 6 2007 12 57 56 AM 6 6 2007 12 58 02 AM 6 6 2007 12 59 12 AM 6 6 2007 12 59 37 AM 6 6 2007 1 01 37 AM 6 6 2007 1 47 31 AM 518 10 Short Message Service 10 5 Password Security To prevent unauthorized users from changing your settings set up an administrator password To apply the password security follow these steps 1 Click the Exit button No 6 Figure 10 1 and then select Change Password to set a password 2 Click the Exit button and select Logout Administrator to lock the SMS Serve
162. 8554 UDP Port 17300 17380 440 D Remote Viewing Functions Video Streaming Remote Playback RPB Audio from GV System and etc Handheld Device View GV Remote View V1 1 1 2 1 for BlackBerry Smartphone V1 1 BlackBerry OS 4 2 1 to 5 0 OS Supported V1 2 1 BlackBerry OS 5 0 to 6 0 Port Data port 8866 HTTP port 80 Functions Video Streaming I O device control Handheld Device View GV iView V2 2 0 for iPhone and iPod Touch iPhone with iPhone OS 4 4 3 to 5 1 OS Supported iPod Touch with iPhone OS 4 4 3 to 5 1 Data Port 8866 RPB Port 5511 HTTP Port 80 Command Port 4550 for PTZ control Data Port 5550 for PTZ control TCP IP JPEG Functions Video Streaming Remote Playback RPB PTZ control output control and etc Handheld Device View GV iView HD V1 1 0 for iPad OS Supported iPad OS 4 4 3 to 5 1 Data Port 8866 RPB Port 5511 HTTP Port 80 Command Port 4550 for PTZ control Data Port 5550 for PTZ control TCPIP JPEG Functions Video Streaming Remote Playback RPB PTZ control output control and etc Pon Data Pon 8866 HTTP Port 60 WSS Pore 10000 Functions Video streaming GV IP devices support Audio from GV IP devices PTZ control Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the video was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower 2 The remote playback RPB function does not support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices 441 D Rem
163. Advanced Video Analysis and select Wide Angle Lens Dewarping This dialog box appears Wide Angle Lens Dewarping Select the desired cameras Host Name Camera Name Local Camera 1 Local Camera 2 Local Camera 4 o Figure 4 26 2 Select the cameras to apply Wide Angle Lens Dewarping 3 Click the Gi button to adjust the level of dewarping This dialog box appears Wide Angle Dewarping Setting p Input Image Dewarped Image Setting Field of View Angle 0 360 la SSES Figure 4 27 4 Move the slider at the bottom to adjust the degree of warping The adjusted view is shown on the right 5 Click OK 252 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 13 Object Tracking in Fisheye View You can apply 360 object tracking to video recorded by fisheye cameras 1 Select a video recorded by a fisheye camera 2 Click the View Mode button select Single View select Geo Fisheye and select Geo Fisheye 360 degree Standard Thumbnail view Mega Pixel View PIP Mega Pixel View PAP Geo Fisheye Panomorph Geo Fisheye Dual 180 degree Geo Fisheye Single View Figure 4 28 3 Right click the fisheye image select Fisheye Option select 360 Object Tracking and select Advanced Settings This dialog box appears Digital Object Tracking Definition Mask Region Object Sze Dwell Time Of Motion Figure 4 29 4 Configure the object tracking settings See Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera in Chap
164. Alarm ee NENNEN ENER ENER Eu SAT SObecr Chuning sackets chide li S42 INTUSION Adina sia 3 9 GET JEE 30 1 Selina OBJECT IO essa Ce EE genee ta 3 9 2 VIEWING OD ect a 3 9 3 Searching Object Index ui dd 3 6 Automatic Video Snapshots ii id 3 6 1 Setting Video Snapshots wc cccesesceeceesseceeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeeasaeeees 3 6 2 Searching Video Snapshots sii os Sil NR OT NEEN 3 9 Face COUN E 3 8 1 Installing the Camera oonmciconccionccocccononononnnonnononnonnnononn nn nnrnnnnanrnnnnns 3602 Selg Race COU Mag NR 3 9 Unattended and Missing Object Detection coccconicicocncncnoncronanaroranaranaroranonos 3 9 1 Detecting Unattended Objects srievet a 3 9 2 Detecting Missing Objects oococcconoccconccccononoononocononoonconnancnnninnnnnnos 3 10 Privacy Mask Protection ged pi ri 3 101 Setting a Privacy Masai do 3 10 2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas uiae 3 11 Scene Change Detectio Masisira a aa a 3 12 Panorama Ve Wi das 3 12 1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping reaS 3 12 2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area 3 12 3 Accessing a Panorama VIEW Qc cc eceseeseeaeeeeeneneeteneeeensereneentes 3 13 VIGECOIDEIOG GING ainia 314 VIGGO Sta bili Z AUG EE 3 15 Wide Angle Lens Dewarping mcoccccoccononoconanaconanocanaranarornanaronanarararararararanano rs 3 16 Advanced Motion Detection wcciccccsscerccseeeesseeseereeeeaseeeeaeacseaeesseeeeseeeeeaeseeans 3 17 EEGEN 3 18 Advanced
165. Applications 6 1 1 Latch Trigger Instead of constant output alarm in N O and N C the Latch Trigger option provides a momentary alarm and allows you to set the alarm duration Setting up Latch Trigger On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories click I O Device and select I O Device Setup to select the Latch Trigger option See the red square in the dialog box below Input 4 H Mame Input 4 Signal Type e BO f AC lw Latch Trigger Output air r Mame Output 1 Force Output Monitor Input C Signal Type Rec videon 30 Sec C WMO AO Toggle fe MO Pulse e P Invoke Alarm Notify 60 Sec C ME MC Toggle C Ac Pulse SS Invoke to Send Alerts IS Output Module Mod 3 Pin gt BY Fame Register Input Event VO Device Setup VO Application Setting Figure 6 4 Application Example In the above scenario Input 4 is set to N O and Latch Trigger as well When Input 4 is triggered The camera starts recording for 30 seconds and stops itself until the next input trigger see the Rec Video option in the blue box Computer Alarm sounds once see the Invoke Alarm option The output Module 3 Pin 7 is triggered simultaneously based on the Latch Trigger mode see the illustrations below 309 FJ 1 0 Applications The following illustrations can help you understand different output signals see Purple Square in the above di
166. Camera Automatic Setup OK ae SF Rw STS Figure 2 7 Change Setting Changes the IP address port number username and password of the camera Only available when the IP camera is disconnected Change Resolution Changes the display ratio live view resolution and record resolution e Remote Camera Setting Accesses the configuration interface of the connected IP device Duplicate Camera Duplicates camera settings to quickly add multiple cameras of the same model You can choose to use the same IP address but different port numbers or use the same port number but different IP addresses for each duplicated camera Only available when the IP camera is disconnected Network Time Out When network disconnection exceeds the specified time period the camera status will be displayed as Connection Lost On Demand Display Enables automatic adjustment of live view resolution See the On Demand Display section later in this chapter for more details Change Live View Codec Changes the live view codec Change Record Codec Changes the recording codec Frames to keep in live view buffer Specifies the number of frames to keep in the live view buffer Record Stream Type Specifies whether to record in standard or Guardian Security Solutions type of JPEG MPEG4 H 264 codec GIS Setting Records the video with the GPS data To record the GPS data remember to also enable the GIS function of the GV System Conf
167. D Format option is enabled to back up files to DVD or 2 the CD Using OS Burning option is enabled to back up files using the inbuilt burning software of the operating system To back up files click the Backup button No 7 Figure 4 2 and follow the instructions in the Backing Up Files Using ViewLog section earlier in this chapter When the system splits backup files into multiple discs two backup modes are selectable The backup modes change when you exclude or include the player in the backup files For details on the two backup modes see the following sections 5 3 1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Files If you choose not to include the player inthe backup files there are two backup modes Mode 1 This mode intelligently burns files onto CD DVD by shifting the complete event s to a new CD DVD if space is not enough on the current CD DVD You may see some blue screen images at the beginning or the end of each CD DVD 1 When you start burning a dialog box appears Gr You Sure m2 Sl Do you want to reduce the disc contents el me Figure 5 4 296 3 L Backup Deletion and Repair For Mode 1 select No A dialog box indicating the number of required discs for burning appears Do you want to burn the files You will need 2 disc s to burn the files Figure 5 5 Select Yes to start the backup Mode 2 This mode will keep some buffers at the end and beginning
168. D Playing Back Video Files 4 7 Single Player When backing up the recorded files you can choose to include the player of ViewLog or Single Player see 5 2 Backing up Recorded Files Compared to ViewLog the Single Player provides simple and easy playback functions To play back the recordings using the Single Player open the backup folder and run GVSinglePlayer exe 4 7 1 Single Player Window To play back a recoded file click Files and click Open File to select the file you wish to play back To play back multiple recorded files together in up to 16 screen divisions click Files and click Open Folder to select the folder that collects several camera recordings i E GvsinglePlayer Open File Open Folder Move to prev 1 mir Move to prev mir Play Pause Move to nexi 1 mir Stop Move to nexi E mir Home End Backward Forward Figure 4 54 284 D Playing Back Video Files Right clicking the playback window can change the play mode and create special effects when you play video back Name Play Mode Render Tools Functions Includes these options Frame by Frame Plays back video frame by frame Real Time Plays back video on real time This mode saves waiting time for rendering but drop frames to give the appearance of real time playback Key Frame Plays back video with key frames only Smooth Playbacks Evenly distributes 30 frames per second When the play
169. D Playing Back Video Files Extracting Frames from a Video Event You can extract certain frames of a vdeo event and save them as another event 1 Click the Save As AVI button No 2 Figure 4 2 and select Display Merging List This dialog box appears Merging List Status Start Time End Time o Preview Eee 6 2004 17 13 48 634 6 1 2004 17 13 48 634 cidocuments A B Merging 2 o View Werge Log 5 Cancel All Jobs Figure 4 19 select a desired video file from the Video Event list Click the Play button on the Playback Panel to play the video To set the start frame click the A to B Mode button in the Merging List dialog box The button turns black If you want to reset the start frame click the Cancel button DC and then click the A to B Mode button again to set a new start frame To set the end frame click the Ato B Mode button The system starts extracting the specified frames from the file When the extract is complete the Status field displays Complete To view the extract click the arrow button on the list and select Play To view where the file is located click the arrow button on the list and select Open Path Note If you want to clear the entries on the Merging List click the arrow button beside the desired entry and select Clear The entry will be deleted but the saved file is still kept in the storage location 245 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 8 Saving Images You c
170. Disable GIS Data Figure 11 95 4 To enable the GIS function of GV System click the Configure button on the main screen select Accessories and select Enable Local GIS 5 Start monitoring The GPS data of the IP device will be recorded with its own video Note 1 Ifthe GIS function of GV System is not enabled at Step 4 the GPS data of the IP device will not be recorded on GV System 2 Ifthe remote GIS function of the IP device is not enabled at Step 3 the video of the IP device will be recorded with the GPS data of GV System instead of the GPS data of the IP device 625 11 15 4 Viewing GPS Locations during Playback To play back the recorded GPS locations with videos follow the steps below 1 On the ViewLog window click the Tools button and click Select Map API to select a map API Application Program Interface This dialog box appears Please enter the map authorization key or license key Key wi Please enter the website ofthe Map API httpuinaps google comJmaps default 2 work offline 2 Please selecta Map API Google Map Ma Lal Figure 11 96 2 Under Please Selecta Map API select a Map API 3 To play back GPS data click the Tools button and select Display GIS Window The first time user will be prompted for a License Agreement Read through the license terms before you click l understand and agree to continue 4 Select the events with GPS data from the Video Event list se
171. Do you accept this video Do you accept this video No Cancel Yes No Cancel i No Cancel Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 6 When a complete image is displayed click the arrow button to preview the file Click Yes to start the repair Click Yes to overwrite or No to save this file to another path Note if you choose No in this step remember to run Repair Database Utility again after exiting this program 304 Chapter 6 I O Applications cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 306 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Visual Automation e au NK ANN KR EN EN E KR EN EN KN EN EN AN EN EN E nr EN E KE EN Nu VO Device S CUD iia 6 1 1 6 1 2 I O Control Panel ee EN cece cee EN ce ENN see E E REN EN NN E nn ANER EEN NN ue Advanced I O Applications ees ee KR ENEE ER ENEE ER EERE EE KEREN E ER En 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 3 5 INPUT State Dele DE VO Enable SINO stan pci a Advanced O Pa o The Advanced I O Panel ono nonn nn none nn narran n aro anaana ana Creating a Group for Cascade Trggers 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 3 6 6 4 6 6 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 6 8 6 6 9 6 6 10 Managing a Group of VO Devices ooo cococnccccccocococcococonoconononnonnnonorcnon nor ononnnanoos 6 7 1 6 7 2 6 8 1 E E E E teria A E E ES Keeping Last Togale Status urinaria D e setting Up Actions Upon Input Trigger suscritas Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input Trigger o Setting Mome
172. E W Alarm Conditions gt 10000 And 100 Advanced i Alarm Output Module 1 Output 2 Alert Message Abnormal Transaction cancel Figure 7 18 Loss Prevention Setting Alarm Conditions Check this option and define the price range for an alarm condition For this example when the price amount in a transaction is great than or equal to gt 10000 and ess than or equal to lt 100000 the assigned alarm will be activated Alarm Output Assign an installed output module for the application Alert Message Enter a desired alert message To set up a notification type E Mail Hotline SMS refer to Send Alerts Approach in Chapter 1 357 Point of Sale POS Application 7 6 1 Setting Alarm Frequency To eliminate false alarms and increase monitoring efficiency you can set up alarm frequency conditions In the Loss Prevention Setting dialog box Figure 7 18 click Advanced This dialog box appears Advanced Setting W Frequency Condition Number of Occurrences ER Time Frame one hour H Return to the configured frequency conditions W Idle time 0 hours 20 minutes E Cancel Figure 7 19 Frequency Condition Enable to set up the number of event occurrences within a given time period to trigger the alarm Aa Number of Occurrences Specify the number of event occurrences Aa Time Frame Select one of the time periods one hour 12
173. E o e eano A A A A a oarecases esate Connecting from Address Book AE Importing and Exporting the Address BOOK ooocioiocciocociconiccccccococnconoccnonororcnnnanios Retrieving Recordings from a Single Host Retrieving Recordings from Multiple Hosts cnn co rcnonorcrnanco Retrieving Images of Object Index Resuming Backup A A o E 223 226 228 230 231 233 238 245 246 247 249 251 252 253 255 256 264 267 269 271 273 274 275 275 276 277 278 279 280 280 281 282 283 284 220 4 1 Songe Eine e EE AS GPS Tracks E ET 4 9 TOUCH Sereen SUD POM asii Eege Ee SeEEE 4 10 Fast Key Reference uni GAT Speciica lO Suicida 284 286 288 289 289 221 Video Playback Recorded files can be played back using different software applications offered by the system ViewLog Quick Search Remote Playback System and Remote Playback System WebCam version Following is a comparison table for these applications This is not a complete comparison table because many of these features are discussed in details throughout the manual However this table may help you to decide which application to use under a given situation Application ViewLog Object Search Quick Search Remote Playback Server WebCam version Single Player Description A full function player allowing you to play back video search a video event merge and export video and etc See 4 1 Playing Back on ViewLog A m
174. EN Video Analysis When any unattended object is detected in the camera view for the specified time its location will be highlighted in live video the selected alarm or output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Advanced Unattended Object in System Log for later retrieval If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this step Right click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert select Camera select Advanced Unattended Object Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset Alert Reset Background Model Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert The replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the camera view to detect changes The system will accept the unattended object from this point on and no longer generate any alert for it Reset Alert Disables and resets the triggered alert After the alert is reset if the object remains unattended over the specified tolerance time the system will still detect it as an unattended object and keep generating alert 205 3 20 Advanced Missing Object Detection El Video Analysis Compared to Missing Object Detection that can only be applied in the indoors the advanced version of Missing Object Detection can be applied in the outdoors The Advanced Missing Object Detection can generate an alert when any object disap
175. ER ENKER EEN EEN BIT Windows TEE 8 132 Windows omano hone ee ao weld eae 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 407 408 409 409 412 413 414 415 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 426 427 428 429 429 431 432 434 435 436 437 439 440 442 450 8 3 8 VisualP Z Control EEN 399 E Map Application s s 2225 222 48 91 The E Map Editor soster a a a enhance eee as The E Map Editor VV ne e EE 9 2 Greating an Ee PIC asia 9 1 1 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 3 Saring E Map EE 9 3 1 9 4 Starting E Map from a Remote Gute ee ENNER RENE ENEE EEN EE The Remote E Map Window oococcioccccccccococcnonocononononancocorononnnoss 9 4 1 9 4 2 9 4 3 9 4 4 9 4 5 9 5 1 9 5 2 9 5 3 9 5 4 9 5 5 Creating an E Map File for a Remote Host oococccococccccocccnnocannnss Setting Polygonal Map to Locate a Triggered Device Setting View Zone to Show the Monitored Area Setting the Pop up Map FUNCT ON nidad Logging in Different Hosts NEE Configuring the Remote EMan Viewing Host Information and Playing Back Video Accessing Remote ViewLogJQ oococcioccccccccococcconocononononancocoronononons 99 EMaD eel ina caida Installing E Map Seve EE The E Map Server WIndOW oocccococccccncconcnncnoconononnococononnncorononnninnos Setting E Map E Remote Monitoring via E Map Server onnmcicccococcconcncocnconnnonccco
176. EZSysLog exe from the backup file 292 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 2 Backing Up Recorded Files Using ViewLog you have three backup options Backup to hard disk Create CD DVD using a third party software e g Nero Roxio etc Create CD using Windows XP Vista Windows 7 inbuilt burning software To back up files 1 On the function panel click the Backup button No 7 Figure 4 2 This dialog box appears Backup Media Time Frame Using Hard Disk 0 111212010 10 53 28 2 3 2010 17 38 38 C SIBK 200301 06 Backup Folder Name SIBK20030106 e CD DVD Burning Software Media Information a Used Size Free Size OK Cancel Iw Include Player Viewlog Figure 5 2 2 Select a destination media to back up files Media Using Hard Disk Click to back up files to the hard disk you select Click the button to select the desired hard disk Backup Folder Name Enter a desired name for the backup folder Using CD DVD Click to back up files to the CD or DVD media using the third party software D Click the button to assign the desired burning software exe file When you click OK on the Backup dialog box Figure 5 2 the system will ask you to paste the backup files to the CDR Writer program and call up the assigned burning software for you to paste and backup files 293 L Backup Deletion and Repair If Nero software of version 6 6 0 14 or la
177. Enable Record button Starts stops recording the current channel Record All Channels The button is available when you press the Enable Record button Starts stops recording all channels Enable PTZ Activates PTZ controls Focus Far Focus The two buttons are available when you press the Enable Near PTZ button Use the two buttons to focus in or out the image PTZ Preset The button is available when you press the Enable PTZ om button It allows you to remotely move the PTZ to the preset points Auto Focus The button is available when you press the Enable PTZ a Activates the output controls e In Takes a snapshot of image 471 D Remote Viewing PTZ Speed Control for PTZ Cameras Click anywhere on the Live View screen of PTZ camera to bring up the PTZ Speed Setting panel Select your desirable level of PTZ speed Higher value means higher speed PTZ Speed Setting Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 4 Figure 8 91 Accessing l O Devices 1 Press the Enable I O button The screen similar to the following image appears 2 Use the left and right buttons to change the I O module and use the scrollbar to change the output device 3 Press IO Module 1 output 1 to manually force the output to be activated a A IO Module 1 output 1 A E y Figure 8 92 472 D Remote Viewing My Favorite On the login screen Figure 8 85 you can find the My Favorite option allowing you to add
178. Exit Description Click Use Defaul Path button or Search Hardisk button to start repairing Database Figure 5 8 The RepairDB Dialog Box 4 If your recorded files exist only in the predefined recording paths click the Use Default Path button The GV System will rebuild paths for these files in the predefined recording hard drives only 5 If your recorded files scatter across different hard drives click the Search Hard Disk button The GV System will rebuild paths for these recorded files in all hard drives connected to the GV System In this way more time will be required for building the database 301 L Backup Deletion and Repair Note The repair and the search function will not apply to the files that have been renamed manually 2 Use this Utility if encountering any of the following scenarios in ViewLog 1 A question mark appears right before a video file in the Video Event list 2 When you click the Playback button no video is displayed even a file is selected 302 L Backup Deletion and Repair 9 6 Repairing Damaged Video Files H the computer has been shut down improperly e g due to power failure use this function to repair the damaged video files Tip When a computer has been shut down improperly the first thing you do before starting the GV System is to run Repair Database Utility After running the Utility go back to ViewLog and view Video Events You should be able to pl
179. F gt ze rg p p p gt d CRT a a p gt a gt gt CR GE p a Pra CR CR sa bE gt a p KR e Sg ZC WK e LE re bE Pa ae s re Fe P CR LE EEN BE be E OR e CR E O e L ra ra ra CR bd CR K gt a gt LE In e mn e ra Pe ps e E e ba gt a Pu mm e Aa a A Le Le Lei E E FE gt d va e Pp g g me me gt P re re gt RK LE La E a Q gt e ra PE a Pa Sg gt lt L p p LA pa 5 KE gt PA e a p LE 2 gt gt b p b ea KR Te KE KL P gt gt P S CG EI ra ra ra Pg gt s A TET b4 p gt b e e e Y e a Pa e O ee Sg CR ba ba ba b Pai gt gt e e OH gt gt gt lt p L es gt EY EA p p p b n gt gt gt gt e ra ra pr A p ra i CR mn e mr e wh ra ra ra ra ra ai d CR CR e Kg ba ba ba bas ba kA gt L b A E E E P p he gt L gt lt re bp ba bpa ba T ze gt e gt a SA ra rs rs ra ra re gt ze sr e rs ee ra ba ra ra ra p ESA LR CR CR CR s E SE ba pt hd p E pd p hd me e KE e s ae BE Pa E ba pa ra gt TF E od sf b gt CR bas L b 4 b b gt b ns E zs L nr e ze sr e PE Pa ee P a O a hs Te L gt L L gt lt Pa L ba ba La rea bE a p Bei Sess HA gt PSS PA ka ka ka ka O p ra rg b fr e Le rg ba d od
180. Figure 1 36 2 Type the new password information and click OK to save the changes Note Only Supervisors can change the password Di Configuring Main System 1 5 3 Retrieving Password Through E mail The password retrieval function can serve inthe following ways after you click the Send Password button at the Login window Figure 1 36 If you are one of supervisors but do not remember your ID separate passwords will be sent to all Supervisor e mail accounts after you click the Send Password button If you are one of the supervisors and remember your ID but forgot your password enter your ID and then click the Send Password button The password will be sent to your e mail account If you are not a supervisor enter your ID and then click the Send Password button The e mail with your password will be sent to you a Configuring Main System 1 5 4 Preventing Unauthorized System Termination The GV System can be protected from stopping or restarting by an unauthorized user To restrict a user who does not belong to the Supervisor level from existing or restarting the system follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit The Password Setup dialog box appears Select a user from the user list to display its properties Select the Multicam tab at the bottom and clear the E
181. File Tool Et E General settings NVR camera settings Camera List 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 0013E20 GYDSP LPR Cameral GY IPCAM Camerat GY IPCAM Camerat GY IPCAM Cameral GY IPSpee Camera GYV IPSpee Cameral GY VSO2A Camera GY SO02A Camera2 YSO4A4 Joy Cameral YSO4A Joy Camera2 YSO4A Joy Camera3 AAO AN las 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 3 192 168 1 192 168 2 192 168 3 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 4091604 nna3sc3n Dispatch Pattern a amp x N R1 E il Camer a GY IP Camer 192 16 0013E YS04A Camer 192 16 0013E ON ON P GA A AH Figure 2 13 7 When you finish selecting the IP cameras export the IP camera mapping settings A Select the tab of the IP camera mapping settings NVR1 2 3 you want to apply and click the Export button on the Dispatch Pattern toolbar The Save As dialog box appears B Specify the file name ipcd and the storage path of the IP camera mapping settings C To export more sets of IP camera mapping settings repeat the steps above 8 Import the IP camera mapping settings into the GV System A Close the GV IP Device Utility window return tothe IP Device Setup dialog box and select Import Camera Le IP Device Setup Serer address 1 Pot
182. I O option is only available when the camera is set to the Round the Clock recording mode 2 The Max Recording Frame Rate is subject to each camera s maximum frame rate 3 When the video is recorded using JPEG compression method every frame is a key frame 131 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 11 On Demand Display For cameras that support dual streaming with different resolutions you can select the On Demand Display option to enable automatic adjustment of live view resolution This option produces good image quality without causing high CPU usage You will need to set one video streaming of the camera to be higher than the other streaming The system will switch to the higher resolution streaming when using view modes that require higher quality images such as single vew or PIP PAP mode When watching live view in vew modes where higher resolution does not make a difference such as a 16 channel screen division the system will switch to the lower resolution streaming to reduce CPU usage To enable the function 1 Make sure the IP camera has been added to the Main System and you have selected Dual Stream during setup For details on how to add an IP camera see P Channel Setup earlier in this chapter 2 Click the Configure button select System Configure select Camera Install and select IP Camera Install The IP Device Setup dialog box appears 3 Right click the camera and select On Demand Display IP Device
183. I w Port Password L Run at Startup To avoid the DEP Data Execution Prevention warning message please go to Windows Start gt Control Panel gt System gt Advanced tab gt Settings button in Performance field gt Data Execution Prevention tab gt Turn on DEF for all programs and services except those select gt Add gt Locate C WINDOVW S explorer exe gt Apply and OK gt Restart your computer Not connected Figure 7 9 POS Data Sender 6 Select Serial Port and select the COM port that the POS device is connected to 7 Click Start Service to send graphic data to GV System The GV System must be configured and ready for this application To set up the GV System see POS Device Setup later in this chapter 348 Point of Sale POS Application 7 2 2 Network Connection 1 Connect the GV System and POS device to the network as illustrated below o LEE An SBRN POS Device GV System USB dongle Figure 7 10 2 Insert the Software DVD to the POS device It runs automatically and a window appears 3 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Paid Software 4 Select GV POS Data Sender Only for Graphic Mode POS System and follow on screen instructions to complete the installation 5 Select POS Data Senderfrom Windows Start Menu The POS Data Sender dialog box appears 6 Select TCP IP 7 Type Password or modify Port value to match those on the GV System if necessar
184. Installing GV Skype Video Utility o oocoocociionocnnnnnononcnoconononoconororonononnnos 11 20 2 Setting Up Notifications Upon Motion or VO Trigger cee eeee eee tteeeeeees 612 613 614 614 616 617 618 620 621 622 622 624 625 626 628 631 631 632 633 634 635 635 636 637 638 642 643 644 925 Useful Utilities This chapter discusses some advanced features and utilities that could help the administrator to maximize system performance in a security network 11 1 Dynamic DNS The Dynamic DNS is an application that allows you to register domain names that always point to your GV Systems This application is only necessary when your GV System is using a dynamic IP address The DDNS will update GV System s IP address to DNS Server every 10 minutes Therefore even if your GV System s IP address changes you can still locate it by using the registered domain name Dynamic DNS supports Windows XP Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 and Windows 7 but it does not support Windows 95 98 or ME Note Dynamic DNS uploads IP addresses over the Internet through ports 80 and 81 If your GV System is connected behind a router or firewall make sure ports 80 and 81 are enabled Dynamic DNS will only upload global IP addresses If your GV System is using virtual IP NAT port mapping should be done first IMPORTANT The DDNS service is provided purely as a favor to you We hope it simplifies the p
185. K Delete Cancel Figure 8 40 Camera Setting 6 Select the device type of the host 7 Enter the IP address username and password to log into the host 8 In the Camera No drop down list select one desired camera channel from the host 9 Keep the port settings as defaults otherwise modify them if necessary 10 Click OK Quick Creation of Multiple Hosts 1 Click on a desired monitoring window which will be highlighted in the red frame 2 Click and drag acamera from the Host List to the monitoring window The selected camera then is displayed 3 Repeat the step 1 and 2 to configure other monitoring windows for different cameras 4 Click the Save Camera to Multiple Host button No 28 Figure 8 35 to create the Multiple Hosts 416 D Remote Viewing 8 6 6 Video Recording You can save live videos in a client computer The files in AVI format are playable at the third party viewer Click the Save button No 25 Figure 8 35 and then select all or several cameras to start recording For the recorded folder see Video and Audio in System Configuration later in this chapter 417 D Remote Viewing 8 6 7 Camera Polling To add cameras to the polling group 1 Click the Add Frame button No 14 Figure 8 35 and then click the monitoring windows The selected windows will be framed in red color 2 Click the Video Polling button No 18 Figure 8 35 The application will rotate the selected cameras in the spec
186. List Figure 10 14 SMS Setup Mobile Setup 4 Click one mobile phone icon and then check the Add to SMS List item for the mobile phone setup Type the Country Code and Mobile Number Click other mobile phone icons and follow Steps 4 and 5 to set up the rest of two mobile phone numbers separately 7 Click OK to apply above settings 8 Start monitoring When the specified events or motion is detected SMS alerts will be sent out automatically 521 10 6 3 Setting Alert Notification To specify the types of events to receive alert notification 1 10 Short Message Service On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Send Alerts Approach Setup The Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box Figure 10 12 appears Select Send Event Alerts click the Arrow button and select the events to send alert notification Click OK To send SMS alerts when motion is detected 1 2 3 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Camera Configure The Camera Configure dialog box appears In the Motion Detection section select Invoke to Send Alerts Motion Detection Motion Sensitivity 95 e Ip Mask Filter zc N EHE e W Invoke Alarm Notify W Invoke to Send Alerts Low W Output Module Mod 1 Pin 1 IS Register Motion Event Figure 10 15 Click OK For details on the Invoke t
187. Live Log Browser to bring up the Advanced Log Browser See Advanced Log Browser in Chapter 4 BR Live Log Browser Recycle Log 8 23 2007 18 52 eat Mitar System Login Counter Pos 2 Time Device Information E vent 10719 2007 3 13 33 PM Camera 3 Video Lost 10192007 3 13 33 PM Camera 4 Video Lost 10192007 3 26 12 PM Camera 3 Video Resume 10192007 5 42 52 PM Camera 4 Video Lost 10192007 6 05 26 PM Camera 4 Video Lost 1019 2007 6 05 50 PM Camera 3 Video Lost 100192007 6 05 57 PM Camera 3 Video Resume 10192007 7 29 38 PM Camera 4 Video Lost 10192007 7 50 55 Ph Camera 3 Video Lost JD 1 2 A 4 A E H D 3 lt Figure 1 47 Di Configuring Main System 1 8 Recording Schedule You can program recording I O devices and Center V2 services to turn on and off at specific time each day Click the Schedule button No 15 Figure 1 2 and select Schedule Edit to display the following window The window has three major tabs Video Schedule A schedule starts the surveillance system automatically O l OSchedule Aschedule starts I O surveillance automatically Center V2 Schedule A schedule starts the connection to Center V2 services automatically CenterV2 Schedule I O Schedule Setup hedule Ps Video Schedule gw i We e k ly Sche du e E Time Monitor Invoke Camera V Rec Round the clo v vives 7 E St San amos oo Special Day Schedule Se e Ga Fs For End pm 17 00 p Remote
188. Live View in the previous Camera Setting section 2 To send a notification message to multiple Skype accounts upon input trigger follow the steps from To Send a Notification Messages inthe previous Camera Setting section 3 Click OK to apply the setting 647 history red phone button to end the video call Click the Answer button to receive camera live view When you finish watching the live view click the Receiving Notification Messages and Live View 1 Useful Utilities After setup is completed the designated Skype user will see a notification message as well as an Incoming call L Answer incoming callto receive live vew upon motion detection or input trigger Decline Busy x el O Seguridad calling C Answer Decline zl Call from Seguridad Seguridad Camera 2 Motion Event Oms Il Figure 11 204 De Sk H pin d erro Skype Contacts Conversation Call View Tools Help e 0 Me Figure 11 205 Note If the incoming call is not picked up the Skype user will see a missed call record in the call 648 KOR Useful Utilities Requesting Live View from a Remote PC or Mobile Device 1 Log in Skype and select the Skype account of the GV Skype Video Utility from Contact 2 Click the IM button GJ and type Cam 1 to view the channel 1 or type other channel numbers To view single channel live view type channels 1 to 32 To view one of the 8 quad views use channels 33 to 40
189. Main System you can decide whether to apply the simple input trigger output setting in the Advanced I O Panel For example you have seta simple access system in the Main System Input 2 card reader triggers Output 3 the door opens Monitor Input l Rec Video D REA Y Invoke Alarm Notify OU Invoke to Send Alerts P Signal Type a pI p vw Output Module Mod 1 Pin 3 e MO NC Latch Trigger S i iw Register Input Event VO Device Setup VO Application Setting Figure 6 32 But to tighten security you may seta group Garage in the Advanced l O Panel Both Input 1 power switch and Input 2 card reader should be activated together to trigger Output 1 light Output 2 alarm and Output 3 the door opens in a cascade series Simply activating Input 2 card reader shouldn t cause any output triggers in the cascading hierarchy 3 4 Garage 48 Input power switch 34 Input 2 __ Card reader Output 3 door opens Output 1 _ light E Output 2 alarm Outputs door opens Figure 6 33 So now you have the options At default the simple input trigger output setting is applied at the Advance I O Panel when I O monitoring is activated For this example Input 2 will trigger Output 3 To only apply the cascade triggers set in the Advanced UO Panel and ignore the simple input trigger output setting enable Use adv Logical input result as input status from the I
190. Modify default values if necessary 4 Optionally specify a Password for hosts to access multicast 5 Click the Camera and Audio buttons to select which camera and audio is accessible through multicast 6 Select another Network Card if available to run multicast on a different network Since the multicast can take a lot of bandwidth when enabled separating it from the main network is advised whenever possible 429 D Remote Viewing Note If you select different network cards belonging to different networks for multicast ensure the receiving end of the multicast service is connected to the same network or IP sequence For example if the IP address assigned for multicast is 192 168 2 x the receiving end should also use the network card of 192 168 2 x Multicast IP 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 Receive broadcast audio Multicast IP 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 e GE WEE meee 8400 Cancel Default Network card selection at the receiving end Receiving Audio Broadcast 1 If you like to receive audio broadcast from other hosts on the GV System select Receive broadcast audio By default the IP address is 224 1 1 3 and port number is 8400 to receive broadcasting Modify default values if necessary 2 Click OK to start the WebCam server Now the GV System can not only deliver the multicast stream but receive audio broadcast from other hosts Ensure a speaker is installed on the GV System 430 D R
191. Non Motion or Non l O Trigger option 6 Under the Motion and I O Trigger Setting section select one of the following options to specify the conditions to begin recording according to the Economic Frame Rate Setting you set in Step 5 Motion and I O Motion First The video images will be recorded according to your selection under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section when motion is detected or when the I O device is triggered However when both motion detection and I O trigger occur at the same time the frame rate setting of motion detection will override the frame rate setting of I O trigger Motion and I O I O First The video images will be recorded according to your selection under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section when motion is detected or when I O devices are triggered However when both motion detection and I O trigger occur at the same time the frame rate setting of I O trigger will override the frame rate setting of motion detection Motion Only When motion is detected the vdeo images will be recorded according to your selection in Max Recording Frame Rate of Motion I O Only When I O devices are triggered the vdeo images will be recorded according to your selection in Max Recording Frame Rate of I O Trigger 7 Click OK to apply the settings and select Start All Monitoring to run the application 130 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution Note 1 The Max Recording Frame Rate of Non Motion or Non
192. Number of addresses in the IP pool 10 cancel Figure 2 6 2 Type a Starting IP address and specify the number of addresses in the IP pool to include In the case of the figure above IP devices using IP address between 192 168 0 1 and 192 168 0 10 will be added 3 Click OK GV System will automatically try to establish connection with IP devices within the defined IP range The username and password are set to admin by default If the camera does not use the default settings the status will be displayed as Connecting To change the login settings right click the camera and click Disconnect Camera Right click the camera again and click Change Setting to modify the username and password 120 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 5 4 Customizing IP Camera Settings To configure IP camera settings such as frame rate codec type and resolution right click the desired camera to see the following list of options IP Device Setup Server address Port Video Resolution Brand Add Camera 1192 168 1 165 10000 Ho Disconnect 192 168 1 231 10000 No Disconnect _GY BL110D_Seri L 6v Smart Box C Display position b Delete camera Change setting Change Resolution Import Camera Remote camera setting Duplicate Camera IP Device Utility Network Time Out On Demand Display Change live view codec Change record codec Frames to keep in live view buffer Record stream type GIS Setting Automatically adjust DST Scan
193. Object Setup dialog box see Setting Object Index earlier in this chapter 167 a Video Analysis Note 1 Face contour must be clearly seen 2 Only faces tilting within the range of 15 vertically and 30 45 horizontally can be detected 3 The face to be detected must cover at least 1 10 of the screen 168 a Video Analysis 3 8 Face Count The Face Count function allows you to count the number of faces that appear in the image You can also select to invoke a computer alarm or trigger an output device when a face is detected or when the system is unable to detect a face The number of faces counted is saved to the GV Web Report and the GV W eb Report can analyze counting data from multiple GV Systems For details see GV Web Report User s Manual Note Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this function 3 8 1 Installing the Camera 1 Install the camera inside an entrance pointing horizontally outward The Face Count function is designed to detect front vew faces only and the area of the detected face must take up 10 to 50 of the live image Y Camera Camera Selection Camera 1 D Definition Mask Region C Detected Face Size Setting Alarm Type Mask Filter Inverse Alarm E Option Reset at 12 o clock s Enable upon input trigger Sensitivity 3 Detection Interval sec 10 Iw Invoke Alarm F Output Module Mod y Pin q Ta 7 Never Recycle E Schedule Test O can
194. Output Module Mod 1 Pin 1 Register Motion Event El Video Lost Connection Lost Output Module Mod 1 lee 1 Figure 1 8 Camera Settings Camera Name The name entered here will appear in the upper left hand corner of the camera screen You can use the drop down list to select the camera to be configured Rec Control The Rec Control section allows you to set each camera s recording mode and frame rate For analog cameras you can also adjust the recording quality and resolution here Apply to all cameras l Day Night Rec Mode Setup For IP cameras EE Rec Frame Rate Setting kW Rec Video y Day Night D Rec Frame Rate Setting Recording Quality gt For analog cameras Codec Settings Figure 1 9 Rec Video Enable the recording function Use the drop down list to select the desired recording mode Motion Detect Round the Clock or Day Night Di Configuring Main System Right Arrow button Click to set up the recording frame rate quality resolution codec or Day Night recording mode for the selected camera Day Night Rec Mode Setup This option is only available when Day Night Recording Mode is selected allowing you to set up different recording modes during different time frames of the day For details on Day Night mode see Setting Day Night Recording Mode later in this chapter L Rec Frame Rate Setting Allows you to set the maximum recording frame so as to sav
195. PP A A o o go 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 2 System Configuration cursi aid 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 3 Audio and Video WC Lu Le E 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 14 Camera MOnitOniinG micro 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 5 Account and Password eene KEN AN ENN E AN ENN E AN EN E ANE EN KR EN ENN KN EN EN E KN 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 A o UN Mstaling Cameras Aere TO Enavliiig ne REC ONGING EE PIAVING BACK VIGO EE General cuna ere Setting Data Sage ai toi Adjusting Camera Configuration ee Setting Day and Night Recording Mode ococcccccnccccinccoconcnococcnononocononononononnnnnos Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings cooococcnonccnococononononononnnnonananononenencannonoconenons CUSTOMIZING Startup E ele EE Customizing RI ed EE oeng AUTO REI tasea aos de SAO TI o Setting Video Source and Resolution oococonnccccccococonnncoconocnononnnncnonononnnnonrnnnnnnanos e Lilien Ee Md ii Adius Ung Video AMMIDULOS in EE EE AQUUSINOAUA OSCURO EE TUDO MOE aussi dr dd Se PSSOCIALS MONTO Md taa obli Daviight Saving Time Recordin Garenn aai a Gredtng an ISSAC NEE Changing Password ON LOGIN cnccococciccccococncononcoccnonnnoncono no nono non annn nn nan rcrnnnnnrnrnnn nano Retrieving Password Through E mail EEN Preventing Unauthorized System Termnaton Setting Double Passwords for View og ACCESS ococococccnncococonoceconoconcconononononanononos 11 11 1
196. PTZ Device and select EN Configuring Main System A Select the brand name from the drop down list click the button B gt Select Active Note that without this step the PTZ camera will not be added to the system C gt Click OK PTZ Control Panel After the PTZ cameras are added to the system you should now see the PTZ Control button on the screen Click the button to bring out the on screen control panel shown as follows PTZ Switch La Lx Close FA 4 Pan Tilt Control Esch oon 3 Preset Switch Panel Figure 1 73 PTZ Switch Changes the PTZ model to be controlled Close Exits the control panel Pan Tilt Control Allows the PTZ to pan and tilt to any angle Zoom Control Allows the PTZ to zoom in or out Focus Control Adjusts the camera focus 6 e e e e Iris Control Adjusts the camera iris The iris Control buttons are only available for GV IP Speed Dome Option Moves the PTZ to a preset point by clicking the preset number Functions included in the Option may be different in terms of PTZ models Consult the manual of the connected PTZ model Preset Switch Panel You can also enter a preset number using the onscreen keypad displayed For the supported PTZ models see Appendix B Di Configuring Main System 1 11 1 Mapping PTZ Cameras This option assigns a PTZ camera to its corresponding camera channel for either the local or the remote applications You must first make
197. SC EE i Figure 9 9 The E Map Viewer Window The controls in the E Map Viewer window No Name Description 1 Popup Settings Selects desired cameras and I O devices for the pop up map function 2 Toggle Popup Toggles between popup and non popup function 3 Tree View The tree view of E Map files and folders 4 Blinking Icon The blinking icon represents a triggered camera or an I O device 5 Output Icon Manually forces an output device 6 Camera Dome Icon Views the live video associated with that camera dome 494 al E Map Application 9 3 1 Setting the Pop up Map Function The E Map Viewer window can be set to pop up with the blinking icons indicating that cameras or input devices are being triggered To set up the function follow the steps below 1 Click the Popup Settings button No 1 Figure 9 9 2 Select desired cameras and input devices for the application and specify Dwell Time for the interval between pop up maps Any event trigger will be ignored by the system during the interval to avoid map popping up frequently 3 Click the Toggle Popup button No 2 Figure 9 9 to enable the function 4 Minimize the E Map Viewer window Once any camera or input device is triggered the map will pop up on your screen immediately 495 al E Map Application 9 4 Starting E Map from a Remote Site Activating and viewing E Maps over a web browser is possible through the WebCam server To do so follow the steps belo
198. Scene Change Detection ek ENKER EEN EEN EEN E ENEE EE un 3 19 Advanced Unattended Object Detection ae ENKEN ERR EEN REENEN 206 209 152 153 154 156 158 158 160 161 163 163 165 167 169 169 170 173 173 175 178 178 179 180 182 184 185 188 189 191 193 195 197 200 203 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 Advanced Missing Object Detection Sekt ENEE ENEE EEN EEN ER NEE EEN EEN Video Analysis Schedule diia eege ebe 3 21 1 Privacy Mask Schedule assi SEENEN ENN inson Ia ees PCRa Aa EA weds der ARA ae 3 22 1 Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera 3 22 2 Setting Up a Third Party Fisheye Camera onmncicicioncciconnocinincnnnanso DESEM eege 206 209 211 212 213 215 219 Video Playback zegegeeg eNsekegiee EEN idos 222 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 Playing Back OM ViewLog ad 4 1 1 Playback Screen Layout 4 1 2 Playback Seit re NET EE 4 1 3 Recycling Option for Video Files oooooccccnonoccconnococcnncnnconanononos A A iat 4 1 5 Searching a Video Event wo cc ececseecseceeeeeseeeeeeeecseeeeereeeeeeeeneeeegs 4 1 6 Merging and Exporting Video EE 4 1 7 Extracting Frames from a Video Event nccininnnnnnnncncnccococcininnos did SAVINGAIMAG CS tidad a ALI a lao Milne LE 41 10 Setting Fade E Aci Displaying GPS Daniela 4 1 12 Adjusting Distorted Views 4 1 13 Object Tracking in Fisheye View ou ecececeseceeeeesseeeeaeaeeeeseanes A114 Event S eaten Tor Limit ica cnonnaaiad aaele Act Advanced
199. Se an dees ae Visual AUTOMATION EE 8 3 9 8 3 10 8 3 11 8 3 12 8 3 13 8 3 14 Picture in Picture View Picture and Picture View image Enhancement at ais Remote Configuration oococccocicncncnococcconnncoconononanonn A a a DU IL VICIO WI VIE WE E 9 9 MUNMIPVWINGOW ENNEN eege 8 6 Muhi View IEN ee dE 8 6 1 Installation of Multi View ENEE 86 2 MOST RE 8 6 3 Ghannel Status normanda a 8 6 4 Creation Of a Host conncccccconncccconoccconccooncn noc ono nnr cn nana no nan annn nn nara cn nara 8 6 5 Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host G 0 0 VIdeo RECORGIING cara GE Camera PONDI eebe ee laa tea lili 8 6 8 Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream o cocoiciccocccnnnnoncnnonos A tee 8 6 10 8 6 11 8 6 12 8 6 13 8 6 14 8 6 15 8 6 16 Visual PTZ Control Panel iniciada BUE Oe ege o e O ued eee REMOTE VIEWLOQ EE System Configuration aida En Gamera EE MOST REENERT a EE cOn Mage Ee 8 7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast mmmiconicinoninecococononancnnanaronanararanararararararoarernanos 8 7 1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings occo onnncionninico ommm o 8 2 2 Sending Audio Broad aS uni Ae See 8 7 3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast coociccocniccoccconoconononnnnns 8 8 JPEG Image VIEW a ad 8 9 Remote Playback aan as 8 10 rette 9 11 Event LIS QUE ona 8 12 iDownload Center ainia acc ds 8 13 Mobile Phone Applications ee RER ENER EEN EEN EEN EN
200. Select a vertical or horizontal panel Click OK for the above settings At the upper left corner of the screen an information window indicating date time and storage space will appear Left click it to open this touch panel Figure 4 58 288 4 10 4 11 Fast Key Reference D Playing Back Video Files To view the fast key list click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 point to Took Kit and then select Fast Key The ViewLog fast key list appears Feature Support for Defogging Support for Stabilizer Specifications Notes Yes 82 channels Yes 82 channels Support for PIP View Yes Support for PAP View Yes Support for Panorama View Yes 4 sets of Panorama View Videos Exported as AVE Files Yes Object Search Yes Support for Fisheye View Yes 289 D Playing Back Video Files Chapter 5 Backup Deletion and Repalr 291 5 1 Backing Up Log Data ENT 5 2 Backing Up Recorded Files 0ccccccceseececeseceseesneesseesensneessessensseeses 29D 5 3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple DiSCS cccconniccccncooonancoaononznan 296 5 3 1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Eles SEI 5 3 2 Including the Player inthe Backup Fles SEI 5 4 Deleting Recorded Files sees ee KENNEN ENEE EE EE ENEE Eu vn uen 299 5 5 Repairing Damaged File Raths eeeeeee NEE KEREN KEEN nuunuu nunne ennn seenen OOT 5 6 Repairing Damaged Video Files See eKER NEEN EEN ENER E Nee ve een GOO 290 290 Ba
201. Storage later in this chapter ER Configuring Main System 1 2 2 Setting Data Storage You can change storage locations of recorded files and event database files You can also enable or disable the recycle function for recorded files Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select General Setting In the General Setting dialog box you can see the storage information in the middle as illustrated below Video Log Storage Available 23 6868 Recycle Log 5 4 2071 14 38 Set Location qe vw Recycle Figure 1 6 O Available Indicates the remaining hard disk space Recycle Log Indicates the recording date of the next video file to be deleted Recycle When this option is selected the oldest files will be deleted when the system requires storage space for new files If it is not selected the system will stop recording when disk space is full CJ Right Arrow button Select the Enlarge Recycle Threshold option and specify the recycle threshold Recycle threshold is the file size at which the recycling begins The upper limit of the recycle threshold is 99999 MB By default the system has the following default settings Default Data Storage Settings Storage Location Recorded Files AGV folder lt camxx or audxx folder gt Event Database Files GV folder lt camxx or audxx database file gt Recycle Function Enabled Di Configuring Main System Setting the Even
202. Toggle Status cin ii a 311 0 2 VO Control Panels aceite 9 19 6 3 Advanced HO Applications ii annealed Ee 6 3 1 Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trgger cee reenen 6 3 2 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Input Trigger 6 3 3 Setting Momentary and Maintained Modes seeen 6 3 4 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input Trigger 6 3 5 Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger 0 4 Input State Deet aia 605 WO Enable Seung aitor 0 6 AUVancea 11O Panel rana int id 601 The Advanced O Panel sosa 6 6 2 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers coocioiconiccnomccnococcnnnocnonanooss 6 6 3 Configuring the Advanced I O Panel cunncionnninonncniniococccononinocinnnnnos 6 6 4 Setting Up Mode Schedule cc cceccecseececeeesseeeeeeeseeereereeseaneaness 6 676 FORCING EL EE 6 6 7 Editing Background Image ira in 6 6 8 System Wide THIS ici AAN 6 6 9 The Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam Option 6 6 10 Managing a Group of I O Devices occ cece eects eeee eee teeeeeaees 6 7 VISUALAUTOMANO NN WEE 6 7 1 Setting Visual Automat om a dict ak cncaditdlncdianssteecmaaknenenas 6 2 USING ViSUallAUtOMalO EE 6 8 NIESEN nt 68 1 SEWING a eil IT 314 315 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 323 324 327 328 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 336 337 338 339 d Point Of Sale POS Application ssssssssssss 341 TA textMode POS Devi Ce e Se Ee EE
203. Video Lost 200741001 22 10 59 Camera 4 Video Lost 2007410411 22 15 50 Camera 3 Video Lost 20074041 22 15 50 Camera 4 Video Lost 2007 10 12 14 29 03 Camera 3 Video Lost 200K 10 12 14 29 03 Camera 4 Video Lost 2101012 14 4 Ad Camera A VWider ost ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 T D 1 2 q Exit Items 29 Figure 4 42 Advanced Log Browser 267 No Name 1 Open 2 Reload 3 Filter 4 Backup 5 Print 6 Monitor Table 7 System Table 8 Login Table 9 Counter Table 10 POS Table 11 POS List 12 Exit Filtering 13 Cancel Filtering D Playing Back Video Files The buttons on the Advanced Log Browser Description Opens an event log Select Reload All Table or Reload Current Table to refresh loaded data Defines the search criteria See Filter Settings later in this chapter Select All Tables to back up all log data or selects Current Table to back up the current log table you are at Prints the current log table Displays the monitor log Displays the system log Displays user s login logout log Displays the counter log Displays the POS log Accesses one POS channel for log data Exits the browser Appears to indicate the filtering process is being performed You can click it to cancel the filtering After the filtering is complete this icon appears dimmed 268 D Playing Back Video Files 4 3 1 Filter Settings You can define filter criteria to search the desired log data You can also i
204. Video Lost Beep To stop a beep noise when any of videos lost click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools select Video Signal Diagnostic and select Disable Video Lost Beep 1 18 5 FastKey Lockup If you wish not to use certain fast keys and do not want them to interfere with the keyboard use you can disable the fast key functions 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools select Tool Kit and then select Fast Key Lock Setup This dialog box appears Fast Key Lock Setup Ei W Lock Sensitive Fast Key El E Ei E Ei El E Ags PZA 7 7 ha r F Cancel Browse Figure 1 91 2 Check Lock Sensitive Fast Key and check the fast keys you want to disable To restore the fast keys uncheck them again 3 Click OK to apply your settings ER Configuring Main System 1 18 6 FastKey Reference This option lets you view the fast key windows of Main System and PTZ Control giving you an instant reference Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools select Tool Kit and then select Fast Key List to display the fast key table of Main System Click Next to display the table of PTZ Control ER Configuring Main System 1 18 7 Memory Limit The GV System can automatically warn you on high memory usage to prevent system instability The memory monitoring and warning function requires your system to be Windows XP SP1 or later The memory limit of GV System or Ma
205. View Figure 8 103 3 Type the IP address port number user name and password of the GV System you want to access 4 You can tap the button next to RPB with Time and specify a time to see videos recorded after the specified time 5 On the bottom of the screen tap the Add button la w to save the connection information 480 D Remote Viewing 6 Tap the Connect button K to connect to the GV System The videos recorded from camera 1 will be displayed 11 33 49 2011 10 20 11 32 49 2011 10 20 11 31 49 2011 10 20 11 30 48 2011 10 20 11 29 48 2011 10 20 11 28 47 2011 10 20 11 27 47 2011 10 20 11 26 46 2011 10 20 11 25 46 2011 10 20 11 24 45 2011 10 20 11 23 44 2011 10 20 11 22 44 2011 10 20 11 21 44 2011 10 20 11 20 43 2011 10 20 11 19 43 2011 10 20 11 18 43 2011 10 20 11 17 43 2011 10 20 11 16 42 2011 10 90 Previous page Figure 8 104 To play back a recording tap on the time of the recording 8 To see more recordings from the same camera press the menu button and tap Next Page to see more recent recordings or tap Previous Page to view older recordings 9 To switchto a different camera press the menu button tap Change Camera and select a camera 481 Other Functions Menu Options in the Address Book Tap the NVR DVR View tab and then tap the menu button This page appears gt GVAView NVR DVR View Demo Site webcam geovision com tw 8866 Figure 8 105 EJ
206. Visual Automation This feature is only available when the Visual Automation is configured ahead on the GV System To access this feature click the I O Control button No 8 Figure 8 20 and select Visual Automation Right click the green I O icon on the left corner to manage the alert areas such as displaying embossing and changing colors to alert areas Click the alert areas on the image to force the outputs to be triggered remotely 17 34 44 Play 0999 A a Figure 8 28 401 D Remote Viewing 8 3 11 Picture in Picture View With the Picture in Picture PIP view you can crop the video to get a close up view or zoom in on the video This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the surveillance area To access this feature right click on the screen and then select PIP For details on usage see Picture in Picture View in Chapter 1 402 D Remote Viewing 8 3 12 Picture and Picture View With the Picture and Picture PAP view you can create a split vdeo effect with multiple close up views on the image Atotal of 7 close up views can be defined This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the surveillance area To access this feature right click on the screen and then select PAP For details on usage see Picture and Picture View in Chapter 1 403 D Remote Viewing 8
207. ab and activate the settings of communication ports 3 Click OK to start the WebCam server 468 D Remote Viewing Note If there is a router or firewall installed ensure these communication ports required by the WebCam server are open HTTP Port 80 HTTPS Port 443 if SSL is enabled Live View Port 8866 and RPB Port 5511 469 D Remote Viewing Accessing Live View To access live vew on your mobile device 1 Activate GV iView onthe mobile device 2 Onthe login screen enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 8866 ID and Password Then press Connect Once the connection is established the live display of 6 cameras will appear 3 Select ON for HTTPS if SSLis enabled for WebCam Server If the default SSL port of 443 on the WebCam Server is modified specify the new port number used for HTTPS connection at the end of the IP address Connect Live Connection Setting Favorite Name Host name HTTPS OFF webcam geovis 8866 test Password ETIT My Favorite Favorite eem RPB View Figure 8 89 Note If the default HTTP port of 80 on the WebCam Server is modified specify the new port number used for HTTP connection at the end of the IP address 470 D Remote Viewing Other Functions After you enlarge one channel you can find the following buttons for control il Carrier gt PTZ preset 1 Record One Channel The button is available when you press the
208. access all ViewLog features for playback 423 D Remote Viewing 8 6 13 System Configuration Click the Configure button No 9 Figure 8 35 to display the following window At the left panel select General Display Video and Audio or Network to start your configuration General Display Video and Audio Network pit 1024x768 32 Resalution Active Camera Startup Fast Key Initial Screen EN View i Division Default Video Polling Polling time Default Server Status Server Status Refresh Time Never hinute Default Camera Status Camera Status Refresh Time Never Minute Default Figure 8 43 The Configure Window General Display e e e Resolution Select the Multi View screen resolution The options available here depend on the monitor resolution of your PC Initial Screen Select screen divisions at startup Polling Time Specify the camera polling time from 1 to 60 seconds Server Status Refresh Time Specify the frequency to update the host information Camera Status Refresh Time Specify the frequency to update the camera information Active Camera Select the maximum number of screen divisions allowed on the Multi View Fast Key Click the View button to display the fast key table of the Multi View 424 D Remote Viewing Video and Audio Folder Path Specify a path to save recorded files Max Video Clip Specify the maximum time length of e
209. access the PTZ functions tap Live View on the top and then tap the JPEG option for Streaming Type This page appears You can control the live view with the direction arrows zoom in out and home position buttons Y Live View Remote Play Back Streaming Type H264 jPEG oma Q Qt Figure 8 108 484 D Remote Viewing 5 To play back tap Remote Play Back This page appears Search recordings by defining the camera date and start time If the vdeo is recorded on a Daylight Saving day select Yes for DST Rollback Live View Y Remote Play Back Camera List Date 2012 10 19 Start Time 00 00 Lee 2012 10 19 00 03 16 2012 10 19 00 08 17 Figure 8 109 6 The matched results are shown Click the video icon for instant playback 485 D Remote Viewing Chapter 9 E Map Application 2 2 48 9 1 The E Map Ee 07 9 1 1 The E Map Editor Window e 408 9 2 Creating an E Map Fille cooonccoicnnicncncocccccconcoconcoonanronncannannnnnanronnanrranaa nan u en 409 9 2 1 Creating an E Map File for a Remote Host 491 9 2 2 Setting Polygonal Map to Locate a Triggered Devce e 492 9 2 3 Setting View Zone to Show the Monitored Area E 493 9 3 Starting EM cuicos E 9 3 1 Setting the Pop up Map Function e 499 9 4 Starting E Map from a Remote Site ooocononiconnciccoconcoocoroonannnonannnonanzanozn 496 9 4 1 The Remote E Map Wimgow E o 496 9 4 2 Logging in Different Hosts Aa ENEE Nun 498 9 4 3
210. ach recorded file Audio Select the audio quality to be Normal Real Time or Smooth For the details of the three quality options see Audio Configure in Video and Audio Configuration in the section of Single View Viewer earlier in this chapter Enable DirectDraw See the same features in mage Enhancement in the section of Single View Viewer Enable DirectDraw for resolution of 320 x 240 or higher Select this option to apply the DirectDraw on the live Images of 320 x 240 or higher resolution The option conserves the system s CPU resources since the DirectDraw is not applied on the resolution lower than 320 x 240 CJ Enable DirectDraw for all resolutions This is the default setting Select this option to apply the DirectDraw on all live images in any resolution Caption Select what kind of caption to display on the monitoring window Network Displays the communication ports of the Multi View 425 D Remote Viewing 8 6 14 Camera Status To show the camera status of the selected GV System click the Camera Status button to display the following window Camera ON indicates the camera is active No Privilege means you re not authorized to view this camera Clicking the View button will bring up a small window displaying the selected camera s video Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the information in this window Camera Status Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera
211. ad 2 8 GHz hannels 320 GB GV 1480A x 2 Core i7 920 2 66 GHz 750 GB E Configuring Main System Activating Turbo Mode 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select A V Setting and select Video Source This dialog box appears Video Source m Video Setup Video Standard NTSC_M Video Resolution 640x480 Figure 1 27 2 Use the drop down list to select the Video Resolution If D1 or VGA resolution is selected the Turbo mode option appears 3 Select Turbo mode and click OK 4 You will be prompted to restart GV System Restart the GV System to take effect Di Configuring Main System 1 4 Camera Monitoring Click the Monitor button and select to start or stop all or individual camera monitoring Camera Name in the upper left corner of the vew screen changes from yellow to red color when motion is detected Blinking represents that motion is detected in the camera view F7 is the shortcut key of this operation 1 4 1 Snapshot To take a snapshot of the current frame click the Camera Name and select SnapShot to open the Save As dialog box shown as below You can select to watermark or de interlace the snapshot as well as tagging the frame with Host name Camera name Time and Date Select Transparent Text if you want to make the tag background transparent and select Set Font to choose your text font Save As fx Save inc Cp SnapShot si Dirr ES My Recent Documents
212. ager The system allows you to send a custom sound file to the telephone For this operation a microphone must be installed on the computer of the GV System To record a sound file follow these steps a Click the Rec button This dialog box appears y Sound Sound Recorder alma Fie Edit Effects Help Position Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec Figure 1 69 b Click the Record button to start recording Speak the message script clearly to the microphone Click Stop button when it is done c Click the Play button to listen to the recording To save this sound file click File select Save as and then click the Change button This Sound Selection dialog box appears Sound Selection untitled Save Ags Format PCM Attributes 18 000 kHz 8 Bit Mono Fkbrsec e Cancel Figure 1 70 d Select PCM 8 000 Hz 8 bit Mono the only format supported for this feature and then click OK To find a sound file click the Browse button to locate the file Add the path of the file to the field and the file will be sent with the telephone calls Hotline Option Specify the interval between hotline alerts The option is useful for the frequent event occurrence by which any event triggers during the interval period will be ignored Hotline Attach Audio Message Specify how many times to repeat the audio message when a telephone call is made to you 1 11 PTZ Control With the PTZ control panel you can control PTZ f
213. aight 6 The resulting image is displayed in the Preview window If satisfied with the result click OK to exit the setup dialog box If not re enter the 3 points for stitching 7 lf you want to stitch a third image or more click Manual Setting and repeat Steps 3 to 5 multiple times 8 When you finish stitching images click the Save Before Exit button No 6 Figure 3 43 to save the created panorama view before exiting the Panorama View Setup dialog box Note The resolution of the images to be stitched will be reduced to 320 x 240 A panorama view has a resolution limit of 1920 x 1080 Once the limit is reached you cannot stitch more images to the created panorama view 3 12 2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area When you have multiple camera views covering areas right next to each other with no overlaps the Easy Mode allows you to simply place camera views together Figure 3 46 Note Up to 16 camera views can be stitched together to create a panorama view 1 Select Easy Mode Video source must be the same resolution No 12 Figure 3 43 185 EI Video Analysis Use the Source drop down list No 14 Figure 3 43 to select the first camera view to be placed in the panorama and click the Add o button The first camera view is added to the Preview Window i Panorama View Setup 2 a Rs 0 41 Panorama selection te Easy mode video source must be the same resolution Panorama 1 D Source C
214. al specified If the face is detected within the interval the door will be open otherwise the door will remain locked When Mask Filter Inverse Alarm is selected the system will attempt to detect the faces for the number of seconds specified For example if you set the interval to 15 seconds the alarm will be triggered if the system cannot detect any faces within 15 seconds after motion is detected Option Enable upon input trigger The system will begin detecting only when the input device is triggered Assign an input module and pin number for the device Saves counting results to GV Web Report Saves the face counting results to the GV W eb Report When the option is selected the dialog box below appears Type the Domain Name or IP Address Port UserName and Password of the GV Web Report After settings click the Test button to see if the connection is succeeded Web Report Domain Name or IP Address Port UserName Password Test Figure 3 32 Invoke Alarm Activates the computer sound alarm when faces are detected under Mask Filter or when the system is unable to detect faces under Mask Filter Inverse Alarm Click the button to designate a sound file to be the alarm sound 171 EI Video Analysis Output Module Activates the output device when faces are detected under Mask Filter or when the system is unable to detect faces under Mask Filter Inverse Alarm Assign an
215. alculator senan masanancnm areata iadaneumennene asian e lie U Oe TEE Stopping Video Lost Watchdog oococccccoonccccccococonnonononocnonorononno 1 18 1 1 18 2 1 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 ch Rh hb sch mb Deactivating Video Lost Beep AE Fast REID ao Fast Key Rele ria sen eny san Ueecveniisan Gnnttnnewiei ts Memory UE ais Version AMFON A ATOM ara azi 105 105 107 107 108 108 109 110 110 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 0 112 2 1 Guardian Security Solutions IP Video Products tie tates 112 2 2 Dongle Reg ire men di a 2 3 Hybrid Solution Description zeen eege ENEE 24 NVR Solution DescrptON asnicar iia E 2 9 El ER TT ra 2 5 1 2 9 2 2 9 3 2 9 4 2 9 Camera Mapping Using GV IP Device Utility o oococoomoromommmommmor 2 10 ECONOMIC MOOG o deeg 211 OR Demand ni TA E 3 1 Obj ct Tracking and ZOOMING WEE 3 1 1 Adding Cameras Manually aria ii bs Sie Illu Gal Cl dao io EIER Customizing IP Camera Settings A 2 07 PITZ IP Came lal Ee EE 2 1 RESP COMME CUON EE 2 8 ONVIF amp PSIA Conn GC thoi EE ODICGL Mae e EE 113 114 115 116 117 119 120 121 123 124 126 127 129 132 3 Video AnNalySiS ss 2 TOO 136 136 3 20 Advanced Missing Object Detection Nee EEK REENEN ENEE EE ENEE EEN un 3 21 Video AnalysiS Schedule dividida al 39 9 Eeer IN PAP EN aaa Ee 3 4 Object Counting and Intrusion
216. alog box working with the Latch Trigger option 1 N O Normal Open Latch Trigger Once the input triggers the output the output will be triggered for a short moment and then turn off itself N C N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O N O N O N O 2 N O Toggle Latch Trigger Once the input triggers the output the output will keep triggering until a new input trigger N C N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger 3 N O Pulse Latch Trigger Suppose you set the Pulse time to 60 second Once the input triggers the output the output will remain ON for 60 seconds before turning off itself N C N C N C N C 60 sec 60 sec Input Output N O N O N O N O 310 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 1 2 Keeping Last Toggle Status This feature can memorize the current output state when the monitoring is stopped or the system is restarted For example suppose the output is lights When remaining on the premises you stop monitoring but the triggered lights remain ON not affected by the system state Setting up Keep Last Toggle Status In the I O Device dialog box Figure 6 1 select N O Toggle or N C Toggle and click the Arrow button beside to check Keep Last Toggle Status Signal Type CO N0 f NO Toggle E NAO Pulse ie C M C NYC Toggle w Keep Last Toggle Status Figure 6 5 Application Example Following two illustrations help you understand how the input works with t
217. amera 2 D Selected Source Figure 3 47 To add a second camera view select the camera from the Source drop down list kK To place the camera view on the left or right of the first camera view click the EI icon and select to place the second view on the Left or Right of the first view ES ic Panorama View Setup alel s EK Panorama selection z Easy mode Vide H soure e mustbe the same resolution Panorama 1 D Source selected Source Figure 4 48 To place the camera view above or below the first camera view click the Al icon and select to place the second view on the Top or Bottom of the first view 6 Repeat the steps for any additional cameras 186 EI Video Analysis Note You will only be able to add additional cameras next to the last camera view added For example when adding a third camera you can only use the direction buttons EI Be in relation to the second camera You will not be able to go back and select the first camera 7 To specify the width and height of the panorama view click the Customize Resolution icon select Enable and type the Width and Height in pixels Customize resolution i Enable Width Height 800 500 een Figure 4 49 8 When you finish stitching images click the Save Before Exit button before exiting 187 EI Video Analysis 3 12 38 Accessing a Panorama View Click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 point to Live Panorama View and
218. amp Camera 7 Camera a Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Host Informations Camera ON VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST VIDEO LOST Figure 8 44 The Camera Status Window Hast Name IF Address Wiser Name 1127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 E view view view view view view view view view view view view view view view Wen E E E E E E E E E H E E pol Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Mo Privilege Refresh 426 D Remote Viewing 8 6 15 Host Information To show the host information of the selected GV System click the Host Information button No 12 Figure 8 35 to display the following window The Host Information window contains the following three categories Use the control tabs to toggle among them Hast Informations Host Name 127 0 0 1 IF Address 127 0 0 1 Liser Mame E Alarm List Th Host Informations E Log List EI Alarm EN 2006 02 11 4 So 11 21 06 Alarm List Figure 8 45 The Host Information Window Alarm List Displays a list of alarm events occurred in the selected GV Syst
219. an add the connection information of multiple GV Systems to the WebCam server for quick access later Click the Show System Menu button No 5 Figure 8 20 and select Change Server to display the following dialog box Change Server The Host na drop down list New Server Default New Delete Host Mame New Server IF Address Et Liser Mame Password Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port 6550 SCH Figure 8 21 Change Server To add a server to the drop down list click the New button In Host Name field type a name to identify the GV System Type the IP address or domain name of the GV System Type a valid username and password to log in to the GV System Leave all port settings as defaults at 4550 5550 and 6550 respectively unless otherwise necessary Click the OK button Then the created GV System will appear in the drop down list 392 D Remote Viewing 8 3 3 Video Recording Click the File Save button No 10 Figure 8 20 to save video in a local computer Files saved in AVI format are playable at third party vewers Use the slider to adjust the time length of each saved clip 393 D Remote Viewing 8 3 4 Alarm Notification The Single View Viewer can be set to display up to four captured images in the control panel upon motion detection or input trigger To enable the function follow these steps a Alarm Notify Motion SAS gt y 2074 11 06 2014 11 06 sti 2 ae Te eee O ES
220. an save the current camera view as an image file 1 Click the Save As Image button No 3 Figure 4 2 This dialog box appears Gil Save As Save in 45 Public Videos v ki ER Ey ri Er Recent Places d se Sample Videos pS Libraries Computer Network File name Y Save as type Windows Bitmap bmp ze Cancel Stamp Text on the Image J Host name V Date De Interlace Transparent Text V Camera name lZ Time Y Watermark Set Font Figure 4 20 Stamp Text on the Image Select whether to include host name camera name date and or time stamp on the image Selecting Transparent Text will create the stamp on the transparent background Selecting Watermarkand Deinterlace will include the two features inthe saved image The image Click on the image at the bottom to preview the stamp text Click on the image again to close the preview window 2 Name the file select a file format and then assign the location to save the image file 246 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 9 Printing Images You can print images in three layout styles single vew quad view or multi view 1 Click the View Mode button No 8 Figure 4 1 to decide the screen layout Note that Thumbnail View is not available for print 2 Select an event in the Video Events list No 6 Figure 4 1 and then click the Print button No 4 Figure 4 2 This dialog box appears Page Setup l q image Ratio and Position
221. and enter the set token code 7 When the Settings window Figure11 20 appears select Windows in the Desktop Type field and then exit from the window 8 Click the Log Off button to log off the GV Desktop and enter the Windows desktop The token code and file are also required here 942 KR Useful Utilities 115 Authentication Server The Authentication Server is a password and account management system for multiple GV Systems The Authentication Server administrator can create the accounts with different access rights to a group of GV Systems Once the GV System is connected to the Authentication Server the previous password settings in local GV Systems will be invalid Local GV Systems will submit to the full control of the Authentication Server 11 5 1 Installing the Server To install this application in a remote server follow these steps 1 Insert the Software DVD It runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Click GV Authentication Server and follow the on screen instructions 943 11 5 2 KR Useful Utilities The Server Window Go to Windows Start click Programs click AuthServer and click AuthServer This window appears e Authentication Server Online Ai DVR List 35 London o EMap Server List 27 New York Control Center List 2 Taipei Client Name TEST111 Client Name TEST111 Client IP 127 0
222. and Export executable file You can copy the exe file to another computer and apply the same translation revision by running the exe file 2 To report the translation revision back to Guardian Security Solutions e f your default mail client is Outlook Outlook Express or Mozilla Thunderbird click Tools Export and Send Report to send the revision e lf your default mail client is not set up or supported click Tools Export and Export text file 3 For the distributors to duplicate Software DVD with the translation revision e Copy and paste all the contents of Software DVD to your computer Export the revised translation file and rename the file as MRevise exe Move MRevise exe to the location you saved the contents of Software DVD Software Translation Revision Duplicate the Software DVD with the MRevise exe file Test the Software DVD by clicking 10 Import Translation Revision from the Install Program window to apply the translation revision 641 1 Useful Utilities 11 20 Skype Video Utility The Guardian Security Solutions Skype Video Utility allows you to receive live view or text notifications through a Skype account using a PC or mobile device upon motion detection or input trigger You will need to install Skype on the computer of the GV System and the notifications can be sent to other Skype accounts GV IP Camere D Motion amp Input Trigger e Live View e Alarm Messages Mobile devices 8 in
223. and eelere eene 11 61 Installing The FBR Programi sirana rial 11 6 2 CUSTOMIZING LOGO and BUMOIV duda iaa is 11 6 3 Customizing the Features oc ccccececsseceeeeeseeeeeaeeeeesneereeneaeens 11 6 4 Backing up and Restoring Settings occ eceeeceeeeeeteeneeee eens 11 7 HOTS Wap Recording WEE 11 7 1 The Media Man Tool Wimdow 11 7 2 Viewing Disk Drive Status cc ccceceeseceeeeeseeeeeaeeeseeseereeseeeeanes 11 35 SAGGING a RTE 11 7 4 Removing a DISK Drive ENEE 11 7 5 Logging In Automatically at Startup occ creer eteeeeeeeeees CEAO Seta LEDS MEL Seegen Ree EE EE Detten Gg 118 BACKUP SEVE Pina cds 11 8 1 Adding a DISK Volume ee 11 8 2 Enabling Backup Server E o A da Hea MiS Adwanced Settings vrai 11 8 4 Manually Adding Files for Backup oocoococcccciccoccconiccocononcninnonnnoo 1180 TE e e E E EE 11 8 6 Retrieving Recorded Files oococcccococcconococononococnonononococonoancnnonoss 11 8 7 Viewing Backup olal S sisi NR te VICW E HH Usage Requirements Ee EE e IER Starting Backup Viewer iii a TOS J PCMOrminG QUES aa 11 9 4 Viewing the Event Files EEN 11 9 5 Using Remote ViewL0Q cocicococcccccoccincioconnnncocnnnoncnconnronocnnaronnnannonos 11 10 Bandwidth Control Applic ation ssssesessssssnsnusnnnnnnnunnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 554 557 557 558 559 560 562 563 564 566 567 568 569 571 571 573 574 577 578 580 581 582 582 583 584 585 586 587 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
224. and gives optimized image quality The adjustment could be done manually or automatically When a video signal is weak for example due to distance adjusting the brightness or contrast of the video source will NOT help the situation Adjust AGC and see the difference Di Configuring Main System In the Auto Gain Control window click Auto for auto adjustment click Defaultto apply default values or click Apply to apply the displayed settings The default value is set to 1 15V 115 but you may move the slider to adjust between 0 3V 30 or 2 5V 250 ER Configuring Main System Advanced Video Attributes In addition to adjust standard video attributes you can adjust image quality and codec With the advanced settings youcan even see the difference in image size after you have these adjustments Multicam This feature helps you to see the difference in image size after you adjust video attributes codec and recording quality Your selection here will also be applied to the assigned camera Advanced Video Attributes Multicam WebCam Centerv2 Control Center Camera 2 T Codec Selection Original Image Compressed Image Brightness Recording Quality Contrast Saturation Keyframe Hue 12 776 Kbytes 1 362 Kbytes HDD Calculator Image Size een Figure 1 24 Camera drop down list Select a camera channel for the application Codec Selection Select a desired type of compression Image
225. anel Displays the Advanced Search panel when the Quick Search is opened Favorite Search Text Click the Add button to create a list of favorite texts for search When you use the Find Text drop down menu on the panel this list is available for use Up to 100 kinds of texts can be added to the list 2 4 D Playing Back Video Files 4 5 Address Book With Address Book you can save the connection information of multiple hosts and quickly access them for video playback in the future The host you can remotely connect includes GV System GV IP devices GV Backup Center GV Storage System GV Recording Server GV Failover Server and GV Redundant Server 4 5 1 Creating a Host Account To create a host account in Address Book follow the steps below 1 On the functional panel click the Tools button and click Address Book This window appears Host Group List FOOD As gt O S LENTE GV Recording Server List GV Backup Center List gly GV Storage System List 4 GV Failover Server List GV Redundant Server List wf Group List Figure 4 48 2 To add a host account click the Add Host button This dialog box appears Add a Host Host Name IF Address Port 5552 Default Remember Account ID ET Password Server Type DVR Camera Count 16 Group Mame cana Figure 4 49 2 5 D Playing Back Video Files 3 Type the connection information of the host including Host Name
226. anel and select Large System Configure Video Analysis Accessories Digital Matrix Setting Add Remove PTZ PT Device Setup LO Device V Camera Mapping PTZ Dome POS Application Setting j PTZ TO Panel Normal d Capture Device Setting Auto Switch PT Panel Figure 1 87 1 17 2 Touch Screen Panel The touch screen panel allows you to switch to ViewLog and full screen by the touch of a finger To open the panel follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools select Tool Kit point to Touch Screen Panel and then select Panel Setup to display the following window Touch Screen Panel Setup Jh Activate Ce Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only T O Always Active Layout Ce Vertically Horizontally Figure 1 88 Di Configuring Main System Activate Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only Launches automatically the panel when the full screen view is applied Always Active Always displays the panel on the screen Layout Choose a vertical or horizontal panel 2 Click OK to save the above settings 3 Aninformation window indicating date time and storage space will appear at the upper left corner of the screen Right click it to open the touch panel as shown below Figure 1 8 9 No Name Description 1 Indicator Indicates date time and storage space 2 ViewLog Opens the ViewLog 3 Full Screen Switches to a full screen 4 Login Chang
227. apServer Port Use Remote Authentication Figure 11 34 2 Select Use Remote Authentication If you want the Authentication Server service started automatically at Windows startup select Automatic Keep the Port 80 as default or change it if necessary Click OK 554 1 Useful Utilities 3 Click Tools on the menu bar and select Remote Authentication This dialog box appears Remote Authentication Metwork Setup Server IP 127 0 0 1 Semer Port 3663 Default Authorized ID 123456 Authorized Password Client Hame 1 Figure 11 35 4 Type the IP address authorized ID and authorized password of the Authentication Server Type the E Map Server s client name created on the Authentication Server Click OK 5 Click the Start Service button on the toolbar to start the E Map Server When you log into the E Map Server enter the user ID and password created on the Authentication Server A list of assigned GV System hosts to the user will be displayed Accessing from Control Center The Control Center can access account settings of the Authentication Server 1 On the Host List right click Host List by ID and select Remote Authentication Setup A dialog box appears See Figure 11 35 2 Type the IP address authorized ID and authorized password of the Authentication Server Type the Control Center s client name created on the Authentication Server Click OK to enable connecting to the Authentication Server
228. apixel Stream in Chapter 8 for more details 216 a Video Analysis 3 22 3 Object Tracking You can now set up object tracking in fisheye live view to track moving object The function is only available when the fisheye camera mode is set to be Geo Fisheye 360 degree When motion is detected in the fisheye the top right channel will start tracking the moving object and in the 360 degree view at the bottom the moving object will be highlighted Di Camera 1 Figure 3 69 2 Right click the fisheye view select the camera number and select Geo Fisheye 3 Right click the fisheye view select Fisheye Option select Camera Mode and select Geo Fisheye 360 degree d Right click the fisheye view select Fisheye Option select 360 Object Tracking and select Advanced Settings This dialog box appears Digital Object Tracking Definition e Mask Region C Object Size Min Object Size O Dwell Time Of Motion 5 sec Figure 3 70 217 EI Video Analysis 5 Use the options below to customize object tracking Mask Region Use the mouse to outline a mask region where motion will be ignored Object Size Click the EN button to pause the live view and then use the mouse to outline the maximum and minimum size of the targeted object Dwell Time of Motion After a targeted object stops moving the highlighted region and the top right channel will remain fixed on the area for the number of seconds specified Any new mot
229. ations 6 8 Virtual I O Control Through TCP IP connection the GV System can remotely control the I O devices connected from the GV 1 O Box of Ethernet module GV Wiegand Capture and GV IP devices On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories click I O Application and select Virtual I O Setting This dialog box appears Virtual 1 0 device setting Select virtual VO device HR Device Add ov IP device D Remove a Modify Signal Type Module Device Description c d Iw Enable GY IP device Demo GY BL11 Output 1 HRS Name p Force Output F Enable Signal Type Ce E r c DEET i Sec x Figure 6 37 For details on the settings in the Virtual O Device Setting dialog box see O Device Setup earlier in this chapter Note The Enable option in the Signal Type section of the dialog box can turn on or off the I O device of the added IP device 338 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 8 1 Setting a Module Up to 16 connected I O devices can be combined to be one module for the GV System to use Note that UO devices from GV Video Server GV Compact DVR and GV IP Camera can be combined to build a module However I O devices of GV Wiegand Capture or GV I O Box can only combine with those of another GV Wiegand Capture or GV I O Box to set up a module 1 Ensure the GV IP device GV Wiegand Capture or GV I O Box of Ethernet module has added to and recognized by the GV Syst
230. ave As dialog box appears 3 Select the destination drive to store the backup file When the backup is complete this message will appear Successfully Backup MultiCam System Settings 560 1 Useful Utilities Restoring the System You can restore the current system with the backup of configuration file Also you can copy this backup file to configure another system with the same settings as the current system 1 Open the backup file exe you previously stored A valid ID and password are required to display this window Ze Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System all Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveillance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below User s Restore MultiCam System or Administrative Rights El zs Restore Defaults Restore Remote AP Figure 11 41 2 Click the Restore Multicam System icon and then select which backup settings you want to restore Press the Next Step button to start restoring When the restoration is complete this message will appear Successfully Restore MultiCam System Settings Restoring Defaults You can choose to restore the system default settings by clicking the Backup System Settings or Restore Defaults icon and select Restore Defaults 961 KR Useful Utilities 11 7 Hot Swap Recording The program Media Man Tool provides a hot swap feature allowing a non stop recording You can add and remove a hot swap or portable hard drive to t
231. ay back all video files at this step However if what you see is a question mark after clicking on the file the problem may be that the recording process was interrupted To repair the file run the AVI Repair Utility and follow the steps below 1 Double click AVIRepairAPl exe inthe GV folder This dialog box appears e AVIRepair 1 Select source file to repair Browse Source File Path DAGYV1 480 cam1 4 0304 Event2003030421 462301 7 avi 2 Select repair method AV file only C Auto Compression Type Resolution IMPEGA 320 x 240 3 Click Repair to start Repair Pea Figure 5 9 Click the Browse button to find the damaged wdeo file H you Know the codec and resolution of the file select Manual select Compression Type and type Resolution Alternatively you may select Auto and the system will run all combinations for you Please note it takes longer time to repair with this selection 4 Click the Repair button to start 303 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 You may see the distorted image or No Image on view screen if an incorrect codec and resolution were chosen For this click No for the next combination until a complete image appears Distorted Image No Image Complete Image Preview Dialog Preview Dialog Le Resolution 320x240 Resolution 640x480 Resolution 320x240 Compression Type MPEG 4 Compression Type MPEG 4 Compression Type Geo MPEG4 ASP Do you accept this video
232. b This dialog box appears Object Tracking Zoom In Object Advance Single Camera Tracking PTZ Selection Camera 16 D Setup m Selection Iw Eanble Tracking Idle Mode GVIPSpeedDome Camera 16 1 Home Preset s LE Speed Level Idle Time sec Sensitivity Schedule Y Support Zoom Function Test The priority of Object Tracking is higher than Advance Single Camera Tracking when both functions are enabled simultaneously Normal D Cancel Figure 3 13 2 Select the camera from the PTZ Selection drop down list 3 Select Enable Tracking This dialog box appears PTZ Selection Device Addr Cancel Figure 3 14 4 Specify the camera brand and its hardware address and click OK 5 Move the Speed Level slider to adjust the speed of PTZ movement The higher the value the faster the PTZ moving speed 147 10 11 12 13 a Video Analysis Select Support Zoom Function to be able to zoom in and out Select Normal and the camera will zoom in once on the moving object Select Deep Zooming and the camera will zoom in three times on the moving object Click the button to adjust the direction and zoom level of the camera To set the camera to return to its home position or a preset position when no motion is detected for a certain time period specify Idle Mode and Idle Time in seconds Click on the button to preview the designated position Note that your camera will ne
233. back appears choppy select this option to enhance the smoothness Auto Play Next5 Minutes Plays back video up to 5 minutes Audio Turns on or off the video sound audio denoise Includes these options e e 6 6 8 e Deinterlace Converts the interlaced video into non interlaced video Scaling Smoothens mosaic squares when enlarging a playback video Deblocking Removes the block like artifacts from low quality and highly compressed video Defog Enhances image visibility Stabilizer Reduces camera shake Text overlay s camera name and time Overlays camera name and time onto the video Text overlay s POS GV Wiegand Overlays POS or GV Wiegand Capture data onto the video Wide angle lens dewarping Corrects distortion toward the corner of the camera view Fisheye Select Geo Fisheye to choose a camera mode Mega Pixel View Enables PIP or PAP view Display GPS Shows the location on the map where the video is taken through GPS Select GPS Map Apply after restart Select a type of GPS map to apply Full Screen Switches to the full screen view Snapshot Saves a video image Save as AVI Saves a video as av format Download Downloads the video clip from the DVR or wdeo server to the local computer 285 D Playing Back Video Files 4 8 GPS Tracks Playback Since GV Video Server and GV Compact DVR support GPS tracking GPS tracks are recorded along with video on these devices On the GV System yo
234. bination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host later in this chapter 411 D Remote Viewing 8 6 2 Host List The Host List displays a list of available hosts The host icons indicate available hosts and the camera icons indicate all cameras included in the selected host To connect to a host 1 Click a monitoring window which will be highlighted in red frame 2 Double click on a camera icon and then its corresponding video will be loaded to the selected monitoring window First time users will only see one host icon as no additional hosts are created yet To create connection to other hosts see Creation of a Host later in this chapter f Host Auto Search Du o BEA Host Icon Kin 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera Camera Icon Figure 8 36 The Host List Working with Hosts on the Same LAN With UPnP technology Multi View can detect all hosts on the same LAN without the need of user configuration 1 On the Host List click the Auto Search tab for detection A list of hosts within the same LAN appears 2 Double click one host for connection A valid ID and password are required Note For UPnP detection it is required to open TCP port 5201 on the host and UDP port 5200 on the Multi View site 412 D Remote Viewing 8 6 3 Channel Status Information When choosing a camera from the Host List or the monitoring window the general information of the selected camera will be dis
235. bookmark behind the one at the front You can also select List Mode to display all bookmarks in the thumbnail view 4 To resume playback from a bookmark double click the bookmark The bookmarked frame is displayed on the ViewLog window Click the Play button to play the video for up to 5 minutes 5 To rename delete or import the bookmark right click the desired bookmarked frame to have these options 232 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 5 Searching a Video Event ViewLog offers four search methods Basic Search Advanced Search List Mode and Line Mode The four methods allow you to locate a video event recorded by a specific camera and during a specific time period Basic Search 1 Click the Advanced button No 9 Figure 4 1 and select Basic Search This dialog box appears Alternatively press CTRL F8 on the keyboard to call it up Event Time 23 2004 10 39 48 Search event in DST Description ViewLog Using Event time selector t is possible to jump straight to video archive from a specific point in Time omo Figure 4 9 2 f you want to search the video events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period select Search event in DST Specify a desired date and time 4 Click the Search button for the search If the specified time can t be found a prompt will appear for you to select a next or previous video event available 233 D Playing Back Video Files Advanced Search
236. cam Option later in this chapter 2 Click Save to apply the settings and return to the panel 3 To create a cascading hierarchy drag the desired inputs outputs from the left Standard I O List to the group Note In the cascading hierarchy each input can only be used once while the same output can be used repeatedly 324 Editing a Group To modify group settings right click a group and select View Edit This dialog box appears Group Information El Group Mame Ge Entrance Cancel Group Motity Setting fe Invoke Alarm Buzzer e Enable advanced logical inputin Multicarn Current Pin Setting Input 1 Input Level User defined Iw Trigger Associated Outputs Change Icon Default loon E 4 Entrance 6s Input 1 Figure 6 20 Group Name As described in Figure 6 19 Group Notify Setting As described in Figure 6 19 FJ 1 0 Applications Current Pin Setting To enable this option highlight an I O device from the group list at the bottom the change to all I O devices at the same group Change Icon To enable this option select one of two displayed icons Normal or Trigger Click the Change Icon button to change an icon Click the Finger button to apply the change to all I O devices at the same group Trigger Associated Outputs Triggers outputs in cascade mode Click the Finger button to apply 325 FJ 1 0 Applications Editing an UO Device In addition to editin
237. camera settings Name v Q i i a 9 a a a 9 9 Sa amp Le P I 4 9 9 a a lt 1_6 800 AS400 Andersen PC BL 110 Demo Bx220 Demo CDVRY 2 Dema Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 4 DYR GY FE110 DWR IPCAM H 264 DWR IPCAM1 3Mv1 DMR LN AM DVR VSO4A DVR S12 FE110 Demo GY BX110D GY BX110D GY BX110D GYV BX110D GY BX110D IMV1 GV BX120 GV BX120 IPCAM Mac Address 0013E2018D06 0013E201AF5C 0001 2909DFEC 0013E2021977 0013E2024588 0013E201E133 0013E2010757 0013E20100A0 0013E20112E6 0013E2021135 0013E201B409 00D089004238 0013E20173B8 0013E2020F26 001 3E20204F5 0013E202113 0013E201ABAE 0013E201F2BC 0013E201F5D4 0013E201F34F 0013E201907A 0013E2019087 0013E2019B61 The controls in the window No y Name Search Auto Set IP Address Add Delete Configure Tool on the menu bar IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 6 192 168 3 275 192 168 3 5 192 168 3 159 192 168 3 151 192 168 3 185 192 168 3 230 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 134 192 168 3 144 192 168 2 244 192 168 2240 192 168 3 241 192 168 2 242 192 168 3 149 192 168 3 133 192 168 3 135 192 168 3 134 192 168 3 253 192 168 1 96 192 168 0 10 Firmware Version v1 03 2010 09 14 1 01 2010 07 13 v2 00 2010 11 20 v1 05 2010 07 16 v1 00 2010 08 20 v1 06 2010 09 29 v1 03 2010 09 14 1 03 2010 08 27 v1 02 2010 09 30 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 09 2010 05 26 v1 06 2010 09 24 v1 03 2
238. can remotely locate a desired event by defining search criteria The search results can be displayed in a text form or a statistic chart You can also play back any suspicious events instantly To allow remote access to GV System ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server function Figure 8 5 is activated on GV System 1 On the left panel of the Single View page Figure 8 20 click Remote Play Back and select Event List Query The Query window appears 2 On the left panel select one of the following query categories and then click Submit Query at the button of the panel to change the category Monitor monitored events System system activities O Login user login logout status Counter counter events O POS POS transaction events Note that the above categories are based on those of System Log in the Main System so you can also locate the same event recorded in System Log 3 Define the search criteria such as Event Type Device Information Date and etc The selection of search criteria may vary depended on query categories 4 lf you search the events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period select DST Rollback and define a certain period of time in the Date column 5 Click Submit Query The search results will be displayed in the text form 6 To play back the attached video click the Video icon Righting click on the vdeo image gives you more playback features such as changing playback mode a
239. canned pages for other monitors In the upper left column click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11 89 Click OK to start scanning among pages 617 1 Useful Utilities 11 144 Setting Pop up Alert You can be alerted by pop up live videos when motion is detected or l O devices are triggered 1 Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured 2 In the upper left column click Event Popup This page appears Digital Matrix Setup iv Activate Display1 Bl Description 1024 by 768 pixels This is the Main Monitor EES Matrix an Y Motion Trigger a O iv WO Trigger OE Event Popup Pi Ws F 13 Mod 1 4 lv 2 lv 6 lv 14 Pin 1 MZ M4 cam Iw 3 Iw Iw 15 Me cams Pa We v 16 M4 cam Me cams HZ CE Popup Dwell Time E Sec 1 jw Invoke M4 cam Popup Interruption Sec M4 cams Interval M4 cam9 LZ camo M4 Cam M4 cam12 M4 cam13 Me Cam A ai ramis Ok Cancel Apply Figure 11 91 Motion Trigger The live video of selected cameras pops up when motion is detected WO Trigger The live vdeo of assigned camera pops up when the selected input device is triggered Popup Dwell Time Specify the amount of time that a pop up live video remains in the foreground Popup Interruption Interval Specify the interval between camera pop ups This option is useful when several cameras are activated for pop up alert at the same time 3 Use the Display list to select ot
240. cel Figure 6 14 2 Check the Input s you want to monitor 3 For any state change you can trigger an alarm output by checking Force Output when one or more inputs are abnormal and assigning the output module and pin number 4 When the state change is detected a warning message will pop up on the screen In the Auto close abnormal notify after x sec field you can define the duration of the message to close itself automatically After settings you can manually detect all input states by selecting Detect Input Status Or you can just start O monitoring When the system detects any change of input state you may see this warning message Detect Input Status Kl L 0 Please verify the following abnormal inputs ups fy g p Module Pin 1 Input 1 1 Input 2 1 Input 3 1 Input 4 Setup Figure 6 15 321 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 5 I O Enable Setting You can manually arm or disarm any l O devices without interrupting the monitoring For example when an output alarm is triggered at the front door you can turn off the output while the system keeps on recording and I O monitoring Arming Disarming I O devices 1 On the main screen click the I O button No 7 Figure 1 2 and select I O Enable Setting This dialog box appears 1 0 Activation O TEST27 o L lz Module 1 6 2 Output Pin 4 Reset Output Cancel Apply Figure 6 16 2 Check the Input Output to arm or unche
241. ch division lt gt buttons Navigate pages Empty page Clears up the channel sequence of the open page 606 Video Setting Spot Monitor Controller Video Setting Advanced Layout sett gt Video Attribute Video Enable min 1 w w 2 Brightness Y na 100 iw 3 Contrast Y En 1150 cal Saturation Se 220 W P Ww E vw F Ww D Hue En 1 20 Scan Setting Interwal Apply to All Default Scan by Figure 11 80 Spot X See the same option in the Advanced Layout tab 10 Au ll W g w 10 iw 11 W 12 Sec 1 Useful Utilities W 13 w 14 w 15 W 16 Select All Clear All Video Attribute Select a desired camera from the drop down list to adjust image attributes such as Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation Video Enable Select the desired cameras for display on another monitor Scan Setting Enter the interval between the scanned pages Select Auto if you want to automatically scan the cameras or Manual to scan at your own speed 607 FOR Useful Utilities 11 12 22 Spot Monitor Panel With the Spot Monitor Panel you can switch screen divisions and channels as well as starting and stopping page scan immediately On the Main System click the TV Out button el This panel appears 9 10 11 12 Figure 11 81 The controls on the DSP Spot Monitor Panel No Name Description Spot 1 is for screen display on the first monitor an
242. channels into a single 320x240 view Since you may use Microsoft Remote Desktop a feature that comes with Windows XP Professional Edition to set up the Main System through network it is important to get smallest size possible data to transfer over network After Mini View for Remote Desktop is selected restart the Main System and you can now switch between the mini and normal view by clicking the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 pointing to A V Setting and selecting Mini View Switch Jan 31 15 35 32 277 15GB 0 aleja AA AZ Figure 1 18 Mini View Show E Map Displays the setup E Map Viewer window Figure 9 5 at system startup Di Configuring Main System 1 2 8 Setting Auto Reboot The Auto Reboot feature restarts GV System and Windows at a scheduled time Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Auto Reboot Setup Auto Reboot Setup W Auto Reboot System Day Interval 1 Reboot Time 4 46 27 PM Cancel e Restore Last Status f Apply Startup Settings i Delay for Cancel Reboot 3 Ser WatchDog Heset if Reboot System Suspend and Fail Figure 1 19 Auto Reboot System Enables the automatic reboot of the GV System and Windows Day Interval Specifies the frequency of auto reboot from 1 to 14 days After the Day Interval is modified the new day interval will start counting from the last reboot date instead of the day when the change is ap
243. ck the Input Output to disarm the device s Then click Apply to verify the changes 322 6 6 FJ 1 0 Applications Advanced UO Panel The Advanced UO Panel provides a centrally managing solution for I O devices installed across a wide area It simplifies the process of configuring and managing many I O devices lts major features are Trigger V O devices without starting I O monitoring Group I O devices for cascade triggers Monitor different I O cascade configurations at different times of the day Quickly access triggered I O devices by a Quick Link window 6 6 1 The Advanced I O Panel To open the panel click the I O button on the main screen and then select Advanced I O Panel 7 Default 8 i Standard VO List A Advanced VO List e TEST69 42564280 1 Modules 1 Module 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 1 17 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Figure 6 17 The controls on the Advanced I O Panel No esch OO Oo nN oO oO AI WY PY Name Description Configure Accesses Panel and Schedule settings Mode Schedule Starts stops Mode Schedule Toggle Quick Link Displays the Quick Link window for quick access to triggered I O devices Advanced WO List Style Displays the Advanced O List in various styles View Edit Icon and Detail Expand Tree Row Expands tree branches Collapse Tree Row Collapses tree branches Mode Configures various cascade modes Standard I O List Displays
244. ck the larger icon EI and click the EX button to pause live images Use the mouse to outline the maximum and minimum size of objects when they are close to the camera 156 EI Video Analysis c Click the smaller icon H and repeat the step above to define the size of objects when they are far from the camera You have now defined two sets of object sizes atthe two ends of the A A line In the Setting section there are two kinds of alarm modes Alarm Mode 1 The detected object slightly crosses the border of the defined region it is about to enter Alarm Mode 2 The detected object is fully inside the defined region it just enters To setup alarm devices configure any or both of the following options Invoke Alarm Enable the computer alarm when an object enters the defined region Click the button next to the option to assign a wav sound file Output Module Enable an installed output device when an object enters the defined region Assign the output module and pin number To test your alarm settings select Live from the Test Count drop down list and click the Test button to start testing W hen the intrusion object is detected the configured computer alarm or output device will be activated Use the Sensitivity slider to increase or decrease detection sensitivity if the intrusion is not detected correctly To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For de
245. ckup Deletion and Repair This chapter explains how to back up and delete video audio files Video files can be copied from the hard disk to external storage media such as CD R DVD MO or ZIP drives Video files saved on the hard disk can be deleted as well 5 1 Backing Up Log Data Using the System Log you can back up all log data or filtered data based on criteria 1 To open the System Log click the ViewLog button on the main screen No 13 Figure 1 2 and select System Log 2 Click el A icon at the top left corner on the System Log window and select Advanced Log Browser The Advanced Log Browser appears 3 Select a time period of logs to be loaded to the Advanced Log Browser 4 Click the Backup button on the toolbar This dialog box appears Current Table e Export with Video Audio data cont Figure 5 1 Table Option O All Tables Backs up all log data Current Table Backs up only the log table you are currently at Export with Video Audio data Backs up video audio attachments with log data 291 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 Click OK The Backup dialog box Figure 5 2 appears 6 In the Media section select the method and destination to back up the log files 7 Click OK to back up Note 1 To back up the filtered data use the Filter function to define search criteria first See Filter Settings in the section of Advanced Log Browser in Chapter 4 2 To open the backup data run
246. click the View Mode button select Single View and select Mega Pixel View PIP or Mega Pixel View PAP 2 For PIP View adjust the navigation box to have a close up view of the selected area For PAP View drag up to 7 areas to see the close up views 3 Click the Save as AVI button and select Save as AVI The PIP or PAP view you have set appears Save Avi File Avi View Setting Direct Merge Higher Speed Start Time 10 45 14 End Time 10 45 41 Export with new Privacy Mask region s O Un recoverable Recoverable Remove Recoverable Privacy Mask region s ID E Password Figure 4 17 4 Click OK to export the video When you play back the video the PIP or PAP view will be applied Note If the frame of the PIP PAP navigation box is partially invisible click the Setting tab click the arrow next to Video Effects and clear the selection for De Interlace For more details on PIP or PAP view see Picture in Picture View or Picture and Picture View in Chapter 1 242 D Playing Back Video Files Privacy Mask Settings In case you forget to set the Privacy Mask at the Main System or need to add more Privacy Masks onto the video for special requirements you can do that in ViewLog 1 In the Export with New Privacy Mask Region s section Figure 4 14 select Un recoverable and or Recoverable Un recoverable The block out area s in the recorded files cannot be retrieve
247. client under the group click the Add A Client button No 9 Figure 11 24 This displays the Client Information dialog box Client Information Mame pc TEL 0939234690 KN Address Figure 11 25 Client Information 3 Type the client s information The Name must match that of local GV System 4 Click OK 045 1 Useful Utilities 11 5 4 Creating a User Account The Authentication Server administrator can create user accounts with different access rights to an assigned group of GV Systems 1 Click the Account Setup button No 3 Figure 11 24 and select Password Setup to display the Password Setup window The window is the same as the Password Setup window in Main System except the following section W Accountis disabled IO Guest Password ii 2E Hint E gt Level Guest Valid Group E All DYR Group Setting Figure 11 26 Password Setup 2 To create and edit a user account refer to Account and Password in Chapter 1 3 To grant the user access to a group of client GV Systems Click the Group Setting button in the window The Valid Group List window appears Click the New Group button The DVR Group Information window appears Name the DVR group and select the desired GV Systems into the group Go back to the Password Setup window Use the Valid Group drop down list to select the created DVR group A o U 9 Yalid Group List SI du E Group List Eee Figure 11 27
248. cncccccnoncnncnnnannanannos FZ COMM A A A ca Aang eal cement MAR Eeer O ADO pies PA o ge Tear ines onan E merrier ET AE WR Ee ht Le EE PICTURES ICLUNG AT ligibel image Gut eu EE Remote oe nstallaton of Multi AE 370 374 374 375 376 377 378 380 381 382 383 384 387 388 389 391 392 393 394 395 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 407 408 409 367 SE AT 8 63 Channell Status Mord re D 9 6 4 Credion 0ra HOST Ab 8 6 5 Combination of Multiple Hosts into a Single Host 8 016 WIASO RECODO astra ais 0 6 7 Gamero PON std io AA 8 6 8 Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream occcocnoniccionoccccncoconoronnonnnononnnnnss TA A PU E A righ Santa TA 8 0 10 Vis al PTZ COntol Panel sica S202 QUIPUECONIROL Maior DUDE Ee DA Abr a 9012 MEMOS MEW e as aaeN aes 8 6 13 System Configura OM srera ed Son 14 Camera Status aia cds Sao JHOSUIMON MAN dla 8 16 cON Mage naaa pao 8 7 Multicast and Audio Broadcast ees KEEN EN ERR EEN ER E ER ER E as 8 7 1 Configuring Multicast and Broadcast Settings ooccononcnnnnnniccconoccnonnnoncnnanonanaoo 8 7 2 Sen ding Audio Broadcast ina 8 7 3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast nana nnn arc nana 9 0 JPEG IMAGE VIE Wei iia 0 9 Remote luese gen iii 8 10 Remote ViewL0Qo ccccnicnnncicnciocnccanccanccancoancnancanerancrnn aran ER E nnmnnn nnmnnn nnman nn ma n 9 11 Event LIST OUG Y ataca 812 Download Center inician 8 13 Mobile Phone App
249. computer It will run automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Click GV E Map Server and then follow the on screen instructions 902 9 5 2 The E Map Server Window D E Map Application Go to Windows Start point to Programs select eMapServer and then click E Map Server This window appears eMap2 Seles Figure 9 14 The controls on the E Map Server window No Name 4 N O oO1 AJOIN Start Service Stop Service New Rename Delete Refresh Accounts Description Starts the E Map Server Stops the E Map Server Creates a new E Map file Renames the E Map file Deletes the E Map file Refreshes the E Map Server window Creates user accounts of the E Map Server 903 al E Map Application 9 5 3 Setting E Map Server Before starting the E Map server you have to create e map files and user accounts 1 Click the New button No 3 Figure 9 14 to create e map s For details on creating an e map file see Creating an E Map File earlier in this chapter 2 Click the Accounts No 7 Figure 9 14 button to create a user account that will use the server 904 al E Map Application 9 5 4 Remote Monitoring via E Map Server Via E Map Server you can monitor different surveillance sites on electronic maps from any computer accessible to Internet Open the web browser and type the address of the E Map server After entering the va
250. d Recoverable The block out area s is retrievable with password protection 2 Drag the area s where you want to block out on the image You will be prompted to click Add to save the setting Using a valid ID and Password you can retrieve the recoverable block out area s in the exported file For details on the Privacy Mask see Privacy Mask Protection in Chapter 3 AVI File Settings To configure the format of exported video follow these steps 1 Click the Setting tab in the Save AVI File dialog box Note that when you save the AVI file in single view mode the window looks slightly different Save Avi File Avi View Setting Direct Merge Higher Speed y Set Location Cibocuments and Settingsiall LisersiDesktopiFile20040601171348 4vi Normal RH Time merge 2 Save as exe E _ Date Time Video Effects Audio Export GPS Export Codec Selection cm Figure 4 18 243 D Playing Back Video Files Set Location Click the button to assign a saving path Normal Time Merge Select whether to save a full length video with recorded and non recorded periods The non recorded period will display a blank blue screen This option is designed to accurately reflect your recording status Save as EXE Select whether to save files in EXE format Enable this feature if you want to play back video at the computer without installing GV System This format allows you to auto play the files w
251. d top Result Figure 4 40 265 D Playing Back Video Files 11 Expand the event folders to see the vdeo segments inside Or enable Show Small Pictures at the upper of window to access the thumbnail view 12 Select one video segment and then click the Play button in the Object Search window to play it back Or click the Open ViewLog button to play it with ViewLog 266 4 3 Advanced Log Browser D Playing Back Video Files With the Advanced Log Browser you can search for log data of monitored events system activities user activities Object Counting events and POS events For details on the log types see System Log in Chapter 1 1 2 Click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 and select Advanced Log Browser This dialog box appears Advanced Log Browser Open Database x selecta period to open TA 02006 1162006 Import Database Range 1 7 Days cr Figure 4 41 Specify a time range and click OK All events within the specified range will be displayed on this Advanced Log Browser window KR Event lists From 10 1 1 2007 to 10 17 2007 Advance Log Browser File Tools view Help VY i coic 4 W A A A ros ee hanitor System Login Counter POS Time Device Information Event 2007 10 11 21 55 35 Camera 3 Video Lost 2007410011 21 55 35 Camera 4 Video Lost 2007 10 11 22 09 45 Camera 3 Video Lost 2007 10 11 22 09 45 Camera 4 Video Lost 20074041 22 10 59 Camera 3
252. d Spot 2 for that on the 1 Spot x second monitor 2 Scan Automatically or manually rotates channels and stops rotation 3 Previous Page Goes to the pervious page of the scanned pages 4 Next Page Goes to the next page of the scanned pages 5 Exit Closes the Spot Monitor Panel 7 Switch Opens or closes the channel menu 8 Channel Menu Displays the desired channel for single view 9 Screen Division Sets screen divisions to 1 4 6 8 9 10 12 and 16 After single view click this button to restore the first scanned page but 10 Zoom Esc e restore the last channel when the screen division is set to 1 608 KR Useful Utilities 11 13 Quad Spot Monitor Controller The Controller integrates the GV Multi Quad Card with TV monitor spot monitor applications It features Upto5 TV monitors can be controlled TV Monitor 1 supports up to 16 screen divisions and TV Monitor 2 to TV Monitor 5 support 1 and 4 divisions Different screen divisions can be set up on each monitor The channel sequence of screen divisions is user defined Note 1 This function is only supported in GV Video Capture Cards with GV Multi Quad Card which include GV 600A 650A 800A 1120A 1240A GV 1480A 2 The Controller does not support the videos from IP devices To export videos from IP devices refer to the Digital Matrix section later in this chapter 11 13 1 Setting the Controller Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point t
253. d out the alert message The identification is recorded in the System Log for later retrieval as well For example if the liquor is prohibited for sale inthe midnight a seller can use this feature to prevent from any unintentional sale 7 10 1 Setting POS Color Text 1 On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories click POS Application Setting and select POS Field Filter Setup The POS Capture Data Setting dialog box Figure 7 15 appears 2 Click New and select Color Keyword This dialog box appears Color Keyword Setting Key word liquor Color w only work between 2300 a 2 conc Figure 7 24 Key Word Type the text to be identified in the transaction data The keyword setting is case sensitive Color Specify a color to identify the defined text only work between Specify the time period to identify the defined text in the transaction data 364 Point of Sale POS Application 3 To trigger an alarm when the defined textis detected during the transaction click the Loss Prevention Setting button in the POS Capture Data Setting dialog box Figure 7 15 This dialog box appears Cheese Loss Prevention Setting E W Enable Alarm Advanced w Alarm Output Module 1 Output 1 Alert Message Not far salel oane Figure 7 25 Enable Alarm Check this item to enable the alarm when the identified text is detected To set up alarm
254. d resets the triggered alert The replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the camera view to detect changes The system will accept the crowd from this point on and no longer generate any alert for it Reset Alert Disables and resets the triggered alert After the alert is reset if the crowd remains gathering over the specified tolerance time the system will still detect itas a crowd gathering and keep generating alert 199 El Video Analysis 3 18 Advanced Scene Change Detection Compared to Scene Change Detection that can only be applied in the indoors the advanced version of Scene Change Detection can be applied in the outdoors The Advanced Scene Change Detection detects and prevents any changes of scene viewing angle or focus clearness made by malice Note 1 Upto 16 cameras can be configured for this application 2 Itis highly recommended not to use Advanced Scene Change Detection and Scene Change Detection together 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 click Advanced Video Analysis and select Advanced Scene Change Detection Setting 2 Select the desired camera s to be configured and click Configure This dialog box appears Advanced Scene Change Detection V Camera Camera Selection Camera 4 Mask Region EHE Oe Setting Sensitivity 3 Tolerance Time of Alarm sec Option m Iw Automatically disable
255. de to be applied And define whether your weekend includes Sunday and Saturday or Sunday only 7 Click OK to apply the settings Note If the End time field is not enabled the time span will continue to the start of the next span ER Configuring Main System 1 2 5 GeoMpeg4 Advanced Settings The Geo Mpeg4 codec supports a number of advanced settings that allow experienced users to adjust the encoding process In Figure 1 9 check the Apply Advanced Codec Setting option click the button beside and then click the Advanced tab This window appears Geo Mpeg4 Codec Setting General Advanced Source Compression ct NEE y Setting Evaluation Video 2 Subpixel precision 2 quantizer 4 SE PtzDome Size Encode speed Frames per second Sto Setting Recommend i si op Figure 1 14 Setting Setting Click the drop down list to select High speed Recommend or High compression rate for default configurations Or select User defined to define encoding settings yourself Subpixel precision Click the drop down list to select Full Half or Quarter pixel Full pixel Fastest compression speed medium compression rate and normal image quality Half pixel Fast compression speed high compression rate and better image quality Quarter pixel Slow compression speed highest compression rate and better image quality Quantizer Raising the value will improve compression
256. dean AP Abnormal Transaction Alerts c ooomnconnnnnnnncconnononannnncno anne nn T61 SC UM E dn FregUC NG ranno E Codepage Mapping seess kee EE KREE EE KEREN NEE nunne E nenun mnnn mn E mnn mae POS Dala d E POS CIV VIEW coca E TOA Te POSLE View Window essa ds 7 9 2 Setting Live VieW o o oocconocccocincncnnncocccococonononononnnonnnn no nononnnon ono nannrr nan nenennnnrnarnanos TNO POS GOO TOX sra cer ideo TADA Selma POS COON Taca airada FJ 1 0 Applications 341 341 346 347 347 349 351 353 355 357 358 360 361 362 362 363 364 364 340 Point Of Sale POS Application A POS device can be integrated to the GV System You can view transactions as they happen overlaid on video channels Transaction alerts can be configured allowing instant notification of transaction events Video searches can be performed based upon a specific transaction item or a period of time Before connecting a POS device tothe GV System you need to know the printing mode of your POS device Text Mode or Graphic Mode If you are not sure about the printing mode of your POS device refer to The Printing Mode of POS System Cash Register Text Mode POS Device 7 1 1 Windows Based Direct POS Integration You can integrate a POS device to the GV System without requiring a GV Data Capture Box The transaction data is directly transferred to the GV System via a RS 232 serial cable or TCP IP connection Before Yo
257. des bi directional counting of objects under the surveillance area When defined itcould count any objects such as people vehicles animals etc 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Counter Intruder Alarm Setting This dialog box appears nn Counter Intrusion Alarm ge Choose Camera Max 16 Iw 1 Ms Tr 9 13 Bey MPS BES 1 1 44 Bie AOS AA GG IA DS LS C At each Clock Hour M Show Object Figure 3 18 2 Select the desired cameras for the counter application 3 Select Update the Log and specify the time interval in minutes to store the counting results to the System Log 4 Select Show Object to put a rectangle around the object being tracked 5 Click the Configure tab to open the Setup dialog box 153 EI Video Analysis 3 4 1 Object Counting To define the counter to count target objects click the Counter tab Counter Alarm Setting Iw Enable Setting e Define Detection Zones GC C Define Object Size KA Sensitivity EME Ae d 3 Hp RAMAS SM Ga U U H Test Count Counting Result Door Demo D i Option Iw Show Alarm Regions Skip Frame Demo Schedule Figure 3 19 1 In the Choose Camera section select a camera from the drop down list for setup 2 Select Enable Setting Define Detection Zones Select this option and use the mouse to draw lines on the camera image to mark the boundaries of detec
258. detailed information of a drive check Display Details No 4 Figure 11 42 in the desired drive section The status window will appear Media Type File Sy tem Free Space Total Space status Path Size and Count Oldest event Local E Free Space NTFS a DVD Used E D MDE Used 39 07 GB O Object Index Used Standby O Database Used E Other Used DYF Event Information E Yov 800 6 07 ME 6 Files 10 31 2007 20 24 38 Never recycle events are excluded Latest event Path Size and Count Path Size and Count Path Size and Count 11182007 14 51 19 DYF Database Information E GV 3 36 00 KB 33 Files 1 MDB Information EXMSYBDODA TAB ASE 25 57 MB 96 Files 1 Object Index Information Eve 800 OBJECTINDEX Av 18 00 KB 1 Files 3 View log Information Empty Figure 11 43 The controls on the MediaMan window No Name Description Indicates disk information 1 Disk Properties In Media Type two messages may appear O LAN indicates a hard drive is connected Local indicates a local hard drive is connected In Status three messages may appear Standby indicates the hard drive already specified as the recording path Unused indicates the hard drive not specified as the recording path Recording indicates the files are being recorded to the disk Indicates the path size and number of recorded events the dates of the 2 DVR Event Info
259. dialog box appears x COM Port coma Detect Device Information Mame Telit Model GMBBS PCS Slt Ready Select Band IER ES Figure 10 2 GSM Module Setting 2 Select the COM port connecting to a GSM GPRS modem 3 Click the Detect button to detect the modem If the connection between the modem and the computer is established the message will show inthe Device Information field Name Manufacturer Module xxx SIM Ready Gi If the connection fails the display will be shown as No usable device in COM xxx 4 Ifyou are using a tri band modem select 1900 or 1800 MHz from the drop down list of Select Band 5 Click OK to apply above settings 910 10 Short Message Service 10 3 2 Server Settings Click the Server Setting button No 2 Figure 10 1 to display the following Server Setting dialog box There are three major tabs in the dialog box 1 General 2 Message Filter and 3 Notify General RK Server Setting x General Message Filter Notify Network Pot Jeep Default P Security M Enhance network security Startup M Auto Start Service when Server Startup he Minimize to System Tray after auto start service h Auto save the PIN number after start service Figure 10 3 Server Setting General Network Define the port of the SMS Server or leave it as default To use UPnP for automatic port configuration to your router click the Arrow button For details see UP
260. dy parts objects or background views Moreover it can capture each face separately when a group of people comes in the view together Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears Select the desired cameras to be configured Click the Configure button The Video Object Setup window appears Select one camera from the drop down list and select Camera to enable the following settings In the Setup section select Face Detection o gt 2 e St Ze Click after Face Detection to adjust the sensitivity The higher the value the more sensitive face detection is 7 Select Noise Tolerance and use the slider to adjust the level The higher the level the more tolerant the system is to video noise 8 Click OK 9 Start the monitoring of the configured camera s 10 On the main screen click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and select Live Object Index When the faces are detected the thumbnail images will appear on the Object Index Live Viewer Object Index Live Viewer WW 5 Camera 1 Camera 1 17 57 08 17 58 25 e Camera 1 Camera 1 17 58 29 17 58 44 3 E Camera 1 Camera 1 17 59 09 17 59 13 Figure 3 29 11 Double clicking one of images can play back its related video For details on the settings in the Video
261. e Password Brand Protocol Device Please select the brand of IP camera d Please select the brand of IP camera Message Geovision GvHIIR SOK up E a ONVIF HIGH over TOR Figure 2 10 5 Adialog box appears after the system confirms that the camera is ONVIF PSIA compatible Click Query 6 After the camera is located click Apply 126 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 9 Camera Mapping Using GV IP Device Utility The GV IP Device Utility program can search and manage all the available IP devices on the same LAN making it time effective to map the connected IP cameras to channels For convenient management you can also save one or multiple sets of configurations and apply them according to your needs To set up multiple IP cameras using GV IP Device Utility 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Camera Install and select IP Camera Install The IP Device Setup dialog box appears E IP Device Setup _Serer address rot Cam NO Status Video Resolution Brand Add Camera 192 166 2 174 192 168 1 165 192 168 3 203 10000 10000 10000 Cameras Camera4 Camera Connected 3522 40 MPEG43 704 GeoVision_G PTZ010D Connected 320x255 MPEG4 128 GeoVision_GY BL110D Connecting GeoVision_Gy FE420 FE421 Scan Camera Import Camera IP Device Utility Automatic Setup OK Figure 2 11 In the IP Device Setup dialog box select IP Device Util
262. e Camera 4 Ze Un recoverable 2 C Recoverable 2 ESA b gt W Mc PS via x e A x d Schedule Figure 3 38 Privacy Mask Setup Select a camera from the drop down list and select Enable 4 Select Un recoverable and or Recoverable Un recoverable You cannot retrieve the block out area s in the recorded clips Recoverable The block out area s is retrievable with password protection 5 Drag the area s where you want to block out on the image You will be prompted to click Add to save the setting The Un recoverable region is marked in black while the recoverable region is shown in red 6 Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 7 Click OK to save the settings 178 EI Video Analysis 3 10 2 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas The user must be granted access privileges to see the block out areas when launching ViewLog for playback 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit The Password Setup dialog box appears 2 Select one account click the Privacy Mask tab and check Restore Recoverable Video to grant the privilege Password Setup Guest E User PowerUser Supervisor Password S 1 Hint ID Level supervisor User cannot change password Force password change at next login Export
263. e storage space For IP cameras refer to Economic Mode in Chapter 2 for more details Max Frame Rate Rec of Motion Set the maximum frame rate on motion detection For example if you set 10 Frames sec in the field the maximum frame this camera will record is 10 frames second This setting does not mean it always records at 10 frames second because the actual recording frame rate is also affected by other settings in the system and CPU loading Max Frame Rate Rec of Non Motion for Economic Round the Clock This option provides a space saving solution for the round the clock recording Set the maximum frame rate for non motion periods so as to save as much storage space as possible L Recording Quality Allows you to adjust the vdeo quality of analog cameras in 5 levels The camera s recording quality is based on its resolution and compression rate Higher quality picture means lower compression rate and requires more storage space This option is only available for analog cameras CJ Recording Resolution This option is only available after you change the default video resolution see Setting Video Source and Resolution later in this chapter Click to select recording resolutions This option is only available for analog cameras Codec Settings Select the type of recording compression for your video This option is only available for analog cameras Geo Mpeg 4 It supports a number of advanced settings tha
264. e 1 62 E Configuring Main System 3 To add anew schedule click the Add button P This dialog box appears Setting VSM Schedule schedule Type Specific Date July 110 O Weekly Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri he Time Start Time AM 08 00 End Time Phi 17 00 Figure 1 63 4 Select to activate VSM on a Specific Date or select Weeklyto set up a weekly schedule 5 Set a Start Time and an End Time for the Specific Date or Weekly schedule 6 Click OK to add the schedule You can add multiple schedules by clicking the Add button and repeating the steps above ER Configuring Main System 1 10 Alert Notification When events occur you can receive alert notification through e mails SMS messages pagers or telephones Follow the steps below to enable alert notification and select the event types to receive notification The events that can trigger alert notification include Video Lost Recording Error Disk Full Motion Detection I O Trigger Scene Change Intruder Event Missing Object Unattended Object POS Loss Prevention Scene Change Crowd Detection Advanced Unattended Object Advanced Scene Change Detection Advanced Missing Object and Face Detection 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click Send Alerts Approach Setup This dialog box appears Send Alerts Approach Setup wv Send Eventalerts PB DB iw Default Alert Approach f E Mail Setting f Hotline
265. e 3 4 Y Enable Mask Select Define Object Size from the drop down menu Use the mouse to outline the max and min object sizes for tracking separately Every time when finishing the outlining you will be prompted to enter Maximum Object Size or Minimum Object Size f Minimum Object Selection ee C Zoom In Object Figure 3 5 Click the Tracking item and specify Track Time sec Track Time sec indicates the tracking duration in seconds Selection Tracking Track Time sec Zoom In Object 10 Figure 3 6 140 10 11 12 a Video Analysis When the PTZ is tracking you can still control it to zoom in a desired area Click the Zoom in Object item and specify Idle Time sec Idle Time sec indicates the zooming duration in seconds If atarget appears after the specified idle time the PTZ will start tracking If not the PTZ will remain on the zoomed place Selection C Tracking Idle Timefsec Figure 3 7 Click the Schedule button to set a schedule to enable the function For details see Video Analysis Schedule later inthis chapter Click the Test button to check your settings There are two major settings you have to observe in the testing 1 Tracking Observe if the target showing in the defined detection region is being tracked with a highlighted mask and magnified automatically in the left image If not increase the sensitivity degree 2 Zooming Use the mouse to outline an object in
266. e Access format To view the System Log click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and then select System Log from the menu This brings up the Live Log Browser as shown below 1 7 1 Viewing Event Logs The Live Log Browser provides five types of event logs Use the control tabs to switch among them Monitor Displays information pertaining to motion and l O events Double clicking an alert event in the list will allow you to view related video BR Live Log Browser Recycle Log 8 23 2007 18 52 Monitor system Login Counter POS 2 Time Device Information Evert 100192007 3 13 33 PM Camera 3 Video Lost 100192007 3 13 33 PM Camera 4 Video Lost 100192007 3 26 12 PM Camera 3 Video Resume 10192007 5 42 52 Ph Camera 4 Video Lost 1019 2007 6 05 26 Phi Camera 4 Wideo Lost 1019 2007 6 05 50 Phi Camera 3 Video Lost 1019 2007 6 05 51 Phi Camera 3 Video Resume 10192007 7 29 38 Ph Camera 4 Video Lost 1019 2007 7 50 55 Phi Camera 3 Wideo Lost ID r Ea E 4 A E H H 3 4 Figure 1 41 ID This column shows the event ID number generated by the system Time This column shows the time when a motion or l O monitor event occurs Device This column shows camera ID or l O device associated with the event Information This column shows the l O module number Event These event messages mean Motion Appear if motion occurs inthe associated camera Video Lost Appears if video lost occurs in the associated camera O Video R
267. e GV System Video sources of the GV System are from IP video devices To receive hardware compressed or megapixel stream through the WebCam server 1 Select Actual Size on the GV System Click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 select WebCam Server click the Video tab and select Actual Size in the Max Image Size option Refer to Video Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 2 On the Single View click the Change Quality button No 11 Figure 8 20 You will have the option of megapixel resolution now Note 1 The hardware compressed and megapixel video stream requires a lot of bandwidth It is highly recommended to enable this function in a LAN environment 2 To enable fisheye functions through WebCam server you must first follow the steps above to set fisheye camera to megapixel resolution Next right click the camera view and select Geo Fisheye to see the fisheye settings For more details on the fisheye settings see Fisheye View in chapter 3 397 D Remote Viewing 8 3 7 PTZControl Click the Camera Select button to select one PTZ camera and then click the PTZ Control button No 7 Figure 8 20 to bring up the PTZ control panel Figure 8 26 PTZ control panel One PTZ camera only allows one user to control at a time If several users are trying to control the same PTZ camera at the same time the Single View viewer will give the priority to the first login user and then to the next us
268. e JPEG GIF file s function on the WebCam Server On the main screen click the Network button select WebCam Server click the JPG tab and select Create JPEG GIF file s For details see General Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 459 D Remote Viewing Connecting to GV System To connect your BlackBerry phone to GV System follow these steps 1 Click the GV Remote View icon on your phone The welcome page appears 2 Select Create Live Connection The Login page appears Figure 8 75 3 Enter the IP address port value default value is 8866 a username and a password to log in GV System 4 Select Connect to start Once the connection is established the Camera List appears Camera 3 Jlobby_left _ Camera 6 D Camera 7 J Camera 8 Figure 8 76 5 Select the desired camera and select OK to access the live view 6 To change to another camera select Change Camera and follow Step 5 460 D Remote Viewing Forcing Outputs 1 To force any connected output devices select a camera from the Camera List and select lO Module The lO Module List appears e Output Device 1 y Output Device 2 D Output Device 3 y Output Device A y Output Device 5 Output Device 6 Output Device 7 Output Device 8 Figure 8 77 2 Scroll down to select the desired output device on the list and push in the scroll wheel to select Force Output 3 To force another output
269. e User Switches users to log in the GV System 5 System Log Opens the System Log 6 Close MultiCam Closes the GV System Note You can move the touch screen panel anywhere on the screen by dragging it ER Configuring Main System 1 18 System Tools 1 18 1 Hard Disk Calculator Before actual recording the Hard Disk Calculator allows you to know the required hard disk space and frame size for different types of codec and quality 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to A V Setting select Video Attributes and then click Advanced The Advanced Video Attributes dialog box appears 2 Click the HDD Calculator button at the right bottom The HDD Calculator dialog box appears HDD Calculator Required Storage Analysis dr Select Camera 2 Select Video Compression Codec Software Compression Advanced Codec Setting W Geo Mpeg4 Geo H 264 Hardware Compression ia y 3 Select Recording Quality Hi ER ll EN E 4 Set Test Time Total Test Time 0 Hour S Mnutez gt O Hours 5 Minute s Sel Expected Recording Time 0 Day s 0 Hour s 5 Minuters Calculate DI Exit Figure 1 90 Select Camera Select cameras to be used for recording Select Video Compression Codec Check the desired codec s to be used for recording You can choose more than one codec to compare their performance CJ Software Compression Check the desired codec s to be used for recording You can c
270. e V3 Series User s Manual or GV AS200 Controller Hardware Installation Guide 932 1 Useful Utilities 11 2 Watermark Viewer The GV System can embed digital watermarks in video streams for the purpose of authentication The watermarks are encrypted and digital signatures embedded in video streams during the compression stage protecting videos from the moment of creation Watermarking ensures that images are not edited or damaged after they are recorded The Watermark Proof is a watermark checking program lt can verify the authenticity of the recording before you present it in court 11 2 1 Activating Watermark Protection Click the Configure button on the main screen click System Configure click General Setting and select Use Digital Watermark Protection The GV System will digitally sign videos as they are recorded 533 FOR Useful Utilities 11 2 2 Running the Watermark Proof 1 Goto the GV folder and run WMProof exe GV1480 File Edit view Favorites Tools Help pack S gt Ki y Search gt Folders Address Name WiakeupDl dl Applicatic Wapbacket dll Applicatic HE webCamServer exe Applicatic a WiMProof exe Applicatic e WMProofS Table xml XML Doce y D j iii E Figure 11 13 2 Inthe Watermark Proof window click File from the menu bar select Open and locate the recorded file avi The selected file is then listed on the window Alternatively you can drag the file directly from the storag
271. e View Delete Log button on the Delete dialog box 2 To view the information of files from a desired camera right click the camera and select Event View on the Delete dialog box 300 L Backup Deletion and Repair 5 5 Repairing Damaged File Paths The only way to correctly delete video and audio files is through the operation you ve just performed in the previous section If you move or delete a video file using Windows Explorer or Windows File Manager the GV System will not Know what you have done In this case the Repair Database Utility can repair misplaced or missing recorded files that are not identified by the ViewLog player As long as these files still exits on the hard drives and detectable by Windows operating system the Utility will restore these recorded files back to their default paths and allow them to appear under ViewLog This Utility comes with the installation of Main System Follow these steps to repair the paths 1 Goto the Windows Start menu select Programs select the GV folder and select the Repair Database Utility The valid ID and password are required 2 When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears select the cameras that require database repair 3 Click OK This dialog box appears A RepairDB lo mm Default Path E Data D Data Status Result Rebuild all information time requires is depended on the database size Use Default Path Search Hard disk
272. e and the physical memory requirements of each setup Good Better Best Extra Maximum pre recording frames per camera fps 15 fps 30 fps 60 fps 90 fps RAM required 128 MB 256 MB 512MB 768 MB Note The recording frame rate is based on a 320x240 recording size Pre Record Option per camera Determines the number of pre record frames Total Frames Specify the maximum pre recording frames of the system Frame Sec Limitation Specify the maximum pre recording frame rate fps of a camera Dividing the Total Frames by Frames Sec Limitation you will get the pre recording duration of each camera For example Total Frames 30 Pre recording duration 2 2 seconds Frame Sec Limitation 6 Pre Recording using HDD Use the hard disk as a pre recording buffer This method gives you much longer pre recording time Keep Pre Record Files Specify the number of video clips for pre record The maximum number of video clips you can specify is 9 and the time range of one wdeo clip is from 1 minute to 5 minutes So the pre recording time can be from 1 minute to 45 minutes Use Digital Watermark Protection Click to watermark all recorded videos Watermark is a way to verify the authenticity of vdeo streams and to ensure that they have not been tampered with or modified in any way For details see Watermark Viewer in Chapter 11 Video Log Storage Select storage type recycle or not recycle and location See Setting Data
273. e bottom right corner of the video Displays the connected GV Systems and their available cameras see Host List later in this chapter Displays all hosts on the same LAN see Host List later in this chapter Select the desired camera for display If a panorama view is created at the GV System it is also included in this menu Displays the PTZ control panel See PTZ Control and Visual PTZ Control Panel later in this chapter Displays the I O control panel See O Control earlier in this chapter Indicates the general information of the selected channel See Channel Status Information later in this chapter Plays back recorded files of the remote GV System by using the video player ViewLog 410 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 Configure Edit Host Camera Status Host Information Zoom in and out Add Remove Frame Next Multicast Full Screen Video Polling Screen Division Exit Minimize Speaker Microphone Play Stop Save Quality Snapshot D Remote Viewing See Remote ViewLog later in this chapter Accesses system settings of the Multi View see System Configuration later in this chapter Adds deletes or modifies a host see Creation of a Host later in this chapter Displays the camera status of the connected GV System See Camera Status later in this chapter Displays the general information of the connected GV Syste
274. e events To select events from different dates click the date from the Date Tree No 4 Figure 4 1 Events of that date will be listed in the Video Event List 223 D Playing Back Video Files The controls in the ViewLog window No sch N IO IO amp W PD 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Name Camera Name Camera View Arrow Switch Date Tree Display Option Video Event List Camera Select View Mode Advanced Normal Function Panel Slider Audio Playback Playback Panel Function Icons Playback Speed Time Display Date Display Exit A to B Mode Playback Mode Description Indicates the given camera name Displays the playback video Switches between List Mode and Line Mode Sets up MDB filter Displays date folders Specifies the event type to display in List Mode or Line Mode Displays video events within a certain date folder Sets a desired camera for display Sets screen divisions Single View Panorama View Quad View or Multi View Single View also includes these options Standard Thumbnail Mega Pixel PIP Mega Pixel PAP Geo Fisheye and IMV1 Panomorph Accesses basic search advanced search and bookmark Reloads vdeo event list Displays or closes the Timeline or Video Event List Provides various settings for ViewLog Moves the slider to rewind or forward the video during playback Enables audio playback Contains typical playback control button
275. e folder to the window 3 Ifthe recording is unmodified a check mark will appear in the Pass column On the contrary if the recording is modified or does not contain watermark during recording a check mark will appear in the Failed column To play the recording double click the listed file on the window 034 11 2 3 1 Useful Utilities The Watermark Proof Window HJ Water Mark F root Event20100203173801009 avi eTe ee ie gt 900 gt e gt Similar Rate 100 Original r Extracted CAS File Name Pass Failed Similar Rate DAGY 1480icam09i0203 Event20100203173801009 a M A Pass 778 1085 Current Total frame j 213 2010 17 38 27 919 Tt i Figure 11 14 The controls in the window No N 1 OO Oo amp W DP Name Description Open File Opens the recorded file First Frame Goes to the first frame of the file Play Plays the file Previous Frame Goes to the previous frame of the file Next Frame Goes to the next frame of the file Previous Watermarked Frame Goes to the previous frame that contains watermark Next Watermarked Frame Goes to the next frame that contains watermark The Extracted icon should be identical with the Original Original vs Extracted icon If not it indicates the recording has been tampered File List Displays the proof results 935 11 3 Twin View Display The GV System supports dual monitor display one for live viewing and the other for
276. e password For the Allow Removing Password System option see Account and Password in Chapter 1 Export Token This option is discussedin Token File for Save Mode later in this chapter System Menu The menu lets you rename system programs Select a desired program and click the Edit button to change its name Customized Menu The menu lets you add other programs to the Programs menu Click the Add button The Shortcut dialog box will appear In the Target field type a path or click the button next to the field to assign a path Then enter the program name comment or even change an icon for the program Finally click OK to add the program Administrative Tools Similar to Customized Menu the option lets you add other programs to the Programs menu But when you want to run the added program the administrative ID and Password are required 540 1 Useful Utilities Desktop Type Select Windows or GV Desktop Multicam from the drop down menu The selected desktop will launch the next time when you log in to PC Log Off Click the Log off button No 3 Figure 11 18 to log off GV Desktop A valid ID and password are required Shut Down Click the Shut Down button No 4 Figure 11 18 to shut down your computer A valid ID and password are required Task Manager Click the Task Manager button No 5 Figure 11 18 to view the programs currently running on your computer When you minimize a program it will be hiding a
277. e triggered events of cameras and l O devices Click the Host Information button No 2 Figure 9 10 to open it The Host Information window allows you to play back events happened in the host sites Double click any Camera Motion event in the left panel to display the remote playback window With this window you can play back an event speak to the host site and take a snapshot as well as download the event to the client PC O x TEST 102 EventType CAM mod vo Name TEST 103 20061114 13 53 55 Camera 1 TEST 104 2006118 13 53 51 Camera 1 TEST 105 20061118 13 45 34 Input 3 TEST 106 2006 111 13 45 34 Input 2 20061118 13 45 34 Input 1 d TEST101 o 9 Module 1 Input 1 Inpi o JE Module 1 Input 2 np o E Module 1 Input 3 Inpi o aa CAMERA 1 Motion Det Figure 9 13 Host Information 500 D E Map Application 9 4 5 Accessing Remote ViewLog On the Remote E Map window the ViewLog button No 6 Figure 9 10 is designed for the Remote ViewLog function giving you remote access to the recorded files of DVR and playing back video by the player ViewLog For details on starting the Remote ViewLog servce refer to Remote ViewLog in Chapter 8 901 al E Map Application 9 5 E Map Server The E Map Server is an independent application designed to create E Maps for different DVRs and run without the GV System 9 5 1 Installing E Map Server 1 Insert the Software DVD to your
278. eated on GV GIS Click OK The Connection s column on the GV GIS Client window will display the total number of to be connected devices which includes one GV System and the number of connected IP cameras To create connection to other GV GIS stations double click 2 to 4 columns on the GV GIS Client window and configure the connection information by following above steps To start connecting to GV GIS click the button The GPS data of GV System and connected IP devices will be sent to GV GIS 630 KR Useful Utilities 11 16 GV IP Device Utility The IP Device utility can detect GV IP devices in the LAN and allows you to quickly set the IP address of the device upgrade firmware export import device settings and reboot the device In addition with the Utility you can map IP cameras to the channels of GV System and export and import the camera mapping settings 11 16 1 Installing GV IP Device Utility 1 Insert the Software DVD to your computer lt runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Select GV IP Device Utility and follow the on screen instructions 631 11 16 2 The GV IP Device Utility Window To start the GV IP Device Utility go to Windows Start point to Programs select GV IP Device Utility and then run GV IP Device Utility The window below appears and automatically searches for any GV IP device under LAN General settings NVR
279. ectivity Sib L d lt Mobile Number OB E Country Code Interval Figure 10 5 Server Setting Notify Check Internet Connectivity Assign any available IP address and click the Test button to know if your SMS Server can access Internet Send SMS notification when no connectivity Sends SMS notification to the three designated mobile numbers when the SMS Server cannot access Internet You can specify the minimum time interval between each notification in minutes Mobile Icon Check the icon and define the number for the SMS notification Up to three recipients can receive the SMS simultaneously 913 10 Short Message Service 10 3 3 Account Settings Click the Account Setting button No 3 Figure 10 1 to display the following window Account Settirig E 47 Address Book Account Information 6 dch Egy Group 1 Notify Yes 2 seen E 2 Mobile 1 oob 92 0632919 S GE Mobile 2 000 935261 462 Mobile 3 06 9307158 56 Login IF 127 0 0 1 Login Time 115 2006 4 06 52 Phi 8 Statistics Group 1 Client 39 5000 Figure 10 6 Account Setting The controls in the Account Setting window No Name Description 1 Add A Group Creates a group 2 Add A Client Creates a client 3 Delete A Group Client Deletes a created group or client 4 View Edit A Client Highlight one client and click the button to view or edit its information 5 Find A Client searches a Client 6 Address Book Lis
280. ed separating it from the main network is advised whenever possible 383 D Remote Viewing 8 2 10 UPnP Settings WebCam Server supports UPnP technology Universal Plug and Play to allow automatic port configuration to your router In order for UPnP tobe enabled the following requirements must be met Windows XP Service Pack 2 or above Windows XP must be configured to use UPnP see below O UPnP must be enabled on your router consult your router s documentation Enabling UPnP in Windows XP 1 Goto Windows Start click Start button select Settings and select Network Connections This window appears T Network Connections Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help ay y Back v P y Y Search Folders gt SJ XxX id EH Address Networkcomections E Name Type Status Device Name PhoneitorHostaddress Owner LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Realtek RTL8139 Family System Figure 8 14 2 Right click one Local Area Connection select Properties and click the Advanced tab This dialog box appears l Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Windows Firewall Protect mu computer and network By limiting or preventing access to this computer from the Internet Figure 8 15 384 D Remote Viewing 3 Click the Settings tab and click Exceptions tab This dialog box appears
281. ed the event files of scene changes will not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached Demo See three examples of Focus Change and View Change Click the Play button to see the demonstration Skip Instant Light Change Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms For example light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly With the option selected the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm and continue monitoring See the Note in Crowd Detection later in this chapter for possible risk To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the settings Start monitoring to run the application When a scene change is detected a warning message will appear on live video if Live Disable Alarm is enabled the selected alarm or output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Scene Change in System Log for later retrieval 181 El Video Analysis 3 12 Panorama View A panorama view splices multiple camera images together and allows you to monitor a large area in one view There are two ways to create a panorama view Stitching camera images together with overlapping by matching reference points and using the Easy Mode to place camera images next to each other with no overlapping The cameras selected for the panorama
282. ed Dome Bullet Camera PTZ Camera PT Camera Vandal Proof IP Dome Fixed IP Dome Cube Camera and Fisheye Camera GV Video Server Converts up to 1 2 or 4 analog camera s into IP camera s GV Compact DVR Converts up to 4 or 8 analog cameras into IP cameras GV NVR A complete software based solution for IP vdeo surveillance 112 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 2 Dongle Requirement To perform third party IP devices with the Hybrid or NVR soltuion you will need a NVR dongle to run the GV System There are two types of dongles internal dongle with hardware watchdog function and external dongle The dongle options include 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 IP channels It is required to install drivers from the Software DVD for the NVR dongle to work See USB Dongle Required for IP Device Application in Appendix A 113 2 3 1 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution Hybrid Solution Description Specifications of the Hybrid solution The Hybrid solution integrates analog videos with digital videos from IP video devices with the limit of 32 channels in total The Hybrid solution allows you to connect up to 32 IP channels from Guardian Security Solutions IP devices for free For example Number of analog channels up to 32 free GV IP channels lt 32 channels Connection of third party IP devices to GV System To implement the Hybrid solution with third party IP v
283. ed by its geographical location 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Network Camera Scan ViewLog Configure Schedule Monitor Camera Select Screen Division Exit Di Configuring Main System Enables the connection to remote applications Rotates through the screen divisions Brings up these options Video Audio Log System Log Search POS Data POS Live View Live Object Index Search Object Index and E Map Accesses System settings Set up recording schedule Starts monitoring Select the desired camera number for main division view Select screen divisions Brings up these options Login Change User Logout Minimize Restart Multicam and Exit ER Configuring Main System 1 1 2 Installing Cameras To set up cameras on the GV System click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click Camera Install Ifyou are connecting to an IP camera select IP Camera Install and refer to IP Channel Setup in Chapter 2 for detailed instructions O For analog cameras no further configuration is required after physically installing the cameras To disable a connected camera select Camera Install In the dialog box clear the checkmarks of the channels you want to disable and click OK Camera Install COTY Camera vd E Clear All ml select All Ok Eo _ CR Cancel Figure 1 3 Di Configuring Main System 1 1 3 Enabling the Recording To start recording p
284. ed to support home position and preset position To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter To outline a mask area where motion will be ignored draw an area on the camera view and click Set Mask on the dialog box that pops up To remove the mask draw an area bigger than the mask and click Remove Mask Click Test Move an object through the view of camera and its movement should be tracked If not increase Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to motion in the camera view If you have set a mask you can select Enable Mask to display masked area during the test Click OK to apply the settings To begin single camera tracking click the Configure button select Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and select Object Tracking Start Note When multiple objects are moving at the same time the camera will track the object with the largest area 148 a Video Analysis 3 3 Digital Object Tracking Without the need of a PTZ camera the Digital Object Tracking provides you real time tracking of up to 7 moving objects and automatic magnification of the targeted objects The digital tracking function which combines with PIP View or PAP View can be an aid to spot any suspicious activities under the surveillance area 3 3 1 Setting Digital Object Tracking 1 Click the Configure butto
285. egistering a domain name with DDNS service you can enable the DDNS function on the GV System Run Dynamic DNS Service from the Windows Start menu This DNS Client dialog box will appear 5 DNSClient Username Password Obtain an IP address automatically 2 Use the following IF address EMail Setting Register Update successhul Time 20 27 19 swansea dipmap com 192 168 0 215 Figure 11 3 Username Type the username used to enable the service from the DDNS Password Type the password used to enable the service from the DDNS Obtain an IP address automatically The DDNS server will use any available IP address from the system or the router Use the following IP address If your system or router has more one IP address you can assign one IP address for the communication between the DDNS server and GV System lt is highly suggested to assign the fixed IP address If the assigned IP address is dynamic the DDNS will not be able to access your system when the IP address is changed O Run at startup Select this option to automatically run the DDNS service at Windows startup Save After above settings click this button The connection information will be displayed Note The DNS Client will not upload IP address unless one of the following applications is running Main System Center V2 VSM Dispatch Server and SMS Server If the IP address of your GV System is not updated for more than 30 days your host
286. elect Apply Directdraw Scale in the Display dialog box and restart the Main System 2 Click the Configure button select Tools select DirectDraw Configuration and select Use Colorful Mode Then restart the Main System for the mode to take effect For the users of GV 1120 GV 1120A GV 1120B GV 1240 GV 1240A GV 1240B GV 1480 GV 1480A GV 1480B or GV 3008 Card 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select General Setting select Apply Directdraw Scale in the Display dialog box and restart the Main System 2 Click the Configure button select Tools select DirectDraw Configuration and select Use Colorful Mode Then restart the Main System 3 Click the Configure button select A V Setting clear the selection of DSP Overlay and restart the Main System for the colorful mode to take effect Note The Colorful Mode can be applied to any connected channels of IP devices directly by selecting Use Colorful Mode and then restarting the Main System 1 18 3 Stopping Video Lost Watchdog When the video signal is weak the software watchdog will try to recover the lost video by restarting the system and even rebooting the computer By default the video lost watchdog is enabled To disable this feature click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools select Video Signal Diagnostic and select Disable Video Signal Weak Watchdog Di Configuring Main System 1 18 4 Deactivating
287. elect Object Index ls Basic Search Ctrl F8 Event on Advanced Search FS Object Index Ctrl Shift F8 Reload Database Figure 4 52 3 On the Object Index Search window select the desired camera and file date for playback 4 To play images with the ViewLog player double click the desired frame on Object Index List amp Object Index Search Camera Camera 9 127 0 0 1 S 2010 01 25 4 17 30 17 59 Object Index List 17 28 56 627 17 29 09 075 17 29 17 517 17 29 43 413 Show Snapshot Figure 4 53 5 If you retrieve the images of Video Snapshot you can select Show Snapshot at the bottom of the dialog box and double click the desired frame to display it with the default image viewer of Windows e g Paint 282 D Playing Back Video Files 4 6 4 Resuming Backup Using the Remote ViewLog Service you can back up files from a remote GV System DVR or a GV IP device When the file transfer is interrupted by a network error you can even resume backup 1 When the backup is interrupted this message will appear There are x file s couldnt be backup Do you want to keep a log file and backup them later 2 Click Yes You will be prompted to save the partial backup file as lv format 3 To resume backup click the Resume button in the Backup dialog box and then locate the partial backup file to continue For details on backing up files see Chapter 5 Backup Deletion and Repair 283
288. elect a customized image in jpeg or bmp format to replace the blue screen Note the image size is limited to 704 x 576 The blue screen is the default setting for no image inthe recording 261 Database Cache Specify the duration of event files to be loaded at ViewLog startup System Configuration Quad View Thumbnail View Multi View Display Database Cache Play setting Read Database when Viewlog starts Local Only Display all available events Display the last 10 Minutes Display the events for the previous 10 Minutes Path for cache CcWindowsiTemp Figure 4 37 Display all available events Load all recorded event files load the selected time period of the last recorded event selected time period of events select Reload Database select DVR and then select Default Setting to reload the specified time length of the event files or Read All to reload all record event files D Playing Back Video Files O Display the last Time of the available database Check this option and select time length of the last recorded event User accounts with limited event search privileges will only be able to Display the events for the previous T me of the user login time Check this option and select time length User accounts with limited event search privileges wi
289. eleration to other fisheye views O Frame Rate Control Limits the frame rate of the fisheye live view to the number specified here Select Apply All to apply the frame rate control to other fisheye views Show Original Video in Low Resolution Shows source video when resolution is low Note The default setting for Hardware Acceleration is enabled for GPU dewarping and it automatically detects the Screen Ratio Setting If you clear Hardware Acceleration it changes to CPU dewarping and you can select the Screen Ratio Setting 3 You can drag and drop PTZ view or 180 degree view to adjust the viewing angle 214 EI Video Analysis 3 22 2 Setting Up a Third Party Fisheye Camera You can also enable dewarping for ga party fisheye cameras and access fisheye related functions 1 To set up a third party fisheye camera click the Configure button select System Configure and select Camera Configure To setup a camera installed with an ImmerVision IMV1 Panorama Lens under Camera Lens select IMV1 Panomorph On the main screen click the camera number and select IMV1 Panomorph to dewarp images For details see Step 2 in Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera earlier in this chapter For other third party fisheye cameras under Camera Lens select Fisheye On the main screen click the camera number and select Fisheye to dewarp images For details see Step 2 in Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera earlier in this chapter Camera Config
290. els Max Image size Select a maximum resolution on the WebCam server The default resolution on the WebCam is Normal 320 x 240 For DVR wdeo source if you want to vew the image of Middle 640 x 480 De interlace 704 x 480 De interlace or Large 640 x 480 or 704 x 480 size on the remote site you also have to configure a corresponding Video Source at the GV System Click the Configure button on the main screen No 14 Figure 1 2 point to A V Setting and then select Video Source In the Video Resolution field select 640 x 480 or higher resolutions and then click OK to apply For IP video source you may have larger size than DVR s Besides normal middle and large size you can select Actual Size of that IP video Refer to Hardware Compressed and Megapixel Stream in Single View Viewer and Multi View Viewer later in this chapter Allowed PTZ camera The option allows you to control selected PTZ cameras at a remote computer Click the button and select the desired PTZ cameras to work on the WebCam server Note To specify the time length allowed for a guest user to access the WebCam server click the Configure button on the main screen select System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit On the WebCam tab select the Limit Connection Time option and specify the time length The time range is between 10 and 3600 seconds 3 6 D Remote Viewing 8 2 4 SDK Settings A Server Setup Audio JPG
291. em 2 In the Virtual O Device Setting dialog box Figure 6 37 select one device e g GV IP Device and click the Add button This dialog box appears GV Video Server GV Compact DVR GV IPCAM1 3M 1 0 IP Address GYVIPCAMT 192 168 1 236 GY IPCAMT 192165 1 154 input 1 Total Input 2 Output Total Output 2 corel Figure 6 38 3 The connected devices appear on the IP address list Select the desired devices and click the gt gt button to add their I O devices to the Mapping list The total number of added I O devices is displayed at the bottom of the Mapping list Click OK 4 Select the added module from the list and define the input status in the Monitor Input section For details see Input x in I O Device Setup earlier in this chapter Click OK 5 Onthe main screen click the I O button No 7 Figure 1 2 This module is available from the selection list 339 Chapter 7 Point Of Sale POS Application 341 340 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 9 7 6 1 1 7 8 7 9 Text Mode POS Deeg EEN 7 1 1 Windows Based Direct POS Integration oococcconinnocnnococcnocononocononcnnnnnronononononons 7 1 2 Data Capture Box Integration EE Graphic Mode POS Device ciisiascninonia tos aech Sedal POM COMM CON sigurnima e deabaisereetueendgeresenaederets Tee INEIWORS COMM CC ION oporto seat cases A E E tenteereewenicoss POS DEVICE SO lino retina POS Dala OV CMA Vasari nnmnnn nunnu nnmnnn
292. em Clicking the Reset button will clear the listed events New events will be generated until the alarms of the remote site are invoked Host Information The upper section shows the general information of the connected GV System The lower section shows the number of MPEG4 RPB and audio channels currently serving over the Internet Log List Displays a history of login and logout information 427 D Remote Viewing 8 6 16 Iconlmage Change The icons displayed on the Host List can be replaced with icons of your choice For example the figure below has the original Host icon replaced with the icon drawn with a red line across it Host y EEE Search A Se gt A Camera Figure 8 46 Under the DMMultivew folder there are 2 subfolders named Commonlcon and Customicon Figure 8 47 Depending on the icons you wish to change just create a new image icon in Customicon and rename it tothe icon name you wish to replace from Commonlcon To revert back to the original icons just delete the images in Customlcon For details on image size restriction and file naming see Custom Icon Naming Chart for Multi View in Appendix G SS C Program Files DMMultiView Commonicon Se C Program Files WMMultiView Customicon File Edit View Favorites Tools Help File Edit view Favorites Tools Help hi a ys Search gt Folders gt Mame i A Size Type Sa addrbook_authsvrgroup bmp i Z EP Bitmap Image S addrbook_camera
293. emote Viewing 8 7 2 Sending Audio Broadcast You can start audio broadcasting on any host by installing the following program 1 Ensure a microphone is properly installed 2 Install and run Audio Broadcast from the Software DVD This dialog box appears Auio Broadcast File Tool Figure 8 48 3 Select Enable You can start speaking to other hosts If you cannot perform audio broadcasting select Tool from the menu bar select Set Broadcast Address and ensure the IP address and port number are correctly configured By default the IP address is 224 1 1 3 and port number is 8400 to broadcast audio 431 D Remote Viewing 8 7 3 Receiving Multicast and Audio Broadcast To remotely receive multicast and audio broadcast there are three methods use the multicast program included on the Software DVD through the web interface of WebCam server and through the Multi View of WebCam server Using Multicast Program on Software DVD 1 Install and run Multicast from the Software DVD This dialog box appears El Is e A SE MulticatHosti Host List 1 SE Multicast Host Configure Configure Button 2080604 16 42 31 Figure 8 49 2 The host s using the same multicast IP address within the same LAN is displayed automatically on the host list If you cannot see any host displayed click the Configure button select General Setup and ensure the relevant ID address and port number are correctly confi
294. en cameras or I O devices are triggered their icons on the E map flash Uncheck this option if you don t want to see the blinking icons EMap Auto Popup When cameras or I O devices are triggered the related map will pop up on the screen instantly Check this option and minimize the Remote E Map window for the 499 D E Map Application application Show Event Check to display motion or VO triggered events on the Host Information window UO Trigger Camera When input devices are triggered the related camera views will pop up on the screen instantly For this function to work input devces must be mapped to cameras on the Main System See Pop up Live View in Chapter 1 Hide Tree List Check to hide the tree list Enable DirectDraw The DirectDraw is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames In this case disable the feature Use small icon The Remote E Map uses the large icons of cameras and I O devices by default Select this option if you want to use small icons Retry in the background When Remote E map is disconnected with the GV System the Remote E Map will automatically re connect the GV System in 5 seconds Select this function to avoid the Server Closed message popping up each time the connection failed but the auto connection still retries in the background 9 4 4 Viewing Host Information and Playing Back Video The Host Information window lists th
295. en you forget the password the password can be sent to your e mail account d Click OK to enter the main screen You can also select the following options Auto Login Allows auto login as the current user every time when the system is launched For security purposes this feature is only recommended for single user systems Di Configuring Main System Allow removing password System lt is recommended to select this option which allows removing the password database once you forget passwords For details see the same option in Account and Password later in this chapter T Click to open the onscreen keyboard and enter the login information 1 1 1 P e CG e e gt E Di Configuring Main System Main Screen alla 18 1 d i di amp Figure 1 2 The controls in the main screen No Name 1 Camera Number 2 Camera Name 3 Date Time E Storage Space Connection PTZ Control VO Control TV Out O0 Oo0O Y O Ol User Defined 10 Location Name Description Indicates the camera number matching the port number in the GV video capture card Indicates the given camera name Displays the current date and time Indicates the remaining disk space Indicates the connection status of remote applications Displays the PTZ control panel Displays the I O control panel Displays the TV Quad control panel Accesses other applications Indicates the GV System s name usually nam
296. ength choices include 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute and 5 minutes Note For details on the ViewLog player see Video Playback in Chapter 4 ER Configuring Main System 1 2 System Configuration This section introduces system configurations of the GV System 1 2 1 General Setting Let s start with the options on the General Setting dialog box Changes made on the General Setting dialog box would apply to all available cameras attached to the system Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click General Setting to access the following dialog box General Setting Location Name Video Record TEST140 PC Max Video Clip 5 Min Post Rec 3 Sec Caption Sef Pre Rec Use Digital Watermark Protection Monitor Option Start Delay 6 Sec Video Log Storage Available 18 81GB Camera Scan Recycle Log Interval 3 Sec D 10 5 2012 10 51 Set Location Exit Option T Auto Shut down Windows W Recycle Fg b Display w Appl DirectDraw Scale lf Enable De interlace Render Figure 1 4 Location Name The given name maximum 14 characters is displayed in main screen as the name of the server Caption Display camera ID and name on the upper left hand corner of the camera screen You may choose No for no caption ID to show only camera ID ID Name to show both camera ID Name Monitor Option Select Start Delay to start recording after x second s when the system is
297. eo Player Quick Search Y Setup C Object Index C Face Detection 2 Schedule Cancel Figure 3 25 Select one camera from the drop down list and enable Camera 163 EI Video Analysis 5 In the Setup section select Video snapshot 6 Click after Video Snapshot for further setup E seconds 2 Frames W Save as JPEG file W Enable KVO triger Mod 1 Pin 1 conce Figure 3 26 Frames Specifies the frequency of automatic video snapshot By default the system will take 2 frames every second when the monitoring starts Save as JPEG file Saves the images in JPEG format Otherwise you can only access the Snapshots by using Quick Search and ViewLog players Enable I O Trigger Takes snapshots only when the assigned input device is triggered 7 To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 8 Click OK to apply the settings 9 Start monitoring to take snapshots 164 3 6 2 Searching Video Snapshots a Video Analysis You can locate snapshots within the specified cameras and period of time with Object Index Search 1 2 3 To Click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and select Search Object Index This dialog box appears 24612002 d 06 30 53 21612002 d 07 30 53 Camera Cancel Figure 3 27 Specify a time period
298. eo quality The level of noise tolerance can be adjusted For details see Video Noise Solutions later in this chapter 3 Motion Detection Associated Group Refer to Associated Monitoring later in this chapter for more details Mask Filter Mask instructs the system to ignore movement within the masked area Mask could be applied to repetitive motion that should be ignored within the surveillance area such as street trees w Invoke Alarm Notify W Invoke to Send Alerts Low E Delay Time Setup vw Output Module Mod 1 Pin 1 Delay Time Setup Register Motion Event Figure 1 11 Invoke Alarm Sends computer alarm wav sound file on motion detection Invoke to Send Alerts Sends an assigned alert E Mail Hotline SMS when motion occurs Use the drop down listto specify the motion duration to trigger the alert The choices include High 0 5 seconds Normal 1 second and Low 1 5 seconds For example if you choose High the alert will be sent out when motion is detected for over 0 5 seconds To configure e mail alerts see E Mail Notification later in this chapter to configure hotline alerts see Hotline Notification later in this chapter to configure SMS alerts see Short Message Service in Chapter 10 Right Arrow button Sets the time to delay the activation of the assigned alerts E Mail Hotline SMS Di Configuring Main System Output Module Triggers the specified output module on motion detec
299. er To start the Spot Monitor Controller follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select DSP Spot Monitor and select Spot Monitor Setup This dialog box appears x e Use DSP as Spot Monitor at next Startup mt 0 Figure 11 77 select Use DSP as Spot Monitor at next Startup and click OK Restart the GV System Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select DSP Spot Monitor and select Spot Monitor Controller The Spot Monitor Controller window appears Note When the DSP Spot Monitor Control feature is enabled DSP Overlay will be disabled in the Main System 605 1 Useful Utilities Advanced Layout Spot Monitor Controller Video Setting Advanced Layout Figure 11 78 Spot Monitor Controller Spot x The drop down list is available when the GV System is equipped with two video capture cards and connects two additional monitors Select Spot 1 to configure the screen display on the first monitor and Spot 2 for the second monitor DIV 1 16 Screen division option Right Arrow button Sets the channel sequence of each scanned page Up to 16 scanned pages can be configured Click the button to display this dialog box Empt fio aji Se Jr 14 15 fe Cancel Figure 11 79 Page Setting Screen Division Displays the channel sequence You can modify the sequence by typing the number directly on ea
300. er Type TEPP Fort Device f POS 1 Mapping Camera y Camera Camera 1 POS Module COM Por 127 0 0 1 iw Cash Drawer open signal Module 1 Input 1 D iw Lise Codepage Mapping 437 CEM United States e Trace mode DH Add Cancel Figure 7 13 POS system settings 351 Point of Sale POS Application Printer Type Select Serial Port Parallel Port or TCP IP Port that the POS device belongs to Device Select the number of the POS device if multiple POS devices are connected and rename it if necessary Mapping Camera Assign the POS device to a camera screen POS Module Select the printer attached to the POS device If it s not Epson select General for other brands If the printing is the graphic mode select GraphMode For Graphic mode applications see the Graphic Mode POS Device section above If the printing is the text mode and a GV Data Capture Box is not used for integration select POS Text Sender For this application see Windows Based Direct POS Integration earlier in this chapter COM Port Select the COM port that the POS device is connected to The parameter IP address button For the serial type of POS device click the button to configure Baud Rate Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits of the POS device For the TCP IP type of POS device click the button to configure IP address domain name or device name of the POS device Cash Drawer Open Si
301. er V2 Connect to VSM Start Stop Net Down Net Resume Appears when the GV System logs in or out VSM when the connection of both fails or resumes Connect to SMS Start Stop Net Down Net Resume Appears when the GV System logs in or out the SMS server when the connection of both fails or resumes Send Email Alert Appears when an e mail alert is sent out Send SMS Alert Appears when an SMS alert is sent out Send Hotline Alert Appears when a Hotline alert is sent out Windows Shutdown Appears when Windows is closed e e e Recycle Appears when the GV System recycles event files toincrease storage space Auto Reboot Appears when Windows is automatically rebooted Device This column shows the indivdual camera number Mode This column shows whether actions are being taken in local side or remote side Login This function shows whom and when has logged in and out the GV System and WebCam server l Live Log Browser Recycle Log 8 23 2007 18 52 Monitor System Login Counter POS 2 Time User Login 10719 2007 3 28 02 PM 10719 2007 5 43 05 PM User Logout Status SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS IL 2 H 4 5 E H D 3 lt 1 101922007 6 05 35 PM 1 1 1019 2007 07 52 PM 101922007 22746 PM 101922007 22254 PM 101922007 2 26 01 PM 1019 2007 7 23 55 PM 101922007 9 26 06 HM ID Shows the event ID number Time This column shows the time when Login event occurs Figure 1 43
302. er backup is completed Double click Backup Server Viewlog batto run ViewLog and to load the recorded events into ViewLog 573 1 Useful Utilities 11 8 3 Advanced Settings You may want to configure the Backup Server to fit into your own needs In the Geo Backup Server dialog box Figure 11 49 click Advanced The Advanced Settings dialog box appears General You can select the bandwidth speed to ensure the quality connection Advanced General Server Settings Schedule Upload Policy Keep Days Full Speed Keep Days C Limit Bandwidth ET 1024 KB s C Smart Detection Startup Add to Startup Recycle Enable P ij Cancel Figure 11 50 Upload Policy Full Speed Build the connection at full maximum speed O Limit Bandwidth Specify the desired bandwidth limit in kb s Smart Detect Automatically detect the file size and decide the proper bandwidth speed Startup Automatically starts the Backup Server at Windows startup Recycle Enable this option to recycle video files Enlarge Recycle Threshold Recycle threshold is the file size at which the recycling begins If you set the recycle threshold to be 2000 MB recycling starts when free space on the connected disk is under 2000 MB and the oldest files are overwritten The upper limit of the recycle threshold is 99999 MB Keep Days 1 999 Specify the number of days to keep the files from 1 day to 999 days When both Keep Days
303. er in queue Each user will be given 60 seconds to control the PTZ camera The Timer at the upper right corner informs the user of the remaining time of control or the total waiting time The supervisor is given the highest priority to control the PTZ camera and won t be restrained by 60 second time limit When the supervisor logs on the WebCam server the Timer shows 999 Click the L button to access more functions of the PTZ camera such as changing PTZ speed starting Auto Scan and setting preset points The available functions are subject to PTZ models To configure preset points for the PTZ camera ensure the following two settings are enabled first 1 Map the PTZ camera to a camera channel Configure button lt Accessories lt Camera Mapping PTZ Dome 2 Enable Remote Control Network button lt WebCam Server lt Enable Remote Control 398 D Remote Viewing 8 3 8 Visual PTZ Control Panel Other than the PTZ control panel you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image To access this feature click the PTZ Control button No 7 Figure 8 19 and select Visual PTZ For details on using the Visual PTZ Control Panel see PTZ Automation in Chapter 1 399 D Remote Viewing 8 3 9 1 0 Control The new interface provides real time graphic displays of camera and I O status and alarm event Additionally you can force output as well as enable and disable I O devices to the remote GV System Click the I O C
304. erver program and how to configure the Main System to send out SMS alerts For supported GPRS models see Appendix F 10 1 Installing SMS Server To install the SMS Server application follow these steps 1 Insert the Software DVD to the PC connected to a GSM GPRS modem lt will run automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Click GV SMS Server and follow the on screen instructions 908 10 Short Message Service 10 2 The SMS Server Window Run the SMS Server program from the Start menu The following window appears Device Information Device GMmMBb2 PCS Band Goh 94001500 MHz SiS Status Queue 0 Send Successi 0 Failure 07 Figure 10 1 The SMS Server Window The controls in the SMS Server window No Name Description 1 Start Stop Service Starts or stops the SMS Server 2 Server Setting Sets up the SMS Server 3 Account Setting Creates and edits accounts 4 SMS Log Setting Sets up and accesses the SMS Log 5 Device Setting Sets up the GSM GPRS modem 6 Exit Logs out administrator changes password or exits the SMS server 509 10 Short Message Service 10 3 SMS Server Setup Before starting the SMS service you must configure these three settings 1 Device Settings 2 Server Settings and 3 Account Settings 10 3 1 Device Settings 1 Click the Device Setting button No 5 Figure 10 1 and then select GSM Module This
305. es 1 On the panel toolbar click the Configure button and select Schedule Setting This dialog box appears Schedule Setting Add Modity Delete save Cancel Monday Wednesday Friday Schedule 1 Default 00 00 00 23 00 00 Figure 6 24 2 Click Add to create a schedule This dialog box appears Schedule Information Mame schedule 1 Mode Defaut Time 00 00 00 23 00 00 Days Figure 6 25 Name Type a name for the schedule Mode Select a mode from the drop down list Time Define a time period you want the mode to run e e Days Check the day s you want the mode to run Click OK to apply the settings and click Save to return to the panel 4 To start the mode schedule click the Mode Schedule button No 2 Figure 6 17 and then select Mode Schedule Start 329 6 6 5 Quick Link FJ 1 0 Applications The Quick Link provides a quick access to triggered I O devices It is a separate window to display all group icons The group icon flashes when any included I O device is triggered Clicking the flashing icon will bring you to the I O location in the Advanced NVO List D To open the Quick Link window click the Toggle Quick Link button No 3 Figure 6 17 x To set the Quick Link window at panel startup see the Show Quick Link option in Figure 6 22 ale a lac Mode Defaut i Standard I O List Advanced VO List TEST27 1 Modules e Entrance AE Module 1
306. es The delay is about 3 frames before or after the found data record 361 Point of Sale POS Application 7 9 POS Live View The POS Live View can display transaction data in a separate window instead of overlaying data on the main screen lt features e Fast access to transaction data without opening System Log The View is designed for high screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 When your monitor supports 1280 x 1024 and the main screen is set to 1024 x 768 you can juxtapose the main screen and the POS Live View 7 9 1 The POS Live View Window On the main screen click the ViewLog button and then select POS Live View eee Figure 7 22 The controls in the POS Live View Window No Name Description 1 Previous Transaction Goes to the previous transaction data 2 Next Transaction Goes to the next transaction data Suspends the current transaction data display Clicking this button 3 Freeze WW again will restore to the live display 4 Live View Menu Accesses the settings of POS Live View 5 Exit Closes the POS Live View window 362 Point of Sale POS Application 7 9 2 Setting Live View To change the display status on the POS Live View window click the Live View Menu button No 4 Figure 7 22 and select Live View Setup This dialog box appears Live View Setup View Setting f Max Transactions in Each View a e Max Rows in Each View 9999 Mode Setting f Single View a oane Fig
307. es can cause false alarms Live Disable Alarm Region When an unattended or a missing object is detected this option allows you to close the flashing alert box automatically or manually Under Delay Time s specify the duration of an unattended or a missing object to invoke a warning message Figure 3 36 The range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds Note Closing the Flashing Alert Region will disable object detection To reactivate please restart monitoring Camera 1 Disable alarm region C Auto Y Unattended Object Manual Missing Object OK Delay Time s p v Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Luminance Change Detection This option may suspend object detection when the lighting condition is poor so as to avoid false detection Use the slide bar to adjust the level of detection from 1 to 5 The higher the level is the more sensitive the system is to luminance change When luminance change reaches the level you set the system will stop object detection Sensitivity Use the slide bar to increase or decrease detection sensitivity if necessary 176 EN Video Analysis Delay Time This option allows you to specify the duration of an object missing or unattended to invoke the detection Unattended Object The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds with 3 seconds as default For example suppose you choose 12 seconds When an unattended object appears in the camera view for 12 seconds its location will be hig
308. es len Jr Raab ra Ha a IMa DI DI up Ge J CH TD C wh Cy nn O a 1 a ict o oer e ma Ee pd a o DI DI o A l l olme e e la la oo oo Wie gell 6 e 10 00 0 Un e Oe Pa A 0 a 1 E a 4 5 D 5 a g A E L L E F g e a e t ll R B le le ee Ile In ai eet ea l T T H A DI eea P H ler M lin Gs o e H Or p O tez HH or m 6 Figure 7 21 Codepage Mapping Preview 3 In the From field locate and click one of the symbols or characters that couldn t display correctly In this example you can see its previous character code From side Ox9C has been transferred to the default equivalent To side OxA3 360 Point of Sale POS Application 7 8 POS Data Search You can locate any desired POS data and videos during a transaction On the main screen click the ViewLog button and then select Search POS Data to display the Quick Search window When the Quick Search starts the latest transaction video and data will always be displayed For details on this feature see Quick Search in Chapter 4 Note When IP cameras are installed with POS devices note the following In an Internet envronment the found POS data and images cannot match properly Therefore IP cameras are not recommended to be installed with POS devices in this condition In a LAN environment there will be image delay between found POS data and imag
309. es using ViewLog follow these steps 1 On the function panel click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 and select Delete Log This dialog box appears Delete Time Period Start Time al 32010 00 00 00 End Time 21 32010 E 23 58 01 Select Camerata E Ol Camerals Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Lamera Camera 9 ideo Audio Event MM Include Mever Recycle Event Included day light saving time rollback event Total Event 1 Total Size 4953 KB cese Figure 5 7 2 Define the time period for file deletion Uncheck the cameras which you don t want to delete the files of Use the drop down list to select the types of events to be deleted e g video audio or both together 5 If you want to delete the never recycle events select Include Never Recycle Event 6 If you want to delete the events recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period select Included Day Light Saving Time Rollback Event 7 Click the Delete button 299 L Backup Deletion and Repair Tip If you just want to delete a specific event or several events within one day select the event or multiple events on the Video Event list and right click to select Delete The Delete dialog box will then appear and you can follow the steps described above to delete files without setting up the time period Note 1 If you want to view the history of file deletion click th
310. essage Service Login ID amp Password Type a valid ID and password registered in the SMS Server Figure 10 7 Local If the GSM GPRS modem is installed at the same server with the GV System select this item Remote If the GSM GPRS modem is installed at a separate server select this item Click the SMS Option tab and specify the Interval between two sent out messages The Interval time can be set up to 1440 minutes Any alert condition will be ignored by the system during the interval Click OK to apply above settings Click the Test Account button Figure 10 12 If the connection of both devices is established the message will appear Login SMS Server OK If the connection fails the message will appear Connect to SMS Server Fail 920 10 Short Message Service 10 6 2 Setting Mobile Numbers The Main System allows you to configure three mobile phone numbers for the SMS service When an alert condition happens the SMS messages will be sent out to the three assigned mobile phones simultaneously 1 Open the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box Figure 10 12 2 Click the Account Setting button The SMS Setup dialog box appears Figure 10 13 3 Click the Mobile Setup tab in the upper of the window This dialog box appears SMS Setup Connection Setup Mobile Setup SMS Option Hotline List w Add to SMS List Country Cade oo Mobile Number rara Please selecta mobile to edit the HotLine
311. esume Appears if video resume in the associated camera Signal On Appears if one of the input device connected tothe associated I O module are activated Signal Off Appears if one of the input device connected to the associated I O module are terminated ER Configuring Main System I O error Appears if associated I O module failed I O resume Appears if associated I O module resume to action Missing Object Appears if objects miss from a defined camera view Unattended Object Appears if unattended objects show up within a defined camera view Intruder Appears if there are objects entering a defined region Disk Full Appears if storage space is full Scene Change Appears if the associated camera has been physically tampered Network Shutdown Appears if the network connection is closed Camera Connection Lost Appears if the connection to the associated cameras is lost e e e e 8 e Camera Connection Resumed Appears if the connection to the associated camera is rebuilt e Tampering Alarm Appears if the camera is physically tampered with e Face Count Appears if faces are detected under Mask Filter or if no faces are detected under Mask Filter Inverse Alarm System This function shows which functions are being enabled or disabled in the GV System BR Live Log Browser Recycle Log 8 23 2007 18 52 Monitor System Login Counter POS 2 Time Event 10192007 3 13 27 PM System Startup
312. etting General Advanced W Moise detection to reduce file size Sensitivity 2 Figure 1 80 4 Select Noise detection to reduce file size and adjust the Sensitivity level The higher the value the more sensitive the system is to video noise 5 Click Apply When the option is selected and video noise conditions are detected you can see the icon overlaid on the right bottom corner of recorded videos So you can easily distinguish the normal size segment from reduced size segment Note the icon does not appear on live video Note You can also use this function when the recording mode is set to Motion Detection ER Configuring Main System 1 133 Noise Filter The Noise Filter function can remove video and audio noise from live view The video denoising can reduce file size and improve image quality while the audio denoising can maximize the sound quality Filtering Out Video Noise 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and select Video Lowpass Filter Setting This dialog box appears Video Lowpass Filter Setting Choose Camera a 39 f 13 Bo mu AI Mil gle E 12 16 Figure 1 81 2 Select the desired channels to be filtered out vdeo noises and click OK The video noises from the selected channels are reduced and file sizes are decreased too Filtering Out Audio Noise 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to A V S
313. etting Ge JPEG MPEG H3264 hax recording frame rate of Motion Frame sec Record 30 FPS hax recording frame rate of Non blotion or Hop Trigger Frame sec Record 30 FPS hax recording frame rate of WO Trigger Framessec Record 30 FPS cancel Figure 2 15 4 Select Enable Economic Mode to enable the economic mode 129 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 5 Under the Economic Frame Rate Setting section configure the frame rate settings for the incoming IP video compressed with JPEG MPEG or H264 codec To configure the frame rate setting for the IP vdeo compressed with JPEG A Select JPEG B Specify the number of frame rates per second for different situations when motion is detected the Max Recording Frame Rate of Motion option when l O devices are triggered the Max Recording Frame Rate of I O Trigger option when no motion is detected or when no I O devices are triggered the Max Recording Frame Rate of Non Motion or Non O Trigger option To configure the frame rate setting for the IP vdeo compressed with MPEG or H 264 A Select MPEG_H264 B Select torecord inthe maximum frame rate or record key frames only for different situations when motion is detected the Max Recording Frame Rate of Motion option when I O devices are triggered the Max Recording Frame Rate of I O Trigger option when no motion is detected or when no I O devices are triggered the Max Recording Frame Rate of
314. etting and select Audio Settings A dialog box appears Select the desired channels to be filtered out audio noise select Wave Out De Noise and click OK The audio noises of the selected channels are reduced ER Configuring Main System 1 14 Picture in Picture View With the Picture in Picture PIP view you can crop the video to get a close up view or zoom in on the video This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear and detailed images of the surveillance area 1 Click the desired camera name and select PIP View 2 The screen automatically switches to one division and an inset window of the camera view appears in the bottom right corner Ny ES 8 on ez oe e S CT Ka TTT e EE admin 1 TEST Inset window Figure 1 82 3 Double click the inset window A hand icon appears 4 Click the inset window Anavigation box appears Navigation box Inset window Figure 1 83 Move the navigation box around in the inset window to have a close up view of the selected area To adjust the navigation box size move the cursor to any of the box corners enlarge or diminish the box 7 To change the frame color of the navigation box right click the image select Mega Pixel Setting and select Set Color of Focus Area 8 To exit the PIP view click the camera name and click PIP View again Di Configuring Main System 1 15 Picture and Picture View Wi
315. etup Specify the time interval between e mail alerts This option can prevent e mails from being sent frequently The default interval is 5 minutes configurable from O to 60 minutes For example if motion lasts for more than 15 minutes it means that you will receive 3 e mails at least H motion lasts for less than 5 minutes you will receive one e mail only SMTP Mail Server requires authentication If the SMTP mail server needs authentication for login select this option and type your account name and password SMTP Server Keep the default port 25 which is common for most SMTP servers However webmail providers such as Yahoo and Hotmail generally use different SMTP port In this case check your e mail provider for the SMTP port number Select SSL if your e mail server requires the SSL authentication for connection Domain Name from DDNS This option generates URL links for remote video playback in the sent e mails For this function to work enter the fixed IP address or domain name of the GV System and enable WebCam Server E mail in Text Mode When WebCam Server is enabled your e mail alert will be sent in HTML format If you want to send the e mail alert in pure text format select this option ER Configuring Main System 1 10 2 Setting Hotline Services When events occur you can receive notification by a text or voice message through pagers or telephones 1 In the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box Figure 1 6
316. events during playback Note that if you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search do not enable this option These flashing boxes can cause false alarms Skip Instant Light Change Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms For example light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly With the option selected the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm and continue monitoring See the Note in Crowd Detection earlier in this chapter for possible risk Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when an unattended object is detected Click the button next to the option to assign a wav sound file Output Module Enables the output device when an unattended object is detected Click the button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number Never Recycle With the option selected the event files of unattended object detection will not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached You can click Test to test your settings If the unattended object cannot be detected increase Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the settings Start monitoring to run the application 204
317. ewing Disk Drive Status ET Ne WE e lee E MRT RE DO 923 11 7 4 11 7 5 11 7 6 NR BACKUD EN Adding a DISK TEE 11 8 1 11 8 2 11 8 3 11 8 4 11 8 5 11 8 6 11 8 7 119 Backup WEI E 11 9 1 11 9 2 11 9 3 11 9 4 11 9 5 11 10 Bandwidth Control Application ccccecceeeeeceeceseceeesnseneeseeenenaes 11 10 1 11 10 2 11 10 38 11 10 4 11 10 5 11 10 6 11 10 7 11 11 ReportGeneralo EE 11 11 1 11 11 2 11 11 3 11 11 4 11 11 5 11 11 6 11 12 Spot Monitor Controller eseou e NEE ces EE NEE E nenn ENEE E nn ns 11 12 1 11 12 2 11 13 1 Remong amp DISK DIV Ea vais Logging n Attomalically at Slant aii rai Setting LED Panel aa E aN BaACKUD SENE apta dci Advanced Set CET Manually AQUINO Files for BAC dl MEET VIEWING Sener ZU sad Retrieving Recorded E EE Viewing Back up SialuS tdi Usage AEC UIC m KEE elle BACK UD VICWON sanirana uae EEN Peronin QUES ni ads VICWING The EVENT FICS arado SING Ener installing the Bandwidth Control EE Allowing Remote Control at DV Atico ci poa Connecting to a WebCam Server onic cccccccecccsececerececaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeaeeeseeaeansneneesaeees Controlling a WebCam Server reses aaan E A E cnn nan RE EE A BanawidilisS cp a ss A A A E dixie ona naee E EE Starting REDON ANA EE SELLING EDOM Ea ee Selina Report aiii oia E Mail Attachment Settings ei nl Playing Back Video Recordings AE VIEWING EVENT HOU EE Spot Monitor TEE eegenaarteg
318. follow the steps in PTZ Control in Chapter 1 123 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 7 RTSP Connection You can add an IP camera to the GV System by using the RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol if this protocol is supported by your IP camera Note The RTSP is a protocol that allows you to access video streams by using the compatible media players like Windows Media Player or equivalent software like GV System 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Camera Install and click IP Camera Install 2 Click the Add Camera button to manually add an IP camera The Select Brand dialog box appears 3 Type the IP address username and password of the IP camera Modify the default HTTP port if necessary 4 Select Protocol from the Brand drop down list 5 Select the protocol that is supported by your IP camera from the Device drop down list Select Brand Server IP HTTP Port User name Password Brand Protocol Device Please select the brand of IP camera Message GV_HTTP_SDK GW_HTTP_SDK_RTSP RTSP over HTTP RTSP over TCP RTSP over UDP i Figure 2 9 GV_HTTP_SDK_RTSP This option is for Guardian Security Solutions SDK users The RTSP protocol uses a HTTP port for data streaming from the IP camera RTSP over HTTP The RTSP protocol uses a HTTP port for data streaming from the IP camera RTSP over TCP The RTSP protocol u
319. g Camera name Camera 9 a Camera TimellO alarm Text g V Print op video file Alignment c ul El Set Font DI jw Apply Stereo Font No POSAYiegand setting Figure 1 20 Camera Time IO Alarm Text Print on video file Displays camera ID location name date and time on the recorded video Note Text overlay is not supported when standard format codec is enabled Print on screen Only for lO alarm Displays the name of triggered input device on the camera screen For this function to work it is required to map a camera to an input device see Overlaying Input Device Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger in Chapter 6 Note Up to 5 input names can be stamped on each channel when inputs are triggered Di Configuring Main System Alignment Select how you want the camera information to be aligned on a camera screen Set Font Click the Set Font button to set up the font The option Apply Stereo Font makes texts stand out from the background by giving white edge to the texts ER Configuring Main System 1 3 Audio and Video Settings 1 3 1 Setting Video Source and Resolution Video Source sets the video standard of your system NTSC or PAL Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select A V Setting and select Video Source to display the following dialog box Video Source Video Setup Video Standard ISCH L Video Resolution 704480 De interlace e cnc Figure 1 21
320. g files mdb files related to the recordings on the hard drive Export Object Index files Exports the Object Index files related to the recordings on the drive O button If you want to change the default folder Viewlog created on the hard drive click the button Note Removing the hard drive will affect ViewLog database To restore these events add the hard drive back to the system and run Repair Database Utility 567 KR Useful Utilities 11 7 5 Logging In Automatically at Startup To automatically log in and minimize the Media Man Tools window at Windows startup follow these steps 1 Click Tools on the menu bar and select Auto login at Windows startup A dialog box appears Type the ID and password of the GV System for automatic login in the future If you want to minimize the Media Man Tools window to the system tray at startup select Auto minimize at startup d Click OK to apply the settings 968 11 7 6 Setting LED Panel 1 Useful Utilities A LED panel on the screen provides a quick indication of the activity status of hard disk drives GOGCAOQOGQOQOQQOQO 1 2 45 6 8 9 10 K a a Mt 2 20 00 ME H E A 7 CS Figure 11 46 CI IT GV System is recording or the video audio files are played back in 1 Flashing Green ViewLog Flashing Red The HDD is recycling Setup LED Panel LED Panel always stays on top Click Tools on the menu bar and select Setup LED Pa
321. g groups you can also edit the settings of individual l O device Right click an l O device and select Setting This dialog box appears Pin Setting Input El Display Setting fis Input Text Color Ge Background Color Alarm Level Level Undefined Trigger Setting e Trigger Associated Outputs Default OK Cancel Figure 6 21 Display Setting You can define the nature of I O devices by colors Note that the setting only affects the Detail style of the Advanced l O List No 4 Figure 6 17 Alarm Level Click the Alarm Level drop down list and select one of the six default colors Fire Smog Vibration Intruder Motion and Emergency For the Level Undefined option select Text Color or Background Color and then click the Input Output drop down list to change its color Trigger Setting Trigger Associated Outputs Triggers outputs in cascade mode see Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers above 326 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 3 Configuring the Advanced I O Panel On the panel toolbar click the Configure button and select Panel Setting This dialog box appears Panel Configure x General Startup Show Quick Link Start Monitoring Schedule Layout Show Host Name i Use User defined Text Level Level 1 Fire SR Figure 6 22 Startup Show Quick Link Opens the Quick Link window at panel startup Start Schedule Monitoring Starts Mode Schedule at panel
322. gnal This option is only available when an input module is configured in the Main System Assign the input module connected to the cash drawer Every time when the cash drawer is opened a signal will be sent to the Main System and recorded in System Log for later retrieval Use Codepage Mapping This feature is to support special characters and symbols display For details see Codepage Mapping later in this chapter Trace Mode Check this item only after getting the recommendation from our technical Support staff 3 After above settings click Add to add the POS dewce to the Main System 352 7 4 POS Data Overlay Follow these steps to superimpose POS transaction data on the video 1 Open the POS Server Setup window Figure 7 12 2 Click the Text Setup button to set text font and position of the data Text Overlay Setting Camera name Camera 1 F POS Wiegand Overlay Object Text w Print on video file w Printon screen w Print on POS Live View Alignment jw Enable Clean time Transaction end dwell time Clean time Camera TimelO alarm Photograph Text Print text on video file Iw oron screen with photograph jw Printon POS Live View Alignment jw Printon video file Print on screen Only for IO alarm Alignment m Tel c a al SetFont DI 5 sec H V Apply Stereo Font 5 sec DI coca Figure 7 14 Text Overlay Settings Point of Sale POS Application Camera Name
323. ground sounds even when you switch between video channels To change background sounds select the desired audio channel and select Disable Wave Out Audio Switch The selected audio channel will always be in the background Di Configuring Main System Audio Format 16kHz 16 bit By default GV System is set to this audio codec 32kHz 16 bit Select this audio codec for better audio quality if you are using GV 5016 4008 4008A 900A 800B 650B 600B 1480A 1240A 1120A 1480B 1240B 1120B Card Di Configuring Main System 135 Turbo Mode Turbo mode allows recording at the highest speed that GV Combo A Card GV 1120A GV 1240A and GV 1480A can provide at the VGA and D1 resolutions Comparison for GV Combo Card and GV Combo A Card Total Recording Rate NTSC PAL GV 1480 GV 1480A GV 1240 GV 1240A GV 1120 GV 1120A BCEE Tube ven mme faao 1200 s age Note When Turbo Mode is activated the DSP Real Time Display and TV Out functions will be disabled System Requirements Following is the basic system requirements to activate the turbo mode Video Capture Pentium 4 3 0 GHz 2x512 MB Dual Windows XP GV 1240A x 1 Core 2 Duo 3 0 GHz 2x1GB Dual 160 GB Channels AGP or GV 1480A x 1 Core 2 Quad 2 4GHz Windows Vista 7 PCI Express 320 GB Server 2008 minimum 800 x 600 1280 x 1024 GV 1120A x 2 Core 2 Quad 2 4 GHz recommended 250 GB 32 bit color 2 x 1 GB Dual GV 1240A x 2 Core 2 Qu
324. gured 3 Drag the desired cameras to the screen for display If the host has already set a password you will be promoted to enter it at this step 4 To receive audio broadcast first ensure a speaker is properly installed on this computer Click the Configure button select General Setup select Receive Broadcast Audio and ensure the broadcast IP address and port number are correctly configured and click OK 5 To save the current settings of screen division and camera display for future use click the Configure button select Video List Setup and select Export You can also select Import to apply the pre defined settings 432 D Remote Viewing Through the Web Interface of WebCam e Type the IP address or the domain name of GV System on the IE browser Enter ID and password to log into the GV System When the connection is established the Single View page appears On the left panel select Live View and select Multicast The Multicast Viewer Figure 8 49 appears To receive multicast and audio broadcast follow Steps 2 4 in the section of Using Multicast Program on Software DVD above Through the Multi View of WebCam 1 Click the Multicast button No 16 Figure 8 35 on the Multi View screen The Multicast Viewer Figure 8 49 appears To receive multicast and audio broadcast follow Steps 2 4 in the section of Using Multicast Program on Software DVD above 433 D Remote Viewing 8 8 JPEG Image Viewer JPEG I
325. he Authentication Server with a pop up window when the GV System and Authentication Server loss connection 550 1 Useful Utilities 11 5 7 Connecting GV System to the Server To configure the GV System in order to access the Authentication Server remotely through a network connection follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure select Password Setup and then select Remote Authentication Setup This dialog box appears Set Up Remote Authentication Server if Enable Remote Authentication When Remote Authentication Server is off line Allow local supervisors to disable Remote Authentication System Allow users to use local accountto log in w remote applications e g Webcam Remote WIE a Set Wp Server cancel Figure 11 31 Enable Remote Authentication Enable the connection with the Authentication Server Allow local supervisors to disable Remote Authentication System Allows the local supervisor to stop the Authentication application when the connection with the Authentication Server fails Note if the option is disabled and the connection with the Authentication Server fails the local supervisor will not be able to log into the GV System and the dialog box won t be accessible until connection resumes Allow users to use local account to log in remote applications Allows the local users to access other remote applications with their previous password a
326. he GIS function to record videos with GPS locations of GV System 1 To enable the GIS function of GV System click the Configure button on the main screen select Accessories and select Enable Local GIS 2 Start monitoring The GPS data of GV System will be recorded with the video 624 KOR Useful Utilities 11 15 3 Recording GPS Locations of the IP Device If the connected IP device is also equipped with and enabled for the GPS function you can choose to record videos with GPS locations of the IP device 1 To record the GPS data of a remote IP device ensure the GPS function on the IP device is enabled 2 Right click the IP device listed on the IP Device Setup window and select GIS Setting 3 Select Enable GIS Data to receive the GPS data from the IP device IP Device Setup Server address Port__ Cam NO Status Video Resolution Add Camera 192 168 2 171 10000 E 14192 GeoYision_6Y BxX220D_Seri Disconnect camera mem a 192 168 1 166 10000 Ce SE 128 GeoVision_GY BX110D_Seri Scan Camera Delete camera Change Resolution Import Camera Remote camera setting Network Time Out IP Device Utility On Demand Display Change live view codec Automatic Setup Change record codec Live view Frame rate control Sub stream OK Live view frame rate control Main stream Image Orientation Frames to keep in live view buffer Recording codec format GIS Setting Enable GIS Data Automatically adjust DST
327. he GV System without interrupting the monitoring When the new drive is added it will be configured to the recording path automatically Additionally you can back up ViewLog player and database files to play back at any computer Note The hot swap feature supports the disk capacity of 2 GB at least 962 1 Useful Utilities 11 7 1 The Media Man Tool Window This program comes with the installation of Main System Click Windows Start point to Programs select the GV folder and then select Hot Swap HDD Tool This window will appear Driver AediaMan Tools Secs Exit View Tools Driver CH Driver Dv Free Space 1 08 GB Free Space 1 60 GB Total Space 391 OD Total Space 19 52 OD Status Standby Status Unused Display details Display details Driver E Driver F 1 Free Space 33 37 GB Free Space 3 60 GB Total Space 39 07 GB Total Space 41 46 GB Status Standby Status Unused 4 Display details Display details Figure 11 42 The controls in this wndow No Name Description 1 Exit Closes or minimizes the Median Man Tool window 2 View Refreshes the disk drive status shown in this window Sets up the LED panel and automatically logs in the Media Man Tool 3 Tools window Select the option to view the status and information of the disk drives For 4 Display Details details see Viewing Disk Drive Status later in this chapter 963 11 7 2 Viewing Disk Drive Status To view the
328. he administrator does not press the mouse or press a key within a set period of time the system will automatically log him her out 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure and then select System Idle Protection Setting This dialog box appears System Idle Protection System Idle Protection System Idle over 30 SEL W Auto Logout or Switch to Startup Login User if available Supervisor i Auto Monitoring Monitor All W Auto Network Service of Startup Setting com Figure 1 39 2 Enable the Auto Logout or Switch to Startup Login User if available option and then select Supervisor or Supervisor Power User from the drop down list 3 In the System Idle Over field type the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which Supervisor or Poweruser will be logged out Di Configuring Main System 1 6 2 Auto Login User without Access Rights When the system is started up after an idle time a specified user with no access right will login This allows the user to see the system is on and working but at the same time does nothing with the system The feature must work with the Startup Auto Login function 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure and select Startup 2 In the Startup dialog box enable Startup Auto Login and click the Arrow button beside Figure 1 16 The Startup Auto Login Setup dialog box appears 3 Type ID and Passw
329. he designated storage space is not big enough to keep all video files for the defined days the Recycle setting then overrides the Keep Days setting The video capture cards and GV NVR have different default recycle thresholds The system will delete the oldest files when the storage space reaches the following recycle threshold Default Recycle Threshold GV 600A 650A 800A GV 1120A 1240A 1480A 4008 GV NVR 795 MB 1 2 GB 1 2 GB Every added IP video channel can expand the default recycle threshold by 50 MB For example if your system of GV 1480A has 4 IP channels the default recycle threshold will be 1200 MB 50 MB x 4 1400 MB You can also use Enlarge Recycle Threshold to expand the threshold Whenever the recycle threshold is reached 400 MB of the oldest files will be deleted ER Configuring Main System 1 23 Adjusting Camera Configuration In the Camera Configure dialog box you can adjust the configurations for each camera Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click Camera Configure to access the following dialog box Camera Configure ns GC 7 r Camera Name Camera Lens Camera 1 General D 8 Rec Control Video Attribute Iw Rec Video Brightness Motion Detect gt D Contrast Saturation Motion Detection gt Hue Sensitivity rb D vask Fiter Bi JESS Invoke Alarm Invoke to Send Alerts T
330. he output set to Keep Last Toggle Status 1 Input N O Output N O Toggle Keep Last Toggle Status The triggered output remains ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger Stop monitoring Restart the system 311 FJ 1 0 Applications 2 Input N O Latch Trigger Output N O Toggle Keep Last Toggle Status When Latch Trigger works with Keep Last Toggle Status the output only has a momentary trigger but also needs to remain ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system Therefore under the two conditions the output turns off until a new input trigger N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger Stop monitoring Restart the system 312 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 2 I O Control Panel The I O control panel is used to control I O devices that are added to the system This control panel will not appear unless at least one I O device is connected to the system To add and to configure a device see LO Device Setup earlier in this chapter After a device is added to the system click the I O button on the main screen to bring out the on screen control panel for inputs and outputs Figure 6 6 If only one I O device is connected to the system click the 1 O button and select Module 1 to bring up the control panel if more than one l O modules are connected to the system clicking
331. he panorama set for the images to be spliced together Clicks again to rename the panorama set Selects the source image to be spliced Displays the selected image 183 EI Video Analysis 3 12 1 Stitching a Panorama View with Overlapping Areas To stitch images from different cameras together follow these steps 1 Select one panorama set No 13 Figure 3 43 from the drop down list If you want to rename the selected panorama set type the name in the field 2 Select one camera from the Source drop down list No 14 Figure 3 43 and then click Manual Setting No 3 Figure 3 43 This dialog box appears ano Source Reference Camera 5 D Camera 4 D E Preview Figure 3 44 3 From the Reference drop down list select one camera as the Reference image At this step the camera you selected at Step 2 will be the only Reference image 4 From the Source drop down list select one camera as the Source image to be stitched with the selected Reference image 5 To stitch the two images together click on a significant point inthe Reference image and then look for the same point in the Source image A dialog box of point selection will prompt you to confirm You need to set up 3 points for stitching Point 2 Point 3 Cancel Figure 3 45 184 EN Video Analysis Note For the best result position the points in the overlapping areas on both images Avoid placing the points in a cluster or lining them up str
332. hen mosaic squares when enlarging a playback video Restart ViewLog to take effect Note This function requires DirectX 9 and VGA card with the video scaling support And the scaling only works in single view 260 D Playing Back Video Files Using Colorful Mode Click the Arrow button beside the Apply Scaling Render option click the DirectDraw Scale tab and select Use Colorful Mode During playback you can enhance the coloring to have more vivid and saturated images Note this function does not affect the original files Apply deblocking render single view only Select to remove the block like artifacts from low quality and highly compressed video greatly increasing the overall quality of video Apply text overlay s camera name and time render Displays the overlaid information of camera ID location name date and time on the recorded files For details see POS Data Overlay in Chapter 7 Apply text overlay s POS GV Wiegand render Displays the overlaid information of POS or GV Wiegand Capture on the recorded files For details see POS Data Overlay in Chapter 7 Apply camera name render Displays the camera number and name on the screen Display GPS positions Displays GPS coordinates on the images when playing the video events recorded with GPS tracks For details see Displaying GPS Data earlier in this chapter Use image instead of blue screen Replace blue screen during playback or merging video clips S
333. her monitors for setup 4 After above settings click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11 89 5 Select Event Popup Mode Then select Fixed Position of Camera or Random Position of Camera For these two options see Setting Pop up Positions section below 6 Click OK 618 KR Useful Utilities 7 Start monitoring When motion is detected or the input device is triggered the live video will pop up for alert Setting Pop up Positions When you select Random Position of Camera you can decide the positions for pop up cameras Fixed Position of Camera The cameras pop up in their assigned positions To assign positions select Screen Division Then drag and drop the cameras number to the desired potions on the divisions Random Position of Camera The positions of pop up cameras are based on the sequence order of triggers There are two modes for this position 1 Cascade Mode This mode can avoid the same cameras popping up on different monitors This is suggested to be used when multiple monitors are placed close to each other Example Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 and Camera 5 are assigned for alert popup on both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 Monitor 1 is set at 4 screen divisions When the five cameras are triggered at same time the first 4 cameras show up on Monitor 1 and the 5th on Monitor 2 Parallel Mode This mode allows the same cameras simultaneously pop up on different monitors T
334. his is suggested to be used when multiple monitors are placed in separate rooms Example Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 and Camera 4 are assigned for pop up upon motion detection on both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 When the four cameras are triggered at the same time they will show up simultaneously on both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 619 1 Useful Utilities 11 145 Setting Live View with Pop up Alert You can set a different live view mode with pop up alert together for each monitor When alert events occur the live video of the associated camera will pop up on the assigned monitor to replace its live view mode 1 To configure live view mode follow the instructions in Setting Live View earlier in this chapter To configure pop up alert in the upper left column click Event Popup Figure 11 91 appears Configure Motion Trigger I O Trigger Popup Dwell Time and Popup Interruption Interval for each monitor For details see Setting Pop up Alert earlier in this chapter Click the Matrix icon and return to Figure 11 89 Ensure the Live Mode option is selected Click OK The live vew mode you configured for each monitor is displayed Start monitoring When alert events occur the associated camera will pop up on the desired monitor 620 1 Useful Utilities 11 14 6 Controlling Screen Display During Digital Matrix operations of page scan or alert popup on other monitors you can instantly suspend the predefined task on a monit
335. hlighted Missing Object The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds with 3 seconds as default For example Suppose you choose 9 seconds When a defined object disappears from the camera view for 9 seconds its location will be highlighted Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when any unattended and or missing objects are detected Click the button next to the item to assign a wav sound file Output Module Activates the output device when any unattended and or missing object is detected Click the button next to the item to assign an installed output module and a pin number Demo Click to see the demonstration from actual DVR applications 177 EI Video Analysis 3 10 Privacy Mask Protection The Privacy Mask can block out sensitive areas from view covering the areas with black boxes in both live view and recorded clips This feature is ideal for locations with displays keyboard sequences e g passwords and for anywhere else you don t want sensitive information visible You can also choose to retrieve the block out areas during playback The retrievable areas will be protected by password 3 10 1 Setting a Privacy Mask 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Privacy Mask Setting The Privacy Mask Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras for setup and then click the Configure tab This dialog box appears Privacy Mask Setup Iw Enabl
336. hoose more than one codec for performance comparison This option appears dimmed when GV 3008 or GV 4008 is installed CJ Hardware Compression Check the desired codec s to be used for recording This option is available when GV 3008 or GV 4008 is installed Select Recording Quality Check the desired quality value s for recording You can choose more than one quality value for comparison Di Configuring Main System SetTest Time The system will process a real time test recording based on the time you set For example if you enter 24 hours here it will take more than one day to do the test recording So avoid entering the longer test time to save you time SetExpected Recording Time Enter the time you wish for recording 3 Click the Calculate tab to see the result Note 1 A calculation difference by 5 from actual disk usage is expected 2 The video attribute settings will effect the hard disk calculation 3 This function is not available tothe IP cameras ER Configuring Main System 1 18 2 Colorful Mode You can enhance the coloring of live vdeo to have more vivid and saturated images Note this function does not affect the original files For the users of GV 600A GV 600B GV 600 S GV 650A GV 650B GV 650 S GV 800A GV 800B GV 800 S GV 804A GV 900A GV 4008 GV 4008A GV 5016 or GV SDI 204 Card 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select General Setting s
337. ically generates daily reports at a specific time Specify the time by using the Select Time drop down list Sun Sat Automatically generates reports on the selected day Sun to Sat and ata specific time Specify the time by using the Select Time drop down list To select the days of data to be included in the report click the desired day buttons Weekly report day s of data selected SUN MOM TUE WED THU FRI SAT Figure 11 72 999 1 Useful Utilities Manual daily Manually generates a daily report 47 If you select The Previous day on the Advanced Setting tab Figure 11 69 the report will be generated on the data of one day before your specified date For example you enter 12 10 2007 in the Select Date drop down list The report is generated on the data of 9th December 2007 If you select 24 hours before execution time on the Advanced Setting tab Figure 11 69 the report will be generated on the data of 24 hours before your specified date and time Specify the date and time by using the Select Date and Select Time drop down lists Manual Weekly Manually generates a weekly report E If you select The Previous day on the Advanced Setting tab Figure 11 69 the generated report will contain the data of 7 days before your specified date For example you enter 12 10 2007 in the Select Date drop down list The report is generated on the date from December 3rd to 9th in 2
338. ick OK on the Backup dialog box to start the backup Tip If you just want to back up a specific event or several events of one day select the event or multiple events on the Video Event list and right click to select Backup The Select Backup Time dialog box will then appear and you can follow the steps described above to back up files without setting up the time period Note 1 If you are unable to record a CD make sure the CD recording is enabled in your CD burner open My Computer right click the CD Drive icon click Properties click the Recording tab and then check Enable CD recording on the drive The Export to DVD Format option at the right bottom of the Backup dialog box Figure 5 2 outputs your files in DVD movie format meaning that it will play in any DVD player that supports writable DVD disks To enable this option MPEG2 files recorded by the GV 2004 Card GV 2008 Card need to be selected first see the Select Camera s option and a DVD RW disk is required as well For ViewLog and Single Player see Chapter 4 Video Playback 295 ES Backup Deletion and Repair 5 3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple Discs When the size of the backup files exceeds the disc space limit the ViewLog can automatically split the files to be burned onto multiple discs For this feature to work Nero 6 6 0 14 or later is required to be installed on your system Note This feature is not available when 1 the Export to DV
339. ick the desired TV tab Camera Popup Setting Dwell Time 5 Interrupt Interval Camera Motion Invoke E Sec SEC wi w5 CS W13 iw iw 6 lw io w14 w 3 jw 7 4 Il jw 15 w 12 jw 16 Iw d e 8 Select All Clear All Mod ld Clear Al Input 1 al D w Input Invoke Camera 1 Figure 11 85 Set the Dwell Time and Interrupt Interval Dwell Time Specify the amount of time a pop up view remains on the monitor screen when an event occurs Set the dwell time between 1 and 120 seconds Interrupt Interval Specify the interval between pop up views when events occur Set the time interval between 1 and 60 seconds To be alarmed with a pop up view whenever movement occurs in the video image select the desired cameras to be popped up in the Camera Motion Invoke section To be alarmed with a pop up view when input devices are triggered select input module and use the drop down list to select the desired camera to be popped up Click OK to apply the settings Tip All cameras can be repetitively setup on different TV monitors If one camera is selected on 612 FOR Useful Utilities 11 133 Displaying TV Quad Panel On the main screen click the TV Out button This panel will appear Figure 11 86 The controls on the TV Quad Panel No Name Description 1 Monitor Selects the monitor to be controlled 2 Scan Automatically or manually rotates channels and stops rotation Sets screen divi
340. ideo devices you will need a NVR Dongle The dongle options include 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 IP channel s In this case the total number of channels for your Hybrid system is Number of analog channels up to 32 free GV IP channels Number of channels in your NVR Dongle lt 32 channels 114 2 4 1 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution NVR Solution Description Specifications of the NVR solution The NVR solution supports up to 32 IP channels It allows you to connect up to 32 IP channels from Guardian Security Solutions IP devices for free Connection of third party IP devices to GV NVR To implement the GV NVR solution with third party IP video devices you need a NVR Dongle Dongle options include 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 IP channel s 115 LO 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution IP Channel Setup There are many ways to set up IP cameras in the system and the setup procedures may vary slightly among IP camera video server and compact DVR Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Camera Install and click IP Camera Install This dialog box appears r IP Device Setup 7 seneradaress Pon Cam No Status Video Resolution nas Camera 1192 168 2 174 10000 Cameras Connected 352x240 MPEG4S amp 704 GeoVision _GY PTZ010D 192 168 1 165 10000 Camera4 Connected 320x256
341. ified time To configure the polling time see Figure 8 43 To remove one camera from the polling group click the Remove Frame button No 14 Figure 8 35 and then click its monitoring window 418 D Remote Viewing 8 6 8 Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream To receive the hardware compressed and megapixel stream from the GV System or to enable fisheye functions through WebCam server refer to the same topic in the section of Single View Viewer 419 D Remote Viewing 8 6 9 PTZ Control 1 Select a PTZ capable camera from the monitoring window or double click it on the Host List Figure 8 36 2 Click the PTZ Control button No 5 Figure 8 35 3 Turn the switch to the ON position 4 Use the directional zoom in zoom out focus in focus out buttons to control the PTZ camera The Timer has the same functions as the one in the Single View Viewer The supervisor is given the highest priority to control PTZ in Multi View and won t be restrained by 60 second time limit When the supervisor logs in Multi View the Timer will show 999 The Option button lets you direct the PTZ camera to a preset position and configure the speed of the PTZ camera up to five levels switch Ta L e OFF Timer Option Figure 8 41 PTZ control panel 420 D Remote Viewing 8 6 10 Visual PTZ Control Panel Other than the PTZ control panel you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image To access this
342. ify the port if necessary Click OK If the connection is established the WebCam server shows up in the Host List You can add up to 10 WebCam servers by repeating above steps To stop the connection select the host and click the Disconnect button E Er St SS Up to 5 users of the Bandwidth Control programs can connect to a single WebCam server for network traffic monitoring However only one user has access to bandwidth settings When this user clicks the Give Up Control button the user no longer controls the WebCam server Whoever clicks the Get Control button first has access to bandwidth settings For bandwidth settings see Controlling a WebCam Server later in this chapter 590 11 10 4 Controlling a WebCam Server 1 Useful Utilities To disconnect a login user or set the bandwidth limit for a user right click the user to have these options Server Na Liser Mame IF Address CHEN ebt H Joyce 14 Bandwidth Handwidt 736 00 Als Kick Block IP Bandwidth Setup e Peter 5 192 1 Figure 11 63 Kick Disconnects the user from the WebCam server Bandwidt Status Login Time 2021 04 1 2021 04 17 Block IP Prohibits the IP address from connecting to the WebCam server To use the function the Enable IP Black List option Figure 11 66 must be selected first Bandwidth Setup Select By Username to specify a bandwidth limit for the user or select By IP to limit the bandwidth
343. igure button lt Accessories lt Enable Local GIS O Automatically Adjust DST If enabled the time on the GV IP device Web interface will be synchronized with the time of the GV System when DST period starts or ends on the GV System 121 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution After a display position is assigned and the camera becomes connected you can also access the following options IP Device Setup Server address Port Video Resolution Brand 1192 169 1 165 10000 Camera Connected y gt Disconnect camera 192 168 1 231 10000 No Disconnect Change position Delete camera Change Resolution Remote camera setting Network Time Out On Demand Display Change live view codec Change record codec Live view frame rate control Sub stream Live view Frame rate control Main stream Image Orientation Frames to keep in live view buffer Record stream type GIS Setting Automatically adjust DST b b b b b b b b b Figure 2 8 110D_Seri art Box C Add Camera Scan Camera Import Camera IP Device Utility Automatic Setup OK Live view frame rate control Sub stream Sets the live view frame rate of the sub stream to help reduce the CPU usage If you have set the live view codec tobe JPEG select the number of frames to allow in a second If the live vew codec selected is MPEG4 or H 264 select one of the following options Aa Maximum Live view Frame Rate View the video
344. imelines of hour mode and minute mode Three types of timeline modes are available Change to day mode The default mode displaying at which hour the events have been recorded Change to hour mode Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which minute the events have been recorded Change to minute mode Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which second the events have been recorded 3 To display the audio information for each camera on the timeline select Display Audio Information 236 D Playing Back Video Files 4 To search events by event types or a POS item select Display MDB Information and click the Arrow button Select Monitor Table to see the events types selected in the MDB filter and select POS Table to see the POS item specified in the MDB filter The selected event types or POS item are marked in orange See the section below on how to set up the MDB filter Setting up the MDB filter 1 Click the arrow on the top left corner of the event search window 2 Select MDB Filter This dialog box appears MDB Filter Monitor Table Event Type Cevice Resume Missing Object Unattended Object Scene Change lO Trigger Other Pos Table AAA 8 can type Milk or milkColajBeer to filter POS data Figure 4 14 3 Select the types of events or type the POS item you want to search 4 Click OK Note The MDB filter only sorts out the events recorded in the System Log To record
345. imultaneously import all database files stored in the same folder To export the address book click the Export button and select a folder on your computer to export all database files Note The database files will be divided into different types of file extensions listed as below when they are exported You can place all the database files in the same folder and select Import a Folder to import those files all at once ees Description _ File Type description DVR and IP Device Storage database database FEOS Group database do Database of version earlier than V8 3 2 Backup Center database Database of Remote Playback 2 9 D Playing Back Video Files 4 6 Remote ViewLog Service Through the network you can retrieve the files from a remote GV IP device and GV System and play back video This feature is made possible through the Remote ViewLog Service The Remote ViewLog Service features Allfunctions provided by ViewLog are available such as Backup Save as AVI Object Search Export to DVD Format Database Files Backup and so on Capability of disabling certain camera connections under heaw network load Resuming file transfers for backup Before you can review video recorded on a remote GV IP device and GV System the following function must be enabled to allow access GV System DVR Enable Remote ViewLog Service on Control Center Server GV IP device Enable the Remote View Log function 4
346. in System is as listed below O For users of 32 bit Windows the memory limit is 1 7 GB For users of 64 bit Windows the memory limit is 1 7 GB with 2 GB RAM and 3 GB with 4 GB RAM When the memory usage of the GV System exceeds the limit the warning message will pop up The system can become unstable if the high memory persists To reduce memory usage you can close one or more of these applications connection to IP video devices Video Analysis Advanced Video Analysis and Pre Record by Memory The system will check the memory usage of the GV system every 60 minutes To disable the memory warning function click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 click Tools select Memory Usage select Hide Warning Message and click OK Multicam Surveillance System LD hemor Usage 823 MB Figure 1 92 1 18 8 Version Information To Know which version of GV System you have click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Tools and then select Version Information Chapter 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution a anaannannnnnnnnnnnnn 112 2 1 Guardian Security Solutions IP Video PrOdUCIS EENEG bh e 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 Economic tere ee 2 11 Dongle REGUIFCIMON diia Hybrid Solution Description cconcccncncccncocicncoccncnancncnanroncannonnnnnnanannnnnns NVR Solution Description cia Eed nunnunum nnmnnn eeEeEE IP Channel Oe E 25 1 Adding Cameras Manually EE
347. in the report To set up specific criteria click the Filter button beside each option System MDB Monitor Includes the events of motion and UO events System Includes the events of functions enabled and disabled in GV System Login Includes the events of who has logged in and out of GV System and WebCam Server at what time Counter Includes the events of and result of GV System s counter function POS MDB Select the cameras for searching POS event 998 Useful Utilities 4 In the Action Select field select how the report is accessed Save to HD Select this option to save the report on the hard disk Click the Setting button to display this dialog box Select save folder Eve e800 Report Select Export file type Cancel Figure 11 71 Click Selectto specify the storage location and use the drop down list to select a report format If you want to create a self executable file of the report select Create a self executable file E Mail Select this option to send the report to an e mail address as an attachment Click the Setting button to set up the e mail account and attachment For details on setting up the e mail account see Setting Email Server in Chapter 1 For details on setting up the attachment see E Mail Attachment Settings later in this chapter 5 In the Execution Method drop down list choose the way and time to generate the report Everyday Automat
348. ing Display Database Cache Quad View Thumbnail wiew Multi View To Be Activated in a Multi wiew Su Camera 10 Camera 1 A Camera 11 Camera 2 Gh Camera 12 Camera 3 Su Camera 13 Camera 4 Su Camera 14 Camera 17 Su Camera 15 ah Camera 2 A Camera 3 oe Mu Views 3 ow Mu View 4 oe Mu views 5 ll Mu View D ll Mu views oo Muti View A Figure 4 33 257 D Playing Back Video Files Thumbnail View System Configuration Play Setting Display Database Cache Quad View Thumbnail View Mutt view Thumbnail wiew Frame Interval 1 frames lf Show frame time OK Cancel Figure 4 34 O Frame Interval Specify the number of frames between each video thumbnail Set the interval between 1 and 600 Show frame time Displays time stamp on each thumbnail 208 D Playing Back Video Files Play Setting System Configuration Play Setting Display Database Cache Quad view Thumbnail View General Play Method Auto play next event Auto switch to full screen for playback Auto play the latest event when Viewlog starts Default view mode when Viewlog starts View mode Auto close when YiewbLog is idle Idle Time Seconds Figure 4 35 General Play Method Audio De noise Improves the audio quality during playback without affecting the files Auto play next event Puts the next events in sequence for automtic playing Aut
349. ion MY Extended partition PY Logical drive Figure 11 48 Note 1 It is recommended that the formatted partition should be Basic disk storage and NTFS file system if the disk volume is over 32 GB 2 For users of the iSCSI storage system a node name account should only be applied for one host computer to use It is restricted to apply one node name account on different hosts computers due to data conflict 9 2 11 8 2 Enabling Backup Server KR Useful Utilities Before you activate the Backup Server ensure the connection between the storage system and GV System has been built and newly added disk volumes have been formatted as well 1 On the GV System click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Backup Server The Geo Backup Server dialog box appears 2 Click the Edit button and select locations to store the backup files 3 Select Copy Viewlog to backup drives if you want to copy the ViewLog application to each of the partition selected 4 Click OK 5 Click the Login button to connect to the storage system Geo Backup Server Disk Space Total Space 85 726B Used Space Ci 29 31 GB 62 19 GB Di 56 41 GB Free Space 23 53 GB Copy Viewlog to backup drives Edit Login Cancel Advanced Figure 11 49 19 56 GB 3 90 GB Note When Copy Viewlogto backup drives is selected a ViewLog folder and Backup Server Viewlog batwill be created inthe selected partitions aft
350. ion detected during the dwell time will be ignored to prevent the camera view from frequently jumping from one area to another Schedule Click Schedule to activate object tracking at certain times only Refer to Video Analysis Schedule earlier in this chapter for more details 6 Right click the fisheye view select Fisheye Option select 360 Object Tracking and select Tracking to enable object tracking 218 El Video Analysis 3 23 Specifications 1GBof RAM minimum required Panorama View SE 4sets of panorama view for live vew monitoring Defogging Maximum of 32 channels Ea Maximum of 4 channels Crowd Detection Maximum of 16 channels Advanced Scene Change Detection Advanced Unattended Object Detection Maximum of 16 channels Advanced Missing Object Detection Scene Change Detection 3MBof RAM minimum required for each channel 7 fps and 9 MB of RAM minimum required for each Channel Object Counting Maximum of 16 channels 512 MB of RAM and Pentium 4 Dual Core 2 13 GHz of CPU required for 8 or more cameras 3 MB of RAM minimum required for each channel Privacy Mask Maximum of 250 detection boxes can be set The overall size of detection boxes cannot exceed 102400 bytes Maximum of 16 channels Object Index 7 fps and 14 MB of RAM minimum required for each Object Monitor channel Face Detection Maximum of 16 channels Specifications are subject to change without notice
351. ion section specify the storage location of merged files and select whether to save merged files in EXE format 10 Click Add to create the schedule task ER Configuring Main System 1 9 3 Setting Backup Schedule You can set up a schedule to regularly back up the configurations in the Main System The backup settings can be restored to the current system or imported to another GV System 1 Click the Schedule button and select Schedule Center This dialog box appears Schedule Center Schedule type Compacting Yideo Events Merging Video Events Setting YSM Schedule Figure 1 59 2 Select Fast Backup and Restore and click Edit This dialog box appears FBR 5chedule Setting Active Schedule schedule Type Daily Schedule O Weekly Schedule O Monthly Schedule Backup Setting Dir Password General Schedule PoOsiGy Wiegand Network Login Information Save Path DAGV BO0 FBR_SCHE_Datal S Figure 1 60 ER Configuring Main System 3 Select Active 4 Under the Schedule Type section choose a backup schedule Daily Schedule Backs up the system configurations daily Weekly Schedule Select a day of the week from the drop down list to back up the system configurations Monthly Schedule Select a day of the month from the drop down list to back up the system configurations Note that if you have selected 31 and the particular month does not have the 31 day the system will sk
352. ion to a WebCam server Disconnect Stops the connection to a WebCam server Get Control Obtains the right to remotely control the WebCam servers Give Up Control User List Bandwidth Record Event Log Host List Displays the network traffic in graph display Ceases controlling the WebCam servers and users Displays the connected users and their status Records activities of WebCam servers and users Displays all WebCam servers to be connected 088 KR Useful Utilities 11 10 2 Allowing Remote Control at DVR The network traffic of WebCam server can be controlled when the DVR permits the remote control from the Bandwidth Control program by the following steps 1 Click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select WebCam Server 2 Onthe General tab select the Run Bandwidth Control server option When this option is enabled on the Control Center Server option list the Bandwidth Control Service is marked with a check 989 1 Useful Utilities 11 10 3 Connecting to a WebCam Server 1 Click Host on the menu bar and select Connection Or you can click the Connection button on the toolbar This dialog box appears Connection Host 1192 168 0 121 Host LESCHTE IP Address 192 168 0 121 Port 3388 User Name 123 Password Figure 11 62 To add a WebCam server to be connected to click Add Ge Type host name IP addresses user name and password of the WebCam server Mod
353. ip backup for that month 5 Under the Backup Setting section select the settings you want to back up 6 Type the ID and Password of your login account 7 Under the Save Path section specify a file path to store the settings 8 Click OK to save the settings After setup is completed the GVServce icon appears on the Windows notification area as shown below D SES The GVSenice i program allows the backup to run automatically without starting the GV System For details on how to restore the system see Backing Up and Restoring Settings in Chapter 11 Note Backup will be performed at the time when you first set up the function For example if the time when you click OK to apply a daily backup schedule is 11 30am the system will perform backup at 11 30am everyday Di Configuring Main System 19 4 Setting VSM Schedule You can set up a schedule to activate the connection to Vital Sign Monitor VSM on a specific date or on a weekly schedule Note For details on setting up the connection to the VSM see Chapter 3 in GV CMS Series Users Manual 1 Click the Schedule button and select Schedule Center This dialog box appears Schedule Center Schedule type Compacting Yideo Events Merging Yideo Events e Fast Backup and Restore E Setting VSM Schedule Figure 1 61 2 Select Setting VSM Schedule and click Edit This dialog box appears VSM Schedule List Sh Schedule List Schedule Date Figur
354. is included in the installation of Main System Go to Windows Start point to Programs select GV folder and click Key Lock Utility This GV Desktop screen appears Figure 11 18 The controls in the GV Desktop screen No Name Description 1 Programs Accesses programs 2 Settings Adds programs to the programs menu 3 Log Off Logs off GV Desktop 4 Shut Down Shuts down the computer 5 Task Manager Click to vew the tasks currently running on your computer 938 1 Useful Utilities 11 4 2 GV Desktop Features The five buttons on GV Desktop are discussed below Programs Click the Programs button No 1 Figure 11 18 to see the program menu The default programs are Multicam Surveillance System Main System ViewLog Repair Database Utility eMap Editor Control Center Service and Hot Swap HDD Tool You can add or remove new programs tothe menu In the example below Paint is a new program added to the menu zs Multicam Surveillance System EE Video Log Repair DataBase Utility be eMap Editor 3 Control Center Service a Hot Swap HDD Tool Figure 11 19 a Paint 939 1 Useful Utilities Settings Click the Settings button No 2 Figure 11 18 to display the following window A valid ID and password are required Settings ID 1 System menu Customize menu D DINF Administrative Tools Down Desktop Type Figure 11 20 Password Click to change th
355. ist Click Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select PTZ Device and select Add Remove PTZ In the dialog box that appears select the brand of your cameras and click the gt button 137 EN Video Analysis Setting up Object Tracking After the above PTZ setup go back to the main screen Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and click Object Tracking Setup to display the following dialog box The left image is the PTZ camera view and the right image is the stationary camera view Object Tracking Config Object Tracking Zoom In Object Advance Single Camera Tracking PTZ Selection Camera 4 D Fixed Camera Selection Camera 2 D Selection Pan Tracking Track Time sec Tilt Zoom In Object Zoom 0 E G Schedule e La 5 sensitivity Define Detect Regi D The priority of Object Tracking is higher than Advance Single Camera Tracking when both functions are enabled simultaneously Cancel Figure 3 2 PTZ Selection gt Click to set up the PTZ Camera Click the drop down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of the PTZ Fixed Camera Selection Click the drop down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of the stationary camera Setup Pan Tiltand Zoom Use the slide bars to adjust the PTZ camera view Sensitivity Use the slide bar to adjust the detecti
356. ith any third party player Add digital watermark Select whether to include the watermark in the exported video This option is only available when the watermark has been applied on the recorded video Date Time Select whether to include date and or time stamps You can also select the font type and size stamp position and color on the images Video Effects Select whether to include the special effects in the exported video To include the effects of De Interlace Defog Stabilizer Overlay s Camera and Time and Overlay s POS you must have applied these functions on the recorded video Audio Export Select Denoise to remove audio noises from the video or select Channel for audio exporting GPS Export Select Channels to export the GPS data recorded on the GV System Codec Selection Geo H264 This codec is created by Guardian Security Solutions It provdes better image quality higher frame rates and smaller files size than any other If the codec is selected you must play the exported files on the computer with the Geo codec installed Otherwise you can export the files in EXE format in order to play the video at any computer WMVS9 This code is created by Microsoft It allows you to play the vdeo with Windows Media Player directly without using Guardian Security Solutions codec If the codec is selected the Privacy Mask youcreated using the ViewLog will be disabled 2 Click OK to apply above settings 244 4 1
357. ities 11 5 8 Remote Access from Control Center Remote E Map and MultiView The Authentication Server allows you to restrict users of E Map Server Control Center and MultiView to access specific DVR hosts and cameras only Instead of connecting to DVR hosts directly the user of E Map Server Control Center and MultiView will connect to the Authentication Server using the user account you created on the Authentication Server You must first set up remote authentication on E Map Server and Control Center After E Map Server Control Center and MultiView are connected to the Authentication Server the user will be prompted to log in with the user ID and password you created on the Authentication Server Once logged in a list of DVR hosts authorized to the user account will be displayed and the user will be able to view the assigned cameras Setting Authentication Server You need to create and arrange E Map Servers and Control Servers under their separate lists on the Authentication Server window Figure 11 24 Type the name and information of the E Map Server or Control Center in the Client Information dialog box The name does not need to match the location name of the E Map Server or Control Center Accessing from E Map Server The E Map Server can access the user account setting of the Authentication Server 1 In the E Map Server window click Tools on the menu bar and select Options This dialog box appears Options eM
358. ity This window appears All the available IP cameras on the LAN are detected and listed in the window GV IP Device Utility File Tool General settings NVR camera settings Camera List 0026186 0026186 0026186 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 0001291 SRD win Camerat SRD win7 Camera Camera Camera Camera2 Camera test166 0f Camerad test166 0f Cameras test166 Df Camerab test166 0f Camera test166 0f Cameras lest ppm Camera9 192 168 3 192 168 3 192 168 3 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 192 168 0 Slsls Siel O 00 4 O Ma UN Figure 2 12 To map the desired IP camera to a channel drag the IP camera from the Camera List to the desired channel number in the Dispatch Pattern section 127 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 4 By default the login username and password for the IP camera both are set to admin If the added IP camera does not use the default settings you need to right click the IP camera in the Dispatch Pattern section and select Login User Information to modify its login information 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to map more IP cameras 6 To create another set of the IP camera mapping settings click the Add button on the Dispatch Pattern toolbar A new tab NVR2 is created GV IP Device Utility
359. l 10 Normal 12 Normal 14 Normal 16 Normal 18 Normal 20 Normal 22 Normal 24 Normal 26 Normal 28 Normal 30 Normal 32 Connection Lost Figure 8 64 This screen displays the status of camera activity Three messages indicate the current camera Status Message Description Normal The camera is turned on and not recording Inactive The camera is turned off Recording The camera is recording 449 D Remote Viewing 8 13 2 Windows Smartphone With the GV MSView V2 V3 applications you can monitor your GV System remotely through a Windows based smartphone For the supported Windows version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter Installing GV MSView V2 V3 1 To download GV MSView V2 V3 2 Click the Download button 3 Consult your smartphone user s manual for how to install a program to the smartphone Activating the GV MSView V2 V3 Function To allow remote access to the GV System you must enable the Mobile function on the WebCam Server For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 450 Connecting to GV System The following operations may vary slightly for different modules 1 Execute MSViewV2 exe or MSViewV3 exe on your smartphone Welcome MsViewtP 4 MSView 3 12 Figure 8 65 2 Click Type and then select Live Welcome MsviewiP we Yi de xX il MSView Y3 12 Rpb Rpb with time Figure 8 66 D Rem
360. lance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below Antenas Lapo a Y Customize Logo and Button utton Customize Features Backup MultiCam Settings W y Or Restore Defaults Backup Remote AP Settings Ee Figure 11 37 557 KR Useful Utilities 11 6 2 Customizing Logo and Button You can replace the screen images of Startup Splash Non Active Video and Video Lost with your own images Before you start remember that each screen image has its specified size Create your own image according to these specifications Startup Splash Bit Depth 24 Width 316 and Height 272 Non Active Video Bit Depth 24 Width 720 and Height 576 Video Lost Bit Depth 24 Width 720 and Height 576 To customize the screen image follow these steps 1 In the FBR window Figure 11 37 click the Customize Logo and Button icon select DVR and then select Custom Logo This window appears Custom Logo Selection Introduction File Path t Startup Splash CAGYEOoiCommResisplash bmp EJ Non Active Video Cia omic ommResicamiogo bmp Video Lost Cci6v UC ommRestvLost bmp Figure 11 38 2 Click a desired screen image to be replaced with an imported image 3 Exitthe FBR program and start the GV System to see the change 558 1 Useful Utilities 11 6 3 Customizing the Features Not every feature may be of equal interest to you You can now specify which features are to be displayed at system startup 1
361. lay the following Server Setup dialog box The Server Setup dialog box contains these tabs 1 General 2 Server 3 Video 4 SDK 5 Audio 6 JPG 7 3GPP 8 Mobile and 9 Multicast 8 2 1 General Settings 22 Server Setup Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile multicast General Server video SOK WebCam Options Enhance network security al Enable Remote Control le Run Miewlog Server w Run Bandwidth Control Server Frame Page Title Color e Mone Black Cancel Detautt Figure 8 5 WebCam Options Enhance network security When this option is enabled it is required to complete a word verification step every time when you log on to the WebCam server Enable Remote Control Select this option to remotely configure the GV System PTZ cameras or I O devices through the WebCam server Run Viewlog Server Select this option to remotely play back video files through the WebCam server Run Bandwidth Control Server Select this option to enable the Bandwidth Control Server For details see Bandwath Control Application in Chapter 11 Frame Page Title Color Select the color of date time and camera stamps on the frame Note When Enhance network security is enabled the users using earlier version than 8 0 cannot access WebCam applications any more and O JPEG 3GPP Mobile applications will be disabled 3 4 D Remote Viewing 8 2 2 Server Settings 22 Server Setup Audio JPG 36PP
362. lect 1 Min a 30 minute event will be chopped into thirty 1 minute event files To decide what to set up here consider how often you back up your event files and how intensive the activity is in your Surveillance area Smaller file size makes backup process faster Post Rec Keeps on recording for a set period of time after motion stops Pre Rec Records video for a set period of time before motion starts or an input device is triggered This feature allows you to choose RAM or HDD as a pre recording buffer The difference between the two is that RAM can save smaller pre record from 1 second to 1 5 minutes while the hard disk can save larger one from 1 minute to 45 minutes Di Configuring Main System Pre Record 5etup e Pre Recording using RAM Pre Record Performance Better e Default Pre Record Option per camera Total Frames 6 co Max 30 Frames Sec Limitation 10 f Pre Recording using HOC keep Pre Record Files Video Clips 2 To use RAM as pre record cache buffer Current used frames is 6 frame rate limit is 10 Available pre recording time is 6 f 10 Sec on Figure 1 5 Pre Record Performance The amount of physical memory of the computer that the system is running on determines the pre recording performance Some options are grayed out if the computer does not have enough memory for the selections ER Configuring Main System This table shows the maximum pre recording frame rat
363. lect the desired video mode and click the Play button to start E A CN a EE E MN E ST Ce satelite Figure 11 97 626 1 Useful Utilities Note 1 If you like to use the maps created yourself overwrite the files at AGV folder GIShtm User and select User Defined from the Please Select a Map API drop down list Figure 11 96 2 Ifyou are the paid client of Google Maps select Client from the Please enter the map authorization key or license key drop down list otherwise select Key 627 1 Useful Utilities 11 15 5 Sending GPS Data to the GV GIS You can configure up to 4 GV GIS stations to receive the GPS data of the GV System and connected IP devices simultaneously Sending Only GPS Data of the GV System To send only GPS data of GV System to the GV GIS station follow the steps below On the GV GIS station a Mobile Host account for GV System needs to be created first 1 To allow the remote access from GV GIS to GV System enable Control Center Server from the Network button on the main screen 2 Click the L button on the GV GIS Client window Figure 11 93 This dialog box appears Connection amp Data Source Setup GPS Data Source Selection Connection Information GPS Receiver Server IP Address 192 168 1 21 O IP Device Port 3356 nera Accountfor GPS Receiver to connect GY GIS Server Login ID 1 L Password H Account for IP Devices to connec
364. lectronic device to change its current state e g light ON 6 7 1 Setting Visual Automation 1 On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories and select Visual Automation Setting This dialog box appears Visual Automation SetUp jw Enable Camera 1 Set Color Delete All Sets Show Style C Normal cancel Figure 6 34 2 Select the desired camera from the drop down list and check Enable 3 Drag the region on the image of the desired device This dialog box appears Modulet Output 1 Mote Figure 6 35 4 Select the connected module and output device In the Note field type a note to help you manage the device Click OK to save the configurations To change the frame color of the set region click the Set Color button To emboss the set region check the Float Up option or keep them flat by checking the Normal option 336 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 7 2 Using Visual Automation 1 On the main screen click the desired camera name No 2 Figure 1 2 and select I O Automation This window appears Figure 6 36 2 Click the set regions to force the connected output device 3 To change the style of the set region right click the I O icon to bring up these options Show All Displays all set regions Rect Float Embosses all set regions SetColor Changes the frame color of all set regions 337 FJ 1 0 Applic
365. led when the recycle threshold is reached You can click Test to test your settings If the missing object cannot be detected increase Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view 10 To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 11 Click OK to apply the settings 12 Start monitoring to run the application When any object which you have outlined the regions for disappears from the camera view for the specified time its location will be highlighted in live video the selected alarm or output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Advanced Missing Object in System Log for later retrieval 207 EI Video Analysis If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this step Right click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert select Camera select Advanced Missing Object Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset Alert Reset Background Model Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert The replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the camera view to detect changes The system will accept the object missing from this point on and no longer generate any alert for it Reset Alert Disables and resets
366. levels from 1 to 5 with 4 as default You can create several areas with different sensitivity levels If you want to ignore motion in a certain area click Mask Region and then drag an area on the image lf you want to ignore video noise when light changes select Noise Tolerance and use the slider to adjust the level The higher the level the more tolerant the system is to video noise If you want to ignore environmental changes such as rain or snow select Ignore environmental changes To set minimum time for motions to be counted as motion detection select Minimum duration and specify the minimum number of seconds motions must exceed Max 60 seconds 10 Click OK to save your settings Note 1 This feature must work with the recording mode of Motion Detection click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure select Camera Configure check Rec Video and then select Motion Detect Figure 1 9 lf you have set up Motion Sensitivity and Mask Filter in the Camera Configure settings Figure 1 10 note that the configurations of Advanced Motion Detection have priority over these settings When Ignore environmental changes is selected objects moving steadily and repeatedly in the same direction for over 1 5 seconds will be filtered out and ignored 196 EI Video Analysis Crowd Detection Crowd detection is used to generate an alert when a crowd of people gathers in a specified area and exceeds
367. lications ooccccnnocicnnnciccncococccconnconcnnncnnn canon nnnn nan SSC WVINGOWS ADA da sa dd S132 Windows Smarty Om rs aaa 813 9 ENEE eege 811394 Ee E ne EE DTS SG MOBIC PROMS EE 8513 0 lee PHONG EE 613 7 Olli 8 13 8 Android Smartphones and Tablets 8 14 Web Browsers on Gmartpohones ees kee Kee ENEE KENE NEEN nnne nnn nann venu FOO 412 413 414 415 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 426 427 428 429 429 431 432 434 4359 436 437 440 442 450 455 459 463 466 468 476 439 368 Remote Viewing With Microsoft Internet Explorer you can remotely view live video download and play back wdeo files manage systems within the security network control PTZ camera and l O devces through the WebCam server The remote computer used to access live video must meet the following minimum requirements 08 CPU Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Hard Disk Graphic Card Network Web Browser DirectX Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2008 Windows 7 Server 2008 Pentium 4 2 0 GHz 2 x 512 MB Dual Channels 2 x 1 GB Dual Channels 80 GB AGP or PCI Express 800 x 600 1280 x 1024 recommended 32 bit color AGP or PCI Express 1024 x 768 32 bit color for Multi View Viewer only TCP IP IE 7 0 or later 9 0c With non lE browsers the below browsers are supported for remotely viewing live view playing back videos and listing the event query Google Chrome Mozilla Firefo
368. lick Quad View and select a quad view This dialog box appears Settings f General e Camera Camera e Camera 2 3 Quad View aa Camera 3 FA quad View 1 Camera 4 FA Quad View 2 FA Quad View 3 FA Quad View 4 FA Quad view 5 FA quad View 6 FA Quad View 7 FA Quad View 8 Figure 11 202 2 Drag and drop up to four cameras to the quad view on the right 3 Click OK I nd a Notification M You can send notifications to multiple Skype accounts upon motion 1 Select Enable under Send Skype Message 2 Use the Skype User drop down list to select the recipient of the message and click the Add button Repeat for any additional recipient 646 1 Useful Utilities 3 Set an Alert Interval to specify the minimum time between each notification 4 Type a notification message up to 255 characters Input Module Setting To send camera live view or notification message to Skype accounts upon input trigger expand the Module list and select an input device This dialog box appears Settings Ki Push video to SKYPE user General e Camera 7 Enable Module 1 Alert Interval Push Camera Input eg 2 Input Push Video to SKYPE user 42 Input 4 co E Quad View Send SKYPE Message SKYPE User echo123 Ke Alert Interval minutes Message Input 1 is triggered Cancel Figure 11 203 1 To send live view to a Skype account of a camera upon input trigger follow the steps from To Send the
369. lid user name and password for login you will be prompted to select the desired e map file emp file 7 Click OK The Remote E Map window appears 8 Click the Login button No 1 Figure 9 10 to select the desired host s to access videos and I O devices Note The host DVR needs to give the access privilege by enabling the WebCam Server 905 D E Map Application 9 5 5 Accessing Authentication Server Account Information With the connection to Authentication Server the E Map Server can accessthe Authentication account settings For details see Authentication Server in Chapter 11 906 Chapter 10 Short Message Gervice 508 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 Installing SMS Se Vean eee The SMS Server le e E SMS Server Sel scarico 10 31 Deuce SCM GS EEN 10 32 ever Sel ae 1033 ACCUM SE UNOS ii ias SMS E 1041 Setting SMS OG ia A A AS 10 42 MICWING OMS HOG uma aid PassWord Sec Visca SMS Notifica lO corri ad 10 6 1 Connecting GV System to SMS Server A 10 6 2 Setting Mobile NUMDEKS ari AN ARS o A aa 508 509 510 510 511 514 516 516 517 519 519 519 521 522 907 short Message Service Via a GSM GPRS modem GV System lets you send SMS Short Message Service messages when an alert condition happens The modem can be installed at either a separate server or the same computer server equipped with GV System This chapter introduces how to manage a GSM GPRS modem with the GV developed SMS S
370. ling the Bandwidth Control On the computer you want to install the Bandwidth Control program insert the Software DVD click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility select GV Bandwidth Control Client Site and follow the onscreen instructions After the installation is complete double click the Bandwidth Remote Control icon created on the desktop The Bandwidth Control window appears Bandwidth Ccntrol ost H ml KR gl 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 WebCam onfiguredc EDEK Serer Name Ufer Name IP Address Bandwidth Bandwidth Bandwidth Status Login Time 2007 12 03 2007 12 03 2007 12 03 127 0 0 1 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 27 09 KB s 26 65 KB s 27 09 KB s Winnie 5 JACK 6 Ev ntLog Bandwidth Record Eent Server Login Server Login Uger Login Uger Login Uger Login Uger Logout Uger Logout Uger Login Uger Login Uger Logout Uger Login User Name WebCam WebCam 1 joyce Winnie Winnie JACK IP Address 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 127 0 0 1 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 192 168 0 245 Login Time 2007 12 03 17 00 56 2007 12 03 17 00 56 2007 12 03 17 05 23 2007 12 03 17 08 00 2007 12 03 17 08 16 2007 12 03 17 08 27 2007 12 03 17 09 30 2007 12 03 17 09 36 2007 12 03 17 09 52 2007 12 03 17 09 58 2007 12 03 17 10 06 NUM 7 6 Figure 11 61 Name Description Connection Builds the connect
371. lizer options are only available after they are activated at the connected GV System Video and Audio Configuration Camera Audio Configure Video Codec Geo MPEG4 Resolution 320240 Quality Best Quality d Frame Rate i High Detog Stabilizer Figure 8 24 Audio Configure In this tab you can enable the microphone and speaker for two way audio communication Select Speaker to access live audio from the server site and select Microphone to speak to the server site Ensure the speaker and microphone are properly installed in the local computer and the audio settings Figure 8 8 are activated on the WebCam server too 395 D Remote Viewing There are three options for audio quality Real Time Transmits simultaneously audio and video but may create sound interruption depending on your network condition Smooth Has a smooth sound quality but without audio and video synchronization Normal The default value which has the audio and video effects between Real Time and Smooth Video and Audio Configuration Camera Audio Configure Audio Codec P Iw Enable Audio Codec Figure 8 25 396 D Remote Viewing 8 3 6 Hardware Compressed or Megapixel Stream If your vdeo source is of hardware compression or megapixel you can choose better video quality on the WebCam server The following conditions can produce a hardware compressed or megapixel video stream GV 4008 Card is installed on th
372. ll only be able to load the 1 If you check the Display the last or Display the events for the previous option the Event List will not be refreshed as the latest event is recorded To refresh the List click the Advanced button 2 For setting event search privilege for user accounts refer to Event Search for Limit in Chapter 4 262 D Playing Back Video Files Path for Cache A cache is memory location that is used to store data temporarily when you are using the function of Save AVI Export DVD or Network Buffering If the default path does not have sufficient space for this temporary storage assign another path by clicking the button 263 D Playing Back Video Files 4 2 Object Search This feature allows you to perform two functions 1 Detect motion missing objects or unattended objects within a certain region of a recorded file 2 Perform the counting function within certain regions in a recorded file The following gives an example of motion detection For details on missing objects unattended objects and counting refer to Object Counting and Intrusion Alarm and Unattended and Missing Object Detection in Chapter 3 1 Select a desired video file from the Video Event list for the search Or select multiple files by clicking on each file while keeping pressing CTRL on the keyboard 2 Click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 on the function panel and then select Object Search to display the following window
373. ls on DSP Spot Monitor Controller see Spot Monitor Controller in Chapter 11 Note You can use the Mask Filter function in the Camera Configure dialog box Figure 1 8 to mask off certain areas of the camera image that you don t want to detect motion Di Configuring Main System 1 13 Video Noise Solutions The system provides these solutions for video audio noise Noise Tolerance for motion detection and advanced motion detection Noise Detection to Reduce File Size for round the clock recording Noise Filter to filter out vdeo and audio noise 1 13 1 Noise Tolerance Designed for motion detection the noise tolerance feature reduces false alarms and unwanted recordings caused by weather or light changes The level of noise tolerance can be adjusted Note The noise tolerance function will not change video quality Setting Up for Motion Detection Camera Configure Camera Name Camera Lens Camera 1 General Rec Control Video Attribute Iw Rec Video Brightness Motion Detect D Contrast Advanced Saturation Motion Detection Hue Default a 9 Senstivty pI Moron daci n Mask Filter E A Iw Activate Noise Tolerance M Invoke Alarm D Leve EF Low Invoke to Send Alerts Output Module Mod 1 Pin 1 D Register Motion Event JE Video Lost Connection Lost Output Module Figure 1 79 Di Configuring Main System 1 Click the Configure butt
374. ltiple routers select a desired one from the UPnP Router drop down list 5 If you server is installed with multiple network adapters select a desired one from the IP Address drop down list 6 Click Configure to automatically configure the communication ports on the router Tip If you don t use the default ports modify the related ports inthe Server Setup dialog box Figure 8 5 and then click OK Re open the dialog box and follow above steps to configure your router Note UPnP technology is also available in other remote applications Control Center Center V2 Remote Playback Authentication Server VSM and TwinDVR 386 D Remote Viewing 8 2 11 FTP Server Settings You can access the recorded images of JPEG format from a remote computer installed with the FTP server In Figure 8 10 select the FTP transfer JPEG file option and then click the FTP Setup button to display the following dialog box Setup FTP FTP Server Host Mame ee E User Mame Password anonymous RERERAREREREEE Remote File Path Transfer Camera Jh Send file delay 0 1 sec men Figure 8 18 FTP Setup 1 Inthe Server Host Name field type the IP address or domain name of the FTP server Modify the default port value 21 if necessary 2 Type a login username and password of the FTP server 3 Specify a file path to save the recorded images on the FTP server 4 Click the Transfer Camera button and assign which camera s files to
375. m See Host Information later in this chapter Zooms in or out the selected channel Adds or deletes the frames for video polling Click the Add or Remove Frame button and then click the desired channel to add to or remove from the video polling Goes to the next page of Screen Division buttons Accessesthe Multicast function See Multicast and Audio Broadcast later in this chapter Switches to a full screen view The maximum video resolution set on the GV System will be applied See Video Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Rotates through the selected channels See Camera Polling later in this chapter Sets screen divisions to 4 6 8 9 10 13 16 or 32 Closes or minimizes the Multi View window Enables live audio from a remote GV System Enables speaking to a remote GV System Establishes the connection to a GV System Terminates the connection to a GV System Saves live video See Video Recording later in this chapter Adjusts video quality with these options Auto Scale using the original resolution and quality of video sources Geo H264 and Geo MPEG4 Display both stream 1 and 2 from GV IP camera GV Video Gateway and GV Recording Server hosts For hardware compressed and megapixel quality see Hardware Compressed and Megapixel Stream later in this chapter Takes a snapshot of the selected channel Saves the selected cameras and creates a Multiple Host Save Camera to Multiple Host See Com
376. m a y E A a di j oF ort lachhobges E at Use Ae Ke E SE As iaat Lee ffo xu ves ad Aes Sate em O 3 Came amera SEB pf Boer k i ch Figure 4 56 Note 1 If you like to use the maps created yourself overwrite the files at GV folder GIShtm User and select User Defined from the Please Select a Map API drop down list Figure 4 55 2 Youcan also attach the USB mass storage device with the recorded files to GV System for playback For this kind of playback first load the data to ViewLog by following the instructions in the section of Playback Using USB Mass Storage Device in GV Video Server or GV Compact DVR User s Manual Then follow Steps 4 7 above to play back GPS tracks 287 D Playing Back Video Files 4 9 Touch Screen Support By the touch of a finger the touch screen panel allows you to change screen divisions switch to full screen and close the ViewLog screen 1 Click the Tools button No 6 Figure 4 2 point to Tool Kit select Touch Screen Panel and click Panel Setup This dialog box appears Touch Screen Panel Setup iw Activate e Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only Always Active Layout e Vertically f Horizontally cnc Figure 4 57 Click Active to have these options Active when enter Full Screen Mode only Launches automatically the panel when the full screen view is applied Always Active Always displays on the ViewLog screen Layout
377. mage Viewer is a cross platform viewer practicable on Mac OS Netscape and Microsoft IE browsers Continuously receiving JPEG images from GV System and limited to the single camera view the viewer is an ideal tool for the users with limited Internet bandwidth Note To enable the JPEG Image Viewer Java needs to be installed on the local PC To start the JPEG Image Viewer follow these steps 1 To enable the function on the WebCam server click the Network button select WebCam Server disable Enhance Network Security on the General tab Figure 8 5 and enable Create JPEG GIF File s on the JPG tab Figure 8 10 2 Open an Internet Explorer browser on the local PC 3 Enter the IP address or domain name of the GV System The Single View page Figure 8 20 appears 4 Onthe left panel click Live View and select JPEG Image Viewer A valid ID and a password are required for login The JPEG Image Viewer window appears View Selection Button Scroll Button Snapshot Camera SelectButton Monitoring Window 11420 200617 56 52 963 Camera l t Figure 8 50 JPGE Image Viewer 434 D Remote Viewing 8 9 Remote Playback With the Remote Playback RPB function on the WebCam server you can play back the recorded files of the connected GV System To allow remote access to GV System ensure the WebCam server with the Run ViewLog Server function Figure 8 4 is activated on GV System 1 In the left panel of the
378. me of the export file will not be listed in the Favorites option 269 D Playing Back Video Files The POS Filter dialog box has a slightly different look as illustrated below Filter the conditions in below to the selected POS table Apply the filter settings to the selected POS devices Period between Set the employee IDs or names for filtering Import Export Import or export the POS Filter settings Pos Filter w Fitter the condiction in below to the selected POS table eli mio mie mie mle mle me mle omer lo Me mie DEN HEH ER EN mie RE Clear Al Select All W Content Se w Period between jw Event W Time Date Time Ze Both 2006 09 25 00 00 00 2006 09 27 T 23 59 59 Cancel Advance Search O NE EA NS E JE El NS Add New Command Import Export 4 Mote all commands are operated by Ob Figure 4 44 2 0 D Playing Back Video Files 4 4 Quick Search Quick Search is a very useful tool for searching and playing back POS events In Advanced Log Browser Figure 4 41 double click any POS event in the POS table The Quick Search window will appear The following figure and table give you an overview on Quick Search s features and functional buttons Note If the Quick Search window doesn t appear click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 on the Main System select General Setting and select System Log Setting Then in the POS Table drop down list
379. minated Device This column shows the camera that performs counter function In This column shows the In result of GV System s counter function Out This column shows the Out result of GV System s counter function ER Configuring Main System POS This function shows the POS event information Double clicking on the log list will allow you to view related video in ViewLog or Quick Search depending on the video player you selected in the System Log Setting dialog box See Figure 1 46 Live Log Browser Recycle Log 9 12 2007 20 29 AE Monitor System Login Counter POs1 POS2 pos3 Pos4 Poss Pos7 Pos12 Po 4 ID Time Content Event A 464 lo 25 2007 6 08 53 PH 101 Cash a0l27az Y 465 lO 25 2007 6 08 54 PH 102 Change 49 00 466 10 25 2007 6 08 55 PM 103 005 09 14 17 55 Shop 0l Stop Transaction 467 lo f25 2007 6 08 56 PM 104 1 000004 206 Page 1 Start Transaction 466 10 25 2007 6 06 56 PM 105 coke 6pack S 1000T 469 1O f25 2007 6 06 57 PM 106 fosters coffee 1000T 470 10 25 2007 6 08 57 PM 107 henejerry ice creas3 00T 471 lO f25 2007 6 08 55 PH 105 doritos chips 1 79T vz 10252007 6 08 59 PH 109 nabisco cookies amp 1 29T 473 10252007 6 08 59 PH 110 tropicana Juice 1 75T lt D D D D D D D D D D Figure 145 ID This column shows the event ID number Time This column shows the time when POS event occurs Content This column shows the action taken in the POS device Event This c
380. motion detection events in the System Log ensure to select Register Motion Event Configure button lt System Configure lt Camera Configure 23 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 6 Merging and Exporting Video You can merge several video files into a single file and export it in AVI format You can also choose to export the file in EXE format which allows you to play video with any multimedia player Simple Merge Simple Merge allows you to merge several video files into a single file Note The maximum size of the merged file is 2 GB If the merged file is over the limit it will be split up into another file 1 From the Video Event list No 6 Figure 4 1 select one event or several events by using Ctrl left click 2 Select the screen division from the View Mode button No 8 Figure 4 1 3 Click the Save As AVI button No 2 Figure 4 2 This dialog box appears Alternatively press S on the keyboard to call it up Save Avi File Avi View Setting Direct Merge Higher Speed Start Time 17 06 30 End Time 17 11 34 I Export with new Privacy Mask region s 0 Un recoverable 2 o Recoverable Remove Recoverable Privacy Mask region s ID 1 Password em Figure 4 15 Save AVI File 4 Drag the timelines to define a starting and ending time of the file 238 D Playing Back Video Files 5 Ifthe vdeo event has the Privacy Mask settings and you want to retrieve the recoverable
381. mport pre defined filter settings for log search or save current filter settings for future use 1 On the toolbar click the desired log table button Monitor System Login Counter or POS click the Filter button No 3 Figure 4 42 and select Default Filter This dialog box appears Monitor Filter jw Device jw Information Iw Event Camera 1 Module 1 Y Motion m Iw Time C Date C Time Bah 3 5 2003 00 00 00 Sal A 5 2003 y 23 59 59 Fe Cancel Add New Command Import Export Time Device Information Event DST 3 5 2003 3 5 2003 11 59 59 PM Camera 1 Module 1 Motion 4 Note all commands are operated by OR Figure 4 43 Define the filter criteria such as a specific camera and a period of time If you want to search the log data recorded during the Daylight Saving Time period select DST Rollback 4 You can click Export to save the current settings to another location or Import to apply other filter settings 5 Click OK to display the filter results Tip Next time when you want to use the same exported settings just click the Filter button select Favorites and select the name of the export file Note 1 The Import and Export features are only available in version 8 1 or later therefore it is not applicable to export the filter settings to the older version of GV System 2 The default Export path is GV folder Syslog_Favorites Monitor If you change the saving path the na
382. n V Recycle M Keep Days 30 Video Player Quick Search Setup e Object Index C Face Detection Ma C Video Snapshot Show Object Never Recycle 2 jw Noise Tolerance A Level 1 Schedule Cancel Figure 3 21 Video Object Setup for Object Index 158 El Video Analysis 4 Select one camera from the drop down list and enable Camera for the following setup e e Mask Filter Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored Set Location Click the button to assign a path to save the file Keep Days Check the item and specify the days to store the files from 1 day to 999 days Recycle When both Keep Days and Recycle are selected the system applies whichever condition comes first For example if storage space is lower than that is required to hold the days of data specified in Keep Days recycle comes first Video Player Select one of these players for playback function ViewLog or Quick Search Show Object When motion is detected it will be outlined with a blue frame Never Recycle With the option selected the event files of object index and face detection will not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached Noise Tolerance Use the slider to adjust the level The higher the level the more tolerant the system is to video noise 5 In the Setup section select Object Index 6 Click Schedule to set a schedule to enable the function For details
383. n 2 2 D Playing Back Video Files 4 4 1 Event Query Settings Click the Event Query button No 6 Figure 4 41 on the Quick Search window and the following dialog box will appear Use this function to find POS events by a specific item transaction or date Find Text POS Event Transaction Start 5 r Figure 4 46 Find Text Enable this option to find vdeo events that match to the key word POS Event Enable this option to find video events that match to the specified transaction type Start Time Enable this function and use the drop down listto specify date and time Rule Specify to search forward or backward from the set date 273 D Playing Back Video Files 4 4 2 Advanced Search Settings To decide the size of Quick Search monitoring window and set up a list of favorite texts for search follow these steps 1 Click the Expand Shrink Dialog button No 11 Figure 4 41 and select Advanced Search The Advanced Search panel appears 2 Click the Setting button jon the right side of the panel This dialog box appears Advanced Search Setting Default Layout View Size 320x240 Y Show Advanced Search Panel Favorite Search Text Newspaper Add Delete Modify 5 100 Cancel Figure 4 47 Default Layout View Size Selects 320 x 240 or 640 x 480 for the monitoring window size when the Quick Search is opened Show Advanced Search P
384. n No 14 Figure 1 2 click Advanced Video Analysis and select Digital Object Tracking Setting 2 Select the camera to be configured and click the Configure button This dialog box appears Digital Object Tracking Camera Camera Selection Camera 2 D Definition e Mask Region EE 6 C Min Object Size O Max number of tracked objects 5 Dwell Time Of Motion Option l Smart Zoom In 6 sec Schedule Figure 3 15 3 Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop down list 149 EI Video Analysis In the Definition section there are three options Mask Region Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored Min Object Size First click the cy button to pause live images and then use the mouse to outline the minimum object size for tracking on the image Max Number of Tracked Objects Use the slider to choose the maximum number of objects to be tracked The maximum value is 7 This number also determines how many navigation boxes would be left free for selecting focus areas of interest in PAP View See Object Tracking in PAP View later in this chapter Dwell Time of Motion After a targeted object stops moving the image will remain magnified for the number of seconds specified In the Option section selecting Smart Zoom In can focus the upper part of the targeted object during tracking To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule but
385. nP Settings in Chapter 8 Security Enable to apply enhanced Internet security Please note when the feature is enabled the subscribers using earlier version than 8 0 cannot access the SMS Server anymore Startup O Auto Start Service when Sever Startup Automatically starts SMS services when the program starts O Minimizeto System Tray when auto start service Minimizes the SMS Server window to notification area when it starts O Auto save the PIN number after start service Automatically saves the PIN number when SMS services start 911 10 Short Message Service Message Filter RK Server Setting General Message Filter Notify Allow Message Type Video Lost LO Module Lost LO Trigger Camera Motion Intruder Missing Object Unattended Object POS Loss Prevention Disk Full Recording abnormal detected DWR Surveillance system abnormality Center VSM Connection Lost Subscriber Login Subscriber Logout User defined MI inn l awa Figure 10 4 Server Setting Message Filter Check the desired alert conditions to send SMS messages The user defined condition refers to the SMS messages sent manually in Center V2 and VSM See Sending SMS in Chapter 1 and Chapter 3 in the CMS Users Manual 512 10 Short Message Service Notify le Server Setting pum General Message Filter Notify Check Internet Connectivity Reference IP Send SMS notification when no conn
386. ncncocnnnononnnnnss 3 12 2 Easy Mode with No Overlapping Area oc oocnocicccccoccccccocococononnnnorocnncororocnninnnnnns 3 12 93 ACCESSING A Panorama WEN tee VIO DETOO GING ME VIGEO SaD llo ali Wide Angle Lens Dewarping esseekee KENE ENEE EEN E NEEN ER KEEN mn mn en Advanced Motion Detechon see E ee EN KREE EEN EE ENEE ER EE Ets e WR EE d EE Advanced Scene Change Detechon see ee nunnu KEREN EE EE EE rn Advanced Unattended Object Detectton ees eek ee EN ERC Ee Advanced Missing Object Detection see ee ENNEN EE nunnan nnne Video Analysis Gchedule ees E RENE NEEN ENK EE ENER EEN ER EE EEN E SEA ele EEN E FISNEVO VIA 3 22 1 Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera oo ccccccccecceeeeeceeaeseseeeeaeesseeseaeaeseeseeteeenens 3 22 2 Setting Up a Third Party Fisheye Camera ommciiconincniccnccccnnnincncn conc nro nn ninas Eet ee TEE 184 185 188 189 191 193 195 197 200 203 206 209 211 212 213 215 219 135 GUARD Guardian Security Solutions LC Video Analysis 3 1 Object Tracking and Zooming Object Tracking provides you the real time tracking and automatic magnification of a single moving object by the combination of one PTZ camera and one stationary camera If only one PTZ camera is available it can be applied for Object Zooming letting you configure four critical vews for real time zooming The Object Tracking and Object Zooming functions can be combined together by completing both settings 3 1
387. nd Temp Folder The temporary storage path for the video files to be compacted Include Never Recycle events This option enables the video files that are set to be never recycle to be compacted 7 Click Exit ER Configuring Main System After setup is completed the GVServce icon appears on the Windows notification area as shown The GVSemice program allows the video compacting to run automatically without the starting the GV System When the GV System starts to compact video files at the time you specified the following Compacting List will pop up displaying the information such as the camera number the processing status the processing time and the number of files that are being compacted To view the log files of vdeo compacting click the icon in the bottom of the window Compacting List Compacting CAGYV 800icam0210527 Event20100527151545002 Avi Camera Processing Event Sta Processing Date Start Date End Date Camera 2 Completed 1 1 5 27 2010 3 3 6 27 2010 6 22 2010 Status Completed Number of Files 15 7 Time 00 00 02 Number of Files DST 0 Figure 1 54 ER Configuring Main System Viewing Compacted Video Files After the vdeo compacting the compacted files will replace the original files and become the video events you view on ViewLog After selecting a camera and date you specified for vdeo compacting you would see three types of icons on
388. nd ID settings when the connection with the Authentication Server fails 551 1 Useful Utilities 2 Click the Set Up Server button in Figure 11 30 This dialog box appears Remote Authentication Metwork Setup Server IF 192 168 0 60 Server Port 3663 Default Authorized ID 112345 Authorized Password Figure 11 32 3 Enter the IP address and port of the Authentication Server Type the Authorized ID and Authorized Password of the Authentication Server Figure 11 30 4 Click OK to start the connection When the connection is established the previous password settings in the GV System will be invalid 5 Press L on the keyboard to call up the Login dialog box The icon 9 indicates the connection Is established Password Forgot Password ES Change Password Cancel Figure 11 33 As long as the Authentication Sever is working every time when you start the GV System the Login dialog box will appear Enter the user account created on the Authentication Server to log into the Server 992 1 Useful Utilities Note W hen the disconnection icon appears on the Login dialog box Figure 11 33 there might be one of these three reasons 1 The login ID and Password do not match any of user IDs and Passwords created on the Authentication Server 2 The client s given name Figure 11 25 doesn t match the GV System s 3 The network connection has traffic problem 553 KOR Useful Util
389. nd turning on audio if available 7 To graph the search results click the Chart button 437 D Remote Viewing 8 To export the search results select one of formats Txt Html or Excel and then click the Export button Monitor Log query E Monitor Event Type Date Submit Query System Motion ODST Rollback O O Login 2011 06 1 6 00 00 01 E O Count 2011 06 16 23 59 51 E ounter O POS mE 1 Page 1 1 Total record s 1 memes Bip Be ti it So i E ao Camera 6 16 2011 Woh 4665 Motion 4 5 16 32 PM 1 Page 1 1 Total record s 1 Query categories Export data Chart display Video icon Playback Window Figure 8 53 438 D Remote Viewing 8 12 Download Center The Download Center provides you with an easy option to upgrade the codec and decide what kind of viewing program should be downloaded to your local computer based on screen resolution required 1 Click Download in the left panel of the Single View page Figure 8 20 This page appears 1024 x 768 1280 x 800 1280 x 1024 Multi View EARL 1600 x 1200 1680 x 1050 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1200 1024 x 768 1280 x 800 1280 x 1024 1440 x 900 1600 x 1200 1680 x 1050 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1200 2 02 MB COTE Emap File size Install Complete Download Figure 8 54 2 Check the desired programs The File Size field will display the total file size of the selected programs 3 Click Download and follo
390. nd working in the background Double click the program listed in Task Manager to bring the program back to desktop Task Manager e Multicam Surveillance System 6 0 Si untitled Paint ED vierwLog 6 1 Figure 11 21 541 1 Useful Utilities 11 4 3 Token File for Save Mode This option in the Settings section lets you export atoken file In case you enter safe mode and are in the status of the GV Desktop this token file will let you exit from the GV Desktop and enter the Windows desktop To export a token file and apply it follow the steps below 1 Click the Export Token button Figure 11 20 to display the following dialog box Enter Token Code In Safe ModetBoot users must locate Token File and enter Token Code to exit from the Multicam Desktop Token Code 123 Enter the Code upto 32 characters with the combination of alphabetsfiqnoring case and digits Cancel Figure 11 22 2 Type a code in the Token Code field 3 Click OK The Save As dialog box appears Save in H Desktop My Documents A My Computer GIS My Network Places File name desktop token Save as type SafeM odeT cken srt Cancel Figure 11 23 E 4 Locate a path and enter a desired name in the File Name field 5 Click Save to save the file When you enter safe mode and are in the status of the GV Desktop 6 Click the Settings button on the desktop You will be prompted to locate the stored token file
391. nel This dialog box appears Synchronize the LED Panel with the LED Device on Gw Hot Y Swap DYR COM Port COM 1 ba Enable disk full beep Indicate HD status by LED Figure 11 47 969 Useful Utilities LED Panel alwaysstays on top This option makes the LED panel stay on top of other windows when the Media Man Tools window is minimized Synchronize the LED Panel with the LED Device on GV Hot Swap DVR This option is designed for the use of the GV Hot Swap DVR System When this option is enabled the LED device installed on the front panel of the GV Hot Swap DVR System will synchronize with the LED panel on the screen O Enable disk full beep When the hard disk drive is full the system sounds on Note this function only works when the motherboard is equipped or installed with a PC speaker By default only the hard disk drive that stores video and audio files will be assigned to LED If you want to re assign the hard disk drive or assign other drives to LEDs freely move the hard disk drive to the desired LED on the tree Click OK to apply the settings and minimize the Media Man Tool window to display the LED panel on the screen If you want to return to the Media Man Tools window right click the LED panel and select Switch to the setup window Note 1 Because the LEDs are designed to indicate the video and audio files are being written or read it is not recommended to assign the HDDs that store l
392. ng from O to 255 can be programmed 317 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 3 3 Setting Momentary and Maintained Modes This section introduces the momentary and maintained modes C Momentary Mode Mainta ned Mode l Stait Stop Fin Ww StatStop Camera Monitoring by VO Mod 1 Pin 1 iw Staristop IO Monitor by II mod 1 Pin 1 Figure 6 10 Momentary Mode Pushbutton switches that are normally open and stay closed only as long as the button is pressed Momentary switches allow turn on or turn off from multiple locations For example certain premises have a designated entry exit door When the staff enters the entry door the system starts monitoring When the staff leaves from the exit door the system stops monitoring Maintained Mode Push on push off button switches that stay open until thrown and then stay closed until thrown again Maintained switches are convenient for only one switch location For example in the business hour when the door is opened the system stops monitoring in the non business hour when the door is closed the system starts monitoring 318 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 3 4 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input Trigger The option lets you instantly deactivate all the prior alarm and alert settings Output Wave Alarm Send Alerts when an assigned input module is triggered W Deactivate notification when selected pin is ON mod 1 Input Pin Deactivate Motification Triggerby
393. nitor Event Records motion triggered and l O triggered events For this feature to work you must enable the Register Motion Event option in Figure 1 11 or the Register Input Event option in Figure 6 7 in Chapter 6 O POS Event Records POS transaction data Counter Event Records counting results Interval of Motion Event Specifies the log interval between motion triggered events This setting could prevent the System Log growing too big when trying to log all events under a motion intensive surveillance area Interval of Input Event Specifies the log interval between l O triggered events Di Configuring Main System Default Video Player Monitor Table Specifies the playback software for monitor events For details on each playback application see Chapter 5 POS Table Specifies the playback software for POS events Import Previous Days of Live Log Browser Specifies how many days of data to be loaded into the System Log Keep Days Set the number of days to keep logs Recycle Enable the system to delete old log files to make space for new files when the space of assigned Log Path is below 500 MB Log Path Click the button to specify a storage path The default log path is AGV folder database The available free space of the storage path will be displayed below Di Configuring Main System 1 7 3 Searching Event Logs To search for log data click the icon on the upper left corner of the
394. nment drag and drop the C icon to that position 5 Select Live Mode 6 Repeat above steps to configure other monitors 7 Click OK to apply the settings 616 11 14 3 1 Useful Utilities Setting Scanned Pages You can set up to 16 scanned pages with different screen divisions and channels for each monitor 1 2 10 11 Digital Matrix Setup FS ER Matrix Ge Pagel E Page2 M Mw camz M4 cams LZ cama M cams M4 cams Me cam M4 cams M camg M4 cam10 M4 cami GE Cam MZ cam 3 M4 Cam 4 m2 ramis Select Auto Scan Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured In the upper left column expand the Matrix folder tree and then click Page 1 This page appears iv Activate Display Bl Description 1024 by 768 pixels This is the Main Monitor Iw Activate Pagel Scan Drag and Drop Camera No to the Screen Division ia ae ae MEA wert 6 T D dla lid 13 14 15 DP Screen 14 Divisions Division Dwell Time 3 Sec Ok Cancel Apply Figure 11 90 Select Activate Page 1 Scan Select Screen Division Drag and drop the camera numbers to the desired positions on the divisions To clear the assignment drag and drop the C icon to that position Specify Dwell Time for how long this scanned page remains on the monitor Repeat Steps 2 to 5 to configure more scanned pages for the specific monitor Repeat Steps 1 to 7 to configure s
395. nnel to 5 4 For Digital Matrix see Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Di Configuring Main System 1 3 3 Adjusting Video Attributes This feature lets you adjust video attributes to get the best picture Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to A V Setting and select Video Attributes to choose between Standard and Advanced Users of GV Combo A Card GV 1016 G V 1120A 1240A 1480A GV 600A GV 650A and GV 800A can also select Default Value to change the default video attributes to Vivid or Standard The Vivid option produces more saturated and colorful video images while the Standard option produces brighter and less saturated vdeo images You must click the Default button in Standard Video Attributes or Advanced Video Attributes to apply the selected default values Note The Video Attributes feature is only available for analog cameras Standard Video Attributes Adjust image quality by moving the sliders to the desired values Click Default to apply default values Click the left and right arrow buttons to select a desired camera for setup Or click the finger button to apply the displayed settings to all cameras Standard Yideo Attributes x Camera 1 Brightness 126 Contrast 126 Saturation 125 Hue 12 Default Cancel Figure 1 23 AGC Auto Gain Control This option is only available on GV 600A GV 650A and GV 800A Adjusting AGC helps boost weak video signals or reduce strong video signals
396. nnnanoons Accessing Authentication Server Account Information 487 488 489 491 492 493 494 495 496 496 498 499 500 501 502 502 503 504 505 506 d 0 Short Message Service ccessssesssnsessesessesss OOS 101 Installing SMS Server tine OG 10 2 The SMS Server WINDOW iniciando in eee OOO 10 3 SMS Serv r Secada 9 10 1031 DEVICE AS Te nta irte a 10 32 SOnernocunas sind 91 19 33 Account SEMINGS ss O04 10 4 SMS LOG a O10 10 41 Setting SMS LOG iaa ak 10 4 2 MISMA SMS LOT WEE a es 10 5 Password Sectas 919 10 6 SMSen eege ee Egger 919 10 6 1 Connecting GV System to SMS Server oot O19 10 6 2 Setting Mobile Numbers A DOT 106 3 Setting Alen dai Me e EE A d Useful Utilities nensnun nu en RR RK e a KR ERR E a DLO 11 4 Dynamic DNS ecee 920 TEL installing Dynamic DNS suicido aaa BLT 11 1 2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS A 028 MLS Starting Dynamic DNS insista danita 090 Td reegt eege teen OO 11 2 Watermark VICW E e 11 2 1 Activating Watermark Protection OOS 11 2 2 Running the Watermark Pro D4 11 23 The Watermark Proof Window oo DO 11 3 Twin View Display SEN OOO 11 4 WINAOWS LOCKUD EE 11 4 1 The GV Desktop Screen ue OOO 11 4 2 GV Desktop EE adas DOD 1d 5 6 Starting EE 11 5 7 Connecting GV System to the Server oo eceeeeeee esses eeeene eens 949 991 11 5 8 Remote Access from Control Center Remote E Map and MultiView 11 6 Fast BACKUP
397. nput name can be found and modified in Figure 6 1 I O Overlay Click Setup to display this dialog box use the drop down lists to select the input module and pin number and then select camera s associated with the input device IO Overlay Setup Mod 1 Pin 1 Clear Al Camera Ww i Ww a W13 10 jw 14 Check Al wv 11 je 15 Uncheck All W 12 W 16 OK Cancel Figure 6 13 al 4 Iw 2 Iw 3 iw A x DO 4 D On x To overlay the name of triggered input on live video click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select General Setting select Text Overlay Setting and select Print on screen Only for I O alarm or Print on video file You can also select the position of the name stamp on the screen For details see POS Data Overlay in Chapter 7 Note Up to 5 input names can be stamped on each channel when inputs are triggered 320 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 4 Input State Detection This feature is designed to monitor all inputs for a change of state whenever you start O monitoring A change from the defined state N O to N C or N C to N O can activate an alarm condition e g a warning light or buzzer 1 On the main screen click the UO button 2 No 7 Figure 1 2 and select Detect Input Status This dialog box appears E MIE Module 1 Y 4 Input 1 yv 4 Input 2 Y 4 Input 3 y Input 4 Mod 1 D Output Pin 1 D Auto close abnormal notify after 5 Sec Can
398. nsaction files or TCP IP or OPOS protocol compatible 2 Configure a static IP address or domain name on the POS device If the POS device uses a dynamic IP address you should apply for a domain name from the DDNS servce so that the GV System can always access the POS device by the domain name 3 Connect the USB dongle to the GV System Note Two kinds of DDNS programs are provided in the Software DVD Dynamic DNS Service and Local DDNS Server For details see Chapter 11 Useful Utilities 342 Point of Sale POS Application Settings At the POS device 1 Insert the Software DVD tothe POS computer lt runs automatically and a wndow appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Paid Software 3 Select GV POS Text Sender Only for Windows Based and Text Mode POS device and follow the on screen instructions This dialog box appears POS Text Sender Modify Delete lt Autorun when Windows starts Figure 7 3 4 Click the New button This dialog box appears Choose Monitor Source Type Monitor Type File File Internet OPOS Printer Driver Figure 7 4 343 Point of Sale POS Application 5 Select one of the following options a Select File if the POS device can generate TXT INI or JNL files b Select Internet if the POS device is compatible with Internet protocol Click OK In the dialog box that appears type the IP address of the POS device and the connection port The default
399. nsparency level of the panel Ten levels range from 10 fully transparent to 100 fully opaque Di Configuring Main System 1 12 Pop up Live Video The live video can pop up immediately for alert whenever motion detection and alarm occurs To set up click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Camera Popup Setting This brings up the following Camera Popup Setting dialog box Dwell Time Interrupt Interval Camera Motion Invoke wi iw H Iw 11 ll 12 Check Al Clear Al Mod 1 afl Clear All Input 1 afl i Input Invoke Camera 1 ceca Figure 1 78 1 5 Bhs IA 3 iw 7 4 E Dwell Time Specify the amount of time a pop up live video to remain in the foreground Interrupt Interval Specify the interval between live video pop ups This feature is useful when several cameras are activated for a pop up alert at the same time Camera Motion Invoke Choose which camera you wish to have auto pop up upon motion detection Input Invoke Select an input module and number using arrow buttons select this option and assign a camera to the input device Whenever the input is triggered the live video of the assigned camera will pop up The Arrow Button The pop up live videos appear on the screen when triggered events occur H the DSP Spot Monitor function is enabled you can select if pop up live videos appear on the system screen spot monitor or both For detai
400. nt Level Supervisor M User cannot change password Force password change at next login P e Export this ID for IR Remote Control GV Keyboard l Send password by E mail Login this ID automatically Single user mode V Input State 7 Output Control MZ PTZ V System Setting V Video Attribute V Object Tracking V Edit Password Supervisor Only V Minimize or Logout V FullScreen Enter V FullScreen Exit V Snapshot V Exit System Figure 1 34 Camera Live ai gu jw 1 jw E jw 3 jw 13 M266 0M 14 Y 3 v7 iv Il 15 shar 2h 16 23 a o 9 13 1014 14 nm 15 12 16 Audio Live Iv 1 Iv 2 lv Y ER Configuring Main System 1 5 1 Creating an User Account To create a user account 1 Click the New button at the lower left hand corner to bring up the New Account dialog box ID Password Password Confirmation Hint Level Figure 1 35 2 Enter the user s ID name and password Re enter the same password in the Password Confirmation field Give a Hint optional that would remind you of the password Select the user s authorization level Supervisor PowerUser or User By default users belonging to the Supervisor level have full rights over GV System settings PowerUsers have the same permission and rights as Supervisors except that they cannot edit user information and delete the password system described later Users belonging to the User level are restricted to all sys
401. nt live views and screen divisions for each monitor Automatic channel scan You can set up to 16 scanned pages with different screen divisions and channels for each monitor Pop up Alert You can be alerted by pop up live videos when motion is detected or I O devices are triggered 11 141 Activating Multiple Monitors Use Windows Display Properties to activate multiple monitors Here we use Windows XP to illustrate the steps of configuration 1 Right click the desktop click Properties and click the Settings tab This dialog box appears Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors a 2 Plug and Play Monitor on GIGABYTE Radeon lt 1600 PRO Seconde ze Screen resolution Color quality J More Highest 32 bit y 1280 by 1024 pixels i EE EE E C Use this device as the primary monitor Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Figure 11 87 614 1 Useful Utilities Click the Display list If you do not see multiple monitors listed check if your additional monitors are connected with the computer properly Select the primary monitor from the list and select Use This Device as the Primary Monitor Select additional monitors from the list and select Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor for each monitor Click Identify Windows XP displays a large number to
402. ntary and Maintained Modes Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings upon Input Trgger ees Overlaying Input Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger ce eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees Configuring the Advanced I O Panel ses setting Up Mode Schedule eegen FORCING QUID Eto td E GING Background IMAG Pumas System W Ide ee EE The Advanced Logical Input Status in Multicam Option Setting Visual Automato Meesi e eee vel es eas ee USIMA ViStal AMO EC e EE 59 Vra O COn ee SU ER leier 307 309 311 314 315 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 323 324 327 328 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 336 337 338 339 305 I O Applications This chapter discusses how you can set up and control the I O devices connected to GV System I O applications include these features Configure I O devices Move PTZ to a preset location on input trigger Support access control systems of Momentary and Maintained modes Arm and disarm l O devices without interfering with the monitoring e e Centrally manage I O devices across the wide area by the Advanced I O Panel 306 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 1 1 0 Device Setup To connect the I O device to the computer of GV System you may need the additional device GV Net GV Net Card GV NET IO Card or GV I O Box For details on these devices see Chapter 2 in the GV DVR and Accessories Installation Guide on the Software DVD To install the O device on the GV System on the main screen
403. nts Configuring Main System cccccccncooooonnnnnnnnnnzs amp 11 e ite Kl CT EE s Fa ER Ee Be 1162 TE ue Ru Lake EMADINO TG EEN a NS 1 14 Playing Back NEE EE EE EG 1 2 EC RS te UR CTT EE E WE EEN EE Een e EE 122 Setting Ree EE 1 2 3 Adjusting Camera Configuration mn ccicinnnninnnocnocinnnncoccro non caronnnnnnos 1 2 4 Setting Day and Night Recording Mode 1 25 Geo Mpeg4 Advanced Settings cooccccocccccccinnoccnonocccononononinononinnnns 12 6 Customizing Startup Seting S cuida 12 GUSIOMIZING Display Seting EE 12 6 SeCUING AUlO REDO0 i eege AER AE ke9 SENNO Text EE 1 3 Audio and Video Setting EE 1 3 1 Setting Video Source and Resolution 132 FKN ASpPEC AANO EE 1 3 3 Adjusting Video Attributes o co ocoociccnonicnnccoccnncoccconororonnnaracnnanncn ninos 1 34 Adjusting AUGI OS CHING statistic bien Es ten TUDO MOJE cta a a S 1 4 Camera MoM ORNO ME SA e e Ro A euectieitam cars 1 42 EECH 1 43 Daylight Saving Time Recording ccccicccococcincnococnnonnncoccnonnnnoconononanoos 1 5 ACCOUNT and PassWord uri aei da kaara aaa arai LST Creating an USer ACCOUNT EE 1 5 2 Changing Password on Login oococcconncniononcconcccncnnococononor cn nan anrnannnnos 1 5 3 Retrieving Password Through E mail 1 5 4 Preventing Unauthorized System Termtnaion eseese 1 5 5 Setting Double Passwords for ViewLog Access O o O OD A 11 15 18 22 23 25 27 29 30 32 32 33 34 38 40 42 42 43 45 4
404. o Accessories and select Quad Spot Monitors Setup The TV Quad Setting dialog box appears O In the General Setting tab you can modify Video Format and Video Attribute for all TV monitors Inthe TV tabs TV1 to TV5 you can set up the following configurations for each TV monitor TV Quad Setting Video Enable C Di wl jw 5 jw Oo jw 13 ales Minii select All Wwa jw Fie 11 jw 15 Clear All od jw H jw 12 jw 16 Scan Setting Video Format Bas Interval 10 Sec Ce Scan by Auto E setting Video Attribute Camera Popup setting TY Setting setting Elid Sa SEINI CECO Figure 11 82 609 1 Useful Utilities Video Enable Check or uncheck the desired channels displayed on monitor screen Scan Setting Interval Enter the interval between the scanned pages see Figure 11 80 for the scanned page Set the time between 1 and 999 seconds Scan by Select Auto to scan the channels automatically or Manual to scan at your speed Setting Camera Popup See Setting Pop up Views below TV Setting Click the Setting button to display this dialog box TY Setting Adjust TW D Li ni D Default Figure 11 83 Press the 4 direction buttons U L R and D to adjust the positions of the divisions on the monitor screen To display the camera number on the TV monitor check the Show Camera Number option To display the camera numbers on all connected TV monitors check the Sh
405. o Dome Pelco Spectra Ill Pelco Spetra Mini Dome SD4 W O Pishion 22X PTZ in I O RX214D SAE DR E588 Samsung SCC 641 643 Samsung SPD 1600 Samsung SPD 3300 Sensormatic Ultra IV Sony EVI D100 StorVision PTZ TOA CC551 VDI CT 58SPD VIDO AT Dome YAAN Dome 360 Vision ViD 18COP04 Pelco P 654 Appendix C Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking The PTZ models listed below are tested and certified by Guardian Security Solutions for their compatibility with the Object Tracking function Dual Camera Tracking Object Tracking and Zooming Brand Model AcutVista SSD 7971D Dynacolor DynaHawk Zh701 Guardian Security Solutions GV SD010 Series GV SD220 Series Messoa SDS600 Series Messoa D 700 Series Pelco Spectra Ill Sensormatic Ultra IV VIDO AT Dome Advanced Single Camera Tracking Brand Model AcutVista SSD 7971D COP 15 CD55W Pelco D Guardian Security Solutions GV SD010 Series GV SD200 Series GV SD220 Series Lilin PIH 7625 MLP1 Messoa D 700 Series Pelco Spectra Ill VIDO AT Dome 655 Appendix D Certificated PTZ Models for Full Degree Pan and Tilt Control RT Brand Model Modes Support Only Acutvista SSD 7871D Ir TI ESC A EN CA A AS BE EE DEE 0 A CS CIS Dynacolor Dome OOOO AO CC RER Guardian Security soos VIP Seed SSS Deiere CIC A a Mesa sosse S o o mesa orosw ERR EC E e E ECTS Polo Spira Min Dome
406. o Send Alerts options see nvoke to Send Alerts in Chapter 1 922 Chapter 11 Useful Uiltes 0 526 TT Dynamic DON LE ikt mstalng DYNAMIC DN Scantrad laredo DAN 11 1 2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS A DOO 1113 Starting Dynamic DNS a et tidad Local DONS SENE austriaca 002 11 2 Watermark Viewer ee eE KN ENEE ER KEREN EE E ER E ER EEN ER E ER EE ee une DOO 11 2 1 Activating Cuir La EE Ee 112 2 SEENEN Me Ware male Pro 004 11 23 The Watermark Proof WINAOW ais OOO 11 3 TWIN VIEW DISDIAY ias ii OOO 11 4 WIndows LOCKUD consista DOO 11 41 The GV D sktop Screen Ee dree OOO 11 42 ENTENTE 11 4 3 Token File for Save Mode A DAS 11 5 Authentication Gerver onconccccnnncioccncacooronnancannancarennnnnnnnanannranaananarmranaanr D4 ST Asta BE a odiada O40 tibia Me ever WINGO Westin ria DAA 11 53 Grealing a Client DVRs DAS 11 5 4 Creating a User el EE 11 5 5 Importing Groups and Users from Active Directory e D47 LS Starungthe ENEE ni O49 11 5 7 Connecting GV System to the Server A D I 11 5 8 Remote Access from Control Center Remote E Map and MultiView 554 11 6 Fast Backup and Restr cocconncccconoconoconnocononononancnan conan cono nan inania DOL 116 1 Nstaling the FBR Progam ua A ias DOY T62 sGUSTOMIZING Logo and BUIO reisiin a a er 11 6 3 Customizing the Features A DDO 11 6 4 Backing up and Restoring Settings A DGO 11 7 HotSwapRecordihg isis 9002 t The M dia Mai Tool HEEN Ee 90 11 7 2 Vi
407. o display camera ID and location name on the recorded video file Print on screen Only for IO alarm Enable this option to display the name of triggered input device on the camera screen For this function to work it is required to map a camera to an input device see Overlaying Input Device Name onto Screen upon Input Trigger in Chapter 6 Note Up to 5 input names can be stamped on each channel when inputs are triggered Alignment Select how you want the camera information to be aligned on a camera screen Set Font Click the Set Font button to set up the font for POS and Camera Time text The option Apply Stereo Font makes texts stand out from the background by giving white edge to the texts 354 Point of Sale POS Application 7 5 POS Field Filter POS Field Filter allows you to create a column for a transaction item in System Log It further filters the transaction conditions based on your criteria and displays the results under the created column To set up the function follow these steps 1 On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select POS Application Setting and select POS Field Filter Setup This dialog box appears POS Capture Data Setting Figure 7 15 POS Capture Data Setting 2 Click the New button and select Caption Data This dialog box appears Caption Data Setting key Word Coke Capture Data Type Currency M with Comma e q 1 0
408. o keep in live view buffer Record stream type GIS Setting Automatically adjust DST Scan Camera Automatic Setup OK WEN Y T E I et Figure 2 4 7 The Status column now should display Connected Click OK To customize camera settings such as codec and frame rate right click the camera to see the list of options See Customizing IP Camera Settings section below for more details Tips You can access the configuration interface of the connected IP device by right clicking the IP device and selecting Remote Camera Setting 118 2 5 2 Scanning Camera You can add camera by scanning for cameras in the LAN 1 Click Scan Camera Adialog box appears 2 Click the Start Scan button IP devices detected are displayed Scan Camera Start Scan Port 15000 Search Progress Name IP Address _Port__ MAC Address Gv LXBC Gv Bx220D GvV FE420 FE421 GV IPCAM H 264 Gv Bx220D Demo Gv YS504H Leo GPS Gv FE110 FE111 Gv PT110D GYV S12 GV BX320D Demo GY BX110D Gv B 220D Bx220D E Gv Bx520D BxX520D E Gv CB220 Gv BX110D GV Y5024 Gv IPSpeedDome Gv PT110 WS 02 RL 3 235 Demo GY FE421 Gv CB220 lt Ca 192 168 3 208 192 168 2 138 192 168 1 111 192 168 3 201 192 168 2 142 192 168 1 164 192 168 1 62 192 168 3 187 192 168 1 102 192 168 1 77 192 168 2 172 192 168 1 166 JEE 192 168 1 55 192 168 2 222 192 168 0 146 192 168 2 102 192 168 3 188 192 168 2 14 192 168 3 235 192 168
409. o switch to full screen for playback Switches to the full screen when a video is started playing Auto Play the latest event when Viewlog starts Plays the latest event when ViewLog starts Default view mode when Viewlog starts Select the desired vew mode at startup Auto close when ViewLog is idle Exits ViewLog automatically after the user remains inactive over the specified timer period Specify the idle time between 10 to 300 seconds 259 D Playing Back Video Files Display System Configuration Play Setting Display Database Cache Quad View Thumbnail View User Interface Aspect ratio Camera lmage Setting le Apply deinterlace render w Apply scaling render Apply deblocking render single views only w Apply text overlay s camera name time alarm render W Apply test overlay s POSG GY Wiegand render W Apply camera name render Use image instead of blue screen Replace blue screen during playback or merging video clips D GY 800CommResiCamloga jpg Sei OK Cancel Figure 4 36 User Interface Aspect Ratio Select the ratio between the width of the image and the height of the image Camera Image Setting O Apply De interlace Render Enable the De interlace function and then restart ViewLog to apply it Note This function requires DirectX 9 0C The De interlace only works in single vew with the resolution of 640 x 480 and 704 x 480 Apply Scaling Render Select to smoot
410. o the map in the Floor Plan window The E Map Editor lets you set the orientation of camera icons and change the icons Right click any camera icon to call up a menu and select the direction where you want the camera to point to Or change the camera icon into the dome icon 489 Lal E Map Application To change the icons for VO devices right click any I O device icon on the map and select Change Icon The window below appears Click No Event and select an icon to display when the I O device is not triggered Click Event to select an icon to display when the I O device is triggered You can use your own icon by clicking Add Icon oChange Icon IDL INPUT IDLINPUT_ IBLOUTPUL IDLOUTPU Ilcon Type DPreview INo Event ID _OUTPUT_PIN e IE vent I0I_OUTPUT_PIN_F Figure 9 3 Changing the I O device icon 7 Click File in the window menu and select Save to DVR or Save to File to save the created E Map file 490 D E Map Application 9 2 1 Creating an E Map File for a Remote Host With E Map Editor you can create E Maps for your local host as well as remotely for other hosts E Maps created for remote hosts are saved atthe server where they are created and can only be edited from that server You have to connect to the E Maps through the WebCam server to be able to see the live status of the cameras or I O devices Note The supported host types for E Map are GV DVR NVR GV IP Devices GV Video Server and GV Com
411. odes Geo Fisheye Quad view Composed of four PTZ views Geo Fisheye 360 degree Composed of two PTZ views and one 360 panoramic view Geo Fisheye Dual 180 degree Composed of two 180 views Geo Fisheye Single view Composed of one PTZ view Camera Position Select Ceiling Wall or Ground according to where the camera is mounted Adjust Auto Pan Speed At Top Left Channel Select low medium or high speed to enable Auto Pan for one PTZ view at the rotation speed of your choice This option applies to Quad view 360 degree and Single view Zoom Select Zoom In or Zoom Out and then click on the image Show Source Video At Top Right Channel You can display the circular source image in the top right quadrant when Quad view is selected Fisheye Settings Wall Mount 180 View Wide View Iw Hardware Acceleration Iw Apply All Frame Rate Control e 30 L Apply All Show Original Video in Low Resolution Apply All cancel Figure 3 64 Screen Ratio Setting Sets the display ratio to be 4 3 or 16 9 213 EI Video Analysis Wide View Increases the height of the 180 degree view when camera position is set to wall mount 4 S i D E p Lem xn a f y Figure 3 65 Wide View Disabled Figure 3 66 Wide View Enabled Hardware Acceleration Dewarps fisheye view processed by GPU to lower CPU loading Select Apply All to apply the hardware acc
412. of GV IP cameras to adjust advanced video attributes such as white balance and shutter speed Different image settings are available on different GV IP camera models ER Configuring Main System 1 2 4 Setting Day and Night Recording Mode Day Night Recording allows you to set up different recording modes for different time frames of the day Each day can be divided into 4 time frames each represented by 1 span You can set up a different frame rate recording quality motion sensitivity and noise detection level for each time frame 1 Click the Day Night Recording Mode button in Figure 1 9 and this dialog box appears Day Night Rec Mode Setup Time Span Setup Y Spani lam 00 00 p Motion Detect D Y Span2 lam 000 pp Motion Detect Y Span3 lam 00 00 E Motion Detect D Y Spand lam 00 00 p Motion Detect Weekend Apply a Ge Es Figure 1 13 2 Enable Span1 and specify the Start time in the first time field select the check box in the second time field and specify the End time 3 Use the drop down list to select Motion Detect or Round the Clock to be the recording mode for the Span 1 4 Select the check box and click the button to adjust recording quality motion sensitivity and noise detection level for Span 1 5 Repeat above steps to set up multiple spans if required 6 If you want to start monitoring all day on the weekend select Weekend Apply and select recording mo
413. og files to the LEDs If the HDD that stores log files is assigned to a LED and its LED turns red make sure the log files are not being written before you remove it Otherwise the log files might be lost during the removal For details on storage locations of logs and video audio files see Setting Data Storage in Chapter 1 970 1 Useful Utilities 11 8 Backup Server With Backup Server the GV System can back up recorded files to the storage system over Internet When the Backup Server is enabled a copy of recorded files will automatically be backed up to the storage system The Backup Server can support any storage system protocol which can add itself to Windows and be formatted by Windows Disk Management The following diagram shows the possible types of storage systems the Backup Server can support The Backup Server allows you to select multiple drives both local drives or through networking to be used to back up files Network Local iSCSI eSATA NAS gt GV sysiem 4 gt USB Thecus 5200N Backup Internal Hard Driver Server 11 8 1 Adding a Disk Volume Generally the steps to add a disk volume from a storage system looks something like this 1 Assign a disk volume on the storage system for GV System 2 Create an account on the storage system for GV System 3 Build the connection between the storage system and GV System Certain storage systems may require you to install and configure additional
414. og into the WebCam server successfully you can see the single live view from the GV System Information Ca a Version 8200 ocal time 2007712 717 17 52 33 Host time 2007 12 17 17 52 33 a Online count 1 06000 Figure 8 20 Single View MPEG4 Encoder Viewer The controls in the Single View Viewer No Name 1 Countdown Timer 2 Menu 3 Expand Close 4 Control Panel 5 Show System Menu Description Indicates the remaining time when you log in as Guest When time is up you will be logged out automatically Opens the menu of Control Panel See Control Panel later in this chapter Expands or closes the Control Panel See Control Panel later in this chapter Brings up these options Alarm Notify Video and Audio Configuration Remote Config Change Server Show Camera Name and Image Enhance See Alarm Notification Video and Audio Configuration Remote Configuration Server List and Image Enhancement later in this chapter 389 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Change Camera PTZ Control VO Control Full Screen File Save Change Quality Snapshot Speaker Microphone Stop Play Live Video D Remote Viewing Selects the desired camera for display Displays the PTZ control panel See PTZ Control and Visual PTZ Control Panel later in this chapter Displays the I O control panel See O Control later in this chapter Switches to full screen view The ma
415. ograms select MCamCtrl and then run MCamCtrl The MCamCtrl dialog box appears amp Keyboard amp Joystick up a F1 F2 F3 FA FS F6 F7 FS DYR ID Name Startup type Manual PTZ Speed Monopoly mode Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Device 5 Device 6 Device 7 S SS SS SS S Device 8 Keyboard amp Joystick Figure 11 103 Leave both ID and Name fields blank In the Startup Type field select Manual or Automatic to run MCamCtrl at next startup To adjust the PTZ speed use the slide bar In the Device field select the port connecting to the GV Joystick To find out the port number the GV Joystick is using go to Windows Device Manager and look for the Prolific USB to Serial Bridge entry under the Ports COM amp LPT section Click the Start Service button to start the service Keep the MCamCtrl Utility running in the background and open the Web interface of the GV IP device to begin controlling the PTZ movement using GV Joystick 636 1 Useful Utilities 11 18 GV Mobile Server GV Mobile Server is an application that can encode up to 32 video channels and allows live view access from GV IP Decoder Box GV Pad and mobile devices including Android Smartphone Pad iPhone and iPod Touch Third party surveillance software can also access video channels from GV Mobile Server through RTSP For more details refer
416. olor of the graph Default Sets the color of graph display at default e 8 e Number of Grid Line Use the drop down list to select how many grid lines to be displayed When you click the Bandwidth Record tab in the Bandwidth Control window you can view the network traffic in graph Event Log Bandwidth Record 524 00 B S 498 00 B 472 00 B S 446 00 B 420 00 ETE Figure 11 68 594 1 Useful Utilities 11 11 Report Generator With the Report Generator you can generate a daily or weekly report based on the specified recording data The report can be either generated manually or automatically by schedule The report is available in two types of formats MDB and HTML You can save the report on the hard disk send itto a specified e mail address or have it to be dealt in both ways If the reports indicate the video recordings of events you can play them back via Internet connection 11 11 1 Starting Report Generator 1 The Report Generator program is included in the installation of Main System Double click ReportGenerator exe from the GV folder 2 The program will be minimized to the system tray Double click the e icon to run the program 3 Type the ID and password of the GV System when you are prompted to log in 995 Useful Utilities 11 11 2 Setting Report Generator In the Report Generator dialog box click the Advanced Setting tab Program Report Advanced Setting Event Log Sta
417. olumn shows the following messages Start Transaction Appears when sales transaction starts Stop Transaction Appears when sales transaction ends Void Transaction Appears if an item is being void from the sales transaction Cash Drawer Open Appears if the cash drawer is opened O Filter 1 15 Appears if the sales transaction matches the defined condition 1 to 15 Note This column is currently not being used Di Configuring Main System 1 7 2 Setting Event Logs You can define several event log settings specifying which event log to be recorded the interval time to write the log into the system video player and the number of days to keep the logs lo accessthese log settings click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select System Log Setting to display the following dialog box System Log Setting W General Event W Login Logout Event w Monitor Event W POS Event W Counter Event interval of Motion Event DI Sec Interval of Input Event BO SEC Default Video Player Monitor Table ViewLog POS Table Quick Search Y impor Previous Days of Live Log Browser H Keep Days 30 H Recycle Pi D Log Path Do 900 e Available 3 99 GH en Figure 1 46 General Event Records system startup exit network server start stop and recording start stop Login Logout Event Records the login logout activities of the local user to GV System and WebCam Server Mo
418. ome MsvViewlP 4 H as 3 GV DVR GV Video Server Clear e Ca Figure 8 69 5 Select the desired video recording on the event list for playback Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the vdeo was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower 2 The remote playback RPB function does not support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices 453 D Remote Viewing Other Functions In addition to live mew GV MSView V2 or GV MSView V3 offers these functions Zooming in out a camera view rotating images and controlling outputs Select the Control option to have these features 454 D Remote Viewing 8 13 3 Symbian Smartphone With the GV SSView V3 application it s also possible to monitor your GV System remotely through a Symbian based smartphone For the supported Symbian version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter Installing GV SSView V3 1 To download GV SSView V3 2 Click the Download button 3 Consult your smartphone user s manual for how to install a program to the smartphone Activating the GV SSView V3 Function To allow remote access to the GV System you must enable the Mobile function on the WebCam Server For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 455 Connecting to GV System The following operations may vary slightly for different modules 1 Execute GV SSView V3 on you
419. on No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure and select Camera Configure A dialog box appears 2 lo setthe recording mode to motion detection enable Rec Video and select Motion Detect from the drop down list 3 To enable noise tolerance click the right arrow button next to Sensitivity in the Motion Detect section The Motion Detection Setup dialog box appears 4 Select Activate Noise Tolerance and adjust tolerance level The higher the level the more tolerant the system is to video noise If your surveillance area may produce much video noise set the level to High Conversely set the level to Low if the surveillance area may produce less video noise 5 Click OK to save the settings Setting Up for Advanced Motion Detection For details see Advanced Motion Detection in chapter 3 Di Configuring Main System 1 13 2 Noise Detectionto Reduce File Size Designed for the round the clock recording the Noise Detection feature can automatically reduce recording size on video noise conditions and restore normal recording size when the disturbing conditions are over 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to System Configure and select Camera Configure A dialog box appears 2 To setthe recording mode to Round the Clock enable Rec Video and select Round the clock from the drop down list 3 Select Apply Advanced Codec Setting and click the 224 button This dialog box appears F Geo Mpeg4 Codec S
420. on sensitivity The drop down menu Click the drop down menu to define detection region and object size Selection Tracking Click to specify the tracking time Zoom in Object Click to specify the idle time Live Tuning Adjust directions and the desired level of zooming Schedule Click to set up a schedule to enable the function 138 El Video Analysis Enable Mask Click to display the mask on the defined detection region when you test the settings 1 Click to display the following dialog box select the PTZ brand and the hardware address and click OK to apply the settings E Device Sensormatic Ultra Pi Cancel Figure 3 3 2 Choose the corresponding camera views of the PTZ and stationary cameras In Figure 3 2 the images of the PTZ camera show in the Camera 2 view while the images of the stationary camera show inthe Camera 1 view 3 Adjust the view of the PTZ camera with the sliders of Pan Tilt and Zoom Make sure the PTZ camera view is as similar as possible to the stationary camera view Click the Save button to save the both views as image references Adjust Sensitivity or keep it as default 139 EI Video Analysis Select Define Detect Region from the drop down menu Use the mouse to outline a detection region inthe right image you will be prompted to enter Detect Region Selection We Tracking Detect Region C Zoom In Object Delete Detect Live 1 d y g Region Figur
421. ontrol button No 8 Figure 8 20 to bring out the I O control panel Enable Disable VO lO DEVICE eR 2008 1 221 E rr otc p Hf 11 33 16 ge 11 33 19 f 11 33 36 Output Reset Sr 11 33 37 TE Module 1 E Module 01 Input S Input Ls Input 1 GE Output Camera 1 Sch Camera 2 Sch Camera 3 E Camera 4 Sch Camera 5 Sch Camera 6 Sch Camera T Sch Camera 8 mh Camera Y Sech Camera 10 Sch Camera 11 SCH Camera 12 utput 2 Figure 8 27 I O Control The alarm status is displayed in three levels The first level indicates date second indicates time and the third indicates alarm ID Clicking the Reset button will clear the alarm list To initiate an output device click the Enable button highlight an output and then click the Output button The Timer functions the same as inthe PTZ control panel Each user will be given 60 seconds of control time while the supervisor has 999 seconds Clicking the Stop button will stop the operation and turn over the control privilege tothe next user waiting online If you want to enable or disable I O devices to the remote GV System click the Enable Disable UO button For this the remote GV System must grant the privilege first Enable the Enable Remote Control option in Figure 8 5 400 D Remote Viewing 8 3 10 Visual Automation You can remotely change the current status of the electronic device by simply clicking on its image Moreover you can manage the settings of
422. or and change its screen divisions or remain on specific channels when you spot suspicious events 1 On the main screen click ViewLog and select Digital Matrix Channel Lock This dialog box appears Digital Matrix Channel Lock W Lock Channel at Display f Pause Event Popup or Page Scan Drag and Drop Camera Mo to the screen Division 1 12 1314 5 6 7138 9 00120 tht Alt LC 7 Division f Goto Defined Page Paget en zm Figure 11 92 2 Use the Display list to select the monitor to be configured 3 Select Lock Channel at Display to control the specific monitor 4 Select one of the three options Pause Event Popup or Page Scan Suspends alert popup and page scan operations Drag and Drop Camera No to the Screen Division Displays desired camera channels Use the Division list to select the screen divisions Drag and drop the camera numbers to the desired positions on the divisions To clear the assignment drag and drop the C icon to that position Goto Defined Page Displays a specific scan page 5 Click Apply or OK to apply the settings 621 KR Useful Utilities 11 15 GIS Recording GV System can record the video along with GPS data of its own and the connected IP devices With the recorded GPS data you can view the recordings simultaneously with the GPS locations of GV System and connected IP devices on Google Maps Microsoft Virtual Earth OpenStreetMap or self defined maps
423. ord to set up a user for auto login and click OK Startup Auto Login Setup ge Startup Auto Login User ID fae Password em Auto Login in Fullscreen Mode coa Figure 1 40 4 Inthe System Idle Protection dialog box Figure 1 39 select Auto Logout or Switch to Startup Login User if available and then select Supervisor or Supervisor Power User from the drop down list 5 Inthe System Idle Over field type the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which the specified user will be logged in ER Configuring Main System 1 6 3 Auto Start Recording lf the administrator does not press the mouse or press a key within a set period of time the system will automatically start recording 1 In the System ldle Protection dialog box Figure 1 39 select the Auto Monitoring option and select Monitoring All Schedule Monitoring I O Monitoring or Camera Monitoring from the drop down list When Monitoring All is selected both I O Monitoring and Camera Monitoring will be enabled 2 In the System Idle Over field enter the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which the system will start recording Note The feature can monitor keystrokes or mouse clicks even from IR Remote Control and GV Keyboard Di Configuring Main System 1 7 System Log System Log provides historical information that can help you track down events system problems and POS and object counting data This information is being saved ina databas
424. ore convenient tool that allows you to search video files recorded on motion or alarm See 4 2 Object Search Searches and plays back POS events See 4 4 Quick Search No additional software installation is necessary Just play back using your Web browser See Remote Viewing in Chapter 8 Plays back the backup recorded files Provides simple and easy playback functions See 4 8 Single Player 222 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 Playing Back on ViewLog The ViewLog plays back recorded video files without affecting recording There are two ways to launch ViewLog Start VideoLog from the GV folder Windows Start menu Programs On the Main System click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and then select Video Audio Log Or press F10 on the keyboard n b P H d AS A S A Mi Y MEE y q ke RK ik D A E Za Figure 4 1 The ViewLog Window Without further settings you can play back the event by clicking the Play button on Playback Panel Click the View Mode button No 8 Figure 4 1 to switch the current vew mode to a multi channel view Use controls on Playback Panel to view the event inthe way you want Move the slider in Playback Meter No 12 Figure 4 1 forward and backward to navigate video frames To play back multiple events keep pressing CTRL on the keyboard and highlight the desired events on the Video Event List No 6 Figure 4 1 Then click the Play button to play thes
425. ote Viewing 451 D Remote Viewing 3 On the login screen enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 8866 a username and a password Then click Control and select Connect Sc Welcome MsView P 4r Ki a X IP Addri peterliu dipmap com Port 8866 Password SnapShot pathy Connect Cancel Figure 8 67 4 Once the connection is established the live video will appear You can use the scroll key on your smartphone to navigate camera channels se Welcome MsView P Control Figure 8 68 452 D Remote Viewing Playing Back the Recordings To play back the recordings follow these steps 1 Enable these two functions on the WebCam Server A Enable the Run ViewLog Server option on the General tab For details see General Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter B Enable the Mobile function on the Mobile tab and keep the RPB port to be 5511 or modify it if necessary For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 2 Execute GV MSView V2 or GV MSView V3 on your smartphone 3 Click Type and then select RPB see Figure 8 65 If you want to search the recordings within a specific period of time for playback select RPB with time 4 On the Login screen enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 5511 a username and a password Then click Select and click GV DVR to start the connection Welc
426. ote Viewing 8 13 1 Windows PDA GV GView V2 is a remote view application for Microsoft PDA For the supported Windows version see the Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications chart earlier in this chapter When GV GView V2 detects the big screen panel of the mobile phone images from the connected G System will be horizontally rotated for a better view Resolution is set to be CIF by default Installing GV GView 1 To download GV GView V2 2 Click the Download button 3 Consult your PDA user s manual for how to install a program tothe PDA Activating the GV GView V2 Function To allow remote access to the GV System you must enable the Mobile function on the WebCam Server For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 442 D Remote Viewing Connecting to GV System Once GV GView V2 is installed on your PDA you can use it to monitor your GV System Make sure your PDA has wireless LAN adapter properly in place with access to the Internet 1 Execute GV GView V2 on your PDA __ ___zz_ A E M M se Welcome Gye neg Til az ok Gview V2 Figure 8 55 2 Click the luuten located at the lower left corner The login screen appears IP Address peterliu dipmap com Port 2866 User Name 1 zk Password SnapShot Path Clear History CANCEL Figure 8 56 3 Enter the IP address of your GV System port value default value is 8866 a username and a
427. ou marked on video events even after repairing the database check Reserve Never recycle Flag on the Repair Database window before making repairs See Figure 5 8 in Chapter 5 230 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 4 Bookmarking a Frame You can create a bookmark for a video frame and later return to that frame quickly or resume a video from where you bookmarked Creating a Bookmark 1 Click the Pause button at the frame you want to bookmark 2 Right click the frame and select Add to Bookmark The Bookmark Description dialog box appears 1 1480 St LA to m Mark Book Marke Description Toggle Fullscreen F Please key in a description text Minimize Z Fam e e Th L TR Sr D90300 en E l SO DUATIDO SD IA Figure 4 7 3 Type the text for the bookmark label Note By default bookmarked frames are saved at GVxxx Bookmark and are in JPEG format 231 D Playing Back Video Files Viewing a Bookmark 1 Click the Advanced button No 9 Figure 4 1 and select Bookmark The Bookmark window appears Book Mark Camera Camera 1 D List Mode Basic Search Ctri F8 Advanced Search FS C Eok mark Reload Database KS Figure 4 8 2 Inthe Camera drop down list select a desired camera to display its bookmarks or select All to display all the bookmarks 3 To change a bookmark displayed at the front click the desired
428. out asking for ID and Password O Startup and Hide into System Tray GV System appears in the system tray when you launch Windows instead of displaying the system login window BUS 5 45 PM Network WebCam Server Allows connection to WebCam Server at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select WebCam Server Connect to Center V2 Allows connection to Center V2 at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Connect to Center V2 Connect to VSM Allows connection to VSM Server at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Connect to VSM Control Center Server Allows connection to Control Center Server at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 select Control Center Server and select Control Center Service Backup Server Allows connection to Backup Server at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Backup Server Connect to Backup Center Allows connection to Backup Center at system startup Or click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select Backup Center Di Configuring Main System 1 2 7 Customizing Display Settings You can customize the display settings in the Display section of the Startup dialog box Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click Startup Startup General Network Ol WebCam Server
429. output module and pin number for the device Never Recycle Prevents recorded events from being recycled when the recycle threshold is reached Click the Test button to see if the settings have been configured according to your preference If you have set a detection interval the test will only run for the number of seconds you specified To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the settings Start monitoring to run the application Note 1 Events triggered under Mask Filter or Mask Filter Inverse alarm will be recorded to the System Log and can be played back in ViewLog In the System Log the events are recorded as Face Count under the Event column The face counting results will only be saved when Enable Web Report is selected and the GV Web Report is connected 172 EI Video Analysis 3 9 Unattended and Missing Object Detection The Object Monitor program can detect any unattended and or missing object within the camera view by highlighting its location 3 9 1 Detecting Unattended Objects To detect any unattended objects within the camera view follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Video Analysis and select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears 2 Select the desired came
430. ow Camera Number option and then click the finger button To change the color of the camera number indicator on the TV monitor use the Color drop down list to select the desired color 610 1 Useful Utilities DIV 1 16 In the TV Quad Setting window Figure 11 82 there are screen division options You can modify the channel sequence by typing the number directly on each division Click OK or Apply Current TV Setting to apply your configurations Right Arrow Button Sets the channel sequence of each scanned page Click the arrow button to display this dialog box Div 16 Page setting E Page 1 SSES la fa 3 fa Default ES a Zz ER Empty page fe ola fs oe apa fefe Figure 11 84 CJ Screen Division Displays the channel sequence You can modify the sequence by typing the number directly on each division Aa lt gt Buttons Navigates pages Empty page Clears up the channel sequence on the open page 611 11 13 2 Setting Pop up Views KR Useful Utilities The pop up camera views on the screen notify users of the current event whether it is motion or I O devices being triggered You can decide to have pop up cameras on computer screen TV monitor or both together Activating Pop up Views 1 2 Click the Setting button of Camera Popup This dialog box appears more than one TV monitors it can be set with different alert events In the TV Quad Setting window cl
431. p Click Enable to automatically run GV Skype Video Utility at Windows Startup Administrator Password Click Enable to require password to log in and out of GV Skype Video Utility 644 1 Useful Utilities Camera Setting To send camera live view or notification message to Skype accounts upon motion detection expand the Cameras list and select a camera This dialog box appears Settings Push Video bo SKYPE user Gei General Camera Enable amp Camera 1 Alert Interval Push Camera Ss Camera 3 Push Video to SKYPE user e Camera 4 echol23 ye 4 02 Module 1 ER Quad View Send SKYPE Message Enable SEYPE User echol23 wi Alert Interval minutes Message Camera 1 detected motion Cancel Figure 11 201 To Send the Live Vi You can send live view from the selected camera or quad view to a Skype account upon motion 1 Select Enable under Push Video to Skype User 2 Set an Alert Interval to specify the minimum time between each notification 3 Select a desired camera or a quad view from the Push Camera drop down list See To Create a Quad View in this chapter later 4 Use the Push Video to SKYPE user drop down list to select a Skype user to send live view 645 D Useful Utilities Note 1 GV Skype Video Utility can only send camera live view to one Skype account at a time 2 The received camera live view will be displayed in Skype s default resolution lo Cr h View 1 C
432. pact DVR 3 4 Click the Add Host button No 3 Figure 9 1 on the toolbar and select the type of host A new host is added in Host View Right click the created host and select Host Settings This dialog box appears The dialog box varies based on the type of host you select x Location Name New Tork Address Jemap dipmap com Cancel of Cameras Webcam C d Port H of Modules aoe ae Module 1 Data Port 5550 E of Inputs H of Dutputs Audio Port 6550 Figure 9 4 Host Settings Type the remote host s name IP address how many cameras I O modules inputs outputs are installed at the host and port information Then click OK Follow the steps instructed in Creating an E Map File to create an e map file for the remote host 491 D E Map Application 9 2 2 Setting Polygonal Map to Locate a Triggered Device The Polygonal Map function helps you quickly locate the location of a triggered device Draw an area on the map and it will flash when any device within the area is triggered university place Figure 9 5 Polygonal Map To Set Up a Polygonal Map 1 In E Map select a map icon 2 Right click the map icon and select Edit Polygonal Map 3 Click on the map to start drawing a polygonal shape indicated by a yellow dotted line university place Figure 9 6 4 After closing the shape right click the map and select Finish The enclosed area will be colored in blue When a
433. pears from the camera view Note 1 Upto 16 cameras can be configured for this application 2 It is highly recommended not to use Advanced Missing Object Detection and Missing Object Detection together 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 click Advanced Video Analysis and select Advanced Missing Object Detection Setting 2 Select the desired camera s to be configured and click Configure This dialog box appears Advanced Missing Object Detection Y Camera Camera Selection Camera 1 D Definition Define Object EHE 2e Setting Sensitivity 3 Tolerance Time of Alarm sec o Construction Option Cc l Hide reference image setup dialog Test Schedule M Automatically disable alarm sec l Embed alarm region into recorded video F Skip instant light change Invoke Alarm f Output Module FT Never Recycle Figure 3 59 3 Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop down list 4 Click the button to outline the regions on the objects you want to detect To cancel the previously drawn area click the H button 5 Select Sensitivity The higher the value the more sensitive the system is for changes in the camera view 206 El Video Analysis 6 Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows any object missing before an alarm d condition is activated Every time when the system detects changes in the background image you will be prompted for
434. played in the Channel Status Window as shown below Host name Camera name IP Address of the host Bandwidth used for delivering this video Displayed frame rate of the video Status Figure 8 37 The Channel Status wndow 413 D Remote Viewing 8 6 4 Creation of a Host The Multi View allows video streaming from multiple GV Systems and GV IP devices Follow the steps below to create several host accounts for later connection use 1 Click the Edit Host button No 10 Figure 8 35 This dialog box appears Host List Host Informations New Group Host Protection Taipei Hast Name Taipei Device GV DVR system y IP Address 192 168 0 10 User Name Taipei Password EE Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port 6550 HTTP Port Ion Change Password New Delete Export Import Figure 8 38 The Edit Host Window 2 Allcreated hosts are forced to be grouped Click the New button and select Group to create a group first Then click the New button again and select Host to create a host 3 In the Host Name field type a name to identify the host 4 Select a device type for the host 5 Type the IP address or domain name of the host Type a valid username and password to log into the host Modify the default ports if necessary to match the corresponding ports on the host 6 Click the Save button The host will appear in the Host List Figure 8 36 with the given ID name 414 D Remote Viewing 8 6 5
435. plied unless you restart the GV System Reboot Time Specifies the reboot time CJ Restore Last Status The system will resume the last operation after rebooting e g camera recording 3 Apply Startup Settings The system will apply your Startup settings in System Configure section after rebooting Delay for Cancel Reboot When the item is checked a warning message will appear and count down for the specified seconds before the reboot schedule begins Clicking the Cancel button on the prompt will cancel the rebooting Watchdog Reset if Reboot System Suspend and Fail Prior to the Reboot Time if GV System finds any abnormal Windows operation that may hinder the Auto Reboot GV System will instruct a hard reboot on the computer The feature is not available in GV 250 Card Note GV System must already be added to Windows Startup menu only so will the Windows automatically restart GV System after a reboot Also make sure you ve correctly connected a GV video capture card to your motherboard for the hardware watchdog feature ER Configuring Main System 1 2 9 Setting Text Overlay You can align camera name time stamp and triggered input name to different positions for each channel To access this feature click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Text Overlay Setting to display the Text Overlay Setting dialog box and select one Camera to be defined Text Overlay Settin
436. program e g iSCSI Initiator on the computer of GV System for building the connection For this consult the documentation of your storage system 4 When the disk volume can be detected by Windows format the disk volume with Window s Disk Management as well as a lock disk 9 1 Useful Utilities Steps 1 3 may vary depending on the type of storage system Ensure the newly added storage drive can be detected by Windows and be formatted by Disk Management in Computer Management To access the Computer Management window right click the My Computer icon on the desk and select Manage Go down to Storage and select Disk Management Computer Management m Fie Action view Window Help ue 2 GE C Computer Management Local D E E System Tools Basic Healthy Unknown Partition 14 64 G Event Viewer d C Partition Basic Healthy System 14 66 G 2 Shared Folders J D Partition Basic Healthy 105 05 Local Users and Groups JSC Partition Basic Healthy Unknown Partition 14 63 G z Performance Logs and Alert Aa Partition Basic Healthy 5 06 GB 2 Device Manager Storage e Removable Storage cc Disk Management BbDisk 0 A o WO Basic C SC XP D 149 05 GB 14 67 GB FAT 14 65GBFAT 14 65 GB FAT 105 08 GB FATE Online Healthy Systi Healthy Unkr Healthy Unkr Healthy SDisk 1 Bae Basic iSCSI Storage F 5 06 GB 5 06 GB NTFS Online Healthy CD ROM 0 DYD E No Media E Primary partit
437. r smartphone x Welcome SsvievwW3 v48300d SsviewV3 Figure 8 70 2 Click Options and select Live Connect Fs Welcome SsviewV3 v8300d Rpb Rpb with Time Figure 8 71 login username and a password Then click Options and select Connect x SsyiewY3Connect Py peterliu dipmap com o sx E Port Username Password ZZZ Figure 8 72 D Remote Viewing On the Login screen enter the IP address of the GV System port value default value is 8866 a 456 D Remote Viewing 4 Once the connection is established the live video will appear SsviewV3Image Figure 8 73 Quick Connection The IP addresses of connected servers can be stored for quick connection in the future Press the lt and gt buttons on the mobile device to select the desired server for connection Playing Back the Recordings To play back the recordings from the GV System follow these steps 1 Enable these two functions on the WebCam Server A Enable the Run ViewLog Server option on the General tab For details see General Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter B Enable the Mobile function on the Mobile tab and keep the RPB port to be 5511 or modify it if necessary For details see Mobile Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter 2 Execute GV SSView V3 on your smartphone 3 Click Options and then select RPB see Figure 8 71 If you want to search the recordings within
438. r window 3 When you want to log in click the Exit button and select Login as Administrator A valid password is required 10 6 SMS Notification After setting up the SMS Server you will need to connect the GV System to the SMS Server assign mobile phones to receive SMS alert messages and set up the types of events to send alert notification 10 6 1 Connecting GV System to SMS Server To connect the GV System to the SMS Server follow these steps 1 On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and select Send Alerts Approach Setup This dialog box appears Send Alerts Approach Setup wv Send Evert ere b if Default Alert Approach C E Mail f Hotline Setting iw Alternative Alert Approach SMS Account Setting Test Account SH Figure 10 12 Send Alerts Approach Setup 2 Select Send Event Alerts click the Arrow button and select the events to send alert notification 3 Select Alternative Alert Approach to enable sending alerts by SMS messages 919 d Click the Account Setting button This dialog box appears SMS Setup Connection Setup Mobile Setup SMS Option Connection Server IP 127 0 0 1 C Local Login ID GVFAE Password Ke Figure 10 13 SMS Setup Connection Setup Server IP Type the IP address of the SMS Server Server Port Type the server port of the SMS Server or keep it as default 10 Short M
439. ra to record upon input trigger Invoke Alarm Select this option to activate computer alarm when the input is triggered You can select the alarm sound from the drop down list Invoke to Send Alerts Select this option to send out the predefined alert E Mail Hotline SMS when the input is triggered For e mail alerts see E Mail Notification in Chapter 1 for hotline alerts see Hotline Notification in Chapter1 for SMS alerts see Short Message Service in Chapter 10 1st Right Arrow button Appears when E Mail is the predefined alert Click the button to select the camera s to take a snapshot upon input trigger The snapshot will be sent out by E Mail 2nd Right Arrow button Sets the time to delay the activation of assigned alerts E Mail Hotline SMS 315 FJ 1 0 Applications Output Module Triggers the specified output module when the input is activated Use the drop down lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function Right Arrow button Sets the time to delay the activation of the specified output module O Register Input Event This option logs the I O trigger events into System Log Each event is labeled with ID time device name camera or I O input corresponding module of the device and event for later retrieval For details on System Log see System Log in Chapter 1 Note The Delay Time in Invoke to Send Alerts and Output Module allow you time to turn off the input device before the
440. rames in the Moving Object List window The Moving Object List window Frames Double click any frame in the window to play back its video file with the ViewLog or Quick Search player Click the Next Page button for the next page Search Click the button to launch the search window Exit Click the button to close the window Note Every time segment is a 30 minute interval as shown in Record list in Figure 3 23 162 3 6 Automatic Video Snapshots a Video Analysis The Video Snapshot allows the system to continuously take 2 snapshots every second as monitoring starts This function gives you a choice to keep the surveillance images in still images or JPEG format when you don t have enough disk space to store AVI format videos Note After you start monitoring the system will continue to take vdeo snapshots whether there is motion or not 3 6 1 Setting Video Snapshots You can select up to 16 cameras to take vdeo snapshots 4 Click the Configure No 14 Figure 1 2 button select Video Analysis and select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears Select the desired cameras to be configured Click the Configure button This dialog box appears Video Object Setup j Object Index Object Monitor MV Camera Camera 1 D Mask Filter H Storage Available 2 67GB Set Location Iw Recycle M Keep Days 30 Vid
441. ras for the application Click the Configure button The Video Object Setup dialog box Figure 3 20 appears 4 Click the Object Monitor tab This dialog box appears Video Object Setup Object Index Object Monitor Camera Camera H Mask Filter BE HEX Setup Unattended Object y Iw Accept Define Object 2 Save Reference Image Never Recycle 2 iv Embed alarm region into recorded IL A A _ v video Demo Show Reference Image T Live disable alarm region Luminance change detection 3 sensitivity 3 Delay Timefsec 1 Trigger output Invoke Alarm Output Module Schedule Figure 3 33 Object Monitor 173 a Video Analysis In the Camera field select a desired camera for setup Select Unattended Object from the drop down list Click the Accept check box to make other options available Use the Mask Filter function toignore any motion detection within a certain area if necessary Click the Define Object button O o NX o nm 10 Use the mouse to outline the max and min detection regions separately on the screen Every time when finishing an outlining you will be prompted to select Maximum Size or Minimum Size See the illustration below Minimum Size Cancel Figure 3 34 Defining the min and max detection size 11 Click the items of Show Max and Show Min in the lower of the window one by one to check your defined size
442. ress F7 on the keyboard or click the Monitor button No 16 Figure 1 2 and select a camera By default every camera records with the following settings Default Recording Settings Recording Mode Motion Detection Resolution 320 x 240 Codec Geo Mpeg4 When working with the system you will undoubtedly want to change the settings as you go along The buttons on the main screen provide quick access to several popular Main System settings Click any button to see the menus of these settings To change recording mode see Monitor Control in Adjusting Individual Camera later in this chapter To change resolution first you need to set up video source and resolution of your system see Setting Video Source and Resolution later in this chapter and then define the resolution of each camera see Resolution Button in Adjusting Individual Camera later in this chapter To change codec see Recording Code in Adjusting Individual Camera later in this chapter ER Configuring Main System 1 1 4 Playing Back Video You can instantly play back the recorded video of a certain time length without interrupting the monitoring and recording To instantly play back the events of one single channel click on the Camera Name No 2 Figure 1 2 and select the time length To instantly play back the events of all channels click on the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 select Instant Play and select the time length Time l
443. ribed below 1 In the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box Figure 1 61 enable Default Alert Approach select E Mail and click the Setting button This dialog box appears E Mail Mail Setup SMTP Server _ Mail Content E Mail From SS E Mail To Charset Western European Wir e Subject Attach Image Setup Alert Setup Attach po E Mail Alerts Interval EN Min SMTP Mail Server requires authentication SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 SSL Account PO Domain name from DONS Password fo m PO E mail in Text Mode OK Cancel Figure 1 66 2 In the Mail Setup section set up the following fields SMTP Sever Type your mail server s URL address or IP address O E Mail From Type the sender s e mail address E Mail To Type recipients e mail addresses For multiple recipients add a semicolon between each e mail address Charset Select the character set for outgoing e mails Subject Type a subject that comes with the alert message 3 Click the Test Mail Account button to send a test e mail and see whether the setup is correct If the connection attempt fails you may also need to check the settings of SMTP Mail Server requires authentication and SMTP Server described below Di Configuring Main System Other options on the E Mail dialog box Attach Image Setup Select Attach to include up to 6 snapshots inthe e mail The image format and size are selectable from drop down lists Email Alerts S
444. rocess of trying to connect an IP video device to the network Guardian Security Solutions does not and cannot warrant that the DDNS service will be uninterrupted or error free Please read Terms of Service carefully before using the service Besides Guardian Security Solutions you can also obtain the free DDNS service from these providers DynDNS org and No IP com 926 1 Useful Utilities 11 1 1 Installing Dynamic DNS To install Dynamic DNS follow these steps 1 Insert the Software DVD to your computer lt runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Select GV Dynamic DNS Service and follow the on screen instructions 527 11 1 2 Registering Domain Name with DDNS FOR Useful Utilities 1 Goto Windows Start point to Programs select DDNS and then run Dynamic DNS Service The DNS Client dialog box Figure 11 3 appears 2 Click Register The following Dynamic DNS register page appears 3 Type a username The username can be up to 16 characters The username accepts a z 0 9 and but does not accept space or password for confirmation UI as the first character Type a password The password is case sensitive and must be at least 6 characters Re type the 5 In the Word Verification section type the code within the box In this example the code you should enter is 4NCXRC Word verification is not case sensitive DynamicDNS 0
445. roll down the page to click Submit Internet Explorer an Yil X Camera 1 32 1 O Last 10 Video Files RPB DST Rollback Video Size 760x144 e Video Quality ormal e Audio Codec Figure 8 80 463 D Remote Viewing 4 On the camera list click the desired camera to access its live vew and then click Next KE Tinternet Explorer cng Kl d x ef http mtrp0216 dipmap com s ele Figure 8 81 5 The default player is called up and the live video appears Note the players on the mobile phones may be different 00 00 02 00 00 00 Figure 8 82 464 D Remote Viewing Playing Back the Recordings You can play back the recordings on the 3G mobile phone Note that only the videos recorded in the CIF resolution are available for playback To search the recordings of the specific time follow these steps 1 On the Settings page see Figure 8 76 select RPB and click Submit This page appears wm e Internet Explorer e Ys X http peee1932 dipmap com 8 ele Figure 8 83 2 Use the drop down lists to define the specific time for search and then click Submit 3 The event list will display the 10 recordings after the defined time Select the desired recording on the event list for playback To play back the last ten recordings follow these steps 1 Onthe Settings page see Figure 8 76 select Last 10 Video Files and click Submit 2 The event list will display
446. rovided to restrict access to a WebCam server permitting and denying a specified range of IP address to establish the connection Note that only one type of block list can be used at one time 1 Click Configure on the menu bar and select IP White Black List Setup A dialog box prompts for you to selecta host 2 Select the desired WebCam server and click OK This dialog box appears IP White Black List Setup WebCam vi C Enable IP White List 192 168 0 220 S 192 168 0 230 O Enable IP Black List Figure 11 66 3 Select the type of block list you want to use and click Add to define the IP addresses Enable IP White list Allows the defined range of IP addresses to establish the connection O Enable IP Black list Prohibits the defined range of IP addresses from establishing the connection 4 Click OK to apply the settings 993 1 Useful Utilities 11 10 7 General Setup You can set up sound alarm when a user logs in or change the real time graph display of network traffic Click Configure on the menu bar and select General Setup This dialog box appears General Setup User Login User Login Alarm Bandwidth Display Option Background Number of Grid Line Figure 11 67 User Login Alarm Computer alarm sounds on when a user logs in Bandwidth Sets the color of bandwidth wave Grid Line Sets the color of the grid lines of graph Background Sets the background c
447. rtup Domain name from DONS Auto startup when Window s startup A DH Minimize Ul Http Port Contra Center Server Z EI Day definition of report f The previous day Report Keep Days f 24 hours before execution time E Evert Log Settings Event List Auto import T Days Event Log Keep Days 365 EN Log Path D 16W 14801W4utoMetionSettingiLog E Figure 11 69 Startup Auto startup when Windows startup Select this option to start Report Generator automatically at Windows startup Minimize UI Select this option to minimize the Report Generator after it is started Day Definition of Report Define the time period of data to be included in the report The previous day The report is generated on the previous day s data 24 hours before execution time The report is generated on the data from 24 hours before report generation Report Keep Days If you generate reports to the hard disk specify the number of days to keep the report files Up to 30 days of files can be kept To generate reports tothe hard disk see Step 4 in Setting Report Criteria later in this chapter 996 1 Useful Utilities Domain name from DDNS This option will generate URL links in the exported HTML report for remote video playback For this function to work enter the fixed IP address or domain name of the GV System and enable Remote View Log Service on the GV System To obtain a domain name see Dynamic
448. s Input X Click the Arrow buttons to select an Input to set up Select Input Input Name input 1 Apply to all Inputs Latch Trigger Figure 6 2 Name Specifies a name for the input device in the Name field Signal Type Selecta signal type for your input device NO normally open NC normally close or Latch Trigger Clicking the finger button can apply your selection to all input devices For details on Latch Trigger see Latch Trigger later in this chapter Output X Click the Arrow buttons to select an output select Output Output 5 Name Output 1 Force Output Signal Type C C NO e NO Toggle C NO Pulse er e ec CNC C NC Toggle C NIC Pulse Keep Last Toggle Status Figure 6 3 Name Specifies a name for the output device in the Name field Force Output Click to test signal to the selected device Signal Type There are six signal types available N O Normal Open N O Toggle N O Pulse N C Normal Closed N C Toggle and N C Pulse Choose the one that mostly suits the device youre using For Toggle output type the output continues to be triggered until a new input trigger ends the output For Pulse output type the output is triggered for the amount of time you specify in Sec field Keep Last Toggle Status See Keeping Last Toggle Status later in this chapter Note PTZ camera and l O devices cannot be assigned to the same port at the same time 308 FJ 1 0
449. s 12 Click the Done button to finish the defining 13 Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view 14 To set up other options see Other controls in the Video Object Setup window in the section of Detecting Missing Object later in this chapter 15 To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 16 Click the OK button to apply the settings 17 Start camera monitoring for the application When an unattended object appears and remains stationary for 9 seconds its location will be highlighted in live video the selected alarm and output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Unattended Object in System Log for later retrieval 174 EI Video Analysis 3 9 2 Detecting Missing Objects To detect any object missing from the camera view follow the steps below 1 Follow the Step 1 to 4 in the above Detecting Unattended Objects section to display the Video Object Setup dialog box Figure 3 21 In the Camera field select a desired camera for configuration Select Missing Object from the drop down list Check the Accept option to make other options available Click the Define Object button Use the mouse to outline regions on the object s you want to detect lt is recommended to outline 7 a a amp e several regions within the object s to increase detection sensi
450. s A highlighted icon indicates an enabled function From left to right are the wide angle lens dewarping defogging function stabilizer function reconnection to Remote ViewLog A to B Mode auto playing of next events the contrast and brightness function the light enhancement and equalization function the sharpness and smoothness function and the grayscale function Indicates the playback speed x1 represents normal playback speed Indicates the time of the playback video Indicates the date of the playback video Closes or minimizes the ViewLog window Plays repeatedly the set frames AtoB Plays back video frame by frame on real time with smooth playback or with just key frames 224 D Playing Back Video Files Figure 4 2 Function Panel The controls in the Function Panel No Name Description Adds effects tothe images The effect options include Contrast Brightness Light Enhancement Equalization Sharpen Effects Smooth Grayscale Undo to Prev Action Undo All Effects Copy Image to Clipboard Sample and Advanced Video Analysis Defog Stabilizer Wide Angle Lens Dewarping See Adjusting Distorted Views later in this chapter Save a video file as avi or exe format 2 Save As AVI See Merging and Exporting Video later in this chapter Save a video image as bmp jpg gif png or tif format 3 save As Image l See Saving Images later in this chapter 4 Print Specifies various settings for printing Accesses s
451. s You can choose whether to recycle your video files To apply this function follow the steps below 1 2 3 Select a desired video event from Video Event List No 6 Figure 4 1 and then right click it to call up a menu as shown below Video Events The never recycling flag Save Avi Pie Mark Never Recycle The never recycling option BackupiiCErl4 E Delete Crrl C Figure 4 6 Select the Mark Never Recycle option A never recycling flag will appear next tothe video event To disable the never recycling function right click the vdeo event again and select Unmark Never Recycle Unmarking All Never Recycling Flags The above step 3 illustrates how to unmark never recycling flag one by one When you like to unmark all the never recycling flags in certain cameras follow the steps below Shut down ViewLog and Main System if they are running Go to the Windows Start menu select Programs point to the GV folder and then click RepairLog500 exe A valid ID and a password are required When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears selectthe cameras of video files that you want to unmark their never recycling flags Click OK to open the Repair Database dialog box See Figure 5 8 in Chapter 5 Uncheck Reserve Never recycle Flag Click the Use Default Path button to unmark all the never recycling flags Reserving Never Recycling Flags If you like to reserve all the never recycling flags y
452. s For details see Panorama View in Chapter 3 Note this function is only available when an appropriate USB dongle is used Quad View Plays back in a quad layout For details see Quad View in Advanced Settings later in this chapter O Multi View Plays back up to 16 camera recordings For details see Multi View in Advanced Settings later in this chapter 226 D Playing Back Video Files The option of Thumbnail View is disabled while a video file is playing back Wait until the video ends or click the Pause button to make the option available In a thumbnail view a video file is divided into a set of frames The frames are displayed in 25 playback windows shown as follows This helps to locate required frames you may otherwise miss by other vewing methods Ce Aa d a Ko Figure 4 3 227 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 2 Playback Control Buttons Real Time Frame by Frame Just Key Frame Playback Scroll Audio Playback Rewind Stop Home Next Frame A to B Mode Previous Frame Play Pause End Figure 4 4 By default the ViewLog is set to play back video in real time mode To change playback modes find the button on the Playback Control Panel Frame by Frame without audio Plays back video frame by frame without audio This method delays playback depending on bandwidth and computer performance but all video frames are fully played back When the
453. s Version motion detection English Select windows for motion detection Ignore motion detection for defined region Decode all frames upon motion detection Define Detect Region yn Define the detect region y Maximum number of motion detection regions has been re Multilingual Text Seleccionar ventanas para deteccion de movimiento Ingorar detecci n de movimento en Regi n definida Decodificar todos los fotogramas sobre detecci n de movi Definir la Regi n de Detecci n yn Definir la Regi n de Se alcanz el n mero m ximo de regiones de detecci n d KOR Useful Utilities In the Search field type all or part of the text in English or the target language and click Search Figure 11 115 Note E 2 8 9 The search is case sensitive Before making any revision click Tools and select Revision Note to read the revision instructions Double click the text you want to revise This dialog box appears Stein Define the maximun and minimum size of objects for motion detection SS definir el m ximo y m nimo tama o de objetos para la Detecci n de Movimiento Figure 11 116 Revise the translated text and click OK Tip The text may contain symbols such as d or n that instruct the application to perform certain functions Be careful not to change the symbols in the translated text 639 To apply the revised text l
454. s and also set the recording mode to be Motion Detect 3 Click the Arrow button on the right of Sensitivity and select Motion Detection Associated Group This dialog box appears Motion Detection 5 Hue 128 Defi Check All tivity l Uncheck All Sen E we as D Noise Tolerance ES Mask Fitter i H gt Cancel Fi Motion Detection Associated Group Figure 1 30 Di Configuring Main System 4 Select the camera channels you wish to be associated with the current camera In this example Camera 1 is being configured and it cannot be selected so it is grayed out Cameras 2 and 3 are selected to be associated with Camera 1 5 Click OK to apply the settings From the example Figure 1 30 whenever Camera 2 or 3 starts recording Camera 1 will also begin recording Di Configuring Main System 1 43 Daylight Saving Time Recording The GV System can automatically adjust to Daylight Saving Time DST To enable the DST function click Windows Start button click Control Panel click Date and Time click the Time Zone tab select a time zone of your location and then select Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Date and Time Properties Date amp Time Time Zone Internet Time Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Figure 1 31 In System Log the DST recordings can be identified in the D S T Rollback column Ml Live Log Browser Recycle Log 10 26
455. s detected Click the button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number Never Recycle Prevents the system from recycling the event files of scene change when the recycle threshold is reached 4 You can click Test to test your settings If the scene change cannot be detected increase Sensitivity value to increase system sensitivity to changes in the camera view 5 To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter 6 Click OK to apply the settings 7 Start monitoring to run the application When a scene change is detected in the camera view for the specified time its location will be highlighted in live video the selected alarm or output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Advanced Scene Change in System Log for later retrieval 201 EI Video Analysis If you do not select Automatically Disable Alarm you can stop all types of triggered alerts by this step Right click on the camera image which has a flashing box indicating a triggered alert select Camera select Advanced Scene Change Detection and select either Reset Background Model or Reset Alert Reser Background Model Rebuilds the reference image and resets the triggered alert The replaced reference image will be used as the base image for comparison with images on the camera view to detect
456. s function is limited to broadband users only 8 6 1 Installation of Multi View You can install the Multi View over the Internet or from the Software DVD The following is an example of installing and running the Multi View over the Internet 1 Onthe left panel of the Single View page Figure 8 20 select DMMultiView and select the desired resolution The first time user will be prompted to specify a folder to install the Multi View program When the installation is complete the Login page appears Je Login Please key in Username and password Device El Gv DVR system User Name h Password Forget Password Change Password Ok Cancel MultiView support 1024768 or higher resolution screen and version 5 4 or later Figure 8 34 2 Type the login User Name and Password of the GV System 3 Click OK The Multi View window appears 409 D Remote Viewing gt a 19 18 Hd Bie Auto Seafch Ew 1 Camera 1 E Autnenication Host ele cerca 2 6006 i SO E 09007 LY 15 IP Ghd alt Figure 8 35 The Multi View Window The controls in the Multi View No Name 1 Monitoring Window 2 Host List 3 Auto Search 4 Show Camera Menu 5 PTZ Control 6 WO Control 7 Channel Status 8 ViewLog Description Displays live video Right clicking on live video allows you to instantly access some useful functions Selecting Resolution displays a resolution indicator at th
457. sage will pop up to notify that Microsoft iSCSI Initiator cannot be installed because Windows 7 comes with built in SCSI Initiator You can simply ignore the message and proceed with installation 983 11 9 3 Performing Queries On the iSCSI tab you can search events or log data stored on the connected storage system This feature shares the same GUI and functions with the Event List Query function on WebCam Server For details see Event List Query in Chapter 8 CH GeoBackupViewer SCSI Tab lt gt iscst toca Miewlog Local El Host list TEST68 A2564280 TEST68 A256A280 33 Monitor Log query E Monitor Event Type Device Information Note EE Query System Ir du lu a Ys Ger Rollback Login 2010 08 09 00 00 01 Counter 2010 08 1 8 23 59 5 POS Chart Tt D Export ID Event Type Device Information Note DST Rollback 1 Motion Camera 5 6 17 2010 12 00 13 AM 2 Motion Camera 8 8 17 2010 12 00 24 AM Motion Camera 7 6 17 2010 12 00 41 AM 4 Motion Camera 23 8 17 2010 12 00 43 AM Figure 11 59 084 11 9 4 Viewing the Event Files On the ViewLog tab you can retrieve the recordings from the storage system and play video back ViewLog tab it W TESTIZAPC 213 List of available hosts cameras and dates Event List Playback Window Right clicking the playback window can change the play mode and create special effects when you a E LL E 2 Z 214 ma 2007 12 28 im 2008 01 02 150 31
458. se button No 3 Figure 8 19 on top of the Single View viewer To change the pages of the control panel click the Menu button No 2 Figure 8 19 You can also use the right and left arrow buttons on the panel to change the pages The functions on the control panel Name Information Video Audio Preset Go I O Control Alarm Notify Camera Adjustment POS W iegand People Count Description Displays the current version local time host time and number of channels currently accessing WebCam Displays the current video codec resolution and data rate Displays audio data rates when the microphone and speaker devices are enabled Allows you to remotely move the PTZ tothe preset points Provides a graphic display of the input and output devices from the GV System Displays the captured images by sensor triggers and or motion detection See Alarm Notification later Allows you to remotely adjust image quality by moving the slider to the desired values Allows you to view POS transactions or cardholder data along with live video H the monitoring is activated on the GV System double clicking any transaction items or cardholder data can have an instant playback Allows you to view the counts of Object Counting along with live vew Once the counts are logged into the GV System In and Out counts will become zero and the system will start counting those numbers again 391 D Remote Viewing 8 3 2 Server List You c
459. see the Video Event List or Line Mode to see the Event Timeline List Mode ll Select a camera from the drop down list 2 Click the date tree to see video events recorded on that day 3 To choose what information to display in the Video Event List or to search by event types or a POS item select one of the following display options from the drop down list D Camera 1 x H 16 14 16 8 16 47 23 O 16 49 23 Figure 4 12 235 D Playing Back Video Files Event Only Lists the video events only Event Total Frame Lists the vdeo events and their total number of frames Event Total Time Lists the vdeo events and their total time length Event Total Size Lists the vdeo events and their total file size Never Recycle Events Lists the never recycle video events only Monitor Table Lists the types of vdeo events selected in MDB filter See the section below on how to set up the MDB filter POS Table Lists the video events with the item specified in MDB filter for each POS device See the section below on how to set up the MDB filter Line Mode gt gt 10 00 00 10 59 59 Display Audio Information Iw Display MDB Information D Figure 4 13 1 To see video events on a particular day click the date tree 2 Move the mouse pointer on the desired blue block of that camera and right click it to have the sub T
460. select the desired panorama set from the list This window appears Panorama 3 Figure 3 50 Panorama View Controls Right click the panorama view to have these options Snapshot Save the current panorama view as an image file Blending Make the two images smoothly blended together If this is not set there can be harsh edges in the panorama Refresh Rate When the panorama view is enabled the system load will increase Change the refresh rate for the panorama images to optimize system performance The refresh rate is from Speed 1 Slow to Speed 5 Fast PIP View Move the navigation box around to have a close up view of the selected area See Picture in Picture View in Chapter 1 PAP View Specify up to 7 close up views by drawing navigation boxes on the panorama view see Picture and Picture View in Chapter 1 188 a Video Analysis 3 13 Video Defogging Smoky environments and bad weather such as rain snow or fog all affect image quality and reduce scene visibility This feature helps to enhance image quality for live viewing Note This function takes high CPU and memory usage Make sure at least 1 GB of RAM is installed on your system 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Advanced Video Analysis click Defog Setting select up to 32 cameras to be configured and then click the Configure button This dialog box appears Defog Setup Iw Enable sample 1 ai Enhanced
461. ses a TCP port for data streaming from the IP camera RTSP over UDP The RTSP protocol uses an UDP port for data streaming from the IP camera 124 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 6 On the RTSP Command dialog box enter the RTSP link address For the RTSP command consult the documentation of your IP camera For instance For an AXIS IP camera enter RTSP lt IP of the IP camera gt lt codec gt media amp For a HIKVISION IP camera enter RTSP usernam e password lt IP of the IP Camera gt 7 Click OK The IP camera is added to the list 125 2 Hybrid and NVR Solution 2 8 ONVIF amp PSIA Connection The GV System is compatible with all other IP vdeo devices using ONVIF and PSIA standards The ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum specification and PSIA Physical Security Interoperability Alliance specification are global standards created to ensure network video products from different manufacturers are compatible with each other 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Camera Install and select IP Camera Install 2 Click Add Camera and type the camera s Server IP Username and Password 3 From the Brand drop down list select Protocol 4 From the Device drop down list select ONVIF or PSIA according to your camera s compatibility Select either one if the camera supports both standards Select Brand Server F HTTP Port Usernam
462. ses or is inside the defined region the alarm can be activated for warning To set the intrusion alarm click the Alarm tab Counter Alarm 1 In the Choose Camera section select a camera from the drop down list for setup 2 Select Enable Setting and define the targeted objects using the options below Choose Camera Camera 3 D Setting 4 Iw Enable Setting C Define Detection Zones RS HI Define Object Size ol a Define Image Depth vvith Depth D Test Count sensitivity 3 1 i 1 1 Live Te st Alarm Mode 1 l 2 z Option Y Show Alarm Regions Iw Invoke Alarm l Skip Frame 2 M Output Module Schedule Never Recycle Figure 3 20 Define Detection Zones See Step 2 in Object Counting earlier in this chapter Define Objet Size See Step 2 in Object Counting earlier in this chapter Mod 1 l Pin 1 Cancel Define Image Depth If the objects will be moving toward or away from the camera along a path a hallway for example they will appear larger when closer to the camera and vice versa You can select With Depth to define different object size according to proximity to the camera A line A A appears a Place the line along the path where the objects will be moving by dragging the line The larger icon indicates the point closer to the camera and the smaller icon indicates the point farther away from the camera b Select Define Object Size Cli
463. sions Only TV 1 can support screen divisions up to 16 3 Screen Division and TV 2 to TV 5 supports 1 or 4 screen divisions 4 Channel Menu Displays the desired channel for single view 5 Exit Closes the TV Quad Panel 6 Previous Page Scans the previous page 7 Next Page Scans the next page 8 Settings Displays the TV Quad Setting window 9 Switch Displays or hides the channel menu After single view click this button to return to the first scanned page or 10 Zoom Esc return to the last channel when the screen division is setto 1 Note If the DSP Spot Monitor function is enabled at the same time with the Quad Spot Monitors the TV Out button has two options Spot Monitor Panel and TV Quad Panel Select the desired panel to be displayed on the screen 613 KR Useful Utilities 11 14 Digital Matrix To create more screen space to display multiple channels such as 32 channels Digital Matrix is thus introduced to provide a way to vew and manage up to 8 monitor displays The monitor of the computer where you configure the settings and control is called the primary monitor and up to 7 additional monitors can be connected with Additional graphic cards are required to install multiple monitors Most graphic cards now support dual monitors at least To connect up to 8 monitors you may need 4 graphic cards installed in the computer of GV System The Digital Matrix includes these features Live view You can set differe
464. sletzlelalwlulveimluaielel EZ 25 R Figure 3 8 The outlined area in the Dialog window is magnified on the main screen 2 In the Zoom In Type field select Fixed Camera In the Camera field select the assigned camera view for the stationary camera 4 Use the mouse to outline a desired area in the Dialog window lt will be magnified on the main screen When the specified idle time of zooming is up PTZ will go back for tracking If you want to stop the zooming function before the specified idle time click the Back to Tracking button in the bottom of the Zoom In Dialog window Then PTZ will go back to tracking instantly 142 EI Video Analysis 3 1 2 Object Zooming lf only one PTZ camera is available without the stationary camera you can simply apply it for the object zooming function The feature allows you to configure up to 4 critical vews for instant monitoring and zooming Setting up a PTZ Camera Before configuring the Object Zooming function first configure the PTZ device Refer to Setting up a PTZ Camera in Object Tracking earlier in this chapter Setting up Object Zooming After the above PTZ setup go back to the menu bar 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application and select Object Tracking Setup to display the Object Tracking Config dialog box Then click the Zoom in Object tab in the upper part to display the following dialog box Note
465. speed and dramatically increase compression rate but reduce image quality Di Configuring Main System Inter frame threshold Raising the value will improve compression speed and rate but reduce image quality slightly Max key frame interval Raising the value will extend the duration between key frames and increase compression rate but reduce image quality slightly Compression speed remains the same Evaluation Encode size Click to calculate the encoding size based on your encoding settings see Setting above and assigned video clip select PTZ dome or street from the drop down list Click the Stop tab to stop the evaluation Encode speed Click to calculate the frame rate based on the encoding settings see Setting above and assigned video clip select PTZ dome or street from the drop down list ER Configuring Main System 1 2 6 Customizing Startup Settings The Startup dialog box allows you to set the system to enable selected features at system startup To access the Startup dialog box click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure and click Startup Startup Network O WebCam Server Monitor All O Connect to CenterV2 5 Connect to VSM Limit Port 16 O Control Center Server Startup Auto Login P Cl Backup Server l Connect to Backup Center Startup and Hide into System Tray Display Default Screen Division Panel Resolution MiniView for
466. ss Camera Camera2 Camera3 Camerad Camera Camera2 Camera Camera2 Camera Camera2 Camera Camera10 Camera Camera12 Camera2 Camera Camerad Camera5 Camerab Camera Cameras Camera Camera Camera 192 168 1 21 192 168 1 21 192 168 1 21 192 168 1 232 192 168 1 232 192 168 3 235 192 168 3 235 192 168 1 115 192 168 1 115 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 50 192 168 2 117 192 168 3 154 Mac Address 0013E2019A50 0013E2019450 0013E2019A50 0013E2019450 0013E201033F 0013E201033F 0013E2012BBE 0013E2012BBE 0013E2012F22 0013E2012F22 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 00261844188F 000C6E34440C 0013E201FC5C A EA E Ak Dispatch Patiern OO 4 OO P 0h Figure 11 102 The buttons in the Dispatch Panel toolbar No Name 1 Add 2 Delete 3 Delete Selection 4 Clear All 5 Export Description Adds a new tab to create another set of IP camera settings Deletes the selected tab Deletes the selected IP camera from the Dispatch Pattern section Clears all IP cameras in the selected tab Exports the IP camera mapping settings To map IP cameras to the channels of GV System 1 Dispatch Pattern section Drag one or multiple IP devices from the
467. stalled with Skype GV Compact DVR Computer installed with e GeoVision Skype Video Utility Analog Camera e GV System e Skype S PC installed with Skype Third party IP devices Figure 11 118 Note Audio function is not supported in GV Skype Video Utility 642 1 Useful Utilities 11 20 1 Installing GV Skype Video Utility 1 Insert the Software DVD to your computer lt runs automatically and a window appears 2 Click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility 3 Select GV Skype Video Utility and follow the on screen instructions Note Before running the utility make sure you have logged in your Skype account and GV System 4 Double click the GV Skype Video Utility exe icon on the desktop The utility begins to connect to Skype 5 Adialog box appears on your Skype Click Allow access lt GV Skype Video Utility exe wants to use Skype Allow access Deny access Skype Home Profile Figure 11 119 After connected to Skype successfully the GV Skype Video Utility will minimize to system tray 643 KOR Useful Utilities 11 20 2 Setting Up Notifications Upon Motion or I O Trigger General Setting 1 Right click the GV Skype Video Utility icon Settings This dialog box appears sy Add to Startup GL Cameras cpa RIO Enable ae Module 1 F Input 1 Administrator Password Enable Figure 11 200 2 The General setting page offers the following options Add to Startu
468. startup For details see Setting up Mode Schedule below Layout Show Host Name Displays the host name of each I O device on the Advanced I O List Use User defined Text Allows you to modify the text of Alarm Level Figure 6 21 327 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 6 4 Setting Up Mode Schedule The Mode Schedule allows you to monitor different I O cascade configurations at different time For example you may want l O cascade triggers one way during business hours and another way for non business hours Modes can be switched automatically at a scheduled time Creating a Mode 1 Click the Mode drop down list No 7 Figure 6 17 and select More Edit This dialog box appears Advanced 1 0 Modes Advanced NO Settings Newhlode 1 Cancel Add Dielete Rename Copy Figure 6 23 Click Add and name the created mode You can create up to 100 modes You can also apply the settings of the existed mode to the newly created mode Click Copy and select from Default to create a mode of default settings or select from selected Mode to create a mode using the settings of the previously created mode 4 Click Save to return to the panel 5 Select the created mode from the Mode drop down list and create the groups inthe Advanced I O List For details see Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers earlier in this chapter 328 FJ 1 0 Applications Creating a Mode Schedule Define the times and days you like the panel to switch mod
469. stopped automatically after 15 minutes For this problem please complete the setup of Center V2 schedule or clear the Center V2 option ER Configuring Main System 1 9 Schedule Center The Schedule Center allows you to set up a schedule to automatically compact video events merge video events and back up the system settings 1 9 1 Compacting Video Events The Video Compacting feature helps you to save storage space by extracting key frames from the recorded files After the extraction the recorded files will be composed of key frames only This can significantly reduce the file size The Video Compacting action is enabled on a specific weekly schedule Note 1 The audio files cannot be compacted 2 Ifafile is in playback when it is supposed to be compacted the compacting will not occur The compacting will be started the next time when the GV System is scheduled to compact video files 3 Compacting the recorded files to key frames only will affect the smoothness of the playback but will not result in data loss since key frame contains the complete image and only the intermediate frames between key frames are deleted Setting up a Compacting Schedule 1 Click the Schedule button select Schedule Center and select Compacting Video Events Schedule Center o type Ze Merging Video Events Fast Backup and Restore li Setting YSM Schedule Figure 1 52 ER Configuring Main System 2 Click Add schedule
470. sure PTZ Device Setup inthe PTZ Control section of the System Configure dialog box is selected For local applications see Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels and PTZ Automation later For remote applications this option will let you control PTZ cameras through the WebCam or Center V2 server 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories select PTZ Device and select Camera Mapping PTZ Dome This dialog box appears Camera Mapping Setup Camera Camera 1 Mame Camera Device Samsung SPD 33001 Kz Address Addr 1 og Idle over DU ser f Auto Auto Pan f Preset Mut Position Tour f Tour Schedule cancel Figure 1 74 Camera Mapping Setup 2 Select a camera channel from the Camera drop down list 3 Select the PTZ model connected to the selected channel from the Device drop down list 4 lf youhave two identical PTZ cameras set inthe system you may use the Address drop down list to choose the one with the correct address Up to 64 addresses can be supported 5 For the PTZ Inactivity settings see PTZ Idle Protection later 6 Click OK to apply the settings ER Configuring Main System 1 11 2 PTZ Idle Protection When the PTZ remains stationary for a certain time the PTZ can automatically activate the scan mode move to the designated preset point or start the preset tour 1 In the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box Figure 1 74 select PTZ Inactivity
471. t Database Location The Event Database consists of the vdeo and audio db files that are used for the Video Event List By default they are saved at the C GV folder Follow the steps below to change the storage location 1 Click the Set Location button Figure 1 6 and select Database Folder 2 Click the Select Files button to specify a new storage path Setting the Video Storage Location You can create the maximum of 16 storage groups with different storage locations keep days and recycle sizes to store video files 1 Click the Set Location button and select Storage Group Folder This dialog box appears Add Log Location 3 Storage 1 Camera of Selected Storage gt 3 Storage 2 Iw 1 Y 5 mg 43 3 Storage 3 3 Storage 4 3 Storage 5 il si Gu ris 3 Storage 6 3 Storage wv 2 Iv 6 w 4 w H IS G size Y CiDocuments and SettingsiAll UsersiDocum 19 69 GB v Keep Days 1 999 30 SE Figure 1 7 2 Click the Add Storage Group icon to add a storage group The first storage group is created by default 3 Select the cameras to be contained in the new storage group Note one camera can only be added to one storage group 4 Select the Keep Days option and specify the number of days to keep the video files in storage 5 Click the Add New Path icon ES to specify the storage location in a hard drive which is not used for other storage groups 6 Click OK Note iP Di Configuring Main System lf t
472. t GY GIS Server Camera Source D Password E Camera 1 IP Device C Camera 2 IP Device C Camera 3 IP Device C Camera 4 IP Device C Camera 5 IP Device C Camera 6 IP Device C Camera 7 IP Device C Camera 8 IP Device C Camera 9 IP Device C Camera 10 IP Device C Camera 11 IP Device C Camera12 IP Device C Camera 13 IP Device C Camera 14 IP Device Cancel Figure 11 98 3 In the GPS Data Source Selection section select GPS Receiver 4 In the Connection Information section type the IP address of GV GIS Keep the default port value of 3356 or modify it if necessary 5 In the Account for GPS Receiver to Connect GV GIS Server section type login ID and password already created on GV GIS for GV System 6 Click OK 628 1 Useful Utilities 7 To create connection to other GV GIS stations double click 2 to 4 columns on the GV GIS Client window and configure the connection information by following above steps 8 To start connecting to GV GIS click the button The GPS data of GV System will be sent to GV GIS Sending GPS Data of both GV System and Connected IP Devices You can not only send the GPS data of GV System to the GV GIS station but also those of connected IP devices On the GV GIS station the Mobile Host accounts for GV System and IP devices need to be created individually in advance 1 To allow the remote access from GV GIS to GV System enable Control Center Server from the Network button
473. t Span 1 specify a period of time and select a camera behavior to be activated during the defined time period 3 Set another span 4 If you want to apply a different setting to weekends select Weekend Apply and select a camera behavior And define whether the weekend includes Saturday or not 5 Click OK to apply the settings Note It is required to set more than one span so that a specified camera behavior will only run in the defined time frame Otherwise you can select the Auto Preset or Multi Position Tour option see Figure 1 71 to configure the idle protection Di Configuring Main System 1 11 3 Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels The function allows the corresponding PTZ control panels to be called up automatically when you switch to different PTZ camera screens To enable the function follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories select PTZ Device and then select Auto PTZ Panel Switch The Camera Mapping Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the corresponding camera channel device model and hardware address for each PTZ camera For details see Mapping PTZ Camera earlier 3 Click OK When you change the channel the corresponding PTZ control panel will appear on the screen ER Configuring Main System 1114 PTZ Automation Other than the PTZ control panel you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image ES TW Loa 1114 E ER DR ei Visual PTZ Con
474. t Te EE ODJOCU EES Adv nced Log BrOW SOR EE e EH EE e QUICK SM EE EE EE 4A d QUENY E IN EE 4 4 2 Advanced Search Settings ocoociccnonncccoccococonnnnncoconononcononononaronnnnnnos Address et 4 5951 Creating lt a Host Account dn e E RETTEN 223 226 228 230 231 233 238 245 246 247 249 251 252 253 255 256 264 267 269 271 2 3 274 275 2 5 2 6 6 3 Advanced VO Applications ii 314 6 3 1 Setting Up Actions Upon Input Trgoger e B15 4 6 3 Retrieving Images of Object Index 282 4 04 TACSUMING BIKUD EE EL ale UE OCT EE 4 7 1 Single Player Window A QO4 4 9 GPS Tracks Playback eege 49 Touch Screen SUPDO sica 200 4 10 Fast Key Feiert a LOS AAT SPE ONE EE Backup Deletion and Repair nenne 291 5 1 Backing Up Log Dita aid 29 5 2 Backing Up Recorded files eebe ee eege 209 5 3 Splitting Backup Files onto Multiple DISCS ENEE ENEE ENER unn 296 5 3 1 Excluding the Player in the Backup Files A 296 5 3 2 Including the Player inthe Backup Files o oo cooiocnionocccocnccooo 298 5 4 Deleting Recorded FileS ccccscccssseerssseceesrseesnscsearseseerscseersssesesstestsaesssasasses 299 5 5 Repairing Damaged File Paths occononiconnciionmaococonorocarararonoranonnananonanarananararararara OO 5 6 Repairing Damaged Video Files uk NEEN REENEN ENER NEEN EE un unn OOO I O Applications nee K KK KKK KKK KKK nenn GOO 0 1 VO Device SCD 30 6k e Bi naler o OO 6 1 2 Keeping Last
475. t allow experienced users to adjust the encoding process For details see Geo Moeg4 Advanced Settings later in this chapter Geo H264 Provides a much smaller compressed file size than other available codec without compromising the image quality Apply Advanced Codec Setting Enable Apply Advanced Codec Setting and click the El button To use standard codec in recording select Standard Format in the General tab and the standard format of the selected recording codec will be applied See Geo Moeg4 Advanced Settings later in this chapter The Advanced Codec Setup button also includes the function of noise detection See Noise Detection to Reduce File Size later in this chapter Note To set the recording quality and codec of IP cameras refer to P Channel Setup in Chapter 2 Di Configuring Main System Motion Detection Apply to all cameras Adjust Sensitivity Level 1 10 Ki Motion Detection 1 Sensitivity EL Activate Noise Tolerance amp Motion Detection Associated Group Mask Fiter GRE Clear mask Set mask color L Cut mask Add 9 Figure 1 10 Sensitivity There are 10 levels of sensitivity for motion detection The default value is set to 9 The higher the value the more sensitive the system is to the motion Click the Arrow button to access the two options below L Noise Tolerance This function reduces false alarms and unwanted recordings caused by weather or light changes without changing vid
476. tails see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the setting Enable monitoring to start intrusion detection When the intrusion event is detected the configured computer alarm or output device will be activated and the event will be recorded as Intruder in System Log for later retrieval More options in the Alarm dialog box Show Alarm Region Displays the drawn lines on the preview image Never Recycle When the option is selected the alarm triggered events will not be recycled when recycle threshold is reached 157 El Video Analysis 3 5 Object Index The Object Index feature allows you to view the very first frame of a continuous movement in a video stream With Live Object Index you may view the most recent 50 frames captured With Object Index Search you may easily locate a desired event and instantly play it back by double clicking on the image frame 3 5 1 Setting Object Index You can select up to 16 cameras to view live video frames 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Video Analysis and then select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras for the application 3 Click the Configure button The Video Object Setup window appears Video Object Setup cal Object Index Object Monitor M Camera Camera 1 Mask Filter ee Storage Available 45 41GB SetLocatio
477. tarting the Authentication Server Network Setting Server Port The default port number is 3663 To use UPnP for automatic port configuration to your router click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 8 Automatic Failover Support You can configure another two Authentication Servers in case of the primary Authentication Server failure Once the primary server fails the second or the third server will take over the connection from clients and provide uninterrupted services Note the settings of Authorized ID and Authorized Password on the failover server must match those of the primary server To set up the failover server you can use the Export Account function inthe Exit button 949 1 Useful Utilities Note Once the primary Authentication Server is ready to resume the services it is required to close the failover Authentication Server so the connection from clients can move back to the primary Security Setting Enhance network security Enhances network security on Authentication Server Note after you enable the option the client GV System of version 7 or earlier cannot connect to the Authentication Server Enable IP White List Click Edit to create a list of IP addresses allowed to connect to Authentication Server Server Setting Auto start service upon server startup Starts automatically the service when Windows starts Notify when DVR disconnected from server Notifies t
478. tem settings and have only limited access to certain functions Click OK to add the user 5 If you want to enable the guest account click Guest and clear the selection for Account is disabled Guests are only allowed to view videos To edit an exiting user account This feature is only available for supervisors 1 Selecta user from the user list to display its properties Or right click on any of the user levels User PowerUser Supervisor and then select Find Specific Account for quick search A valid password is required to edit a supervisor 2 Edit the properties as required Check the Account Is Disabled option if you wish to disable this user You may also find these options inthe dialog box Expire in xx day s The account will expire and be disabled automatically after a set number of days The number you set will count down automatically Specify the number between 1 and 9999 User cannot change password The user is not allowed to change the set password Di Configuring Main System Force Password change atthe first logon The user must change the password when logging in first time Disable user if do not login after xx day s When the user does not log in the system after a set number of days its account will be disabled automatically Export this ID for IR Remote Control Allows you to log into the system by using the GV Keyboard instead of using the general keyboard and mouse For details see GV Ke
479. ter right click the image select Mega Pixel Setting and then select Enable Add Focus Area Mode ER Configuring Main System 1 16 Shortcuts You can create up to 20 shortcuts on the main screen to a program or file 1 Run Fast Backup amp Restore Main System from the Windows Start menu The Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System window appears 2 Click the Customize Logo and Button button select DVR and then select User Define Setting This dialog box appears User define Application Parameter Figure 1 85 3 Click the Add button This dialog box appears Add New Item Application Painter File WMD MV sy stema2 imspaint exe Se Parameter To modify images coa Figure 1 86 Application Names the desired application to be pointed to File Assigns the path to the desired application Parameter Sets the command information for the application 4 Click OK to save all the configurations 5 Run the Main System The shortcut button appears ER Configuring Main System 1 17 Touch Screen Support The GV System offers three types of control panels with touch screen support PTZ Control Panel I O Control Panel and Touch Screen Panel 1 17 1 PTZ and I O Control Panel This feature gives you the option of a large PTZ and l O control panel with touch screen support To open the panel click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories select PTZ Device select PTZ IO P
480. ter 3 5 To enable object tracking right click the fisheye image select Fisheye Option select 360 Object Tracking and select Tracking 293 D Playing Back Video Files 6 Click the Play button to see object tracking applied to the video Figure 4 30 204 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 14 Event Search for Limit The supervisor can follow the steps below to place a search limit for individual accounts 1 Onthe Main System click the Configure button select System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit The Password Setup dialog box appears 2 Select a Power User or a User account and click the ViewLog tab Guest User PowerUser ID z Disable Account Expire in days 2 Password PP Hint A i Level PowerUser User cannot change password Force password change at next login Disable account if user does not log in after days Export this ID for IR Remote Control GV Keyboard M Send password by E mail lv Execute EventLog Camera Evertlog Y Export AVI S V Delete EventLog 23 a Y MV Browse System Log Vis V9 Iv 13 Y Mark UnMark Never Recycle W266 jw 10l 14 Backup EventLog V3 MV 7h 16 15 Kerd an A A AA e Gs Enable duration setting for event search iv 4 lv 8 Iv 12M 16 Audio EventLog 2 y CH 1 5 vw 9 v 13 Iv 2 Iv E Iv 10 v4 14 v3 iv 7 Iv Iw 15 Iv 4 jw 8 Iv 12 v 16 New ZE EEN Multicam Viewlog Webcam Fast Backup and Restore Con
481. ter is installed the backup feature provides the direct burn function It allows you to directly burn the files onto CD DVD without the need to assign the burning software and pasting the backup files tothe CDR Writer program x If Nero software of version 7 0 or later is installed the backup feature allows you to directly burn the files to blue ray media Using OS Burning This option is only available when you use Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 It burns files using the inbuilt software of the operation system onto the DVD CD or blue ray disc Note that your hard disk needs at least 1 G buffer space Media Information This section indicates free and used space on CD DVD media or the local disk 3 Click the Add Time Frame button to define a time period for backup Select Backup Time Time Period 2 Select Camera s Camera 1 Start Time 21 2010 S 00 00 00 Y Camera 2 wi Camera 3 End Time 7 21 2010 e S 23 59 59 Camera 4 wi Camera 5 Information Database Files Object Index Files Only Never Recycle Event ee hi E Include daylight saving rollback events Book Mark Files Status Search End Total Event Total MDB Total Object Index Total Book Mark Used Size o _ Cancel Video Audio Event Figure 5 3 Time Period Specify the time periods for backup Select Camera s Click to select the camera s for backup The number of video and audio files of
482. ternet You can search the log data as well as view edit and save the recordings at the local computer Backup Viewer GV System Backup Server Read only um H Read Write Storage System 11 9 1 Usage Requirements You must meet the following requirements when building the Backup Viewer and creating the account on the storage system O The Backup Viewer is not appropriate to be installed on the computer of Backup Server GV System due to node host name conflict Create an account of Read Only on the storage system for Backup Viewer Build the connection between the storage system and Backup Viewer Certain storage systems may require you to install and configure additional program e g iSCSI Initiator on the computer of Backup Viewer for building the connection Consult the documentation of the storage system for building connection with another computer 982 1 Useful Utilities 11 9 2 Starting Backup Viewer Before you start Backup Viewer ensure to meet the usage requirements mentioned earlier 1 Insert the Software DVD click Install Guardian Security Solutions Free Utility select GV Backup Viewer and follow the onscreen instructions 2 Run Backup Viewer The Backup Viewer window Figure 11 59 appears 3 Click the Connect button on the toolbar to enable connecting Backup Viewer to the storage system Note When installing Backup Viewer on Windows 7 using Typical Installation a mes
483. th the Picture and Picture PAP view you can create a split vdeo effect with multiple close up views on the image A total of 7 close up views can be defined This function is useful for megapixel resolution that provides clear detailed images of the surveillance area 1 Click the desired camera name on the screen and select PAP View 2 The screen automatically switches to one division and a row of three inset windows appears on the bottom of the screen da a Oebs h IsI 10 0 12115 14 15 16 E Figure 1 84 3 Draw a navigation box on the image and this selected area is immediately reflected in one inset window Up to seven navigation boxes can be drawn on the image 4 To adjust a navigation box size move the cursor to any of the box corners enlarge or diminish the box 5 To move a navigation box to another area on the image drag itto that area 6 To change the frame color of the navigation box right click the image select Mega Pixel Setting and click Set Color of Focus Area 7 To hide the navigation box on the image right click the image select Mega Pixel Setting and click Display Focus Area of PAP Mode 8 To delete a navigation box right click the desired box select Focus Area of PAP Mode and select Delete 9 To exitthe PAP view click the camera name and select PAP View again 10 To add another navigation box when less than seven navigation boxes are drawn click the camera name select PAP View to en
484. the I O button will list all O modules connected to the system Select one to bring out the control panel Gala Module 1 Module 1 3 Module No Input1 A Qutput1 O mu Y Qutput2 Input3 Y Qutput3 er Inputs ZS Output 4 e Input Control Panel Output Control Panel Figure 6 6 Input Control Panel Displays the status of current input sensors The walking man icon indicates the sensor is being triggered Output Control Panel Displays the status of current output devices You can force the output device to be triggered by clicking on its icon 313 FJ 1 0 Applications 6 3 Advanced l O Applications In the I O Application dialog box you can configure the advanced applications such as setting alarm notification defining a PTZ camera movement upon input trigger setting momentary or maintained mode and deactivating alarm and alert settings Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 point to Accessories click UO Application and select UO Application Setting This dialog box appears VO Application Monitor Input 2 Lo Module 1 s Input Rec Video 5 Sec ze Input Invoke Alarm Hot 42 Input Invoke to Send Alerts es Input 4 Output Module wad Pin1 By Register Input Event Ex Input Overlay b Preset Go by Ifo Demo PTZ010D Camera 9 si Addr Alarm On Present Alarm Of Present Preset Go by VO Never Recycling Input Triggered Events Alarm On Dwell Time
485. the defined time threshold Note Up to 16 cameras can be configured for this application Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 click Advanced Video Analysis and select Crowd Detection Setting Select the desired camera s to be configured and click Configure This dialog box appears Crowd Detection Iv Camera Camera Selection Camera H D Definition Alarm Region Setting Sensitivity Ratio of Changes Tolerance Time of Alarm eer Construction Option 30 Hide reference image setup dialog Alarm Option Option C Manuallly disable alarm 7 Embed alarm region into recorded video l Skip instant light change Automatically disable alarm when the crowd Invoke Alarm idisperses Ge M Output Module caner Figure 3 56 Select a camera from the Camera Selection drop down list By default the whole camera view is set to be the alarm region Click the 24 loutton to clear the default setting Click the LEER button to freely draw the alarm region To cancel the previously drawn area click the button Select Ratio of Changes When the selected ratio of changes in the defined alarm region is detected the alarm will be activated The smaller the ratio of changes the more sensitive the system is for changes in the camera view Specify Tolerance Time of Alarm in seconds that allows a crowd to stay before an alarm condition is activated 197 EI Video Analysis 7 Ever
486. the last 10 recordings Select the desired recording on the event list for playback Note 1 The remote playback RPB function is only supported if the vdeo was recorded with a resolution of CIF or lower 2 The remote playback RPB function does not support the playback of video files recorded on the GV IP devices 465 D Remote Viewing 8 13 6 l Mode Phone You can monitor your GV System remotely with l Mode phone or Mobile phone supporting xhtml chtml or html and capable of GPRS When using i Mode services you do not pay for the connection time but will be charged by the volume of data transmitted and or received Therefore Mode will NOT receive live video streaming instead it will receive one image at a time and will not receive another unless it is requested to do so To request another image simply press the Enter key on your Mode phone The images are in GIF or JPEG format with resolution of 96x72 pixels Activating the i Mode Function To allow the remote access to GV System you must enable the Create JPEG GIF file s function on the WebCam Server For details see JPG Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Your GV System must use a global IP address and be accessible from the Internet Connecting to GV System The following operations may vary slightly for different modules 1 Open the i Mode menu and select Input Web Address TT Input Web Address Login History Returr
487. the triggered alert After the alert is reset if the object remains missing over the specified tolerance time the system will still detect it as a missing object and keep generating alert 208 a Video Analysis 3 21 Video Analysis Schedule A schedule monitoring has been added to most of Advanced Video Analysis and Video Analysis functions This feature allows you to maximize the use of cameras and video analysis effects on each camera With this feature you can set multiple video analysis effects on each camera at different times For example previously when you want to configure Counter Setting to count the number of people during work hours and also configure Intrusion Alarm Setting for thief detection after work hours you will require 2 cameras at the same location for this scenario But with the feature you can set a schedule with just 1 camera to do Counter Setting between 7AM 5PM working hours and Intrusion Alarm Setting between 5PM 7AM after work hours Only a few functions of video analysis do not support the schedule feature These functions are Camera Popup Setting Advanced Motion Detection Video Lowpass Filter Setting and Panorama Setting To setthe Video Analytic schedule 1 Click the Configure No 14 Figure 1 2 button select Video Analysis or Advanced Video Analysis select a supported analysis function select the cameras to be configured and click Configure For this example Counter Intrusion Alarm Se
488. the video can t be played back since the system is still recording 160 a Video Analysis 3 5 3 Searching Object Index You can locate frames within selected cameras and a specific time frame 1 Click the ViewLog button No 13 Figure 1 2 and then select Search Object Index to display the following search window 24612002 d 06 30 53 To 21612002 d 07 30 53 Camera Cancel Figure 3 23 The Search Window 2 Specify a time frame and cameras and then click OK to start searching The following window will be called up Cam04 7 15 2004 10 00 10 30 1 q a 711142004 1 71 212004 yA a 13 7 13 2004 E e D o 03 7 14 2004 r 2 3 7115 2004 S E 01 00 10 00 26 453 10 00 27 140 10 01 04 140 10 01 05 640 10 02 33 687 i E 03 00 a E 05 00 gt d E 08 00 Ep 08 30 Bp 09 00 10 02 47 750 EN 09 30 E 10 00 Ep 10 30 Bp 11 00 E 11 30 10 03 16 671 10 04 47 015 10 04 48 515 10 05 12 796 10 05 20 703 Ep 12 00 Ep 12 30 e Ep 13 00 E 13 30 Ad a a 10 06 23 531 10 06 41 265 10 06 42 406 10 06 45 250 10 07 11 359 a 10 07 37 343 10 08 46 093 10 08 46 406 10 08 47 750 Search Exit Figure 3 24 The Moving Object List Window left and the Record List right 161 EI Video Analysis The Record List The list contains the search results Double click a camera folder to display all found files Click one time segment file e g 10 00 to open its included f
489. tion Use the drop down lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function To configure the output device see O Device Setup in Chapter 6 CJ Right Arrow button Sets the time to delay the activation of the specified output module Register Motion Event Records motion events to System Log Note The Delay Time in Invoke to Send Alerts and Output Module allow you time to turn off the input device before the system triggers alerts or the output device The Delay Time will not work if you stop monitoring or enable the function Deactivate notification when selected pin ON in I O Application window Figure 6 7 Video Lost Connection Lost Output Module Triggers the specified output module upon video lost or connection lost Use the drop down lists to select the output module and pin number to perform this function To configure the output device see O Device Setup in Chapter 6 Camera Lens Wide Angle y Wide Angle Settings Video Attributes Brightness Contrast 128 E Advanced Advanced Video Attributes Saturation 128 Hue 1268 Default Figure 1 12 Camera Lens Select Wide Angle to correct warping toward the edge of the camera image See Wide Angle Lens Dewarping in Chapter 3 for details Video Attributes Allows you to adjust video characteristics such as brightness contrast saturation and hue Advanced Allows you to access the control panel
490. tion zones This button is used to switch the direction and scheme of counting Click this button to add green or red arrows or both The red arrow indicates an in direction When an object appears in the camera view and moves along the direction of the red arrow it will be counted as 1 in The green arrow indicates an out direction When an object appears in the Camera view and moves along the direction of the green arrow it will be counted as 1 out Click this button to switch to another line and then use x button to delete or the button to edit Click this button to delete the line 154 EI Video Analysis Define Object Size Select this option and click the EX button to pause live images Use the mouse to outline a region matching the normal size of the targeted object To test your counting settings select Live from the Test Count drop down listand click the Test button to start testing Notice how the number changes in the Counting Result section when objects cross the boundary lines Use the Sensitivity slider to increase or decrease detection sensitivity if the passing objects are not counted correctly To activate the function at certain times only click the Schedule button and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the settings Start monitoring to begin counting 155 3 4 2 Intrusion Alarm a Video Analysis When any object cros
491. tivity Notice that the outlined regions should not be larger than the object s Every time when finishing an outlining you will be prompted to select Add Region See the illustration below Add Region Delete Region Figure 3 35 Outlining regions on objects 7 Click the Done button to finish the defining 8 Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view 9 To setup other options see Other Controls in the Video Object Setup Window below 10 Click the OK button to apply the settings 11 Start camera monitoring for the application When any object which you have outlined the regions for disappears from the camera view for 3 seconds its location will be highlighted in live vdeo the selected alarm and output will be activated and the event will be recorded as Missing Object in System Log for later retrieval 175 a Video Analysis Other Controls in the Video Object Setup Window Show Reference Image Click to view the saved reference image Never Recycle When this option is selected the events of unattended and missing objects will not be recycled when the recycle threshold is reached Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in the recorded files so you can easily find out suspicious events during playback Note that if you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search do not enable this option These flashing box
492. ton and select Active Schedule For details see Video Analysis Schedule later in this chapter Click OK to apply the settings Note 1 The function will stop tracking an object when it remains stationary in the camera view for 3 seconds It takes about 3 to 5 seconds to start tracking after you switch to another channel for object tracking 150 a Video Analysis 3 3 2 Tracking in PIP View The PIP Picture in Picture View with Digital Object Tracking can track up to 7 moving objects and zoom in the first targeted object 1 On the main screen click the desired camera name label and select PIP View 2 The screen automatically switches to one division and an inset window of the camera view appears in the bottom right corner Navigation boxes also appear inside the inset window to focus the moving objects Navigation box Inset w indow i ds wo l LIL a U 21s1 TsT eT TsTo holul hsha shs EZ iL Ec EE EE al EE Figure 3 16 3 The first object entering the camera view will be highlighted and zoomed in the live view screen You can switch the highlight to another tracked object by clicking on its navigation box Note Manually moving or adjusting the navigation box size is disabled in PIP View when Digital Object Tracking is enabled 151 El Video Analysis 3 3 3 Tracking in PAP View The PAP Picture and Picture View with Digital Object Tracking can create split vdeo effects
493. tor Displayer Mode 1 RA Monitor 1 Screen Resolution 11024 w 768 0 Screen origin cm al c IEN El Monitor 1 Cancel Figure 11 17 5 In the Screen Setup tab select Twin View from the Displayer Mode drop down list 6 Click the desired application tab to move the application to the second monitor In this case ViewLog is used as an example 7 In the ViewLog tab select Monitor 2 from the Select Monitor drop down list 8 Click OK 9 Start GV System It should appear on Monitor 1 10 Click the ViewLog button on the main screen and select Video Audio log from the menu ViewLog should appear on Monitor 2 Note The Set Position option allows you to determine where to position GV System on Windows lt is only necessary if your GV System is set to 800 x 600 panel resolutions but your Windows desktop is set to 1024 x 768 or higher It is recommended that both GV System and Windows desktop to be set to the same resolution To set the panel resolution of GV System click Configure button select General Setting select System Configure and find Panel Resolution 537 1 Useful Utilities 11 4 Windows Lockup This feature helps you to secure your PC while away from your workstation You may lock up the Windows desktop while launching a customized GV Desktop The GV Desktop is where operators are limited to run the GV System and the selected programs 11 4 1 The GV Desktop Screen The GV Desktop program
494. towards right the better the image quality and the bigger image file size O FTP Transfer JPEG file Downloads JPEG images from the FTP server For details see FTP Server Settings later in this chapter 380 8 2 7 3GPP Settings These settings allow you to stream video and audio on 3G enabled mobile phones A Server Setup General Server ideo SDE Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile Multicast w RTSPITER Port Max connections 20 RTRIRTERPILIDP port 17300 P 17380 Cancel Detank Figure 8 11 RTSP TCP Port The default communication port is 8554 D Remote Viewing Max Connections Specify the number of users that can connect to this server Set the number to be between 1 and 100 RIP RTCP UDP Port The number of ports is limited to 80 in order to enhance the security of the WebCam server during the connection with the 3G enabled mobile phones The default range of ports is 17300 to 17380 Note To enable 3G services on your mobile phone consult your network operator 381 D Remote Viewing 8 2 8 Mobile Settings These settings allow you to perform mobile phone applications For details see Mobile Phone Applications later in this chapter xi General Server Video SDK Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile Multicast Ve Fart Stream port Rob port May connections May FPS Forssviewys Gyiewy Maview yy WG View 2 D I View iwiew Cancel Default Figure 8 12
495. trol Center Privacy Mask Other Allow removing password system Figure 4 31 3 Clear the selection for Enable duration setting for event search to limit the event search privilege for that account 4 Click OK to apply the settings 255 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 15 Advanced Settings The Setting button on the Function Panel No 5 Figure 4 2 allows you to configure 1 Quad View 2 Multi View 3 Thumbnail View 4 Play Setting 5 Display and 6 Database Cache Click this button to open the System Configuration dialog box Quad View You can configure up to 10 sets of Quad Views for simultaneous playback of up to 4 camera recordings Drag up to four cameras from the right side to the desired number of Quad View System Configuration Play Setting Display Database Cache Suad View Thumbnail view To Be Activated in a Quad wiew ER Camera 1 Gh Camera 2 Sh Camera 3 Sh Camera 4 1 Quad View 2 1 Quad View 3 2 Quad View 4 1 Quad View 5 Quad View 6 Quad View 7 Quad View 8 al Quad View 9 Quad View 10 cancel Figure 4 32 256 D Playing Back Video Files Multi View You can configure up to 10 sets of Multi Views for simultaneous playback of multiple camera recordings In each Multi View you can select the maximum of 16 cameras for playback Drag up to 16 cameras from the right side to the desired number of Multi View System Configuration Play Sett
496. trol Panel Figure 1 77 1 To control the PTZ you must map one channel to the PTZ camera first For details see Mapping PTZ Cameras earlier in this chapter 2 To access the Visual PTZ Control Panel click on the desired Camera Name on the top left corner of every channel and select PTZ Automation A separate PTZ control wndow appears 3 To change the panel settings click the green PTZ button on the top left corner of the PTZ control window to have these options PTZ Control Type Fixed Direction Move In this mode the dome view can only be moved to the eight directions north south east west northeast northwest southeast and southwest To move the camera view click and hold on to the dotted red line further from the panel The round panel appears when moving the mouse to the live view Random Move In this mode you can move the camera view to any direction Click any place on the live view for the panel to appear and right click for the panel to hide To move the camera view click and hold on to a desired direction Click further for the camera view to move faster Center Move In this mode you can zoom in and out using the mouse scroll or by drawing a block directly on the live view Note The Center Move mode is only for GV SD220 Di Configuring Main System Configure SetColor Changes the color of the panel Three kinds of colors are available Red Green and Blue Transparent Degree Adjusts the tra
497. ts the created groups and clients 7 Account Information Displays the highlighted client s account information o Displays the number of created groups and clients The SMS Server 8 Statistics can serve up to 5000 clients at one time 514 10 Short Message Service Creating a client 1 Click the Add A Client button No 2 Figure 10 6 This dialog box appears xl LoginID Host 1 Password Cancel Information No Country Code Mobile Number 886 22318098 886 28759603 886 9354231 Telephone 2228098 FAX 2228097 E mail Ou geovision com tw Address Neihu Rd Taipei Taiwan Notify Setting Send SMS notification to the client s network administrators Je when connection is abnormal Set up three mobile numbers in above Information section Send SMS notification to the client s operators when E connection is abnormal Figure 10 7 Client Information 2 Type alogin ID and a password They will be the ID and password for the client to log in the SMS Server Figure 10 13 3 In the Information section type the client s related information You can specify three mobile numbers of the client s network administrators for SMS notification 4 In the Notify Setting section you can send a SMS message to the client in the case of Internet disconnection between the client and the SMS Server or e Improper program shutdown in the client The recipients can be
498. tting is selected and this dialog box appears Counter Alarm Choose Camera Camera 1 D Definition Define Detection Zones C Define Object Size E y Sensitivity 3 Setting Enable Counting e Test Count Counting Result In 0 E Live ei Test Out 0 Option Y Enable Mask M Skip Frame Figure 3 60 209 EI Video Analysis 2 Click the Schedule button in the bottom left corner of the dialog box This dialog box appears Video Analysis Schedule W Active Schedule Time Span Setup lw Span Spana f Sunday E Saturday f Sunday Only Figure 3 61 3 Select Active Schedule to enable video analytic schedule 4 Select Span 1 and specify atime period The period that you specify is effective from Monday through Sunday 5 Set more spans based on your requirements 6 To have the video analysis function all day on the weekend select Weekend Apply and define whether the weekend includes Sunday amp Saturday or Sunday Only 7 Click OK to apply the settings 210 a Video Analysis 3 21 1 Privacy Mask Schedule The schedule setting of Privacy Mask allows you to disable the function during holidays and weekends 1 Click the Configure No 14 Figure 1 2 button select Video Analysis select Privacy Mask Setting select the cameras tobe configured and click Configure 2 Click the Schedule button Video Analysis Schedule lv Enable Time Span Setup Iw Spant T Span2
499. tus of the drive displays Standby Or inthe Main System click the Configure button point to System Configure select General Setting click the Set Location button and then select the Storage Group Folder to confirm the new recording path Tip To add a local drive to the recording path right click the desired drive select Add for recording and follow Step 3 to add the drive 966 1 Useful Utilities 11 7 4 Removing a Disk Drive To remove a disk drive from the recording path right click the desired drive and select Remove from recording path This dialog box will appear You can export related database files with the recordings on the hard drive You can also export the ViewLog player which allows you to play back the recordings on any computer Please select to do something before remove this disk Export View og Player E Wwiewlogi Gi Export view og with database files Export database tiles only Export System Log database files E WiewlogiDatabaszet Export Object Index files E WwiewlgbjectIndex Figure 11 45 Export ViewLog Player CJ Export ViewLog with database files Exports the ViewLog player together with ViewLog Event List log files db files related to the recordings on the hard drive CJ Export database files only Exports ViewLog Event List log files db files only if the ViewLog program already exits on the hard drive Export System Log database files Exports the system lo
500. tware and hardware specifications Software Specifications Supported Not Supported Sandy Bridge Ivy Bridge ES Windows Vista 7 Operating Windows 2000 XP Windows 7 System 64 Bit Windows 7 Emol 2006 Server 2008 R2 Srem E CTE Note To apply GPU decoding the recommended memory RAM requirements is 8 GB or more for 64 bit OS and 3 GB for 32 bit OS Hardware Specifications Motherboard Intel chipset with onboard VGA Ex Intel Q77 Q75 Z77 Z75 H77 B75 Q67 H67 H61 Q65 B65 Z68 Express Chipset Note If you want to use an external VGA card it is required to connect a monitor to the onboard VGA to activate GPU decoding Multi Channel Playback Specifications In V8 5 or later multi channel playback in ViewLog has been enhanced to improve the smoothness of the video by producing higher frame rate However playing back multiple channels at high resolution can increase the CPU loading especially if the GV System is processing other tasks simultaneously As a result of the high CPU loading dropped frames may sometimes occur in recorded video when playing back multiple megapixel channels To avoid the problem it is recommended to play back megapixel video in single view Naming Definition Uran Securi olutions Analog and Digital Video Recording Software The GV System GV System also refers to Multicam System GV DVR System GV NVR System and GV Hybrid DVR System at the same time 1 Conte
501. ty adjustment Codec Selection The codec selection is for your reference only to know the bitrate The selection will not be applied to video streaming to the remote applications ER Configuring Main System 1 3 4 Adjusting Audio Setting You can adjust audio devices to record and listens to live sound Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select A V Setting and select Audio Settings to bring up the following dialog box Audio ES ES Other Audio Settings Audio 1 Gain Control 3 Iw Wave Out lv Wave Out De Noise lv Rec Audio e By Sensitivity 7 C Round the clock Other Show Volume Indicator Disable Wave Out Auto Switch Audio Format 116 KHz 16 bit Figure 1 26 Audio Select an audio channel to be configured Clicking the finger button can apply the settings of one audio channel to the rest of channels Gain Control Increases or decreases the gain of the microphone Wave Out Listens to the audio around the camera Wave Out De Noise Reduces audio noise Rec Audio Activates the audio recording By Sensitivity Audio recording is activated when the volume reaches the sensitivity level indicated Round the Clock Continuously records audio Show Audio Indicator Displays an audio volume indicator in the top left corner of the camera view Disable Wave Out Auto Switch By default audio channel 1 is set to be back
502. u Start Before you start note the specifications below for the integration This integration supports Windows based POS devices that can generate TXT INI or JNL files and POS devces that are compatible with Internet or OPOS Printer Driver protocols An appropriate dongle is required for the integration to work The dongle options include 1 2 4 8 12 and 16 ports For serial port connection up to 4 POS devices can be connected to one GV System For TCP IP connection up to 16 POS devices can be connected to one GV System 341 Point of Sale POS Application Connection Choose one of the following methods to connect the GV System to a POS device RS 232 Connection Cross over RS232 POS Device TCP IP or OPOS protocol compatible GV System USB dongle POS Text Sender Figure 7 1 1 Using a cross over RS 232 cable connect the GV System to the serial output of the POS device The POS device needs to be capable of generating transaction files or TCP IP or OPOS protocol compatible 2 Connect the USB dongle to the GV System Network Connection Y Ca Ke SSS ASSA sasee AANA AM ANAN AS gt L Hi gpppepepareencn RAA RARR gt DE SE o 3 EE ahs St POS Device TCP IP or OPOS protocol compatible POS Text Sender GV System USB dongle Figure 7 2 1 Connect the GV System and POS device to the network The POS device needs to be capable of generating tra
503. u can retrieve GPS tracks from these devices and play them back in Google Maps Microsoft Virtual Earth and even user defined maps 1 GV IP device must allow the remote access with ViewLog Server activated See View og Server in its user s manual 2 To remotely connect to GV IP device from GV System click the Tools button and select Remote ViewLog Service The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears 3 Enter the connection information of GV IP device and click Connect Once the connection is established the video events will be displayed on the Video Event list 4 To select a map API Application Program Interface click the Tools button and click Select Map API This dialog box appears Please enter the map authorization key or license key o Please enter the website ofthe Map API httpsidev virtualearth netimapeontral default 2 vw Work offline Please selecta Map API Microsoft Virtual Earth 2 OK RH Cancel Figure 4 55 5 In Please Select a Map API select a Map API 6 To play back GPS tracks click the Tools button and select Display GIS Window The first time user will be prompted for a License Agreement Read through the license terms before you click I understand and agree to continue 286 D Playing Back Video Files 7 Select the events with GPS tracks from the Video Event list select the desired video mode and click the Play button to start E qe 4
504. unctions e g pan tilt zoom focus and preset points ER Configuring Main System This control panel will not appear unless at least one PTZ camera is connected to the system Adding a PTZ Camera For the IP Camera skip steps 1 to 3 and start from the step 4 l di 6 PTZ Configuration DongYang Dome DOH 24 DynaColor D 7720 7722 Sony E I D100 Panasonic w CS 850 Kastel CyberD ome Samsung SPD 1600 Sensormatic Ultra lv Samsung SCC 641 1643 Acut ista_SSD 7971D Bosch TC700 8560 Bosch_G3 CBC GANZ 20 5120 Se Chiper MSKA COP 15 CD53w PelcoD COP 15 CD55w PelcoD COP CD55x PELCO_D24 COP 15 CD55TW Pelcol Direct Perception PTU Se D max Dome Dynacolor Dome DynaHawk_2h701 lt After adding the cameras please restart the GY System and enable the PTZ device Configure button Accessories PTZ Add Remove PTZ This dialog box appears Device PTZ Device Setup Cancel Figure 1 71 PTZ Control Select the brand of your camera and click the gt button Click OK and restart the GV System Click Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select PTZ Device and select PTZ Device Setup This dialog box appears i PTZ Device Setup D B Sony EVI D100 oaren Figure 1 72 For an IP camera select the brand name from the drop down list and click OK For an analog camera Click Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories select
505. ure Camera Name Camera Lens Camera 2 D Fisheye D l Rec Control W Rec video Motion Detect saturation Motion Detection g Sensitivity ao ma E Mask Filter E EAEIFA M Invoke Alarm D Invoke to Send Alerts TI Register Motion Event Video Lost Connection Lost Output Module ceca Figure 3 67 2 To adjust the image alignment for optimal results right click the camera image select Fisheye Option and select Image Alignment In the dialog box align the dotted circle with the outer edge of the camera image and then align it with the inner edge of the image frame 215 EI Video Analysis Image Alignment Outer Edge Inner Edge Figure 3 68 3 To access fisheye related functions right click the camera image and select Fisheye Option Note 1 For GV Fisheye Cameras the image alignment function is only available on its Web interface 2 Regardless of the vew mode selected here the hemispherical fisheye source image will be recorded When playing back the events in ViewLog the GV System will reconvert the source image to different vew modes according to your preference To see how to play back the events in fisheye vew mode see Playback Screen Layout in Chapter 4 3 To enable fisheye functions through WebCam Server you must first set the fisheye view to megapixel resolution in WebCam settings Refer to Hardware Compressed or Meg
506. ure 7 23 View Setting Max Transactions in Each View Enter the number of transactions you want to keep on the POS Live View window For example if you enter 99 there are always 99 transactions kept on the window When the 100th transaction is entered the oldest transaction data will be deleted and the max transaction number remains to be 99 Max Rows in Each View Enter the number of transaction rows you want to keep on the POS Live View window which includes any materials printed by the POS device e g data and time Mode Setting Single View Displays only one POS Live View window on the screen O Multi View Displays multiple POS Live View windows on the screen Save User Define Arrange Position Allows you to freely place the multiple windows on the screen To use this feature 1 Drag the windows to the desired places on the screen 2 Open the Live View Setup dialog box and click this option Click Yes to save your arrangement when this warning message appears Are you sure to save User Define Arrange Position Whenever you want to place the POS Live View windows as your previous arrangement click the Live View Menu button point to Arrange Views and select Custom View 363 Point of Sale POS Application 7 10 POS Color Text You can use different colors and time periods to identify any desired transaction items When the transaction item is identified the feature can trigger the alarm and sen
507. w 1 Atthe local server equipped with the GV System click the Network button No 11 Figure 1 2 and select WebCam Server to display the Server Setup dialog box Click OK to start the WebCam server 2 Atthe client PC open the web browser and type the address of the local server Once the connection is established the Single View page will appear 3 On the left panel click Remote E Map to display the E Map window on the client PC 9 4 1 The Remote E Map Window H IP Address 127 0 0 1 7 d New Map Li New Yor L Taiwan d Kaohsiung A Sen Taipei Figure 9 10 The Remote E Map Window 496 D E Map Application The controls in the Remote E Map window No 4 O O NI OO oF AJO 11 12 Name Login Host Information Previous Home Next ViewLog Configure Tree List IP Address Blinking Icon Output Icon Camera Dome Icon Description Click to login up to 500 hosts Click to view the information of incoming events upon motion detected and I O devices triggered Click to go to the last selected E Map file Click to back to the top of the tree view Click to go to the next E Map file Click to access the Remote ViewLog function Click to configure the Remote E Map The list displays all created E Map files and folders Displays the IP Address of the connected host The blinking icon represents a triggered camera or I O device Click to manually force
508. w the on screen instructions to install the programs When the installation is complete the message Install Complete will be displayed 439 D Remote Viewing 8 13 Mobile Phone Applications With the mobile phone capable of GPRS 3G and Wi Fi you can receive live videos from your GV System The GV mobile phone applications and their major features are listed below Note Mobile phone applications installed from the Software DVD version 8 5 9 only support GV System version 8 5 9 Overview of GV Mobile Phone Applications Handheld Device View GV GView V2 for Windows PDA Windows Mobile 5 0 and 2003 OS Supported Windows Mobile 6 6 1 Classic and Professional port Data Ports 8866 APB Port 5511 Video streaming GV IP devices support PTZ control l O device control Remote Playback RPB and etc EE Video streaming GV IP devices support PTZ control l O device control Remote Playback RPB and etc Prot CAETANO Video streaming GV IP devices support PTZ control l O device control Remote Playback RPB and etc Handheld Device View GV SSView V3 for Symbian Smartphone OS Supported Nokia S60 2nd Edition and 3rd Edition Pot Data Port 8866 RPB Port 5511 Video Streaming GV IP devices support Remote Playback RPB PTZ control output control and etc Handheld Device View 3GPP Viewer for 3GPP Phone OS Supported Mobile phones with players supporting RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol een TCP Por
509. x Apple Safari 21 0 1180 89m or earlier 15 0 1 or earlier 5 1 7 or earlier 369 D Remote Viewing 8 1 Remote Viewing Using a Web Browser The GV System is built in a WebCam server Once the WebCam server is enabled you can use Microsoft Internet Explorer Google Chrome Apple Safari or Mozilla Firefox to remotely view and manage the surveillance images from the GV System Note 1 For Internet connection the GV System must have an IP address or domain name from ISP If the IP address is dynamic you may use the DDNS servce to direct changing IP addresses to the GV System For the service see Dynamic DNS in Chapter 11 2 Make sure the remote PC is going to access the GV System meets the minimum system requirements mentioned above 1 To start the WebCam server on GV System click the Network button The Server Setup dialog box appears The first time user can click OK without making any configuration to close the dialog box and start When the WebCam server is started Web and CCS signs appear on the main screen as illustrated below Jan 31 16 25 46 re Tor TD 70GB Figure 8 1 2 If there is a router or firewall installed on the server site of the GV System ensure the communication ports required by the WebCam Server is open 80 HTTP Port 370 D Remote Viewing On any remote computer open a Web browser and type the IP address or domain name of the GV System This dialog box appears z
510. ximum video resolution configured on the GV System will be applied See Video Settings in WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Saves live video in the local computer See Video Recording later in this chapter Adjusts video quality with two options Geo H264 and Geo MPEG4 For hardware com pressed and megapixel quality see Hardware Compressed and Megapixel Stream later in this chapter Takes a snapshot of the displayed live video Enables live audio from the remote GV System See Video and Audio Configuration later in this chapter Enables speaking to the remote GV System See Video and Audio Configuration later in this chapter Terminates the connection to the remote GV System Connects to the remote GV System Right clicking on live video allows you to instantly access some useful functions The Resolution option can display a resolution indicator at the bottom right corner of the video Using the IE browser you can display up to 10 full screen channels with multiple monitors installed Right click the live vew and select a designated monitor to bring full screen live view The full screen live view appears on the designated monitor immediately Note The full screen display closes at the designed monitor if its Web interface window is minimized 390 D Remote Viewing 8 3 1 Control Panel A control panel is provided for control of the connected channel To open the control panel click the Expand Clo
511. xit System option to restrict the user from quitting or restarting the system Fulibcreen Lt Iw A w g w 12 w 16 w Exit System Webcam Fast Backup and Restore Control Center Privacy Mask Other OK Cancel Figure 1 37 ER Configuring Main System 1 5 5 Setting Double Passwords for ViewLog Access You can select the Enable Double Password option to require two supervisor passwords to access the ViewLog and play back recorded files The option is only available when you have created at least two supervisor accounts For details on the ViewLog see Chapter 4 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit The Password Setup dialog box appears 2 Select Enable Double Password at the bottom New E Remove e Search _Multicam Webcam Fast Backup and Restore Control Center Privacy Mask Other jw Enable double password Cancel Figure 1 38 After clicking the View Log button you will need to type the passwords of any two supervisors to be able to login ER Configuring Main System 1 6 System Idle Protection The System Idle Protection allows the administrator to work on the system without the worry of logout or leaving the system not recording anymore This feature can automatically logout the administrator login a user with no access rights and or start recording 1 6 1 Auto Logout Administrator If t
512. y By default the port value is 4000 and the password fields in both POS Data Sender and GV System are left blank The first time user can skip the step and follow the next step to test the connection Data Capture Box IP Setting Fixed IP Device IP C IP Info in DDNS Server dipmap corn DI Domain Name C IP Info in GW Data Capture Local DDNS Server Device Name Ce C Local DDNS Server IP Browse Device Setting Device Port Login ID To avold the DEP Data Execution Prevention waming message please Password Windows Start gt Control Pane and sr sc Dose select gt Add gt Locate CXIWIN Apply and OK gt Mestart your computer al Cofrexted Settings on POS Data Sender Settings on GV System Figure 7 11 8 Click Start Service to send graphic data to GV System 349 Point of Sale POS Application The GV System must be configured and ready for this application To set up the GV System see POS Device Setup later in this chapter 390 Point of Sale POS Application 7 3 POS Device Setup To setup a POS device in GV System follow these steps 1 On the main screen click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Accessories click POS Application Setting and select POS Device Setup This dialog box appears POS Server Setup Camera 1 127 0 0 1 TEPAP Portit Sof Figure 7 12 POS Server Setup 2 Click the New button This dialog box appears Print
513. y and the area of the detected face must take up 10 to 50 of the live image For other limitations see Face Detection in Chapter 3 2 When the Face Mask function is enabled the Speed Up button e will be grayed out 249 To Enable the Face Mask for an User Account 1 D Playing Back Video Files On the GV System click the Configure button select System Configure select Password Setup and select Local Account Edit This dialog box appears Password Setup Guest User PowerUser Supervisor 2 1 New Remove Search MV Allow removing password system Iw Disable Account Expire in days ID Guest Password Hint Level Guest User cannot change password Force password change at next login Disable account if user does not log in after days T Export this ID for IR Remote Control GV Keyboard V Execute EventLog Export AVI V Delete EventLog V Browse System Log Mark UnMark Never Recycle l Backup EventLog Display detected faces Enable duration setting for event search Camera EventLog 2 Y O MATA Sat mz em i 4 Bl gy ele Bg m m Audio EventLog 23 a O dl Mmm E mm mo E 199 188 9 OMA Figure 4 23 Multicam Viewlog Webcam Fast Backup and Restore Control Center Privacy Mask Other Cancel Select a Power User User or Guest account and click the Viewlogtab at the bottom Clear the selection for Display detected faces to
514. y time when the system detects changes in the background image you will be prompted for alert If you want to close the prompt select Hide Reference Image Setup Dialog 8 In the Options section you can optionally configure these settings Automatically Disable Alarm Stops all types of triggered alerts including computer alarm flashing boxes and output module after the specified duration Disabling the alerts will not disable alert settings and the detection in progress Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in the recorded files so that you can easily spot Suspicious events during playback Note that if you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search do not enable this option These flashing boxes can cause false alarms Skip Instant Light Change Ignores sudden illumination changes and avoids false alarms For example light switches can cause illumination changes suddenly With the option selected the system will ignore significant illumination changes without triggering the alarm and continue monitoring See the Note below for possible risk Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when an assemblage is detected Click the button next to the option to assign a wav sound file Output Module Activates the output device when an assemblage is detected Click the button next to the option to assign an installed output module and a pin number
515. yboard Users Manual Send Password by Email Allows you to retrieve passwords through e mails To specify e mails click the button For details on this feature see Retrieving Password Through E mail later in this chapter Allow removing password System Enables the password removal utility The option is critical if you forget or unable to retrieve any Supervisor password in the future With this option selected you can run the password removal utility PassUNINStall exe from the GV folder and remove the password database Otherwise you can only remove the password database by reinstalling Windows operating system Note The loss of passwords can be solved in the following two ways 1 Retrieving password through e mails 2 Removing password database by using the PassUNINStall exe utility and rebuilding all accounts However if both Send Password by Email and Allow Removing Password System options are not selected in advance it is required to reinstall Windows operating system once you loss the passwords Di Configuring Main System 1 5 2 Changing Password on Login 1 When you log in the GV System click the Change Password button in the Login dialog box The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password ID taipei Password Mo Mew Password Password Mew Password Forgot Password Confirmation ay Change Password jw How Hint Send Password 2 area code Cancel GE sn un
516. your setting in Step 7 of Object Zooming Setup will be applied For example if you choose View 3 the PTZ camera will go to the preset View 3 when you click the button 145 EI Video Analysis 3 2 Advanced Single Camera Tracking The Advanced Single Camera Tracking can track a moving object using only one PTZ camera When an object moves within the vew of camera the PTZ camera will follow its movement When the object is out of view the PTZ camera can be set to return to a designated position For supported PTZ models see Certified PTZ Models for Object Tracking in Appendix C Note 1 The Advanced Single Camera Tracking with color based object tracking introduced in V8 3 2 has been removed The Advanced Single Camera Tracking in V8 4 or later uses motion based object tracking 2 The Advanced Single Camera Tracking function can only be enabled for one GV SD200 at a time and cannot be applied to other PTZ cameras once it is applied to GV SD200 Setting up a PTZ Camera Before setting up the Advanced Single Camera Tracking function you need to first configure the PTZ device to enable Object Tracking Refer to Setting up a PTZ Camera in Object Tracking earlier in this chapter 146 a Video Analysis Setting up Advanced Single Camera Tracking 1 Click the Configure button No 14 Figure 1 2 select Video Analysis select Object Tracking Application select Object Tracking Setup and click the Advance Single Camera Tracking ta
517. ystem settings of ViewLog 5 Setting y 9 9 See Advanced Settings later in this chapter Brings up these options Object Search Advanced Log Browser Delete Log Remote ViewLog Service Remote Storage System Address Book 6 Tools Display GIS Window Select Map API and Tool Kit See Object Search Advanced Log Browser Remote ViewLog Service later in this chapter 7 Backup Backs up video files See Chapter 5 Backup Deletion and Repair 225 D Playing Back Video Files 4 1 1 Playback Screen Layout Click the View Mode button No 8 Figure 4 1 any time when you want to change the current view mode Single View Includes the following types of layouts Standard Displays one playback channel only Thumbnail Reviews images frame by frame in thumbnails Mega Pixel PIP Crops a video to get a close up view or zoom in on the video For details see Picture in Picture View in Chapter 1 Mega Pixel PAP Creates a split vdeo effect with multiple close up views on the image For details see Picture and Picture View in Chapter 1 Geo Fisheye Displays the fisheye images recorded with GV Fisheye Camera or third party fisheye cameras in different vew modes For details see Fisheye View in Chapter 3 IMV1 Panomorph Displays the fisheye images recorded with an ImmerVision IMV Panorama Lens in different vew modes For details see Step 1 in Setting Up a GV Fisheye Camera earlier in this chapter Panorama View Plays back in continuous scene

DVR Manual - Guardian Security

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents